JP2022011245A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing processing by control means.SOLUTION: A main-side MPU 82 specifies presence or absence of detection of game balls in each detection sensor by specific control processing. Then, it specifies whether detection of game balls is caused by fraudulence or the like by fraudulence detection execution processing in non-specific control processing. It sets "1" to an abnormality flag when specifying that detection of game balls is caused by fraudulence or the like. After that, it invalidates detection of game balls when specifying that "1" is set to the abnormality flag by specific control processing. First, the abnormality flag is cleared to "0" in fraudulence detection execution processing. It also specifies presence or absence of fraudulent winning by utilizing a counter provided in a specific control work area in fraudulence detection execution processing. Commands are stored in a command transmission buffer in each of specific control processing and non-specific control processing, and the stored commands are transmitted by a command transmission circuit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-005447

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the processing is suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing processing by a control means.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a first processing group execution means for executing the processing of the first processing group and a means for executing the first processing group.
The second processing group execution means for executing the processing of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The storage area corresponding to the first processing, which cannot be written to,
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. The second processing-compatible storage area where writing is not possible,
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means is
As the processing of the second processing group, a means for executing an event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, and a means for executing the event occurrence specifying process.
As the processing of the second processing group, when it is specified in the event occurrence specifying processing that the predetermined event has occurred, the generation information for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Means of performing amnestics and
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means is
A means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area, and
As a process of the first process group, a special process execution means for executing a special process when it is specified in the information identification process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. ,
Equipped with
When the event occurrence specifying process is executed, the second processing group executing means erases the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence specifying process is executed as the processing of the second processing group. It is characterized in that it is provided with means for executing information erasing processing.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably execute the process by the control means.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device at the time of executing a game round. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the main symbol and the sub symbol which are variablely displayed in each symbol string. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a support mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (a) the first hit / fail table at the time of low probability, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hit / miss table at the time of low probability, and (c) the hit / miss at the time of high probability. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a table. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the first special figure, (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table for the second special figure, and (c) the second. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time-shortening distribution table for 1 special drawing, and (d) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (d) the time-saving distribution table for the 2nd special drawing. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each time saving result and ceiling time saving. (A) to (e) It is a time chart which shows how the time saving state is set by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fudition control process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the process of confirming a normal figure in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of a high probability state counter in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the special figure display part, and the stop result of a symbol display device. (A) The stop result of the first special figure display unit and the symbol display device when the first time reduction result is obtained in the game time triggered by the first hold information in the final game time in the normal game state or the time reduction state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, and (b) is the game time other than the last game time of a high probability state or a time saving state, and is the 1st time reduction result in the game time which was triggered by the 1st hold information. 1 It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display unit and the symbol display device, and (c) the first special figure display unit and the first special figure display unit in the case where the result is disengaged in the game round triggered by the first hold information. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the fluctuation pattern in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter in the main MPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart for explaining the execution order of the process in the process during special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter in the main MPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for explaining the relationship of the execution timing between the reach high frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed by the main MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the non-guided state, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the guided state. It is a vertical sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of the distribution winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first hit / miss table, (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hit / miss table, and (c) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table. , (D) An explanatory diagram for explaining the time-saving distribution table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table, and (f) for explaining the contents of each small hit result. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process executed by the main MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the time saving state counter executed by the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart for demonstrating the game state after the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state. It is a front view of the game board in tenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various storage areas. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process of the variation display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process of the time saving state in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the time saving result in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed notification processing in a sound light side MPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the 1st hold information as the execution target. It is a flowchart which shows the specifying process of the variation display period executed by the main MPU in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specifying process of the variation display period executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting mode of the program and data in the main ROM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting mode of each area in the main side RAM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various storage areas provided in the work area for specific control, and various storage areas provided in the work area for non-specific control. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric structure for sending a command from a main MPU to a sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the state that the command (a)-(d) is transmitted. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process in the main MPU. To explain the content of the processing executed in the main processing when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st management process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection short-circuit process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down in a game area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of the detection sensor input to the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information clear process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection execution processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows (a) the special electric start processing in the main MPU, (b) the flow chart which shows the special electric opening process in a main MPU, and (c) the flowchart which shows the special electric closing process in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the magnetic monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud handling process in the main MPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a prize-winning monitoring is performed by taking the 2nd actuating opening detection sensor as an example. It is a flowchart which shows the security processing in the main MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how security signals are output to the outside. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of the work area for non-specific control used for managing a game history. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of a calculation result storage area. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st to 4th notification display devices. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st to 4th notification display devices. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd management process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the check process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry management processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation processing in the main MPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for displaying and controlling various display circuits in a main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various buffers provided in the work area for specific control. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric structure of a display IC. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 8th display data buffer in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display process in the main MPU. (A) to (i) is a time chart showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices and setting display devices when the supply of operating power to the main MPU is started. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM clear process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information abnormality monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the prize ball counter in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry management processing in the main MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 66a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33 or when the balls are entered into the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. ..

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Further, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 are a plurality. Instead, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 may be one, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 is one. It may be a certain configuration, or both may have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is one.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward.

The lower frame portion 36a, which is a lower portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is provided with a stage portion 36b so as to extend laterally above the first operating port 33, and is capable of variable display. The left frame portion 36c, which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, is an entrance of a warp passage that enables a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. The portion 36d is formed. The lateral central portion of the stage portion 36b exists vertically above the first operating port 33, and the lead-out portion 36e for leading the game ball to the lower side of the stage portion 36b by its own weight is present in the central portion. Is formed. In this case, the game ball led out to the stage portion 36b and led out from a region other than the lead-out portion 36e to the lower side of the stage portion 36b is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the lead-out portion 36e The game ball led out from the lower side of the stage portion 36b enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The first operating port 33 is open upward and is not provided with a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down from the game area PA toward the first operating port 33.

The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the normal drawing pass / fail determination process is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric combination open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display of the normal figure display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

The winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as a result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result, which will be described later, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot result, the time saving result, and the missed result, respectively. It's different. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as a result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result, which will be described later, but the content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is the jackpot result, the time saving result, and the missed result, respectively. It's different. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters. Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure holding display unit 37c and a second special drawing holding display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, the number of game balls winning in the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning of the first actuating port 33, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the second actuation port is displayed. When the second special figure display unit 37b displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning of the prize 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later, which shifts after the big hit result is obtained, etc. Is done.

Based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. The period from the end of the game to the completion of the process during the determination of the special figure in the main control device 71, which will be described later, corresponds to one game.

In the pachinko machine 10, the hit / fail determination process is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, and the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a big hit result, so that the pachinko machine shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode, the open / close control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed, and the game ball is paid out by generating a prize in the special electric winning device 32 in the open state. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined opening continuation period elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the special electric winning device 32. That is. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In, the opening continuation period is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than the number of game balls will win. In addition, the maximum number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition.

As the winning / failing lottery mode of the winning / failing determination process, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of a jackpot result in which the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs is relatively high or low. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes in which the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode (first high-frequency support mode and second high-frequency support mode, which will be described later) and the low-frequency support mode are set so that Depending on the type of combination of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, the game state in the situation other than the open / close execution mode will be different. The gaming states include a normal gaming state which is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, a high-probability state which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode. The time saving state is set. In the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the average period required for one game to be digested is shorter than in the normal game state.

Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the lower region PAU, which is the lower region of the variable display unit 36 in the game region PA. Further, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device in a state where the first operating port 33 is arranged vertically so that the first operating port 33 is upward and the second operating port 34 is downward. Has been done. Further, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 can be controlled to be in an open state when the through gate 35 is won, but the through gate 35 is in the left area of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is located in a left area PAL. Then, the game ball flowing down the left side region PAL is guided to the lower region PAU, and the game ball guided to the lower region PAU is guided to the region provided with the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Can be done. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the first operating port 33, not only the winning of the first operating port 33 but also the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. When the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the second operating port 34, not only the winning of the second operating port 34 may occur, but also the winning of the first operating port 33 may occur.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as described above, so that it is difficult for the second operating port 34 to win a prize, and the first operating port is more difficult than the second operating port 34. Winning to 33 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the normal game state, the execution target of the game is basically the first special figure display unit 37a, and when a prize is accidentally generated in the second operating port 34, the second special figure display unit 37b is used. It becomes the execution target of the game times.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state or a time saving state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as described above, so that the second operating port 34 is likely to win a prize. In this case, the second operating port 34 is more likely to win a prize than the first operating port 33. However, as described above, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, the winning operation to the first operating port 33 may occur and the player is guided to the lead-out unit 36e of the stage portion 36b. Since the game ball will win a prize in the first operating port 33 with a high probability, a prize will be generated in the first operating port 33 at the same frequency as in the low frequency support mode even in the high frequency support mode. ..

The effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41 in a mode corresponding to the patterns of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the game round. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed will be described.

4 (a) and 4 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. That is, when the game round is executed, the variable display of the symbol is performed by using most of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

5 (a) to 5 (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the main symbol and the sub symbol which are variablely displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), the symbols which are a kind of symbols are 9 kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and a sub symbol is 1 between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The symbol display device 41 is designed to stop and display three symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, the symbol display device 41 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. There is.

When the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started so as to be performed. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with.

When the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the hit / fail determination process in the main control device 71 described later is the jackpot result described later, the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. To. In addition, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is set triggered by the time saving result, one of the effective lines is performed when the variation display of the symbol ends. A predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3", “3 ・ 4 ・ 1”) is formed on L1 to L5, which is neither a combination of the same symbols nor a combination of reach symbols. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of time saving results as described later, the content of the combination of predetermined symbols also differs depending on the type of time saving results. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the reach symbol is displayed when the variation display of the symbol ends. A non-reach out-of-reach stop symbol that does not form a combination is displayed. That is, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the stop result in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the hit / fail determination process. Can result in the same stop result as if the result of was out of order.

As described above, in the configuration in which the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 41 when the game round is executed. The expected effect is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be a big hit result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. say. There are two types of expected effects, a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the jackpot result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the remaining middle symbols are displayed in that state. The display state in which the variable display of the symbol is performed in the column Z2 is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect. If it is a game time that results in a big hit, a symbol of the same type as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and if it is a game time that does not result in a big hit, the reach symbol A symbol of a type different from the symbol forming the combination of is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z1 to In a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in Z3, an embodiment in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but it is higher when the reach display is performed than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

As shown in FIG. 4B, a hold display area 42 and a state suggestion area 43 are set on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in addition to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The hold display area 42 is set at the lower part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the hold display area 42, an image for notifying the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on the winning of the first operation port 33 is displayed in the hold display area 42. It has a 42a and a second holding display area 42b on which an image for notifying the player of the number of holding information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later based on the winning of the second operating port 34, is displayed. .. The hold information is information that triggers the execution of the hit / miss determination process in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers the execution of the game round. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold information) acquired by winning the prize in the first operating port 33 serves as an opportunity to execute the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and the second operating port 34 wins a prize. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information) acquired in response to the above triggers the execution of the game round in the second special figure display unit 37b. The first reserved information is stored in a maximum of four, and the second reserved information is also stored in a maximum of four.

In the first hold display area 42a, a number of first hold images G1 corresponding to the number of first hold information is displayed. That is, if the number of the first reserved information stored on hold is 0, the first reserved image G1 is not displayed in the first reserved display area 42a. Further, if the number of the first reserved information stored on hold is one, one first reserved image G1 is displayed, and if the number of first reserved information stored on hold is two, the first reserved image G1 is displayed. If two images G1 are displayed and the number of first reserved information stored on hold is three, three first reserved images G1 are displayed and the number of first reserved information stored on hold is four. If so, four first reserved images G1 are displayed. When a plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed, the plurality of first reserved images G1 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the first reserved information stored on hold increases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the first reserved information serves as a trigger for the start of the game round and is stored on hold. When the number of the first reserved information being stored decreases, the first reserved image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In the second hold display area 42b, a number of second hold images G2 corresponding to the number of second hold information is displayed. That is, if the number of the second reserved information stored on hold is 0, the second reserved image G2 is not displayed in the second reserved display area 42b. If the number of second reserved information stored on hold is one, one second reserved image G2 is displayed, and if the number of second reserved information stored on hold is two, the second reserved image G2 is displayed. If two images G2 are displayed and the number of second reserved information stored on hold is three, three second reserved images G2 are displayed and the number of second reserved information stored on hold is four. If so, four second reserved images G2 are displayed. When a plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed, the plurality of second reserved images G2 are displayed side by side at regular intervals. Further, when the number of the second reserved information stored on hold increases, the second reserved image G2 is displayed so as to increase toward the right, and the second reserved information serves as a trigger for the start of the game round and is stored on hold. When the number of the second reserved information is decreased, the second reserved image G2 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left.

In addition, in FIG. 4B, since the number of the first reserved information stored on hold is four and the number of the second reserved information is four, the first reserved information is first reserved in the first reserved display area 42a. Four images G1 are displayed, and four second reserved images G2 are displayed in the second reserved display area 42b.

The state suggestion area 43 is set in the upper part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The state suggestion area 43 has a smaller display area than the display area of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the state suggestion area 43, the fluctuation display of the symbol for the game round is performed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination process of the game round is not stopped and displayed. In some situations, color switching is displayed. Specifically, a predetermined display color pattern is repeated in the order of red → blue → green → red → blue → green → red. Then, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the confirmation display (stationary display) is started, the stop corresponding to the game status and the result of the hit / fail determination process at that time is started. The result is displayed. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result or a miss result, the red color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later, if the time saving state is set triggered by the time saving result, red is stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the time saving result, and the time saving is displayed. If the time saving state is not set triggered by the result, blue or green is stopped and displayed depending on the type of the time saving result. As described above, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result described later and the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result, the stop result in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the hit / fail judgment process. In a configuration that can have the same stop result as the case where the result of By making the display content of the state suggestion area 43 different between the case and the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order, the result of the hit / miss judgment process is the time saving result described later, and the time saving result is concerned. It is possible to display different display contents as a whole of the symbol display device 41 depending on whether the time saving state is not set with the above as an opportunity and the result of the pass / fail determination process is out of order. ..

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a big hit result, the game shifts to the open / close execution mode as described above. In the open / close execution mode, the open / close control of the special electric winning device 32 is executed. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when a jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

The front door frame 14 is provided so that the game board 24 having the above configuration covers the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 67 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 66a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing seal that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operating port 33, and a second operation. The detection sensor 86d provided in the mouth 34 and the detection sensor 86e provided in the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines the winning of each winning ball. Further, in the MPU 82, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 91.

On the output side of the MPU 82, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 82 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 82 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed when the utility opening is won. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 82. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the display control of the normal figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 82.

The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control device 71, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a for power-on and a power supply unit 78b for power-off. The power supply unit 78a during power-on is connected to, for example, a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Has a function. The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a during power supply when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged by. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. It is stored in memory.

Here, the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Will be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply, the current game It is possible to store the state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the voice emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply is stopped. It will be erased.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). To. The power supply unit 78b during power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown), which is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure during power failure. In the power supply / emission control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit discharges from the power supply unit during a power failure for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure process described later. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle. Further, the launch control unit 78c grasps whether or not the launch stop switch of the launch operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the amount of rotation operation of.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 when the predetermined launch conditions of the game ball are satisfied. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted to the MPU 82 on condition that the HI level condition satisfying signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfying) is received from the push sensor 28b. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition condition signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition condition) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfying signal corresponding to the condition satisfying.

In the MPU 82, if the HI level condition condition satisfying signal is received and the launch of the game ball can be permitted, the launch control unit 78c is notified of the HI level launch permission signal (signal corresponding to the launch permission). Continue to send. When the MPU 82 does not receive the HI level condition condition satisfying signal from the launch control unit 78c, the MPU 82 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

The launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 when the game ball launch mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 82. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). To. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle.

The voice emission control device 91 includes a voice emission control board 92 on which the MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 is a ROM 94 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 93, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A certain RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in. In the MPU 93, the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are driven and controlled based on the command received from the main control device 71, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 101.

The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which the MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 is a ROM 104 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in. The MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 91.

Although not shown, the display control board 102 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and at the same time, reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as a main MPU 82, a main ROM 83 and a main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94 and RAM 95 of the audio emission control device 91 are on the sound light side. The MPU 93, the sound light side ROM 94 and the sound light side RAM 95 are referred to, and the MPU 103, ROM 104 and RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as a display side MPU 103, a display side ROM 104 and a display side RAM 105.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 82 uses various counter information during the game to perform a winning lottery, setting the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a hit random number counter C1 used for a lottery for hit occurrence, a type random number counter C2 used for determining a jackpot result type and a time saving result type, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display. A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display period in the device 41 is used. Further, the normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 84b of the main RAM 84.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for special figures provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the area 84a. The special figure holding area 84a includes a first special drawing holding area 111, a second special drawing holding area 112, and an execution area 113 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 111 includes a first area 111a, a second area 111b, a third area 111c, and a fourth area 111d. It is stored in any of the areas 111a to 111d as the first hold information of each numerical value of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3. In this case, in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 111a → the second area 111b → the third area 111c → the third area 111c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 111d. By providing the four areas 111a to 111d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the first special figure holding area 111 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 112 includes a first area 112a, a second area 112b, a third area 112c, and a fourth area 112d, and the winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 112a to 112d as the second hold information. In this case, in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 112a → the second area 112b → the third area 112c → the third area 112c. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 4 areas 112d. By providing the four areas 112a to 112d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 112 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The execution area 113 for the special figure is an area in which the hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail determination, the distribution determination, or the like is stored when the variation display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure hold area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for special figure. To. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure hold area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 84c when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 84c includes a first area 114a, a second area 114b, a third area 114c, and a fourth area 114d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 114a to 114d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 114a → the second area 114b → the third area 114c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 114d. By providing the four areas 114a to 114d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of cells that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing holding area 84c is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. May be. An execution area 115 for a normal map is provided in the normal map hold area 84c. The execution area 115 for the normal map is an area in which the pending information to be processed for the normal map pass / fail determination process when the variable display is started by the normal map display unit 38a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 114a of the normal map hold area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The Fuden random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the Fuzu holding area 84c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a normal figure hit / miss determination process is performed to determine whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored normal electric random number counter C4.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode.

In the support mode, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that is relatively high and low. Further, as the high frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode are set.

The probability of winning the electric service is relative as the judgment mode when the normal figure winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not the utility object 34a is in the open state is executed by lottery. There is a high-probability mode on the normal map side and a low-probability mode on the normal map side so as to be high and low. In the low-probability mode on the normal map side, the probability of winning the electric service is halved in one normal-figure winning / failing judgment process, whereas in the high-probability mode on the normal-figure side, one normal-figure winning / failing judgment is made. The probability of winning the electric service opening in the process is 4/5.

When the normal map pass / fail determination process is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the normal map display unit 38a. In this case, the fluctuation period of the normal map, which is the continuation period of the variable display times in which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the normal map display unit 38a, is set to a long period and a short period so that the period is relatively long and short. Exists. The long term is 10 seconds, while the short term is 1 second.

When the variation display times of the normal map display unit 38a are completed, the stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the normal map hit / miss determination process that triggered the execution of the fluctuation display times is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a. .. In this case, if the determination result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is a deviation result, the stop result corresponding to the deviation result is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and the transition to the normal power open state does not occur. When the holding information on the normal drawing side is stored in the normal drawing holding area 84c, a new normal drawing pass / fail determination process is executed for the holding information on the normal drawing side, and the normal drawing display unit 38a newly executes the holding information. Fluctuation display times are started. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process is the result corresponding to the electric combination open winning, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the normal figure display unit 38a, and the transition to the normal electric opening state is made. Occur.

As the execution mode in the open state of the normal electric power, there are a high expectation degree mode and a low expectation degree mode so that the expected degree of entry of the game ball into the general electric power accessory 34a is relatively high and low. In the low expectation mode, the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once. The duration of the short opening is 0.7 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball basically enters the second operating port 34. Even if it does not occur, the number of balls entered is about one. The open state of the normal power is also terminated when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit of 10 on the normal power side, but when the short opening occurs once. As described above, even if a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the number of the game balls is about one, so that the upper limit number of game balls on the normal electric side does not enter the second operating port 34.

In the high expectation mode, the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs three times. The duration of the long opening is 2 seconds. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls will enter the second operating port 34. obtain. Then, in the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times with an interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is closed. Therefore, when the high expectation mode is open, about nine game balls can enter. As described above, the normal power open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit of the number of game balls on the normal power side. When an open state occurs, an event may occur in which the open state of the normal power is terminated by the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side entering the second operating port 34.

In the configuration in which the judgment mode of the normal figure hit / fail judgment process, the fluctuation period of the normal figure in the normal figure display unit 38a, and the execution mode of the normal power open state are set as described above, the normal figure hit / fail judgment process is performed in the low frequency support mode. The judgment mode is the low probability mode on the normal map side, the fluctuation period of the normal map is long, and the execution mode in the normal power open state is the low expectation mode in which one short opening occurs. In addition, in the first high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal-figure hit / fail judgment process is the high-probability mode on the normal-figure side, the fluctuation period of the normal-figure is short, and the execution mode of the normal-power open state is three long open times. It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. In addition, in the second high-frequency support mode, the judgment mode of the normal-figure hit / fail judgment process is the low-probability mode on the normal-figure side, the fluctuation period of the normal-figure is short, and the execution mode of the normal-power open state is three long open times. It becomes a high expectation mode that occurs. Therefore, when the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner so as to generate a prize in the through gate 35, the ratio of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time. The expectation of the first high frequency support mode is the highest, the second high frequency support mode is the next highest, and the low frequency support mode is the lowest. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power is the low expectation mode, so that in the low frequency support mode, the game ball hardly enters the second operating port 34. On the other hand, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the execution mode in the open state is the high-expectation mode. It can be expected that the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of the second reserved information in the second special drawing reserved area 112.

It should be noted that the configuration for differentiating the expected degree of the ratio of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is It is not limited to the above, and for example, a short period is selected in the first high frequency support mode as a variable period of the normal figure, whereas a short period and a long period are selected in the second high frequency support mode. In the configuration in which the medium period is selected, the long opening occurs three times in the first high frequency support mode as the execution mode in the normal power open state, while the long opening occurs in the second high frequency support mode. It may be configured to occur multiple times. Further, although the judgment mode of the normal figure hit / miss judgment process is the same in the high probability mode on the normal figure side in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the fluctuation period of the normal figure or the execution of the normal electric open state is executed. Depending on the content of the mode, the first high-frequency support mode has a higher expectation of the ratio of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 being open per unit time than the second high-frequency support mode. It may be configured.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9999 and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. Then, the hit / fail determination process is performed using the numerical information of the stored random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination process is stored in the main ROM 83 as a winning / failing table. In the pachinko machine 10, there are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of a big hit result is relatively high or low as the winning / failing lottery mode of the winning / failing determination process. As the pass / fail table referred to in the pass / fail determination process in the low probability mode, the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability referred to when the pass / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, and the second hold information. A second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability is provided, which is referred to when the hit / miss determination process is executed. Further, a hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability is provided as a hit / miss table referred to in the hit / miss determination process in the high probability mode.

FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first hit / miss table 121 at the time of low probability, and FIG. 9B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability. FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c), as a result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a big hit result, a time saving result, and a missed result. The jackpot result is a result of success or failure that can be a trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and a trigger for transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. The time saving result is a result of success or failure that can be a trigger for transition to the support mode, although it does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode and further does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode. The deviation result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode and also does not trigger the transition of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a set value that determines the advantage per unit time. As for the set value, the larger n of "setting n" (n is an integer of "1" to "6") (that is, the higher the set value), the higher the advantage. There are "setting 1" to "setting 6" as setting values. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. .. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of, and 9850 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 1", 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9848 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. In addition, 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in "setting 3" which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 2", and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9846 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 3", 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9844 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. In addition, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in "setting 5" which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 4", and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9842 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9840 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. As described above, the probability of a time-saving result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9B, in the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. .. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 50 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of, and 9830 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 1", 52 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9828 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. In addition, 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in "setting 3" which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 2", and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9826 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 3", 56 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9824 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. In addition, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in "setting 5" which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 4", and a hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9822 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 120 pieces are set, and 9820 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation.

That is, the probability of the jackpot result of each set value is the same in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability and the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability. On the other hand, the probability that the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process is higher in the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability than in the first hit / miss table 121 with low probability. Therefore, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the case where the winning / failing determination process is executed for the second reserved information is more than the case where the winning / failing determination process is executed for the first reserved information. , The probability that a time-saving result will be selected increases.

It should be noted that the probability of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process is not limited to this, and is the same or substantially the same in the first hit / miss table 121 at the time of low probability and the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability. The configuration may be such that the first hit / miss table 121 at the time of low probability is higher than the second hit / miss table 122 at the low probability. Further, the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is not limited to the configuration in which the probability of the time saving result is the same for each set value, and may be configured to fluctuate according to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, or the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the time saving result. Further, the second hit / fail table 122 at the time of low probability is not limited to the configuration in which the probability of the time saving result is the same for each set value, and may be configured to fluctuate according to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the time saving result, or the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 9C, in the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the set value, the lower the probability of a deviation result. On the other hand, the probability of achieving a time saving result is set to be the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

Specifically, 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit result in the lowest setting value "setting 1", and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is the time saving result is set. 100 pieces are set as the number of, and 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 1", 520 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result is set. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9380 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 2", 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9360 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 3", 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result is set. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9340 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in "setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "setting 4", 580 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number counter which is a time saving result is set. 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1, and 9320 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation. Further, in the highest setting value "setting 6", 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a time saving result. 100 pieces are set, and 9300 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a result of deviation.

When the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability is in the high probability mode, either the case where the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information or the case where the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the second hold information. Even if there is, it is referred. As a result, the pass / fail table corresponds to the case where the hit / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information in the high probability mode and the case where the hit / fail judgment process is executed for the second hold information in the high probability mode. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the main ROM 83 required for storing the pass / fail table, as compared with the configuration provided with the above.

In "setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200 in the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/192 in the low probability mode and about 1/19.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/185 in the low probability mode and about 1/18.5, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/179 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 17.9, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/172 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 17.2, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. In "setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/167 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 16.7, which is 10 times that in the high probability mode. That is, in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the probability of a big hit result is 10 times higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the probability of a time-saving result is 1/100 in any of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in the first hit / fail table 121 at the time of low probability and the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, which is a low probability. In the second hit / fail table 122 at the time, any of "setting 1" to "setting 6" is about 1/83. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the high-probability hit / miss table 123, the probability of a time-saving result is higher than that of the low-probability first hit / miss table 121 and is higher than that of the low-probability second hit / miss table 122. It may be configured to be set to be lower than that of the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability.

The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is the result of the big hit may be aggregated and set so as to be a serial number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It may be configured as such. Further, the numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is the result of shortening the time may be aggregated and set so as to be a serial number, and at least a part or all of the numerical information may be distributed and set so as not to be a serial number. It may be configured as such.

As described above, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that a big hit result will be obtained, regardless of whether the first hold information is the trigger or the second hold information is the trigger. The higher the value, the more advantageous it is for the player. In addition, the open / close execution mode is the period in which the amount of increase in the number of balls held by the player per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode fluctuates according to the set value. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is low probability mode regardless of any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". In, the probability is a certain number of times (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a big hit result, which is a number larger than "1". This makes it possible to keep the fluctuation rate of the probability of a jackpot result between the low probability mode and the high probability mode constant regardless of the setting state.

The probability that a big hit result will be obtained when the combination of the set value and the winning / failing lottery mode is the same is the same when the first holding information is used as a trigger and when the second holding information is used as a trigger. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a difference in the probability of occurrence of the jackpot result between the case where the first hold information is used as the trigger and the case where the second hold information is used as a trigger.

The probability of a time saving result when the first hold information is used as an opportunity is the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Further, the probability that the time saving result is obtained when the second hold information is used as an opportunity is the same regardless of any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target to be focused on in order to estimate the set value to the jackpot result, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value. On the other hand, the probability of a time saving result is higher when the second hold information is used as a trigger than when the first hold information is used as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to make the frequency of occurrence of the time saving result different between the case where the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed and the case where the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed.

The type random number counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type random number counter C2 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results can be obtained by providing differences in three conditions: the number of times a round game is executed in the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode after the open / close execution mode ends, and the support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. It is set. The jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is provided as the jackpot distribution table referred to in the jackpot distribution determination process when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information. There is. Further, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is provided as the jackpot distribution table referred to in the jackpot distribution determination process when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information. Has been done.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special drawing, and FIG. 10B is an explanation for explaining the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special drawing. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126 have 5R low accuracy results, 5R high accuracy results, and 10R high accuracy results as the types of jackpot results. It is set. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result.

As already explained, the 5R low probability result is generated by the jackpot result in the hit / fail determination process and being selected in the distribution determination process for the jackpot. As for the 5R low probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 5, the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes a support mode. The low-probability mode in this case continues at least until the next open / close execution mode occurs. In addition, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, the 5R high accuracy result is generated by the jackpot result in the hit / fail determination process and being selected in the distribution determination process for the jackpot. As for the 5R high probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 5, the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes a support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times are exhausted, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As described above, the 10R high accuracy result becomes a big hit result in the hit / fail judgment process and is selected in the big hit distribution judgment process. As for the 10R high probability result, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is 10, the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high frequency. It is a big hit result that becomes a support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times are exhausted, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is set to 5R low accuracy result, 5R high accuracy result and 10R high accuracy result as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low accuracy result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 22" corresponds to the 5R high accuracy result. Corresponding, the type random number counter C2 of "23-29" corresponds to the 10R high accuracy result. On the other hand, in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special drawing, as shown in FIG. 10B, 5R low accuracy result and 10R high accuracy result are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 14" corresponds to the 5R low accuracy result, and the type random number counter C2 of "15 to 29" corresponds to the 10R high accuracy result. It corresponds.

The jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure and the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of times the round game is executed is larger in the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure than in the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure. Therefore, as the type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the prize in the second operating port 34 is higher than that in the case where the winning / failing determination process is performed when the winning in the first operating port 33 occurs. It is more advantageous for the player when the game is generated and the pass / fail determination process is performed.

Not only are multiple types of jackpot results set, but multiple types of time-saving results are also set. Then, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the time saving result is determined by the lottery using the type random number counter C2 used for determining the type of the jackpot result by the lottery. That is, not only the hit random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot result is used as the random number for selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process, but also the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. In this case, as the random number for selecting the type of the time saving result, the type random number counter C2 used for selecting the type of the jackpot result is used. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of counters for lottery, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 84 required for performing the lottery.

A time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is provided as a time-saving distribution table to be referred to in the time-saving distribution determination process when a time-saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information. There is. Further, a time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is provided as a time saving distribution table referred to in the time saving distribution determination process when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second reserved information. Has been done.

FIG. 10 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special drawing, and FIG. 10 (d) is an explanation for explaining the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special drawing. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, the time saving distribution tables 127 and 128 are set to the first time saving result and the second time saving result as the types of the time saving result. FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each time saving opportunity.

As described above, the first time saving result is generated by the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process and being selected in the time saving distribution determination process. The first time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode and further not the transition trigger of the winning / failing lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As described above, the second time saving result is generated by the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process and being selected in the time saving distribution determination process. The second time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition of the open / close execution mode and further not the transition trigger of the winning / failing lottery mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 150 game rounds are completed without a new open / close execution mode. When 150 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the second time saving result has a larger number of executions of the game times in which the second high frequency support mode continues than the first time saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the types of the time saving results to be distributed. In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 19" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. It corresponds. On the other hand, in the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special drawing, as shown in FIG. 10D, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the types of the time saving results to be distributed. .. In the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure, the type random number counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first time saving result, and the type random number counter C2 of "10 to 29" corresponds to the second time saving result. It corresponds.

In the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure, the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous. In the time saving distribution table 128 for 2 special figures, the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous, is higher than the selection probability of the first time saving result, which is relatively disadvantageous. Furthermore, the selection probability of the second time saving result, which is relatively advantageous, is higher in the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure than in the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure. Therefore, as the type of the time saving result that can be selected when the time saving result is obtained in the hit / fail determination process, the second operation is performed as compared with the case where the winning of the first operating port 33 is generated and the winning / failing determination process is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the winning of the mouth 34 is generated and the winning / failing determination process is performed.

Here, the selection of the time saving result in the winning / failing determination process may occur regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, but even if the time saving result is selected in the high probability mode. The support mode is not set based on the time saving result. Further, the selection of the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process may occur regardless of whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode, or the second high frequency support mode, but the first high frequency support mode is selected. Even if the time saving result is selected in the frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the support mode triggered by the time saving result is not set. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the time saving result when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process occurs only in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support modes in the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. It also includes the situation after the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the time-saving result occurs only in the low-probability mode, when the time-saving result occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the low-probability mode is used. Therefore, it becomes the second high-frequency support mode. That is, the time saving result is the result of shifting the gaming state to the above time saving state without intervening the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is the first high frequency support mode, while the support mode set triggered by the time saving result is the first. 2 High frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the reduced working hours result.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an event of shifting the support mode to the second high-frequency support mode without generating the open / close execution mode, there is a ceiling time reduction in addition to the time reduction result as described above. As shown in FIG. 11B, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the game times of the number of ceilings are digested without a big hit result. It should be noted that the setting of the number of ceilings occurs not only when the jackpot result occurs but also when the supply of operating power starts. This will be described in detail later. The ceiling time reduction does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and does not trigger the transition of the winning / failing lottery mode, and is the result of setting the support mode to the second high frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when 100 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 100 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode generated by the ceiling time reduction is the same as the number of continuations of the second high-frequency support mode generated by the first time reduction result, and the second time reduction result is obtained. Less than the number of continuations of the second high frequency support mode caused by. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to select the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process than to shorten the ceiling time.

The digestion of the game times of the ceiling number does not occur in the high probability mode. Therefore, even if the number of ceilings is newly set due to the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result, the remaining number of ceilings is not subtracted until the subsequent high probability mode ends. On the other hand, the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings occurs in the low probability mode regardless of the support mode. However, even if the digestion of the game times of the ceiling number is completed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the support mode is not set triggered by the digestion of the game times of the ceiling number. That is, the setting of the support mode triggered by the shortening of the ceiling time for the completion of the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings occurs only in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the situation where the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, the last of the high frequency support modes in the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. It also includes the situation after the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode and shifting to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the game round.

Since the transition to the second high-frequency support mode due to the ceiling time reduction occurs only in the low-probability mode, if the ceiling time reduction occurs and the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs, the low-probability mode is used. Therefore, it becomes the second high-frequency support mode. That is, the ceiling time reduction is a result of shifting the game state to the above time reduction state without intervening the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the support mode set after the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is the first high frequency support mode, while the support mode set triggered by the shortened ceiling time is the first. 2 High frequency support mode. In other words, the support mode triggered by the jackpot result is more advantageous than the support mode triggered by the shortened ceiling time.

FIG. 12 is a time chart showing how the time reduction state is set according to the time reduction result or the ceiling time reduction. FIG. 12 (a) shows a period in which the open / close execution mode is set, FIG. 12 (b) shows a state of the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84, and FIG. 12 (c) shows a period in which the open / close state is in a high probability state. 12 (d) shows the timing at which the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, and FIG. 12 (e) shows the period during which the time saving state is selected.

First, a case will be described in which an event that becomes a time saving state triggered by a time saving result and an event that becomes a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time saving occur discontinuously.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a 5R high accuracy result or a 10R high accuracy result, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 12A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ceiling counter 131 provided in the main RAM 84 is set to 500 times, which is a fixed number of ceilings, triggered by the start of the opening / closing execution mode. The ceiling counter 131 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of ceilings by the main MPU 82.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12 (a) at the timing of t2, the high probability state is reached as shown in FIG. 12 (c). The high-probability state is a high-probability mode, which is a gaming state which is the first high-probability support mode. The high probability state ends at the timing of t4 when 100 game times are digested. Since the game round is not executed in the open / close execution mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and in the high probability mode, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game round is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from the timing of t1 when the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131. Further, as shown in FIG. 12D, the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t3, which is the timing in the middle of the high probability state, but the time saving result is invalidated because it is in the high probability mode. Will be done.

When the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (c) at the timing of t4, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, FIG. 12 (b) shows whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. As described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. Since the gaming state at the timing of t5 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the game state shifts to the time saving state triggered by the time saving result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12 (b), in the time saving state, regardless of whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, the remaining number of times of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t6 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e). In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 12 (b). That is, the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings is completed. Since the gaming state at the timing of t7 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the game state shifts to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. After that, the remaining number of times of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t8 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e). In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set in either case of shifting to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction or the end of the time reduction state. Further, in the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game times being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in the situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. Occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and basically after the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once. Unless the jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur.

Next, a case will be described in which an event that becomes a time saving state triggered by a time saving result and an event that becomes a time saving state triggered by a ceiling time saving occur continuously.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a 5R high accuracy result or a 10R high accuracy result, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 12A. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ceiling counter 131 is set to 500 times, which is a fixed number of ceilings, triggered by the start of the opening / closing execution mode.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 12 (a) at the timing of t10, the high probability state is reached as shown in FIG. 12 (c). The high probability state ends at the timing of t11 when 100 game times are digested. In this case, the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because the game times are not executed in the open / close execution mode, and the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game times are executed in the high probability mode. Therefore, at the timing of t11 when the high probability state ends, the value of the ceiling counter 131 does not change from the timing of t9 when the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131.

When the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (c) at the timing of t11, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, FIG. 12 (b) shows whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. As described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. Since the gaming state at the timing of t12 is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12 (e), the game state shifts to the time saving state triggered by the time saving result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, the opening / closing execution mode does not intervene, and the winning / failing lottery mode is maintained in the low probability mode. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12 (b), in the time saving state, regardless of whether the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed or the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed. The value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t13, which is the timing in the middle of the time saving state, but the time saving result is invalidated because it is in the time saving state. ..

After that, the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t14 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 12 (b). Become. In this case, the time is shortened at the timing when the last game round of the time shortened state is started, but the remaining number of continuations of the time shortened state is 0 in the process executed when the game round is finished. When it is specified, the support mode is changed from the second high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal gaming state. Further, when the game round is completed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 after the process is executed, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0". That is, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" after the game state is set from the reduced working hours state to the normal game state in the game times. Therefore, in the game round, the time saving state is set when the digestion of the game rounds of the number of ceilings is completed. Therefore, the time saving state does not end at the timing of t14, and the time saving state continues. The time saving state is a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a second high frequency support mode. After that, the remaining number of times of the time saving state becomes 0 at the timing of t15 without the big hit result occurring in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 12 (e). In this case, the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 of FIG. 7 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the time saving result, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 83.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main MPU 82 to determine the variation display period in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the variation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired at the start of variation display on the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 82 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 82 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step S101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for weight (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

After that, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S102). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to a predetermined cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). The details of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described later. In addition to setting the interrupt cycle, the internal function register setting process also executes setting processing of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1.

After that, "1" is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S103). The start-up processing flag is used to monitor power failure, update various counters, and monitor fraud among various processes set in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) even if the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is started. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S101 to S126) is started in the main process (FIG. 13), and the process at the start of supply of operating power is set. "0" is cleared before (steps S101 to S126) are completed and the residual processing (steps S127 to S130) is started. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), when "1" is set in the start-up processing flag, the processing of steps S207 to S220 is not executed, so that the processing at the start of supply of operating power (the processing at the start of supply of operating power). It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) described later in steps S101 to S126) is being executed. Will be. On the other hand, as described above, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed to supply the operating power. Even if the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start (steps S101 to S126), the power failure monitoring is executed and the power failure monitoring is executed. The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further executed.

In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure monitoring process (step S201) is executed, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power (step S101 to step SB126). Of these, even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure processing for the power failure. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84, so that the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 84 from being identified as an abnormal occurrence. As a result, if a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117), which will be described later, the next operating power indicates that the power failure occurred during these setting-related processes. Can be specified at the start of supply. By the way, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the setting value update process (step S117) described later is being executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not disabled and is interrupted at an arbitrary timing. It is possible.

After setting "1" in the start-up processing flag in step S103, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S104). When the power failure processing is executed in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was properly performed at the time of the previous power failure.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S104: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step S105). Specifically, first, the checksum is calculated for the main RAM 84. The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but it is the same calculation method as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing in the power failure monitoring process (step S201) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) described later. ing. After that, the checksum calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped and stored in the main RAM 84 is read, and the read checksum is used as the main checksum this time. Compare with the checksum calculated in the process. Then, it is determined whether or not those checksums match.

When the checksums match (step S105: YES), it is determined whether or not the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is within the normal range (step S106). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the set value set as the target of use in the current pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S106, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area is any of "1" to "6".

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S104 to S106, it means that no information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting updating flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S107). The setting updating flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting value updating process (step S117) described later is being executed, and when "1" is set in the setting updating flag. Is a display indicating that the set value is being updated and a display indicating the set value being updated on the notification display device 141 (see FIG. 6) mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71. Is done. The notification display device 141 includes a plurality of segment display devices. These plurality of segment indicators are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the display surface of each segment indicator can be visually recognized from the outside of the board box without opening the board box of the main control device 71. It has become.

Since the setting updating flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the setting value updating process (step S117) is started and "0" is cleared when the setting value updating process (step S117) is completed. , In the situation where the setting value updating process (step S117) is not executed, basically, the setting updating flag is not set to "1". However, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped in the situation where the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that. In, the setting updating flag is set to "1". The state in which "1" is set in this setting updating flag is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting updating flag "0" is executed in the setting value updating process (step S117).

When a negative determination is made in step S107 because "1" is not set in the setting updating flag, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 (see FIG. 6) is pressed (step S108). The reset button 142 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the pressing operation portion of the reset button 142 is not covered by the board box of the main control device 71. Therefore, it is possible to operate the reset button 142 without opening the board box. In step S108, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 142 is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started.

When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S108: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S109). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) described later, while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to step S207. The process of S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly when the power was cut off last time, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the time when the power was cut off last time. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S109, the processes of steps S124 and S125, which will be described later, are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 (see FIG. 6) is turned on by using the setting key (step S110). The setting key insertion unit 143 is provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and the keyhole portion for performing an ON operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion unit 143 is the board box of the main control device 71. Not covered by. Therefore, it is possible to perform an ON operation with the setting key to the setting key insertion unit 143 without opening the board box. When the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S110: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S112). Further, even when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key (step S110: NO), "1" is set in the setting checking flag provided in the main RAM 84. If so (step S111: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S112).

The setting confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, and is notified when "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag. On the display device 141, a display indicating that the set value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set value are displayed. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is completed. , In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is not executed, basically, "1" is not set in the setting confirmation flag. However, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started after that. In, the setting confirmation flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in this setting confirmation flag, the RAM clear process (step S119) described later is executed, the setting value update process (step S117) described later is executed, or the setting is confirmed. It is maintained until the process of clearing the setting confirmation flag "0" in the process (step S112) is executed.

Not only when the reset button 142 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed) as described above, but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. Even when the setting confirmation flag is set to "1" even when the pressing operation is not performed, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed, so that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed. When the power failure processing is executed in the above situation, the setting confirmation process (step S112) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. This makes it possible to continue to confirm the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step S112) is being executed, if the reset button 142 is pressed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted, the reset button 142 is pressed. Of the RAM clear processing (step S119) and the setting value update processing (step S117), the processing corresponding to the operation performed when the operation power supply is restarted is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (step S112). To. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S119) or the set value update process (step S117) over the setting confirmation process (step S112).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S112 will be described.

In the setting confirmation process, interrupt enable is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted and started at a predetermined cycle. In the pachinko machine 10, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited from being interrupted in the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power, and the setting confirmation processing (step S112) and the setting are prohibited. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in the situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, "1" is set in the start-up process in progress flag, so that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Is started, of the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated without any notice. After that, "1" is set in the setting confirmation flag on condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84. By setting "1" to the setting confirmation flag, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the notification display devices. It is done at 141. After that, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) is being executed and an image for making the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112) recognizable are displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display side MPU 103 is displayed and controlled so as to be displayed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting confirmation flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the state in which the notification display device 141 is displayed indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is released is released. To. After that, the interrupt is disabled. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step S112) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step S101 to step S126) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed. Interruption is prohibited. After that, the return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. As a result, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (step S112) in the symbol display device 41 is being executed and an image for making the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (step S112) recognizable. The display ends.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), when the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key and "1" is not set in the setting confirmation flag (step S110 and). Step S111: NO), it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open (step S113). The resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 is provided with a main body opening detection sensor 144 (see FIG. 6). The main body open detection sensor 144 is electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, a LOW level open detection signal is transmitted to the main MPU 82. When the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the HI level open detection signal is transmitted to the main MPU 82. The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed. In step S113, it is determined whether or not the HI level openness detection signal is received from the main body openness detection sensor 144.

When the HI level opening detection signal is received from the main body opening detection sensor 144 (step S113: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main RAM 84 Information on the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set in the counter 131 (step S114). When the process of step S113 is executed, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by the setting key. Further, "1" is not set in both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84. In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed in the process (step S101 to step S126) at the start of supply of the operating power. The situation. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once.

In such a situation, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S113, the gaming machine is in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed. This is a case where the supply of operating power is started in a state where the main body 12 is intentionally opened. Then, in such a situation, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business, and also to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate the operation (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) without being involved.

When a negative determination is made in step S113 or the process of step S114 is executed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S115). By receiving the normal return command, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power has been completed in the main MPU 82, and at the time of starting the supply of the operating power this time. In the process (steps S101 to S126), it is specified that none of the RAM clear process (step S119), the setting confirmation process (step S112), and the set value update process (step S117) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S108 that the reset button 142 is being pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 is being turned on using the setting key (step S116: YES). Or, when it is determined in step S107 that "1" is set in the setting updating flag, the setting value updating process is executed (step S117). Not only when the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed) as described above, but also when the reset button 142 is pressed. The set value is updated by executing the set value update process (step S117) even when the setting updating flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the pressing operation and the setting key insertion unit 143 are turned on. When the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the processing (step S117) is being executed, the operation contents at the start of the subsequent operation power supply are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", and "setting change". The setting value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of whether it is an "operation" or a "setting confirmation operation". This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the set value update process (step S117).

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S117 will be described.

In the setting value update process, interrupt enable is first set. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is interrupted and started at a predetermined cycle. In the pachinko machine 10, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is basically prohibited from being interrupted in the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power, and the setting confirmation processing (step S112) and the setting are prohibited. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is permitted in the situation where the value update process (step S117) is being executed. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112) or the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, "1" is set in the start-up process in progress flag, so that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Is started, of the various processes of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is terminated without any notice. After that, "1" is set in the setting updating flag on condition that "1" is not set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84. By setting "1" to the setting updating flag, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display of the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is performed by the notification display device 141.

After that, the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". If the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, the game stop flag is set to the main side from the time of the previous power failure. When the checksums do not match due to the change in the storage state of the RAM 84 (step S105: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area is not in the normal range. (Step S106: NO), this is a flag in which "1" is set in step S121 of the main process (FIG. 13). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Do not execute the process. As a result, when the above-mentioned information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. Will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the set value update process, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (step S117) is executed. Is possible.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area provided in the main RAM 84. The setting update area is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (step S117) is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6". After that, the update start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. As a result, the image indicating that the set value update process (step S117) is being executed, the image for making the operation content for changing the set value recognizable, and the set value update process (step S117) are completed. The display side MPU 103 is displayed and controlled so that the image for making the operation content for making the image recognizable is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the setting value update process, the value of the setting update area is added by 1 on condition that the reset button 142 is pressed. As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated one step higher. If the value of the setting update area after 1 addition is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area. As a result, if the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it returns to "setting 1".

In the set value update process, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key. When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area. As a result, the information of the set value as a result of being updated in the current set value update process (step S117) is set in the setting reference area, and the set value corresponding to the set information is the current pachinko machine. It becomes the set value of the machine 10. After that, the interrupt is disabled. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step S101 to step S126) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 13), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed. Interruption is prohibited.

After that, the RAM clear process is executed. In the RAM clear processing, the area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 84 (that is, the setting reference area), the information for calculating the combination ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main RAM 84. Except for the area where is stored, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting updating flag, the setting checking flag, and the setting updating area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S102 is executed.

Here, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is newly set including the information of the fixed ceiling count. Is not done. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

After that, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. As a result, an image indicating that the set value update process (step S117) in the symbol display device 41 is being executed, an image for making the operation content for changing the set value recognizable, and a set value update process (step S117). The display of the image for making the operation content for ending step S117) recognizable is finished.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 13), it is the case that the reset button 142 is determined to be pressed in step S108, and the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on by using the setting key. If it is determined (step S116: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S118). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to perform steps S207 to S220. Do not execute the process. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly when the power was cut off last time, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the time when the power was cut off last time. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

When "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step S118: NO), the RAM clear process is executed (step S119). In the RAM clear processing, the area in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 84 (that is, the setting reference area), the information for calculating the combination ratio in the ceiling counter 131 and the main RAM 84. Except for the area where is stored, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Here, even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the new setting of the ceiling count including the information of the fixed ceiling count is set. Not done. As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

After that, the return command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93 (step S120). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing (steps S101 to S126) at the start of supply of the operating power has been completed in the main MPU 82, and the supply of the operating power this time is started. It is specified that the RAM clear process (step S119) has been executed in the time process (steps S101 to S126).

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106 in the main process (FIG. 13), that is, when "1" is not set in the power failure flag, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If this is the case, "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S121). As described above, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S201 to S205 are executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206 to make a positive determination in step S207. -The process of step S220 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly when the power was cut off last time, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the time when the power was cut off last time. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S122). As described above, the set value update process (step S117) is executed, but even if it is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling including the information on the fixed number of ceilings is included. No new setting is made for the number of times. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 has a fixed number of ceilings of 500 times. Information is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123). When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S123: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. (Step S124). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 65 "Please change the setting." Is output. In addition, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is sent when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process (step S117) is executed. It will be started again.

After that, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S125). In the external output processing at the time of abnormality, the processing for externally outputting the abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that the abnormal signal is displayed. The signal output may be stopped.

When the reset button 142 is pressed (step S123: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S116). When the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S116 and step S123: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S117). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, it is denied in any of steps S104 to S106 because an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. Even when the determination is made, the set value update process (step S117) is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the set value. Further, in the set value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" as described above. As a result, when the set value update process (step S117) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 after the update of the set value is completed.

On the other hand, when the reset button 142 is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned ON (step S123: YES, step S116: NO), "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84. It is determined whether or not it is (step S118). In the process of step S118 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121, as a matter of course, "1" is set to the game stop flag, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S118. In this case, the abnormality command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S124, and the abnormality signal is output to the outside in step S125.

That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S104 to S106, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. Even if the power supply is started, the RAM clear process (step S119) is not executed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the RAM clear process (RAM clear process) Step S119) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag can be prevented from being resolved. It will be possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (step S117) is executed and the setting is performed regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. In the value update process (step S117), the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (step S117) in order to eliminate the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, it is possible to require not only the process for initializing a part of the area of the main RAM 84 but also the resetting of the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where "1" is set in the game stop flag, the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation". Alternatively, when the "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S109 or step S118, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step S124 and an external external state at the time of abnormality in step S125. Execute output processing. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the main side is not executed unless the set value update process (step S117) is executed regardless of the process results of steps S104 to S106 in the subsequent main process. Every time the supply of the operating power to the MPU 82 is started, the abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and the external output at the time of the abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S112 is executed, the process of step S115 is executed, the process of step S117 is executed, the process of step S120 is executed, or the process of step S125 is executed, the main RAM 84 stands. Clear the raising process flag to "0" (step S126). When the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is activated by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S206, so that not only the processing of steps S201 to S205 but also step S207 The process of step S220 is executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step S126, the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S127 to S130. That is, although the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of the timer interrupt processing, and the residual processing of steps S127 to S130 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S127 to S130 is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S127, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). In the following step S128, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S129. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S130, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. When the process of step S130 is executed, the process returns to step S127, and the processes of steps S127 to S130 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the power failure monitoring process is executed (step S201). In the power failure monitoring process, whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85 is monitored, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure processing is executed. .. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S128 of the main process (FIG. 13), and in step S204, the variable counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S129 of the main process (FIG. 13). do.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 84 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S206). When "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag (step S206: YES), the timer interrupt processing ends without executing the processing of steps S207 to S220. As a result, in a situation where "1" is set in the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executes power failure monitoring, random number update, and fraud monitoring while performing the step. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game in steps S207 to S220 from being executed.

When "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S206: NO), the process for advancing the game in steps S207 to S220 is executed. Specifically, first, the port output process is executed (step S207). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are reached. Executes the process of specifying whether or not the ball has entered.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

After that, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208 (step). S212).

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213), and the display control of the normal figure display unit 38a and the execution control of the normal electric open state are performed. (Step S214). These special figure special electric control processing and general figure general electric control processing will be described in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased / decreased number of the first reserved information on the first special figure reserved display unit 37c is set, and the second reserved information is set. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number in the second special figure hold display unit 37d and the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the normal figure side in the normal figure hold display unit 38b are set. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218).

After that, the setting monitoring process is executed (step S219). In the setting monitoring process, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is set as a target for use by determining whether or not it is any of "1" to "6". It is determined whether or not the set value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the set value set as the target of use is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 Set to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the set value to be used is newly set in the set value update process (step S117). After that, the management process is executed (step S220). In the management process, the process for storing the game history for calculating the combination ratio, the process for calculating the combination ratio using the stored game history, and the calculated combination display for notification. A process for displaying on the device 141 is executed.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
Next, the general-purpose electric power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When a prize has been awarded to the through gate 35 (step S301: YES), the maximum number of reserved information on the normal drawing side stored in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the normal drawing holding area 84c is the maximum number. On condition that the number is less than four (step S302: NO), the storage process in the normal figure holding area 84c is executed (step S303). In the storage process, the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 is used as the hold information on the Fuzu side, and the hold information on the Fuzu side in the first area 114a to the fourth area 114d of the Fuzu hold area 84c is not stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order. In addition, when the holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired, the data for updating the display contents of the holding information on the normal drawing side in accordance with the increase in the number of holding information on the normal drawing side this time. Make settings.

When a negative determination is made in step S301, an affirmative determination is made in step S302, or the process of step S303 is executed, the normal drawing address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S304). In the Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the Fuzu Fuden control process on the main MPU 82.

The Fuzu Fuden counter can take values of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" corresponds to each process (step S307 to step S310). Specifically, when the value of the normal map normal electric counter is "0", the normal figure change start process (step S307), which is a process for starting the change display times in the normal figure display unit 38a, is an execution target. When the value of the normal map fluctuation counter is "1", the normal map fluctuation processing (step S308), which is a process for advancing the fluctuation display times in the normal map display unit 38a, is executed. When the value of the figure Fuden counter is "2", the Fuzu finalizing process (step S309), which is a process for ending the fluctuation display times in the Fuzu display unit 38a, is executed, and the Fuzu Fuden is executed. When the value of the counter is "3", the normal power control process (step S310), which is a process for controlling the normal power open state of the normal power accessory 34a in the second operating port 34, is the execution target.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S304), the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S305). , Jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S306). Hereinafter, each process of steps S307 to S310 will be described individually.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation start process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal map fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the hold information on the normal map side is stored in the normal map hold area 84c (step S401: YES) (step S402). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 114a of the normal map holding area 84c is moved to the execution area 115 for the normal map. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the normal figure holding area 84c is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 114a to 114d to the lower area side, specifically, the second area 114b → the first area 114a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 114c → second area 114b, fourth area 114d → third area 114c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 114d is cleared to "0". Further, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the normal map reservation display unit 38b are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of reserved information on the normal map side this time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S403), and if it is not the open / close execution mode, whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 84. (Step S404). The first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and is the first when the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. 1 "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and "0" is cleared when the first high frequency support mode ends.

In the open / close execution mode (step S403: YES), the low probability table on the normal side is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). Further, when it is not the open / close execution mode but "1" is not set in the first high frequency flag (step S404: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, it is mainly. The low-probability table on the normal drawing side is read from the side ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S405). On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S404: YES), that is, when the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, the main side ROM 83 to the main side The high-probability table on the normal drawing side is read into the RAM 84 (step S406). The value of the Fuden random number counter C4, which is the winning of the electric service opening, is set in each of the low-probability table on the Fuzu side and the high-probability table on the Fuzu side. In this case, the high-probability table on the normal map side has a larger number of values of the normal electric random number counter C4 that is elected to open the electric service than the low-probability table on the normal map side. As a result, the probability of winning the electric service opening is higher when the high probability table on the normal map side is referred to than when the low probability table on the normal map side is referred to. That is, the high probability mode on the normal map side and the low probability mode on the normal map side are set so that the probability of winning the electric service opening is relatively high or low as the determination mode of the normal map success / failure determination process (step S407) described later. Existing. The low-probability table on the normal map side is set so that the probability of winning the electric service is halved, and the high-probability table on the normal map side is set so that the probability of winning the electric service is 4/5. However, if the high probability mode on the normal map side has a higher probability of winning the electric service open than the low probability mode on the normal map side, the probability of winning the electric service open is arbitrary. ..

When the process of step S405 or the process of step S406 is executed, the normal figure hit / miss determination process is executed (step S407). Numerical information about the Fuden random number counter C4 in the hold information on the Fuzu side, which is the execution target of the Fuzu hit / fail judgment process this time, for the table read in step S405 or Step S406 in the normal figure hit / fail judgment process. To match.

When the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process is the electric service open winning (step S408: YES), the stop result setting process for the normal figure winning result is executed (step S409). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the result of winning the normal map to be finally stopped and displayed in the current variation display time in the normal map display unit 38a is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. It should be noted that one type of stop mode may be set as the stop mode of the picture for the normal drawing winning result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the picture may be set.

When the result of the normal figure hit / fail determination process is not the electric service open winning (step S408: NO), the stop result setting process for the normal figure wrong result is executed (step S410). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the result of out-of-drawing, which is finally stopped and displayed on the normal drawing display unit 38a in the current display continuation time, is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the winning result of the general map.

When the process of step S409 or the process of step S410 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S411), and if it is not the open / close execution mode, the first height provided in the main RAM 84 is provided. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S412). As already explained, the first high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, and the transition to the first high-frequency support mode occurs. When this is done, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag, and "0" is cleared when the first high frequency support mode ends. The second high-frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, and is the second flag when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs. 2 "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and "0" is cleared when the second high frequency support mode ends.

In the case of the open / close execution mode (step S411: YES), the information corresponding to the long-term 10 seconds as the continuation period of the fluctuation display times in the normal figure display unit 38a this time is provided in the normal figure side provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter (step S413). Further, when "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag (step S412: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the normal map display unit this time. Information corresponding to a long period of 10 seconds as the continuation period of the fluctuation display times in 38a is set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side provided in the main RAM 84 (step S413). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when the open / close execution mode or the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display times on the normal map display unit 38a are performed over a long period of time, which is a relatively long duration.

When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S412: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support. In the mode, the information corresponding to 1 second, which is a short period as the continuation period of the fluctuation display times in the normal map display unit 38a this time, is set in the normal map side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S414). As a result, when the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the variable display times on the normal map display unit 38a are performed over a short period of time, which is a relatively short duration.

After that, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is started (step S415). A variable display table for normal drawings is stored in advance in the main ROM 83 as a table to be referred to by the main MPU 82 when the normal drawing display unit 38a displays the variable display of the pattern. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the normal map display unit 38a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, the variable display of the pattern according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the normal map shows the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one lap is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, the variable display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed. After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S416). As a result, the value of the normal map normal electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the normal map fluctuation processing (step S308).

<Processing during fluctuation of normal map>
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in step S308 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal map fluctuation processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side, which measures the duration of the fluctuation display times this time, is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the confirmation display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process (step S407) is the electric service open winning. Further, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is set to the stop mode corresponding to the result of the current normal map pass / fail determination process. This stop mode corresponds to the information read out to the main RAM 84 in step S409 or step S410 of the normal figure variation start process (FIG. 16). Then, by adding 1 to the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter, the value of the counter is updated to the one corresponding to the processing during the Fuzu confirmation.

<Processing during confirmation of normal map>
Next, the process during the determination of the normal figure in step S309 in the normal figure general control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter on the normal map side, which measures the duration of the current fluctuation display times, is "0", the final display period of the current fluctuation display times (specifically, It is determined whether or not 0.4 seconds) has elapsed (step S501). When the definite display period has elapsed (step S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination process in the current variable display times is the electric service open winning (step S502). If the electric service opening is not won (step S502: NO), after clearing the value of the normal drawing counter to "0" (step S503), the processing during confirmation of the normal drawing is terminated. As a result, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter corresponds to the Fuzu fluctuation start processing.

When the electric service opening is won (step S502: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the open / close execution mode (step S504), and when it is not the open / close execution mode, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 and It is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the second high frequency flags (step S505). When the open / close execution mode is set (step S504: YES), the processes of steps S506 to S508 are executed. Further, when "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag (step S505: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, although it is not the open / close execution mode. The processes of steps S506 to S508 are executed.

In steps S506 to S508, first, "1" is set in the normal power release counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S506). Further, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S507). Further, information corresponding to 0.7 seconds, which is the duration of the short opening on the normal power side, is set in the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 84 (step S508). The normal power release counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the normal power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the normal power open state by the main MPU 82. The Fuden winning counter specifies whether or not the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit of 10 on the Fuden side in the current Fuden open state by the main MPU 82. It is a counter for.

By executing the processes of steps S506 to S508, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power generated in the low frequency support mode becomes the low expectation mode. That is, in the low expectation mode, the short opening of the utility object 34a occurs once. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the short opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, the game ball basically enters the second operating port 34. Even if it does not occur, the number of balls entered is about one.

When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag instead of the open / close execution mode (step S505: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support. In the mode, "3" is set in the timer opening counter of the main RAM 84 (step S509), "10" is set in the timer prize counter of the main RAM 84 (step S510), and the timer of the main RAM 84 is set. Information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of the long opening on the normal power side, is set in the timer counter on the drawing side (step S511). By executing the processes of steps S509 to S511, the execution mode in the open state of the normal power generated in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode becomes the high expectation mode. That is, in the high expectation mode in the open state of the normal electric power, the long open of the general electric power accessory 34a occurs three times. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the long opening of the general electric accessory 34a occurs once, about three game balls will enter the second operating port 34. obtain. Then, in the high expectation mode, the long opening occurs three times with the interval period on the normal power side in which the second operating port 34 is closed. Therefore, when the high expectation mode is open, about nine game balls can enter. In addition, since the normal power open state ends when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 reaches 10, which is the upper limit number on the normal power side, the normal power open state in the high expectation mode is set. If this occurs, an event may occur in which the open state of the normal power is terminated by the upper limit number of game balls on the normal power side entering the second operating port 34.

When the process of step S507 or the process of step S510 is executed, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for electric power is started to open the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the normal power counter, the value of the counter is updated to be compatible with the normal power control process.

<Public control processing>
Next, the normal power control process in step S310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the general electric control process, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electric winning counter of the main RAM 84. Then, when the value of the normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the normal power is stopped. By doing so, the second operating port 34 is closed. Then, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307).

If the second operating port 34 has not been won or the value of the general electric winning counter is not "0", whether or not the value of the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 84 is "0" is determined. judge. When the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side is "0", the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for normal electric power is stopped to close the second operating port 34. Then, the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power release counter after 1 subtraction is "0". When the value of the normal power opening counter after subtraction 1 is 1 or more, the second operating port 34 is maintained in the closed state for the interval period (specifically, 1 second) on the normal power side, and then the normal power is used. By outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 34b again, the second actuating port 34 is opened. Further, information corresponding to 2 seconds, which is the duration of long opening on the normal power side, is set in the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 84. As a result, the second actuating port 34 is opened again, and the duration of the open state is set to 2 seconds, which is the continuation period of the long opening on the normal electric side. If the value of the normal power release counter after subtraction is "0", the value of the normal power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307).

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S601). In the hold information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 (step S701: YES), and the first special figure hold area 111 is stored in the first special figure hold area 111. When the number of 1 reserved information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S702: YES), the process for acquiring the first reserved information is executed.

In the process for acquiring the first reserved information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided to grasp the number of unprocessed first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 in the main MPU 82. The value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S703). The display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure holding display unit 37c corresponds to the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 111. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S703. Store in the area (step S704). After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93 (step S705). As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the first hold information.

When a negative determination is made in step S701, a negative determination is made in step S702, or the process of step S705 is executed, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 (step S706: YES). Further, on the condition that the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit stored number (step S707: YES), the process for acquiring the second reserved information is executed. do.

In the process for acquiring the second reserved information, first, the main RAM 84 is provided to grasp the number of unprocessed second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 in the main MPU 82. The value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S708). The display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure holding display unit 37d corresponds to the number of the second holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 112. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S708. Store in the area (step S709). After that, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93 (step S710). As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second hold information.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S601, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is read out (step S602). , Read the special figure special electric address table provided in the main ROM 83 (step S603). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S604), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S605).

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to grasp which of the processes of steps S606 to S612 in the special figure special electric control process should be executed, and is stored in the special figure special electric address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing each process of step S606 to step S612 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process in step S606, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the process during special figure change in step S607. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the process jumps to the process of confirming the special figure in step S608, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric of step S609 It jumps to the start process, jumps to the process during opening of the special electric power in step S610 when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4", and when the value of the special electric special electric counter is "5", it jumps to the process of step S611. It jumps to the special electric closing process, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "6", it jumps to the special electric end processing of step S612. Hereinafter, each process of steps S606 to S612 will be described individually.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the special figure change start process is not executed in the situation where the game round is already executed and the open / close execution mode is executed.

In the special figure change start process, when the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 (step S801: YES, step). S802: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S803). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, specifically, the second area 111b → the first area 111a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 111c → second area 111b, fourth area 111d → third area 111c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 111d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the first special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a first reduction command indicating that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 111 has been reduced by one is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the first hold information.

On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112 (step S801 and step S802: YES), the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is the first. 1 Even if it is stored in the special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S804). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is moved to the execution area 113 for the special figure. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, specifically, the second area 112b → the first area 112a, the third. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 112c → second area 112b, fourth area 112d → third area 112c, and so on. Then, the fourth area 112d is cleared to "0". After that, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second reduction command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure hold area 112 has been reduced by one is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the decrease of the second hold information.

When the second hold information is stored as described above, even if the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is stored, the second hold information is the execution area for the special figure. It becomes a shift target to 113. As a result, the second hold information is preferentially digested as the start target of the game round rather than the first hold information.

When the process of step S803 or the process of step S804 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S805). In the win / fail determination process, if the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first win / fail table 121 (see FIG. 9A) at the time of low probability is displayed from the main ROM 83. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the second winning / failing table 122 (see FIG. 9B) at the time of low probability is read to the main side RAM 84. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning / failing table 123 at the time of high probability regardless of whether the game round is started from the first hold information or the second hold information (FIG. 9 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the hit / fail tables 121 to 123, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is obtained. It is determined whether or not the data group corresponding to the set value of the current use target in the read-out hit / fail tables 121 to 123 matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. If the numerical information does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the information for the hit / fail determination corresponds to the set value of the current use target in the read hit / miss tables 121 to 123. In, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the time saving result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S806: YES), the distribution determination process for the jackpot is executed (step S807). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10A) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. If the target to be read and the start of the game round is the second hold information, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the jackpot distribution tables 125 and 126, the distribution determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the jackpot distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 125 and 126, it is specified which kind of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the jackpot distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the jackpot distribution determination process (step S808). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S809). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of this game, is stored in advance in the main ROM 83 for the stop for the jackpot result. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S809, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S808 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. The method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a jackpot result but a time saving result (step S806: NO, step S810: YES), the time saving distribution determination process is executed (step S811). In the time-saving distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure (see FIG. 10C) is transferred from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. If the target to be read and the start of the game round is the second hold information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure (see FIG. 10D) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the time-saving distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the time saving distribution determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in the time saving distribution determination process (step S812). After that, the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S813). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the time saving result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the time saving result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the time saving result. In step S813, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in step S812 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each time reduction result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the time reduction results. The method of selecting the stop result for the time saving result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type random number counter C2. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in step S813 is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S810: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S814). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result, and further, the first special feature. It is one type common to the figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

When the process of step S809, the process of step S813, or the process of step S814 is executed, the process of specifying the variable display period is executed (step S815). FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying a variable display period.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S901). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and when the transition to the high-probability mode occurs, "1" is set in the high-probability flag. It is set and the high probability flag is cleared to "0" when the high probability mode ends. When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S901: YES), that is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the table group for high probability is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step). S902). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high probability, if a big hit result is generated in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the table corresponding to the reach in the table group for high probability, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, but any of the variable display periods of the reach display mode is longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur.

If the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second cards are in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode. Further, even when a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in the above situation, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side is read out.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. The first reserved information is the execution target of the game round when the game round is started in the situation where the information is stored, or when the jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and the off-reach display does not occur. If it is, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game times this time. This makes it possible to secure the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the high probability mode. Further, even when a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in the above situation, or if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In the high probability mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S805), it is invalidated. In this case, if the variation display period of the game times is selected with reference to the table group for high probability, the time saving result is treated in the same way as the out-of-time result, so that the time saving result that is invalidated is generated. It is possible to make it inconspicuous.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S901: NO), "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. Whether or not it is determined (step S903). When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903: YES), that is, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the first. 2 In the high frequency support mode, the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S904). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high frequency support, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. In addition, if the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type at that time. By collating the numerical information of the counter CS with the reach-compatible table in the table group for high frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In this case, the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode is different from the case where the table group for high probability is referred to, and specifically, the frequency is higher when the table group for high probability is referred to. It is easier to select a longer variable display period than when the supporting tables are referenced. However, this relationship may be reversed.

If the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second cards are in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in a situation where the hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even when a time saving result occurs in the current game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game is started in the above situation, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side is read out.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result does not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round and one second hold in the second special figure hold area 112. The first hold information is the execution target of the game round when the game round is started in the situation where the information is stored, or when the jackpot result does not occur in the current game round and the off-reach display does not occur. If it is, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game times this time. This makes it possible to secure the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even when a time saving result occurs in this game round, the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, and one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If the game round is started in the above situation, or if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round, the information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

In the situation where the low probability mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S805), the last game of the high frequency support mode. Unless it is a time, it will be invalidated. In this case, if the variable display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for high frequency support, the time saving result is treated in the same way as the out-of-time result, so that the time saving result is invalidated. Can be made inconspicuous. Further, when the time saving result is selected in the last game round of the high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is generated, but even in this case, the said As for the variable display period of the game times, the same variable display period as in the case of the deviation result in which the reach display does not occur is selected. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize.

When "1" is not set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag (step S903; NO), that is, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. If so, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S905). The reach high frequency state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the reach high frequency state is a low probability mode and can occur in the low frequency support mode. The high-reach state is a gaming state in which the off-reach display occurs more frequently than in the situation where the low-probability mode is in the low-frequency support mode and the reach is not in high-frequency state.

When "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag (step S905: YES), that is, when the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set and the reach high frequency state is set, the table group for the high reach frequency is displayed. Read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S906). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the table group for high reach frequency, the variable display period is selected in step S908 with reference to the table group for low frequency support described later. The numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order than the situation in which the selection process is executed corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display. The probability of being identified as being is high.

When a big hit result occurs in this game round, or when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed is missed and the reach display occurs. If an out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the reach display mode is by collating the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time with the reach-compatible table in the table group for high reach frequency. Read the information of the fluctuation display period of. In this case, as the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode, a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the table group for low frequency support described later is referred to. Further, in this case, the selection mode of the variation display period of the reach display mode is the same as the case where the table group for high probability is referred to, but the fluctuation is longer than the case where the table group for high probability is referred to. The display period may be easily selected, or a shorter variable display period may be more easily selected than when the table group for high probability is referred to, and the table group for high frequency support may be referred to. The configuration may be the same, or a configuration in which a shorter variable display period can be easily selected than when a table group for high frequency support is referred to may be used.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for high reach frequency, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time reduction result are set, and it corresponds to the fact that reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special figure side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time reduction result. The period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and three or more in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first hold information of the above is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or The second is when the game is started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, or when the big hit result and the time saving result are not generated in this game time and the off-reach display is not generated. When the hold information is the target of the game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for high reach frequency, so that the complete deviation result is obtained. Read the information of the corresponding variation display period. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result are set, and any variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is longer than the shortest period on the special map side, and the variable display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. The period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of the period and reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

When "1" is not set in the reach high frequency state flag (step S905: NO), that is, when the low probability mode is in the low frequency support mode and the reach high frequency state is not set, the table for low frequency support is used. The group is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S907). In the situation where the variable display period selection process is executed in step S908 with reference to the low frequency support table group, the variable display is performed in step S908 with reference to the reach high frequency table group as described above. Numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of order than the situation where the period selection process is executed is out of order and the reach display occurs. The probability of being identified as corresponding is low.

When a big hit result occurs in this game round, or when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is a miss result and the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed is missed and the reach display occurs. If an out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the reach display mode is by collating the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time with the reach-compatible table in the table group for low-frequency support. Read the information of the fluctuation display period of. In this case, as for the selection mode of the variable display period of the reach display mode, as described above, it is easier to select a shorter variable display period than when the table group for high reach frequency is referred to.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for low frequency support, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. The mode of selecting the information of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result is the same as the case where the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred. In other words, multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result are set, and the reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special map side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result. The period is shorter than the corresponding variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the out-of-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and three or more in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game is started in a situation where the first hold information of the above is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variation display period of the current game. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or The second is when the game is started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, or when the big hit result and the time saving result are not generated in this game time and the off-reach display is not generated. When the pending information is the target of the game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for low frequency support, so that the complete deviation result is obtained. Read the information of the corresponding variation display period. The mode of selecting the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result correspondence is the same as the case where the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for high reach frequency is referred. In other words, multiple types of information on the variation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result are set, and the variation display period corresponding to any of the complete deviation results is longer than the shortest period on the special map side, and the variation corresponding to the time saving result is changed. The period is shorter than the display period and the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

When the process of step S902, the process of step S904, the process of step S906, or the process of step S907 is executed, the variable display period selection process is executed with reference to the table group read in any of these processes (step). S908). The content of the selection process is as described above. Then, the information of the fluctuation display period selected in step S908 is set in the special figure side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S909). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

Returning to the explanation of the special figure change start process (FIG. 20), after executing the change display period specifying process in step S815, the change command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are executed. It is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93 (step S816). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S815, and the game times to be started are included in either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The variable command does not include information on whether to execute reach display, but the variable display period when reach display occurs is longer than the variable display period when reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound / light side MPU 93 can specify the presence / absence of reach display from the information of the variable display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Contains information indicating whether or not. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, which type of time saving result is supported. Contains information indicating whether or not.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S817). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S818). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure change processing (step S607).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command, the sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for determining the execution content of the game rounding effect corresponding to those commands. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission effect of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output effect of the speaker unit 65 are executed over the variable display period of the game times. Further, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the execution content of the game rounding effect determined this time to the display side MPU 103. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 103 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the game times this time.

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S607 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game times has not elapsed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game times. When it is the update timing of the contents, the data for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result, and the symbol display device. It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a predetermined multiple update timings occur, the display contents of the pattern make one round and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the fluctuation display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. After that, at the start of the game round, the pattern of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 in any of step S809, step S813 and step S814 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) is stopped. Read information. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure finalizing process (step S608).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the command, the display-side MPU 103 confirms and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step S608 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1001: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S1002: YES). ), Information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side (step S1003), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound light side (step S1004). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S1005). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of starting the open / close execution mode, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or RAM clear processing (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times of ceiling, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1006). The trigger for the value of the variable selection state counter 132 to be subtracted by 1 is the same as the trigger for the value of the ceiling counter 131 to be subtracted by 1. That is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode and the game round is exhausted once, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 at the end of the game round. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, the main RAM 84 "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag of. When "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the reach high frequency is specified in the variable display period specification process (FIG. 21) as described above. The variable display period of the game times is selected with reference to the table group for.

In other words, if the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, the reach high frequency table group is referred to in the low frequency support mode. It becomes a high frequency state. And, in the high reach state, as already explained, there is a high probability that the reach display is selected when the result is out of order in the situation where the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not the high frequency state. At the same time, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1007). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S609).

If the game result of this game is not a big hit result (step S1002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) is executed in step S1008, and the variable selection state counter 132 of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed in step S1009. The subtraction process is executed, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S1010, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in step S1011, and the subtraction of the high probability state counter 133 (see FIG. 6) is executed in step S1012. Execute the process. The contents of the processes of steps S1008 to S1012 will be described in detail later. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S609 of the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

The opening / closing count setting process is executed on condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a 5R low accuracy result or a 5R high accuracy result, "5" is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 84, and if the current game result is a 10R high accuracy result, the main result is Set "10" in the round counter of the side RAM 84. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 82. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit pieces by the main MPU 82. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S610).

<Processing while the special electric train is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special electric power executed in step S610 of the special electric power control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power is transmitted. By stopping the output, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main RAM 84 By subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter and stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power, the special electric power winning device 32 is closed. When the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side. , The value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S611). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the information of the ending period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side, and the ending command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound light side. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric power end processing (step S612). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process executed in step S611 of the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 18) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the information on the open continuation period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. .. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S610).

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process executed in step S612 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 5R high probability result or the 10R. If the result is highly accurate (step S1102: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S1103). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode as described above. When "1" is set in the high probability flag, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

After that, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1104). The first high frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode by the main MPU 82 as already explained, and the second high frequency flag is the support mode as already explained. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not is the second high frequency support mode. When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag, the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "100" which is the high probability continuation number is set in the high probability state counter 133 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1105). The high-probability state counter 133 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-probability mode by the main MPU 82. In this pachinko machine 10, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are set when the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability result or the 10R high-probability result ends. If the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result occurring in the mode is 100, which is the high probability continuation number, the low probability mode and the low probability mode even if the jackpot result does not occur Enter low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R low probability result (step S1102: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1106). When the high probability flag is cleared to "0", the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. After that, "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1107). When "1" is set in the first high frequency flag and "0" is cleared in the second high frequency flag, the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "100" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1108). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) in the low probability mode by the main MPU 82. In the pachinko machine 10, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are set. In the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, when the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is the first time reduction continuation number, the jackpot result has not occurred. However, it becomes a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

When the process of step S1105 or the process of step S1108 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S1019). In the transmission process, the state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S1102 to S1108 is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. The sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute the effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

<Subtraction process of high probability state counter 133>
Next, the subtraction process of the high-probability state counter 133 executed in step S1012 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

When "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1201: YES), that is, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. (Step S1202). When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1203: YES), the high-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the first high-frequency support mode. It means that 100 game times, which is a high probability continuation number, have been digested. In this case, the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1204), and the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, it becomes a normal gaming state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1206). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the high-probability state has ended is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the high probability mode in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. To start.

<Setting process for time saving results>
Next, the setting process for the time saving result executed in step S1010 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the game result of this game is a time saving result (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1302). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1302: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the process after step S1303. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. Time saving results are invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as described above, the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1302: NO). Step S1303, step S1304). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S1303 or step S1304: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S1305. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the hit / fail determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving is shortened. If the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode is executed at the timing when the setting process for the result (FIG. 25) is executed, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is set. Time saving results are invalidated without being done. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the low frequency support mode (step S1303 and step S1304: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1305). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high frequency support mode. If the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S1306: YES), the information of "100" which is the first time saving continuation number is displayed in the time saving state counter 134 (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 84. (Step S1307), and if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S1306: NO), the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S1308). ). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) by the main MPU 82. Is. In a situation where the time is shortened, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is 100, which is the first time reduction continuation number, or 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number, the jackpot is achieved. Low probability mode and low frequency support mode are set even if no result is generated.

When the process of step S1307 or the process of step S1308 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S1309). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of time reduction continuations set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

Even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process as described above, the time saving result setting process (FIG. 25) is executed at the end of the game round that resulted in the time saving result, depending on the situation. The second high-frequency support mode may or may not be set based on the time saving result. In this case, the stop result displayed as a stop on the special figure display units 37a and 37b in the game in which the time reduction result is selected in the hit / fail determination process is set to the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result. While it does not change depending on whether or not it is performed, the stop result displayed as a stop on the symbol display device 41 changes depending on whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the time saving result. .. Such contents will be described in detail below. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the stop result of the symbol display device 41.

As described above, as the game results that can be selected by the game round hit / fail determination process (step S805) and various distribution determination processes (step S807, step S811), 5R low accuracy result, 5R high accuracy result, 10R high accuracy result, There are first time reduction results, second time reduction results, and missed results. The stop result displayed as a definite display of the game times on the special figure display units 37a and 37b is "1" in the case of the 5R low accuracy result and "2" in the case of the 5R high accuracy result. It is "3" in the case of 10R high accuracy result, "4" in the case of the first time saving result, "5" in the case of the second time saving result, and "-" in the case of the wrong result. ". These stop results do not change in any game situation. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can uniquely grasp the game result of the game times by confirming the stop result of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

The stop result, which is stopped and displayed as the confirmation display of the game times on the symbol display device 41, does not change regardless of the game situation when it is a jackpot result or a missed result, whereas it is a time-saving result. In some cases, it changes depending on the game situation. Specifically, in the case of a 5R low probability result, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in any of the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion region 43. To. In the case of 5R high accuracy result, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the red color is stopped in the state suggestion region 43. Is displayed. In the case of the 10R high accuracy result, the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the red color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion region 43. In the case of a deviation result, each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”) and the second time reduction occurrence symbol. Combinations of outlier symbols other than the combination of (“3.4.1”) are stopped and displayed, and red is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43.

In the case of the first time saving result, the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode). In the case of the final game round of, the combination of the first time saving occurrence symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43. Is stopped and displayed in red. In the case of the second time saving result, the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, or the time saving state which is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode). In the case of the final game round of, the combination of the second time saving occurrence symbols (“3.4.1”) is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the state suggestion area 43. Is stopped and displayed in red. Although the details will be described later, in the final game round of the time saving state, the setting processing for the time saving result is performed after the subtraction processing (step S1008) of the time saving state counter 134 for ending the time saving state is executed (FIG. 25). Is executed, so that the time saving state has already ended and the normal gaming state is reached at the timing when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed.

FIG. 27 (a) shows the first special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device in the case where the first game time is obtained in the game time triggered by the first hold information, which is the final game time in the normal game state or the time reduction state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of 41. As shown in FIG. 27 (a1), the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”) is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, suggesting the state. The red color is stopped and displayed in the area 43. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (a2), the stop result "4" corresponding to the first time saving result is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a.

On the other hand, in the case of a high-probability mode and a high-probability state in which the first high-frequency support mode is used, or a game round other than the final game round in the time-saving state, the symbol sequence is used regardless of whether the time-saving result is the first time-saving result or the second time-saving result. In Z1 to Z3, the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5. The non-reach out-of-reach symbol combination is a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3"), and a combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols ("3.4.1"). ) And a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination. In the state suggestion area 43, blue is stopped and displayed in the case of the first time saving result, and green is stopped and displayed in the case of the second time saving result.

FIG. 27 (b) shows a second special figure display unit 37b in the case where the first game time is obtained in the game time triggered by the second hold information, which is a game time other than the final game time in the high probability state or the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result of the symbol display apparatus 41. As shown in FIG. 27 (b2), "4", which is a stop result corresponding to the first time reduction result, is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (b1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of the non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5, and the state suggestion region 43 is displayed. The blue color is stopped and displayed.

In the case of a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is combined with a non-reach off symbol. Is stopped and displayed. Then, the combination of the non-reach out-of-reach symbols is stopped and displayed even when the result of the hit / miss determination process is the out-of-reach result.

FIG. 27 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b and the symbol display device 41 when the result of the hit / fail determination process is missed in the game round triggered by the second hold information. Is. As shown in FIG. 27 (c2), "-", which is a stop result corresponding to the disengagement result, is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (c1), in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5, and the state suggestion region 43 is displayed. The red color is stopped and displayed.

The display area of the symbol display device 41 is wider than the display area of the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, and the symbol display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, whereas the special symbol display units 37a and 37b are arranged. Is arranged on the corner side of the game area PA, so that the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Further, while the symbol display device 41 executes a wide variety of effects such as reach display, the special symbol display units 37a and 37b perform variable display of the symbol in a certain mode as described above to correspond to the game result. Since only the stop result is displayed, the symbol display device 41 attracts more attention from the player than the special figure display units 37a and 37b from this point as well. In such a situation, if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the result deviates from each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. By stopping and displaying the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the case of, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the time saving result is invalidated even though it is selected. Become.

In the case of a time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the hit / fail determination process is performed on each effective line L1 to L5 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as described above. Even if the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed even if the result is an out-of-reach result is stopped and displayed, the stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is the out-of-reach result is displayed in the state suggestion area 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c), the state is as shown in FIG. 27 (b) when the first time saving result does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode. While the blue color is stopped and displayed in the suggestion area 43, the red color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 as shown in FIG. 27 (c) when the result is off. Further, in the case of the second time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the green color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas in the case of the off result, the state suggestion area 43 Red is stopped and displayed. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to visually recognize the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, the combination of the non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, by checking the state suggestion region 43, it is possible to grasp whether the result is a time saving result or an out-of-time result.

The symbol column Z1 to either is the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, or the second time result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode. Even if the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5 of Z3, the stop result different from the case of the first time saving result and the case of the second time saving result is displayed in the state suggestion region 43. Stop is displayed. That is, in the case of the first time saving result that does not trigger the setting of the second high frequency support mode, the green color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43, whereas the trigger for setting the second high frequency support mode is In the case of the second time saving result, the green color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to visually recognize the special symbol display units 37a and 37b, the combination of the non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In that case, by checking the state suggestion region 43, not only whether it is a time saving result or an outlier result, but also whether it is a time saving result or a second time saving result if it is a time saving result. It becomes possible to grasp.

The processing configuration that enables the display of the stop result in the symbol display device 41 as described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation pattern determination process executed by the sound / light side MPU 93. The variation pattern determination process is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 82.

If the type command received this time has information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result (step S1401: YES), the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result is executed. (Step S1402). In the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the current jackpot result is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The relationship between the type of jackpot result and the combination of stop symbols is as shown in FIG. Further, in the stop symbol determination process for the jackpot result, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the stop symbol combination corresponding to the type of the jackpot result this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1403).

When the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result (step S1404: YES), the current game state is the high probability state and the time saving state. When it is not in the state (step S1405 and step S1406: NO), or when the current gaming state is the final game round in the time saving state (step S1406 and step S1407: YES), the time saving suggestion is used. The stop symbol determination process of is executed (step S1408). The sound / light side MPU 93 can specify whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability state, or a time saving state by a state specification command received from the main side MPU 82, and further corresponds to the start of the time saving state. It is possible to specify whether or not the game is the final game in a time-saving state by the number of times the variable command is received after the state specification command is received.

In the stop symbol determination process for suggesting a time reduction, a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the type of the time reduction result is selected as the stop result to be stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, if it is the first time reduction result, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”) is selected, and if it is the second time reduction result, the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols (“3. 4.1 ”) is selected. Further, in the stop symbol determination process for suggesting a time reduction, the effective lines L1 to L5 for displaying the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the type of the time reduction result of this time are determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1409).

On the other hand, when the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result (step S1404: YES), the current game state is When it is in a high probability state (step S1405: YES), or when the current gaming state is in a time-saving state and is not the final game round in the time-saving state (step S1406: YES, step S1407: NO), it is for non-reach off. The stop symbol determination process of is executed (step S1410). In the stop symbol determination process for non-reach off, as the stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result and the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols ("1 and 2").・ 3 ”), the combination of the second time-saving symbols (“3.4 ・ 1”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, are stopped and displayed by lottery. decide.

After that, if the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the first time saving result (step S1411: YES), the symbol display device 41 Blue is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 (step S1412). Further, when the information indicating that the game times to be started this time corresponds to the second time saving result is set in the type command received this time (step S1411: NO), the symbol display device 41 Green is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 (step S1413).

When the type command received this time is set with information indicating that the game times to be started this time correspond to the missed result (step S1404: NO), the stop symbol determination process for the missed result is executed. (Step S1414). In the stop symbol determination process for the deviation result, when the information of the fluctuation display period indicating that the game times to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display is set in the fluctuation command received this time. As a stop result for displaying the stop display on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the effective lines L1 to L5 for determining the combination of the out-reach symbols by lottery and stopping and displaying the determined combination of the out-reach symbols are provided. It will be decided by lottery. In addition, in the stop symbol determination process for the deviation result, information on the variation display period indicating that the game times targeted for start this time does not correspond to the occurrence of reach display is set in the variation command received this time. If so, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbol ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3"), the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbol ("3 ・ 4 ・ 1") and the missed reach The stop result in which the combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed is determined by lottery. After that, red is selected as the stop result of the state suggestion region 43 of the symbol display device 41 (step S1415).

When the process of step S1403, the process of step S1409, the process of step S1412, the process of step S1413, or the process of step S1415 is executed, the variation pattern determination process is executed (step S1416). In the variation pattern determination process, first, the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice display and, if the advance notice display is executed, the advance notice lottery process for determining the type is executed. Then, as a result of the advance notice lottery process, a variation pattern corresponding to the stop result determined in steps S1401 to S1415 and the variation display period information included in the variation command received this time is selected, and the selected variation pattern is used. The corresponding variation pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. The sound / light side MPU 93 controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read variation pattern table, so that the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 execute the effect of the variation pattern corresponding to the current game times. ..

After that, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S1416 is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1417). The display-side MPU 1417 reads the display control table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command from the display-side ROM 104 to the display-side RAM 105. By controlling the symbol display device 41 according to the read display control table, the display side MPU 103 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute a display effect of a variation pattern corresponding to the current game times. In this case, in the game round, the stop result of displaying the stop display in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the stop result of displaying the stop display in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 are the variation pattern determination process (FIG. 28). The stop result is determined in steps S1401 to S1415 in the above.

<Subtraction process of ceiling counter 131>
Next, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S1011 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1501). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1501: YES), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1502. That is, in the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, and further, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as described above. As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1501: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As already explained, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started in a certain situation, step S122 when the information error of the main RAM 84 occurs when the supply of the operating power is started, and the open / close execution mode are started. Only in step S1005 in the case, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S1502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and the game times of the number of times of continuation of the time reduction are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time reduction state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S1502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S1503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction is 1 is "0". (Step S1504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S1504: YES), the main side is provided that "1" is not set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1505: NO). “1” is set in the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 (step S1506), and information of “100”, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction, is set in the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S1507). As a result, the time is shortened, which is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of game times executed without a big hit result reaches 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and is a normal game which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. It becomes a state.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1508). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of times of continuation of the first time reduction set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", if "1" is set in the second high frequency flag, the processes of steps S1506 to S1508 are not executed, so this time. The ceiling time reduction of this time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction of. That is, even if the digestion of the game times of the fixed number of ceilings is completed in the situation where the time is shortened, the ceiling time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. The first high-frequency support mode is set only within the range until 100 game times are exhausted after the open / close execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set when the open / close execution mode is started. Is set, so that the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in the situation of the first high frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 or when the process of step S1508 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1509). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

<Subtraction process of time saving state counter 134>
Next, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 executed in step S1008 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1601). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1601: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1602. In the high-probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the end trigger of the high-probability state is specified by using the high-probability state counter 133 as described above, the high-probability flag is set to "1". If is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1602: YES), that is, the time is shortened. In the case of a state, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1603), and when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1604: YES), the main Both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the side RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, in the case of the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode ends and becomes the low-frequency support mode, and in the case of the second high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support is supported. The mode ends and the low frequency support mode is set. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

After that, the transmission process of the status specification command is executed (step S1606). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as already described, the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed before the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25), and the time saving result is subtracted. The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 (FIG. 30) is executed before the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29). Further, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as already described, the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. The operation of setting the execution order of such processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the period during which the game times are executed, FIG. 31 (b) shows the period during which the time saving state is executed, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the subtraction of the time saving state counter 134 (step S1603). 31 (d) shows the timing at which the time saving state setting (step S1305 to step S1308) is executed triggered by the time saving result, and FIG. 31 (e) shows the subtraction of the ceiling counter 131 (step S1503). ) Is executed.

First, a case where the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the time saving result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” in the final game round in the time saving state will be described.

In the situation where the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game rotation is started as shown in FIG. 31 (a) at the timing of t1. Then, as the variable display period of the game times elapses, the stop result corresponding to the game result is obtained on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game times. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period elapses with these stop results confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game is not a big hit result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processing after step S1008, the subtraction processing (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is first executed. Since this time is the game times executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 31 (c) at the timing of t2, which is the timing during which the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is being executed. The value of is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that the timing of t2 As shown in FIG. 31B, the current time saving state ends and the normal gaming state, which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, is reached.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) in which the execution order of the processes is set to the later order than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. do. Since the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process this time, the time saving result of this time is displayed at the timing of t3, which is the timing during execution of the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25), as shown in FIG. 31 (d). The time saving state is set as an opportunity. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31B, the gaming state becomes the time saving state in which the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. Further, since the time saving result this time is the second time saving result, the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in which the execution order of the processes is set later than the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed. .. As shown in FIG. 31 (e), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 at the timing of t4, which is the timing during the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29), and the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is subtracted. The value becomes "0". That is, the ceiling time is shortened. However, as already explained, the result of the hit / fail determination process in this game round is the time saving result, and the time saving state is already set at the timing of t3 in this game round, triggered by the time saving result. Therefore, the ceiling time reduction that occurred this time is invalidated. After that, at the timing of t5, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 31 (a).

As described above, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is set in the order in which the execution order of the processes is later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. As a result, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time reduction result in the game times other than the final game time in the time reduction state, the second high frequency support mode is not set by the time reduction result. When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time reduction result in the final game round in the time reduction state, it is possible to set the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result. As a result, by preventing the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving state is prevented from continuing excessively, and the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state is triggered. By making the setting of the time saving state set to be effective, it is possible to give the player the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process as much as possible. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

As described above, in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result, the second high frequency support mode is not set with the time saving result as a trigger. However, in the final game round in the time-reduced state, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time-reduced result, the second high-frequency support mode is set with the time-reduced result as an opportunity. As shown, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time reduction result in the game rounds other than the final game round in the time saving state, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is placed on each effective line L1 to L5. When the combination is stopped and displayed and the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result in the final game round in the time saving state, the combination of the time saving occurrence symbols (the combination of the first time saving occurrence symbols or the combination of the time saving occurrence symbols is performed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. The second time reduction occurrence symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 can be set as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time reduction result triggers the setting of the time reduction state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process becomes the time-saving result in the game times other than the final game times in the time-saving state is stopped when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the result of the loss. It is a combination of displayed symbols. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time saving result, although the time saving result is obtained.

Although the time reduction result is obtained as described above, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 display a stop when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the special figure display units 37a and 37b stop and display the pattern corresponding to the time saving result. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

Although the time reduction result is obtained as described above, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 display a stop when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect. Even if the stop result is displayed, the stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

In the process of confirming the special figure (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is set in the order in which the process is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0" in the game times when the result of the determination process is the time reduction result, the time reduction result is obtained compared to the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high frequency support mode as an opportunity. The number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is equal to or greater than the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is prioritized over the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction, so that the result of the hit / fail determination process is obtained. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in the game times resulting in the time reduction, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the time reduction continuation number from becoming disadvantageous to the player. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

Next, a case will be described in which the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes a wrong result and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes “0” in the final game round in the time saving state.

In the situation where the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game round is started as shown in FIG. 31 (a) at the timing of t6. Then, as the variable display period of the game times elapses, the stop result corresponding to the game result is obtained on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game times. Along with the confirmation display, the stop result corresponding to the game result is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the final stop period elapses with these stop results confirmed and displayed, the processes after step S1002 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) are executed. In this case, since the game result of the game is not a big hit result, a negative determination is made in step S1002 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), and the processes after step S1008 are executed.

In the processing after step S1008, the subtraction processing (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is first executed. Since this time is the game times executed in the time saving state, the time saving state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 31 (c) at the timing of t7, which is the timing during which the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is being executed. The value of is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0", so that the timing of t7 As shown in FIG. 31B, the time saving state ends and the normal gaming state, which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, is reached. After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) in which the execution order of the processes is set to the later order than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. However, in this game round, the result of the hit / fail determination process is a wrong result, so the time saving state is not set in the setting process.

After that, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 whose execution order is set to be later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 is executed. do. As shown in FIG. 31 (e), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 at the timing of t8, which is the timing during the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29), and the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is subtracted. The value becomes "0". That is, the ceiling time is shortened. Then, by setting the time reduction state triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction, the gaming state is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 31B at the timing of the t8. It will be in a short time state. Further, since the ceiling time reduction is triggered, the information of "100" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134. After that, at the timing of t9, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 31 (a).

As described above, in the process during confirmation of the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is set in the order of execution of the process after the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134. As a result, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0" in the game times other than the final game time in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. If the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" in the final game round in the time saving state, the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time saving as a trigger. It becomes possible to. As a result, the ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round of the time reduction state while preventing the time reduction state from being newly set in the middle of the time reduction state so that the time reduction state does not continue excessively. By making the setting of the time reduction state triggered by the above, it becomes possible to give the player the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction as much as possible. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

<Subtraction process of variable selection state counter 132>
Next, the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 executed in step S1009 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1701). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1701: YES), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1702.

As already explained, if the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, the table group for high reach frequency is referred to in the low frequency support mode. Reach becomes a high frequency state. And, in the high reach state, as already explained, there is a high probability that the reach display is selected when the result is out of order in the situation where the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not the high frequency state. At the same time, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The variable selection state counter 132 is a counter for measuring the game times of the remaining period switching reference number of times. In this case, as described above, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted in the high probability state, and the ceiling time reduction does not occur in the high probability state. Therefore, when the high probability flag is set to "1", the process for subtracting the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702). When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1703. The process of setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open / close execution mode is started as described above, and after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, step S1006 The value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" unless the process of is executed. On the other hand, in the high reach high frequency state, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 in the situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”. Occurs when. In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" as described above (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is performed without executing the processes after step S1703. finish. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", a high reach high frequency state occurs, and when the high high reach reach state ends, the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Even if it does, the high reach condition does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach state from occurring excessively.

Further, as already explained, the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed number of times of the ceiling, so that before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time is shortened once, the jackpot result does not occur after that, even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, it does not occur. In this case, when the high-reach state ends as described above, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the high-reach state does not occur, so that the ceiling time can be shortened. It is possible to prevent a high-reach state from occurring in a situation where it does not occur.

When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more (step S1702: YES), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 (step S1703), and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 after the 1 subtraction is ". It is determined whether or not it is "0" (step S1704). When the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1704: YES), "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 (step S1705).

When "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" by subtracting 1 by the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131, and the reach high frequency in step S1509. It is canceled by executing the process of clearing the status flag "0". That is, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is canceled regardless of whether or not the time reduction state is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction when the ceiling time reduction occurs.

Here, the process of step S1705 is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side is prior to the process of step S905 for determining whether or not "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84. Since the process of step S903 for determining whether or not "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is executed, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game times, the selection mode of the variable display period in the time saving state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the reach high frequency state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting "1" in the reach high frequency state flag.

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag and "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag "0" occurs, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S1706). In the transmission process, a status specification command indicating that "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 are provided with an effect indicating that the reach high frequency state is started on condition that the time saving state is not obtained. Executes the process to be executed. Further, when the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the above state designation command in the time saving state, the reach high frequency state is started if the time saving state is completed before the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted. A process is executed so that the effect shown is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

Next, the relationship between the high reach frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 (a) shows a period in which the open / close execution mode is used, FIG. 33 (b) shows a period in which the high probability state (high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode) is set, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a time saving state. (Low probability mode, first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) is shown, FIG. 33 (d) shows the state of the variable selection state counter 132, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the reach. The period in which the frequency is high is shown, and FIG. 33 (f) shows the state of the ceiling counter 131.

First, a case where the reach high frequency state is reached at the timing when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 becomes “0” will be described.

When the game round that gives a 5R high accuracy result ends at the timing of t1, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, at the timing of t1, the variable selection state counter 132 is set with information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), and the ceiling is set as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the counter 131.

After that, when the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at the timing of t2, the high-probability mode and the first high-probability support mode, which are the high-probability mode, are set as shown in FIG. 33 (b). .. Although the game times are repeatedly executed in the high probability state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) even if the game times are repeatedly executed in the high probability state. As shown in 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is not subtracted.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the high probability continuation number in the high probability state is completed at the timing of t3, the high probability state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (b), and the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are completed. It becomes a normal game state. Each time the game times are digested by entering the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f), and the variable selection state counter 132 is shown in FIG. 33 (d). The value of is subtracted.

After that, the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t4, so that the time saving state is started as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game round is digested. Will be done.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t5, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is changed as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game times are digested. It is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (d). At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the reach high frequency state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the high reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of the normal gaming state and the result is different from the situation where the reach high frequency state is not, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in the normal gaming state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of t7, which is a high reach frequency state. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Further, at the timing of t7, the high reach frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the short time state, it is easy to select a short period as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times is high.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t8, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 at the timing of t8. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the variable selection state counter 132 at the timing of the t8.

Next, a case where the setting of the reach high frequency state is delayed due to the time saving state at the timing when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0” will be described.

When the game round that gives a 5R low probability result ends at the timing of t9, the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, at the timing of t9, information of 450 times, which is the period switching reference number, is set in the variable selection state counter 132 as shown in FIG. 33 (d), and the ceiling is shown as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the counter 131.

After that, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (a) at the timing of t10, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game round is digested. Will be done.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t11, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the normal game state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is changed as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game times are digested. It is subtracted.

After that, the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process at the timing of t12, so that the time saving state is started as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (f) and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 33 (d) each time the game round is digested. Will be done.

After that, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t13, which is the time saving state. At the timing of t13, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Therefore, at the timing of t13, the reach high frequency state does not occur as shown in FIG. 33 (e). However, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84, and "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. In this case, the time saving state is continued, and in the time saving state, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted each time the game round is digested, as shown in FIG. 33 (f).

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t14, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (c). However, since "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84, the reach high frequency state is set at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the high reach state, as already explained, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of the normal gaming state and the result is different from the situation where the reach high frequency state is not, and when the reach display is selected. The variable display period in is also likely to be longer than in the normal gaming state and not in the reach high frequency state.

After that, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 33 (f) at the timing of t15, which is a high reach frequency state. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the time is not shortened. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the time is shortened as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Further, at the timing of t15, the high reach frequency state ends as shown in FIG. 33 (e). In the short time state, it is easy to select a short period as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times is high.

After that, when the digestion of the game times of the number of times of continuous time reduction is completed at the timing of t16, the time reduction state ends and the normal game state is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the ceiling counter 131 at the timing of t16. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0" without resetting the value to the variable selection state counter 132 at the timing of the t16.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even if a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (excluding the final game round), the time reduction state is not set triggered by these time reduction results or ceiling time reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the time saving state from continuing excessively.

Since the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is set in the execution order of the processing after the subtraction processing (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22). Even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in a game other than the final game time in the time-saving state, the second high-frequency support mode is not set with the time-saving result as a trigger, and the time-saving state is set. When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time reduction result in the final game round, it is possible to set the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result. As a result, by preventing the time saving state from being newly set in the middle of the time saving state, the time saving state is prevented from continuing excessively, and the time saving result in the final game round of the time saving state is triggered. By making the setting of the time saving state set to be effective, it is possible to give the player the benefit of selecting the time saving result in the hit / fail determination process as much as possible. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the game times other than the final game times in the time saving state, even if the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result, the time saving state is made while preventing the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result. In the final game round, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time saving result, the second high frequency support mode is set with the time saving result as a trigger, and the symbol of the symbol display device 41 is set. In rows Z1 to Z3, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in a game round other than the final game round in the time-saving state, the combination of non-reach off symbols is stopped and displayed on each effective line L1 to L5, and the time-saving state is reached. If the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result in the final game round of, the combination of the time saving occurrence symbols on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (the combination of the first time saving occurrence symbols or the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols). Is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 can be set as a stop result corresponding to whether or not the time reduction result triggers the setting of the time reduction state.

In particular, the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process becomes the time-saving result in the game rounds other than the final game round in the time-saving state is stopped when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is the missed result. It is a combination of displayed symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the second high-frequency support mode is not set in the wake of the time-saving result, although the time-saving result is obtained.

Although the time reduction result is obtained, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the stop result is stopped and displayed when the result of the pass / fail judgment process is incorrect in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is displayed, the special figure display units 37a and 37b stop and display the pattern corresponding to the time saving result. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

Although the time reduction result is obtained, when the second high frequency support mode is not set triggered by the time reduction result, the stop result is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is incorrect in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is displayed, in the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41, a stop result different from the case where the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm whether or not the time saving result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set.

If the second high frequency support mode is not set with the time saving result as a trigger, although the time saving result is obtained, the symbol column Z1 to the symbol column Z1 to the time saving result is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z3, the stop result that is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order is displayed. This makes it possible to make it inconspicuous not only that the time saving result was invalidated, but also that the occurrence of the relatively advantageous second time saving result was invalidated. ..

If the second high frequency support mode is not set with the time saving result as a trigger, the time saving result is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result, and the symbol column Z1 to In the Z3, in the configuration in which the stop result is displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment process is out of alignment, the special figure display units 37a and 37b display the patterns corresponding to the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result. Stop is displayed. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether or not each of the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set. Will be.

If the second high frequency support mode is not set with the time saving result as a trigger, although the time saving result is obtained, the symbol column Z1 to the symbol column Z1 to the time saving result is either the first time saving result or the second time saving result. In Z3, in the configuration in which the stop result is displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of alignment, the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result, respectively. The stop result is displayed. This allows the manager of the game hall to visually confirm whether or not each of the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result has occurred regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode has been set. Will be.

Since the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 29) is set in the order in which the process execution order is later than the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22). Even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" in the game times other than the final game time in the time reduction state, the second high frequency support mode is not set with the ceiling time reduction as a trigger. However, when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" in the final game round in the time reduction state, the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time reduction as a trigger. Is possible. As a result, the ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round of the time reduction state while preventing the time reduction state from being newly set in the middle of the time reduction state so that the time reduction state does not continue excessively. By making the setting of the time reduction state triggered by the above, it becomes possible to give the player the benefit of the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction as much as possible. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

If a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game round in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or ceiling time reduction is started following the end of the current time reduction state. The total number of times the game is executed is larger than the number of times the game times in the time-reduced state are executed when the time-reduced state is started from the normal game state. As a result, if a time reduction result or ceiling time reduction occurs in the final game in the time reduction state, the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or ceiling time reduction is started following the end of the current time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage of what has been done.

In the process of confirming the special figure (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is set in the order in which the process is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0" in the game times when the result of the determination process is the time reduction result, the time reduction result is obtained compared to the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. It is possible to prioritize the setting of the second high frequency support mode as an opportunity. The number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction is fixed at 100 times, while the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is the first time reduction result. If there is, it is 100 times, and if it is the second time saving result, it is 150 times. That is, the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is equal to or greater than the number of time reduction continuations in the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, as described above, the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result is prioritized over the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction, so that the result of the hit / fail determination process is obtained. When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in the game times resulting in the time reduction, it is possible to prevent the setting mode of the time reduction continuation number from becoming disadvantageous to the player. Further, it is possible to bring about such an excellent effect by setting the execution order of the processes as described above.

In the special figure fixing process (FIG. 22), the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 25) is executed at that timing, the high probability flag is still set to "1", so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

In the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 29) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

In the high probability state, not only the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur, but also the process itself for subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability state advantageous to the player from the game times to be subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter 131.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is not set in either case of shifting to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction or the end of the time reduction state. Further, in the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is the value of the ceiling counter 131 as a result of the game times being digested and the value of the ceiling counter 131 being subtracted in the situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. Occurs when becomes "0". Therefore, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs only once after the jackpot result occurs, and basically after the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs once. Unless the jackpot result occurs and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is set, the transition to the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving from occurring excessively.

Even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is newly set including the information of the fixed ceiling count. do not have. As a result, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

Even if the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the ceiling count is not newly set including the information of the fixed ceiling count. .. As a result, even if the RAM clearing process (step S119) is executed, the remaining number of ceilings can be maintained.

Even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the number of ceilings is new including the information on the fixed number of ceilings. No settings are made. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S117) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 has a fixed number of ceilings of 500 times. Information is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

When the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84. When such a process is executed, the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (step S101 to step S126). This is a situation in which the process (step S119) is not executed. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once. Under such circumstances, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) are not executed, the gaming machine main body 12 is intentionally set to the open state and the operating power is increased. When the supply is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business, and also to confirm the setting. It is possible to generate the operation (step S112), the set value update process (step S117), and the RAM clear process (step S119) without being involved.

When the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of starting the open / close execution mode, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or RAM clear processing (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times of ceiling, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

If the game times of the period switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode is completed, the table group for high reach frequency is referred to in the low frequency support mode. It becomes a state. Then, in the high-reach state, the probability that the reach display is selected is higher when the result is out of range than in the situation where the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are not the high-reach state, and the reach is high. The variable display period when the display is selected is also likely to be longer in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode than in the non-reach high frequency state. Further, the period switching reference number of times is a predetermined number of times (specifically, 50 times) less than the number of times of the fixed ceiling that triggers the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0" in the reach high frequency state and the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends. Then, in the time-reduced state, it becomes easy to select a short period as the variable display period of the game times, so that the digestion efficiency of the game times becomes high. This makes it possible to allow a high-reach state to occur while not hindering the high digestive efficiency of the game times in the short-time state.

The process of setting the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 to "1" when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after subtraction 1 becomes "0" is executed even in the time saving state. On the other hand, in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 21), the main side is prior to the process of step S905 for determining whether or not "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag of the main side RAM 84. Since the process of step S903 for determining whether or not "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is executed, "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag. Even if it is set, when selecting the variable display period of the game times, the selection mode of the variable display period in the time saving state has priority over the selection mode of the variable display period in the reach high frequency state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the digestion efficiency of the game times is high in the time saving state from being hindered by setting "1" in the reach high frequency state flag.

On the other hand, even in the time saving state, the state in which "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag and "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag is maintained. Therefore, if the time saving state ends before the opportunity to clear the reach high frequency state flag "0" occurs, it is possible to generate the reach high frequency state from that point.

The process of setting information in the variable selection state counter 132 is only step S1006 when the open / close execution mode is started, and the process of step S1006 is executed after the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”. Unless this is done, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is maintained at "0". On the other hand, in the high reach high frequency state, the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is subtracted by 1 in the situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more, and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”. Occurs when. In this case, if the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is "0" (step S1702: NO), the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is terminated without executing the processes after step S1703. As a result, the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", a high reach high frequency state occurs, and when the high high reach reach state ends, the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Even if it does, the high reach condition does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the high reach state from occurring excessively.

Since the period switching reference number is set to a predetermined number (specifically, 50 times) less than the fixed ceiling number, the reach high frequency state occurs before the second high frequency support mode occurs due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. However, if the ceiling time reduction occurs once, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the ceiling time reduction does not occur. In this case, when the high-reach state ends, the jackpot result does not occur after that. Even if the digestion of the game times is repeated, the high-reach state does not occur, so that the ceiling time reduction does not occur. It is possible to prevent a high-reach state from occurring in the ceiling.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution order of the processes in the process during the determination of the special figure is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1801 to S1817, the same processing as in steps S801 to S817 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. After executing the process of step S1817, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S1818). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S1818: YES), "1" is set in the start high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1819), and "1" is set in the high probability flag. If is not set (step S1818: NO), the start high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S1820). The start high probability flag is a flag for the main MP82 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode at the start of the game round is the high probability mode in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 35) described later.

When the process of step S1819 or the process of step S1820 is executed, the value of the special electric counter in the figure is added by 1 (step S1821). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure change processing (step S607).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S1901 to S1907, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), and the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step S1902: NO). ), The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed in step S1908, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S1909, and the subtraction process of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed in step S1910. In S1911, the setting process for the time saving result is executed, and in step S1912, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1913). That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is not set as the processing order after the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131, but the setting process for the time saving result and the ceiling. The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is set as the processing order before the subtraction process of the counter 131.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result in the present embodiment executed in step S1911 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 35).

When the game result of this game is a time saving result (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2002). Then, when "1" is set in the start high probability flag (step S2002: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the process after step S2003. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game round started in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. Time saving results are invalidated without setting the mode.

When "1" is not set in the start high probability flag (step S2002: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S2003, Step S2004). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. When the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S2003 or step S2004: YES), the setting process for this time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S2005. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the hit / fail determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the time saving is shortened. If the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode is executed at the timing when the setting process for the result (FIG. 36) is executed, the setting of the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time-saving result is set. Time saving results are invalidated without being done. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the low frequency support mode (step S2003 and step S2004: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2005). As a result, the support mode becomes the second high frequency support mode. If the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S2006: YES), the information of "100" which is the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 provided in the main RAM 84 (step). In S2007), if the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S2006: NO), the information of "150" which is the second time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134 (step S2008). In a situation where the time is shortened, if the number of game times executed without a new jackpot result is 100, which is the first time reduction continuation number, or 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number, the jackpot is achieved. Low probability mode and low frequency support mode are set even if no result is generated.

When the process of step S2007 or the process of step S2008 is executed, the process of transmitting the state specification command is executed (step S2009). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of time reduction continuations set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the present embodiment executed in step S1912 of the process during determination of the special figure (FIG. 35).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2101). Then, when "1" is set in the start high probability flag (step S2101: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S2102. That is, in the game rounds started in the high probability mode, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

When "1" is not set in the start high probability flag (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2102: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S2103. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and the game times of the number of times of continuation of the time reduction are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time reduction state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S2102: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S2103), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction is 1 is "0". (Step S2104). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S2104: YES), the main side is provided that "1" is not set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2105: NO). The second high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2106), and the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is set to the information of "100" which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction (step S2107). As a result, the time is shortened, which is the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. In addition, the time saving state ends when the number of game times executed without a big hit result reaches 100 times, which is the first time saving continuation number, and is a normal game which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. It becomes a state.

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S2108). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has started is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. The status specification command also includes information on the number of times of continuation of the first time reduction set this time. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 performs a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect indicating that the time saving state is started. Execute.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", if "1" is set in the second high frequency flag, the processes of steps S2106 to S2108 are not executed, so this time. The ceiling time reduction of this time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction of. That is, even if the digestion of the game times of the fixed number of ceilings is completed in the situation where the time is shortened, the ceiling time is invalidated without setting the second high frequency support mode. This makes it possible to prevent additional settings for shifting to the high-frequency support mode from being executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode. The first high-frequency support mode is set only within the range until 100 game times are exhausted after the open / close execution mode, whereas the fixed ceiling number of 500 times is set when the open / close execution mode is started. Is set, so that the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 does not become "0" in the situation of the first high frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105 or the process of step S2108 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 35), the setting process (FIG. 36) for the time saving result is executed after the subtraction process (step S1908) of the high probability state counter 133. However, when the game round is started in the high probability mode and the hit / fail determination process is executed with reference to the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84. Will be done. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 36) is started and the start high accuracy flag is set to "1", even if the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the time saving result is concerned. The time saving state is not set with the result as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

Using the start high-probability flag, which is set to "1" on condition that it is in the high-probability mode when the game round is started, the time-saving result is invalidated in the setting process for the time-saving result (FIG. 36). Since it is configured to determine whether or not it is, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect regardless of the execution order of the processes in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 35).

In the process of determining the special figure (FIG. 35), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is executed after the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (step S1908). However, when the game round is started in the high probability mode and the hit / fail determination process is executed with reference to the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability, "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84. Will be done. Then, when the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) is started and the start high probability flag is set to "1", the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode.

The value of the ceiling counter 131 is set in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 37) by using the start high probability flag in which "1" is set on condition that the game is in the high probability mode when the game round is started. Since it is configured to determine whether or not to subtract, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect regardless of the execution order of the processes in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 35).

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opportunity to shift the winning / failing lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS, and the general electric random number counter C4, a fall random number counter C5 is provided. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS. The content is the same as that of the first embodiment.

The fall random number counter C5 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fall random number counter C5 is periodically updated, stored in the first special figure holding area 111 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34. It is stored in the special figure holding area 112. In the high probability mode, when the game round is started, the fall determination process is executed by using the numerical information corresponding to the fall random number counter C5 among the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. Then, when the fall result is selected in the fall determination process, the winning / failing lottery mode changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at that time. That is, in the first embodiment, when the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode becomes the high-probability continuation number, the winning / failing lottery mode is configured to shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In the embodiment, the transition to the low-probability mode does not occur depending on the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode, and the transition to the low-probability mode occurs by selecting the fall result in the fall determination process. ..

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 and the first reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 (step S2201: YES, step S2202: NO), the first The data setting process is executed (step S2203). The content of the first data setting process is the same as that of step S803 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), the first hold information acquired before the second hold information is the first. 1 Even if it is stored in the special figure holding area 111, the second data setting process is executed (step S2204). The content of the second data setting process is the same as that of step S804 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2203 or the process of step S2204 is executed, the fall determination process is executed on condition that "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2205: YES) (step S2206). ). In the fall determination process, the fall determination table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. Numerical information of the fall random number counter C5, which is the fall result, is set in the fall determination table. Only one type of the fall determination table is provided, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process is constant regardless of the set value, and the start target of the game round is the first hold information and the second hold information. It is constant regardless of any of the above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process may be changed according to the set value, and the probability that the fall result is selected in the fall determination process is the first. The configuration may vary depending on which of the 1st hold information and the 2nd hold information is the start target of the game round.

The fall determination table is set so that the probability that the fall result is selected is 1/15, but the probability may be lower than 1/15 or higher than 1/15. In the fall determination process, the information for the fall determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the fall random number counter C5 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the read out fall determination. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the fall result in the table.

When the result of the fall determination process is the fall result (step S2207: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2208), and the result of the fall determination process is not the fall result (step S2207). : NO), keep the high probability flag set to "1". As a result, if the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and if the result of the falling determination processing is not a falling result, the winning / failing lottery mode has a high probability. Stay in mode. Further, the fall determination process is executed before the hit / fail determination process (step S2209), and the transition to the low probability mode when the result of the fall determination process is the fall result is also performed before the hit / fail determination process (step S2209). Executed before. As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, it is possible to execute the pass / fail determination process (step S2209) in a situation where the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2205, a negative determination is made in step S2207, or the process of step S2208 is executed, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S2209). The content of the hit / fail determination process is the same as step S805 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S2210: YES), the jackpot distribution determination process is executed (step S2211), the jackpot flag set process is executed (step S2212), and the jackpot result is executed. The stop result setting process of is executed (step S2213). The contents of steps S2211 to S2213 are the same as those of steps S807 to S809 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a jackpot result but a time saving result (step S2210: NO, step S2214: YES), and if "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2215: YES), the first time saving result is selected (step S2216), and if "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2215: NO), the time saving distribution determination process is executed. (Step S2217). In the distribution determination process for shortening the time, as in step S811 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first special figure is used. The time-saving distribution table 127 (see FIG. 10C) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84, and if the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the time-saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure (FIG. 10). 10 (d)) is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. After reading the time-saving distribution tables 127 and 128, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type random number counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 113 for the special figure, and the time-saving distribution is performed. By referring to the minute tables 127 and 128, it is specified which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to. Therefore, either the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected.

Even in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit / miss determination process is a time saving result in the high probability state as in the first embodiment, the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high probability state, the first time-saving result, which has a lower advantage than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time saving result in the probability state, the second time saving result having a high advantage is obtained. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first reduction of working hours result, which has a low advantage, has been invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasteful pulling on the occurrence of the invalidation. The configuration may be applied to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, or the fourth to twelfth embodiments described later.

When the process of step S2216 or the process of step S2217 is executed, the flag set process for time saving is executed (step S2218), and the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S2219). The contents of steps S2217 to S2219 are the same as those of steps S811 to S813 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S2214: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S2220). The content of step S2220 is the same as step S814 of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S2213, the process of step S2219, or the process of step S2220 is executed, the processes of steps S2221 to S2224 are executed. The contents of steps S2221 to S2224 are the same as those of steps S815 to S818 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2301 to S2307, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1007 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S2301: YES), and the game result of this game is not a jackpot result (step S2302: NO). ), The subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S2308, the subtraction processing of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed in step S2309, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S2310, and the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S2311. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed. Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2312). In steps S2308 to S2311, the same processes as in steps S1008 to S1011 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is not set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 40). .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition to the low-probability mode does not occur depending on the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode.

As described above, when the game round is started in the high probability mode, the fall determination process (step S2206) is executed, and when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, the winning / fail lottery mode is performed at that time. Changes from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. Then, these processes are executed before the pass / fail determination process (step S2209). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process is a fall result, it is possible to execute the pass / fail determination process (step S2209) in a situation where the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode.

When the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process (step S2209), the first time saving result or the second time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution determination process (step S2217) in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, the first time saving result is forcibly selected. Even in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit / miss determination process is a time saving result in the high probability state as in the first embodiment, the time saving state is not set triggered by the time saving result. In this case, if the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time-saving result in the high-probability state, the first time-saving result, which has a lower advantage than the second time-saving result, is forcibly selected to have a high probability. Even if the player recognizes from the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 that the result of the hit / miss determination process is a time saving result in the state, it is not the second time saving result having a high advantage. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first time saving result having a low advantage is invalidated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of wasteful pulling on the occurrence of the invalidation.

In the configuration in which the first time-saving result, which has a relatively low advantage, is selected when the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is the time-saving result in the high probability mode, the time-saving result is the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result. The fall determination process (step S2206) is executed before the process of allocating to any of the time saving results (step S2215 to step S2219). As a result, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) becomes the fall result and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, the time saving result is reduced to the first time after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. The process of allocating to either the result or the second time saving result (step S2215 to step S2219) is executed. Therefore, in the game times in which the transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being the fall result, the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is relative to the time saving result. It is possible to allow the second time saving result to be selected, which is advantageous to.

In the configuration of shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) is the fall result, the process of shifting to the low-probability mode is executed at the start of the game round. On the other hand, the setting process for the time saving result (step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 40) which is the process at the end of the game round. As a result, when the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) becomes the fall result and the transition to the low probability mode occurs, the setting process for the time saving result is performed after the transition to the low probability mode is performed. (Step S2310) and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S2311) are executed. Therefore, in the game round in which the transition to the low probability mode occurs due to the result of the fall determination process (step S2206) being the fall result, when the result of the hit / fail determination process (step S2209) is the time reduction result, the time reduction is concerned. It is possible to set the time reduction state triggered by the result, and when the ceiling time reduction occurs because the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the ceiling time reduction is set. It is possible to set the time saving state as an opportunity.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2401 to S2416, the same processing as in steps S101 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. When it is determined that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2408 or step S2422: YES), and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S2416). : YES), or when it is determined in step S2407 that "1" is set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84, the setting value updating process is executed (step S2417). The setting value update process will be described later. Further, in steps S2418 to S2420, the same processing as in steps S118 to S120 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2404 to S2406, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal, the main side “1” is set in the game stop flag of the RAM 84 (step S2421). By setting the game stop flag to "1" as in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly when the power was cut off last time, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the time when the power was cut off last time. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

In the first embodiment, when the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S121 by specifying that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter of the main RAM 84 is set in step S122. Although it is configured to execute a process of setting information of 500 times, which is the number of fixed ceilings, in 131, the process is not set in the present embodiment. That is, even if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S2421 by specifying that the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84, the process of setting the information in the ceiling counter 131 is not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422). When the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2422: NO), the processes of step S2423 and step S2424 are executed. In the processes of steps S2423 and S2424, the same processes as those of steps S124 and S125 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

When the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2422: YES), the set value update process is performed on condition that the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by using the setting key (step S2416: YES). Execute (step S2417). In steps S2425 to S2429, the same process as in steps S126 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a set value update process executed in step S2417 of the main process (FIG. 41).

First, the interrupt permission is set (step S2501). After that, "1" is set in the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2502). After that, if "1" is not set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2503: NO), after executing the RAM clear process (step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507 and the game stop flag is set to "1". If "1" is set (step S2503: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step S2505), and after the ceiling counter 131 set process is executed (step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2507.

In the RAM clear processing in each of step S2504 and step S2505, the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area), the ceiling counter 131, and the setting updating flag are set in the main RAM 84. And, except for the area in which the information for calculating the winning ratio is stored in the main RAM 84, the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal drawing holding area 84c are also cleared to "0", the first holding information, the second holding information, and the holding information on the normal drawing side are deleted. In addition, the setting confirmation flag and the setting update area are cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S2402 is executed.

In the setting process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S2506, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred, and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84, so that the start of the process for advancing the game is prevented. When the set value update process is executed in the present situation and the blocked situation is canceled, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area of the main RAM 84 (step S2507), and the update start command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 (step S2508). Further, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting update area is any of "1" to "6" (step S2509). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step S2509: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S2510). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2509 or when the process of step S2510 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step S2511). When a negative determination is made in step S2511, the value of the setting update area is added by 1 (step S2513), provided that the reset button 142 is pressed (step S2512: YES). As a result, each time the reset button 142 is pressed once, the set value is updated one step higher. Further, when the reset button 142 is not pressed (step S2512: NO) or when the value of the setting update area is added by 1, the process returns to the process of step S2509, but the setting is updated in step S2509. If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S2510. As a result, if the reset button 142 is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 143 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S2511: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S2514). ). As a result, the information of the setting value of the result updated in the current setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the setting of the current pachinko machine 10. It becomes a value.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S2515). Further, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93 (step S2516). Further, the setting updating flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2517).

According to the above configuration, it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred, and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 to start the process for advancing the game. When the set value update process is executed in the blocked situation and the blocked situation is canceled, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. It becomes.

When an information error in the main RAM 84 occurs, the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is released from the situation where the start of the process for advancing the game is blocked. It is possible to concentrate on the setting value update process that is executed for this purpose. Further, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 occurs, the process of resetting the information of the ceiling counter 131 to the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, prevents the start of the process for advancing the game. When the setting value update process is executed in order to cancel, it is possible to execute it naturally.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

In steps S2601 to S2612, the same processing as in steps S101 to S112 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. When the setting key insertion unit 143 is not turned on using the setting key and "1" is not set in the setting checking flag (step S2610 and step S2611: NO), the main body open detection sensor 144 It is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is being opened by determining whether or not the opening detection signal of the HI level is received from the above (step S2613).

When the HI level opening detection signal is received from the main body opening detection sensor 144 (step S2613: YES), that is, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the ceiling of the main RAM 84 Information of 500 times, which is the number of times of the first ceiling, is set in the counter 131 (step S2614). When the process of step S2613 is executed, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the reset button 142 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 143 is turned on by the setting key. Further, "1" is not set in both the setting updating flag and the setting checking flag of the main RAM 84. In this case, the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (step S2601 to step S2626). The situation. Further, in the game hall, with the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 turned off, the power switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 of each pachinko machine 10 is turned on in advance. When it is time to start business on the 1st, the main power is turned on so that the pachinko machines 10 are activated all at once. In such a situation, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2613, the gaming machine is in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619) are not executed. This is a case where the supply of operating power is started with the main body 12 intentionally opened. Then, in such a situation, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the first number of ceilings. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which information of 500 times, which is the first number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 at the start of supply of operating power as a situation different from that at the start of normal business. It can be generated without the confirmation process (step S2612), the set value update process (step S2617), and the RAM clear process (step S2619). Even when the result of a big hit is obtained and the opening / closing execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the number of times of the first ceiling, is set in the ceiling counter 131.

In steps S2615 to S2620, the same processes as in steps S115 to S120 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. When a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2604 to S2606, that is, when "1" is not set in the power failure flag, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal, the main side “1” is set in the game stop flag of the RAM 84 (step S2621). By setting the game stop flag to "1" as in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S201 to S205 is executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), while the affirmative determination is made in step S206. By doing so, the processes of steps S207 to S220 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly when the power was cut off last time, the storage state of the main RAM 84 changes from the time when the power was cut off last time. If the checksums do not match due to the fact that the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the game progresses. Will not be executed.

After that, information of 800 times, which is a second ceiling number larger than the first ceiling number, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S2622). In steps S2623 to S2630, the same processing as in steps S123 to S130 of the main processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

Even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed as in the first embodiment, the initialization of the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 is not executed, and the new setting of the number of ceilings is performed. I won't get it. Therefore, even if the set value update process (step S2617) is executed in order to cancel the game stop state due to the information abnormality when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained as it is. .. On the other hand, when it is specified that an information abnormality in the main RAM 84 has occurred and "1" is set in the game stop flag of the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 is set to 800, which is the second ceiling count. The information of the times is set. As a result, even if the information of the ceiling counter 131 is rewritten when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the information of the ceiling counter 131 can be reset to the information of 800 times, which is the second ceiling count. It will be possible.

The second ceiling count is a number larger than the first ceiling count set in the ceiling counter 131 when the open / close execution mode is started or in step S2614 of the main process (FIG. 43). As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the second ceiling count, which is a relatively large number of times, is set in the ceiling counter 131, which is an illegal act accompanied by the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 84. When an act is performed, it is possible to give a penalty that the number of executions of the game times required to generate the ceiling time reduction increases.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in the present embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are used to guide means. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game board 24 has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, and a general drawing unit 38. Is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, a distribution winning device 161 is provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the special winning device 151, and the distribution winning device 161, the number of game media that can be used by the player is determined. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and 15 when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. When the payout of one game ball is executed and the ball is entered into the first operating port 33, the payout of three game balls is executed, and when the ball is entered into the special winning device 151, the ball is paid out. One game ball is paid out, and when a ball is entered into the distribution winning device 161, 15 game balls are paid out.

The distribution winning device 161 is provided with a discharge passage area 165b and a V winning passage area 165c as described later, and the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 is provided with the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage. Although it will pass through any of the areas 165c, the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge passage area 165b and the V winning passage area 165c the game balls pass through. Will be done. Further, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 and the special prize device 151 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the distribution winning device 161 is the special electric prize winning device. The number of prize balls may be larger than or less than the number of prize balls of 32.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball moves to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player operates the launch operation device 28 on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 of the left side region PA2 and the right side region PA3, and also the right side region. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first actuating port 33 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is not provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down from the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. Further, the first actuating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 36b via the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the center of the stage portion 36b in the lateral direction to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower region PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right region PA3, a game ball flowing down the right region PA3 is the first. A regulation nail 24c is provided so as not to reach the 1 actuating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side region PA2 and not for the right side region PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the first operating port 33 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the launching operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, it is not possible to win a prize in the first operating port 33. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right side region PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided in the right side region PA3. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first actuating port 33 may be configured to be able to win a prize.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The configuration of the special winning device 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a vertical sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the non-guided state. The special winning device 151 has a base unit 151a in which a discharge passage 153 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a game ball flowing down the game area PA into the discharge passage 153. It is provided with a guidance unit 152 for guiding. The entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 has an opening area of one game ball or more, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 154 is provided on the exit portion 153b side of the discharge passage 153, and the detection sensor 154 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the special winning device 151.

The guidance unit 152 receives the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 153 and into the discharge passage 153. A situation in which the guide drive unit 156 for displacement of the guide member 155 between the initial position at which the game ball cannot be guided and the guidance position at which the guidance is possible, and the guide member 155 are arranged at the initial position. Is arranged in a blocking position that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 153, and is arranged in a non-blocking position that does not prevent the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 153 in the situation where the guide member 155 is arranged in the guidance position. It is provided with a blocking member 157. The guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction so that the guide member 155 faces downward. A transmission unit 158 is provided on the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 156.

When the guide driving unit 156 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are completely buried in the discharge passage 153 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front region of the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 153 by the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157, that is, the game ball is a special prize. The game area PA flows downward without entering the device 151. Further, since the blocking member 157 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantially opening area of the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 is less than one game ball. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the special winning device 151 in the situation where the guide member 155 is arranged at the initial position.

When the guide drive unit 156 is in the drive state, the guide member 155 and the blocking member 157 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, the guide member 155 is arranged at the guide position, and the blocking member 157 is not. It is placed in the blocking position. FIG. 45B is a vertical sectional view of the special winning device 151 in the guided state.

When the guide member 155 is arranged at the guide position, the tip end side of the guide member 155 projects from the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 toward the game area PA side. This amount of protrusion is such that the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA can be received from below. Since the upper surface of the tip end side of the guide member 155 is inclined downward toward the inlet portion 153a of the discharge passage 153, the game ball received from below on the tip end side of the guide member 155 is the upper surface of the guide member 155. Will be guided into the discharge passage 153. Further, when the blocking member 157 is arranged in the non-blocking position, the blocking member 157 is displaced so that the tip portion thereof is located above the blocking position, so that the game of rolling on the upper surface of the guide member 155. The ball flows into the discharge passage 153 without interfering with the blocking member 157. As a result, the guide drive unit 156 is brought into the drive state, so that the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 153a in the game area PA enters the special winning device 151. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide driving unit 156 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged in the initial position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged in the blocking position is the non-inducing state of the guiding unit 152 or the special winning device 151. The state in which the guide driving unit 156 is in the driving state, the guide member 155 is arranged in the guiding position, and the blocking member 157 is arranged in the non-blocking position is the guided state of the guiding unit 152 or the special winning device 151. It is called an open state.

The special winning device 151 includes a cover member 159 provided so as to face the entrance portion 153a of the discharge passage 153 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 159 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 159a in the front region of the entrance portion 153a in the game region PA, and one game ball that simultaneously passes through the front region of the entrance portion 153a. It is provided so as to limit the number of the game balls to one and to restrict the movement of the game ball forward and laterally of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when the guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is in the guidance state, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls are simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 153 of the special prize device 151, and the guidance state is also prevented. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 153a into the discharge passage 153.

As shown in FIG. 44, a through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If is operated, a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 and a distribution winning device 161 are provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. Has been done. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special winning device 151, the special electric winning device 32, or the distribution winning device 161.

The right side region PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are centrally arranged is defined by the side wall 36f whose left side is bulging in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the gaming board 24 in the variable display unit 36. The right side is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and is defined by a regulation wall protruding in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side region PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower region PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the ball entry devices of the game balls in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right region PA3 is set to guide the game ball flowing down the right region PA3 to the through gate 35. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 is easy to enter the through gate 35, and as the ball is easy to enter the through gate 35, it is easy to enter the special winning device 151.

The guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is switched from the non-induction state to the guidance state based on the winning of the through gate 35, so that the special prize device 151 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the gaming area PA where the game ball does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric combination open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display of the normal figure display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the normal power open state, the guidance unit 152 is in the guidance state in a predetermined mode, so that the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the predetermined mode.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of winning an open prize, the mode of selecting the duration of the variable display times in the normal map display unit 38a, and the mode of selecting the stop result in the normal map display unit 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the mode (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) in which the special winning device 151 is opened when the normal electric power is opened in each support mode is described in each of the first embodiments. This is the same as the mode in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state (opening continuation period, open number of times, maximum number of winnings, interval period) when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the first operating port The probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than that of 33. Then, when a prize is won in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player holds too many balls. You can play the game without reducing it.

The winning / failing determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a change display of a pattern is performed by performing a hit / fail determination process on the first hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the winning / failing determination process is performed on the second reserved information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 151, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a big hit result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, and there are other small hit results. The content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is different for each of the big hit result, the time saving result, the small hit result and the missed result. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure holding display unit 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. On the other hand, the special figure holding display unit corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b is not provided. Unlike the first operating port 33, the number of game balls winning in the special winning device 151 is not stored on hold. That is, when a prize is awarded to the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game round can be started, the game round in the second special figure display unit 37b is executed, but the game round cannot be started. Even if a prize is awarded to the special prize device 151 in the situation, the hold information that triggers the start of the game round is not stored. However, even if a prize is awarded to the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game round cannot be started, the payout of the game ball is executed.

The display range of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 more than the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 37c.

When the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b performs variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is executed, the symbol display device 41 performs a display effect accordingly. When the effect for game rounds is executed in the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first hold display area 42a, and the state suggestion area 43 are set as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the second hold display area 42b is not displayed because the second hold information is not held and stored. Further, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect for the game round but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts to after the big hit result is performed.

When a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the open / close execution mode after the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. In the open / close execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device 32. As shown in FIG. 44, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right side region PA3 at a position below the special winning device 151 and above the distribution winning device 161. That is, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 32 causes the game ball to flow down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when a jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state. Further, the execution content of the open / close execution mode is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When a small hit result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the distribution execution mode after the game rounds corresponding to the small winning result are completed. In the distribution execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the distribution winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the distribution winning device 161 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3. A prize can be won when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 161 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 in addition to FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 161.

As shown in FIG. 44, the distribution winning device 161 is provided with a distribution entrance 161a having a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state and a game in which the game ball cannot pass through the distribution entrance 161a. It is provided with a distribution side opening / closing member 162 that switches to an open state through which a ball can pass. The distribution side opening / closing member 162 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 163 for the distribution inlet through a link mechanism (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball winning the distribution entrance 161a is led out to the branch passage 165 formed in the base body 164 of the distribution winning device 161. The branch passage 165 has an upstream passage area 165a set so that the passage direction is laterally inclined downward from the entrance portion of the branch passage 165 to an intermediate position of the branch passage 165, and the upstream passage area 165a. The game is on a side different from the discharge passage area 165b, which is continuous with the downstream end of the sill and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and is provided by branching from an intermediate position of the discharge passage area 165b. It is provided with a V winning passage area 165c for guiding the ball. In this case, since the upstream passage area 165a has a dimension of one game ball or more and less than two game balls in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction, the upstream passage region 165a is in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction. It is prevented that the game balls pass through the upstream passage area 165a in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls reach the branch position to the V winning passage area 165c in the discharge passage area 165b at the same time.

At the branching point of the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c, a switching piece 166 for guiding the game ball flowing into the discharge passage area 165b to the V winning passage area 165c is provided. The switching piece 166 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 165c side with respect to the discharge passage region 165b in the base body 164, and is retracted entirely to the outside of the discharge passage region 165b. It can be displaced between the position and the V-guided position protruding into the discharge passage area 165b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 167 is transmitted to the switching piece 166 through a transmission unit (not shown). The switching piece 166 is arranged at the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown) when the switching drive unit 167 is in the non-drive state, and the switching drive unit 167 is in the drive state. The switching piece 166 is displaced against the urging force and is arranged at the V induction position.

When the switching piece 166 is arranged in the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 flows down the discharge passage area 165b without being guided to the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the count detection sensor 168 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 166 in the discharge passage area 165b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 165 is received from below by the switching piece 166. The upper surface of the switching piece 166 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 165c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 166 flows into the V winning passage area 165c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning passage area 165c. Then, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 provided in the V winning passage area 165c, and then discharged to the rear of the game board 24.

When the distribution side opening / closing member 162 is in the open state, the period during which the open state is maintained is constant at 2 seconds, which is a period longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and distribution is performed in the distribution execution mode. The maximum number of game balls that can be entered in the winning device 161 is 5 and is constant. Further, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Then, when the distribution side opening / closing member 162 is in the open state, the number of game balls to be won in the distribution winning device 161 is often one or two, and the maximum is about three. On the other hand, the switching piece 166 is started to operate when the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V induction position in a fixed cycle for a fixed period. .. The cycle in which the switching piece 166 is arranged at the V-lead position is once every 4 seconds, and the period during which the switching piece 166 is held at the V-lead position is 1 second. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the distribution winning device 161 in the open state, the switching piece 166 is not arranged at the V guidance position at the timing when the game ball reaches the position of the switching piece 166. Assumed, in this case, the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169.

Regardless of whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 169, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution prize device 161 are paid out. Will be done. Further, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is generated after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, if the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution execution mode is generated and the firing of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, there is a 1/2 probability that the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 169 Detection occurs. However, the probability is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower than 1/2 or higher. Further, when the distribution execution mode is generated and the firing of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 161 is continued, there is a 100% or approximately 100% probability of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 169. It may be configured to generate the detection of.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the present embodiment also includes a hit random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a general electric random number counter C4. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Further, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, the numerical information of the normal number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 84c, and the configuration of the normal figure holding area 84c is the same as that of the first embodiment. Is.

The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special drawing area 171 provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33. Will be done. Further, each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151. ..

The first special drawing area 171 includes a first area 172a, a second area 172b, a third area 172c, and a fourth area 172d, and a hit random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. , Each numerical information of the type random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 172a to 172d as the first hold information. In this case, in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 172a → the second area 172b → the third area 172c → the third area 172c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 172d. By providing the four areas 172a to 172d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored on hold in the first special drawing area 171 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The first special drawing area 171 is provided with an execution area 173 for the first special drawing in addition to the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d. The execution area 173 for the first special figure stores the first hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail determination process, various distribution determination processes, etc. when the variable display of the pattern is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. It is an area to be done. The hold information stored in the first area 172a is shifted to the execution area 173 for the first special figure when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started.

In the execution area 174 for the second special figure, each numerical information of the random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is second when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151 in a situation where the game round can be started. Stored as pending information. Here, the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d are provided in the first special drawing area 171 as described above, and the first hold information is stored even in a situation where it is impossible to start the game round. In contrast to the configuration in which the second reserved information is held and stored, only the execution area 174 for the second special figure is provided for the second reserved information, and the area for holding and storing the second reserved information is not provided. .. This makes it possible to handle the presence / absence of hold storage differently between the first hold information and the second hold information. In addition, since the reach effect that is finally out of order does not occur in the game round triggered by the second hold information, the first hold information includes the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, whereas the second hold information is included. 2 The hold information does not include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second hold information may include the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3.

The hit / fail determination process is executed using the hit random number counter C1. In the first embodiment, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the winning / failing lottery mode, but in the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning / failing lottery mode.

When the pass / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, the first pass / fail table 181 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first pass / fail table 181 when the set value set as the target of use is “setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result are set in the first hit / fail table 181 as the result of the hit / fail determination process. Even in the first hit / fail table 181 corresponding to the set value other than "setting 3", the big hit result, the time saving result and the missed result are set. The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 set corresponding to the jackpot result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and the hit random number set corresponding to the time saving result is set. The number of numerical information of the counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the pass / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information, the second pass / fail table 182 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second pass / fail table 182 when the set value set as the target of use is “setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the big hit result, the time saving result and the missed result are set as the result of the hit / fail determination process in the second hit / miss table 182, and the small hit result is further set. Even in the second hit / fail table 182 corresponding to the set value other than "setting 3", the big hit result, the time saving result, the small hit result and the missed result are set. The number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 set corresponding to the big hit result is different for each set value as in the first embodiment, and it corresponds to each of the time saving result and the small hit result. The number of numerical information of the set random number counter C1 is the same for each set value.

When the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the jackpot result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the jackpot distribution determination process for determining the type of the jackpot result is executed, the jackpot distribution table 183 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot distribution table 183. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), a low-frequency jackpot result and a high-frequency jackpot result are set in the jackpot distribution table 183 as the result of the distribution determination process for the jackpot.

The low-frequency jackpot result triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result, the number of round game executions is 10. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode in this case continues at least until the next open / close execution mode occurs.

The high-frequency jackpot result triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the high-frequency jackpot result, the number of round game executions is 10. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first hold information is the jackpot result or the result of the hit / fail determination process for the second hold information is the jackpot result. Will be done. Further, the same jackpot distribution table 183 is referred to regardless of the set value. The jackpot distribution table 183 is set so that the low frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the high frequency jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the time saving result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the distribution determination process for time reduction for determining the type of the time reduction result is executed, the time reduction distribution table 184 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving distribution table 184. As shown in FIG. 48 (d), the first time reduction result and the second time reduction result are set in the time reduction distribution table 184 as the result of the distribution determination process for time reduction.

The first time saving result does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, and is the time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the opening / closing execution mode is not newly generated and the ten game times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, is exhausted. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The second time saving result is a time saving result in which the support mode is set to the second high frequency support mode without triggering the transition to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the second high-frequency support mode ends when the opening / closing execution mode is not newly generated and the 15 game times, which is the second time-saving continuation number, is exhausted. When 15 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the second time saving result has a larger number of executions of the game times in which the second high frequency support mode continues than the first time saving result. Therefore, the second time saving result is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving result.

Even in this embodiment, the ceiling time is shortened. When the second high frequency support mode is set with the ceiling time reduction as an opportunity, the second high frequency support mode is the first time reduction continuation number without a new opening / closing execution mode, as in the case of the first time reduction result. It ends when a certain 10 game times are digested. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The time saving distribution table 184 is referred to regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information is the time saving result or the result of the hit / miss determination process for the second reserved information is the time saving result. Will be done. Further, the same time saving distribution table 184 is referred to regardless of the set value. The time saving distribution table 184 is set so that the first time saving result is selected with a probability of 2/3 and the second time saving result is selected with a probability of 1/3, but these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

When the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the type of the small hit result is selected by using the type random number counter C2. When the distribution determination process for small hits for determining the type of the small hit result is executed, the small hit distribution table 185 stored in the main ROM 83 is referred to. FIG. 48 (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small hit distribution table 185. As shown in FIG. 48 (e), the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set in the small hit distribution table 185 as the result of the distribution determination process for the small hit. ing.

All of these first to third small hit results trigger the transition to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 161 is opened as described above. The game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 flows into the V winning passage area 165c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169, so that the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode after the distribution execution mode. Then, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the support mode is set according to the type of the small hit result. FIG. 48 (f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of an opening / closing execution mode and a support mode corresponding to each small hit result.

The first small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is one. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The second small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of executions of the round game in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is four times. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

The third small hit result is a small hit result in which the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode shifted by the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode is nine times. Further, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends when 10 game times have been completed without a new opening / closing execution mode. When 10 game times have been digested, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 48 (e), in the small hit distribution table 185, when the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information is the small hit result, and the result of the hit / miss determination process for the second reserved information is the small hit. It is referred to in any case that results. Further, the same small hit distribution table 185 is referred to regardless of the set value. In the small hit distribution table 185, the first small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the third small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3. However, these selection probabilities are arbitrary.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S2701). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. When a prize has been generated for the first operating port 33 (step S2801: YES), the number of first reserved information stored in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special drawing area 171 is On condition that the number is less than four, which is the upper limit storage number (step S2802: NO), the storage process in the first special figure area 171 is executed (step S2803). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the first reserved information, and the first in the first area 172a to the fourth area 172d of the first special drawing area 171. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas where the pending information is not stored. When the first reserved information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure reserved display unit 37c in accordance with the increase in the number of the first reserved information this time is set. conduct. Further, when the first hold information is acquired, the corresponding command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. As a result, the image of the first hold display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the first hold information.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801, a negative determination is made in step S2802, or the process of step S2803 is executed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the special winning device 151 (step S2804). .. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2804, the second special figure is provided on the condition that none of the game times, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode is executed (step S2805: YES). Is executed in the execution area 174 (step S2806). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type random number counter C2 is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure as the second hold information. That is, the second hold information is acquired only in the situation where none of the game times triggered by the first hold information, the game times triggered by the second hold information, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode is executed. Will be done. Then, as will be described in detail later, regarding the execution of the pass / fail determination process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game round, the second hold information has priority over the first hold information as an execution trigger, so that the second hold information is the second. When it is stored in the execution area 174 for the special figure, the hit / fail determination process triggered by the second hold information is immediately executed, and the game round triggered by the second hold information is started. It should be noted that the second special figure hold display unit for notifying the number of the second hold information stored is not provided, and further, the symbol display device 41 is for notifying the hold storage number of the second hold information. The image is not displayed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S2701, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out (step S2702). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main MPU 82.

The special figure special electric counter can take a value of "0" to "8", and each value of "0" to "8" corresponds to a start address of each process (step S2705 to step S2713). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S2705), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and the special figure special electric is executed. When the value of the counter is "1", the special figure changing process (step S2706), which is the process for advancing the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2". In some cases, the special figure determination process (step S2707), which is the process for ending the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the distribution execution mode The distribution start process (step S2708), which is the process for setting the start of, is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4", various processes in the distribution execution mode are executed. The special electric power start process (step S2710) is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode when the special electric power counter value is “5”. Is the execution target, and when the value of the special power special electric counter is "6", the special electric power opening process (step S2711), which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electric power winning device 32, is the execution target. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "7", the special electric special electric closing process (step S2712), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric special electric winning device 32, is executed, and the special electric special electric counter is executed. When the value is "8", the special electric termination process (step S2713), which is a process for controlling the ending of the open / close execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode, is the execution target.

In the special figure special electric control process, after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S2702), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S2703), and the acquisition is obtained. Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S2704). Hereinafter, each process of step S2705 to step S2713 will be described individually.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start process in step S2705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the first hold information or the second hold information is stored (step S2901: YES) (step S2902). In the data setting process, when the second reserved information is stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the first reserved information acquired before the second reserved information in the first special figure area 171. The second reserved information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set as the execution target regardless of whether or not is acquired. As a result, the second hold information can be prioritized over the first hold information as an execution trigger of the hit / miss determination process, and can be prioritized as an execution trigger of the game round. The second hold information stored in the execution area 174 for the second special drawing is deleted when the game round triggered by the second hold information is completed.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, when the second reserved information is not stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 172a of the first special figure area 171 is stored in the first special figure. Move to the execution area 173 for. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special drawing area 171 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d to the lower area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 172a to 172d in order to the lower area side, and the second area 172b → the first area 172a, the third area 172c → the third area. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 172b, 4th area 172d → 3rd area 172c, the 4th area 172d is cleared to “0”. Further, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display content of the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Further, in the data setting process, the hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. As a result, the image of the first hold display area 42a in the symbol display device 41 is updated in correspondence with the decrease of the first hold information.

After executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S2903). In the hit / fail determination process, if the execution target of the current game round is the first hold information, the first hit / miss table 181 (see FIG. 48 (a)) corresponding to the current set value is read from the main ROM 83, and the current game is played. If the execution target of the times is the second hold information, the second pass / fail table 182 (see FIG. 48 (b)) corresponding to the current setting is read from the main ROM 83. As already explained, there is only one type of winning / failing lottery mode. After reading the pass / fail tables 181, 182, if the first hold information is the trigger for this game round, the numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is displayed. When the second reserved information is read and the trigger of the game round is this time, the numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is read. Then, it is determined which of the game results set in 182 in the hit / miss table 181 matches the numerical information about the read random number counter C1.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S2904: YES), the process for the jackpot result is executed (step S2905). In the processing for the jackpot result, the same processing as in steps S807 to S809 of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the jackpot distribution determination process, the jackpot distribution table 183 shown in FIG. 48 (c) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Determine which of the jackpot results that have been made matches. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the jackpot distribution table 183. Determine which of the jackpot results you are in agreement with. In the big hit flag set process, when the low frequency big hit result is selected in the big hit distribution determination process, the corresponding flag is set, and when the high frequency big hit result is selected. Sets the corresponding flag. Further, in the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, when the low frequency jackpot result is selected in the distribution determination process for the jackpot, the stop result information corresponding to it is stored in the main RAM 84, and the frequency is high. When the jackpot result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main RAM 84.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the time saving result (step S2906: YES), the process for the time saving result is executed (step S2907). In the process for shortening the time, the same process as in steps S811 to S813 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment is executed. However, in the time saving distribution determination process, the time saving distribution table 184 shown in FIG. 48 (d) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is set in the time saving distribution table 184. It is determined which of the time saving results is matched. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the time saving distribution table 184. Determine which of the time-saving results you are in agreement with. Further, in the time saving flag set processing, when the first time saving result is selected in the time saving distribution determination processing, the corresponding flag is set, and when the second time saving result is selected, the flag is set. Sets the corresponding flag. Further, in the stop result setting process for the time saving result, when the first time saving result is selected in the distribution determination process for the time saving, the information of the stop result corresponding to the first time saving result is stored in the main RAM 84, and the second When the time saving result is selected, the information of the stop result corresponding to it is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the small hit result (step S2908: YES), the distribution determination process for the small hit is executed (step S2909). In the distribution determination process for small hits, the small hit distribution table 185 shown in FIG. 48 (e) is referred to regardless of the type and set value of the reserved information that is the start target of the game round. In this case, when the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 173 for the first special figure is stored in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the set small hit results matches. Further, when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the numerical information about the type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area 174 for the second special figure is set in the small hit distribution table 185. It is determined which of the small hit results is matched.

After that, the flag setting process for small hits is executed (step S2910). In the flag set process for small hits, when the first small hit result is selected in the distribution determination process for small hits in step S2909, the corresponding flag is set and the second small hit result is obtained. If selected, the corresponding flag is set, and if the third small hit result is selected, the corresponding flag is set.

After that, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S2911). In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the second special figure display unit 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main ROM 83. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step S2911 , Information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in step S2909 is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result. .. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the small hit results. ..

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a loss result (step S2908: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S2912). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b that is the execution target of the game round in the current game round. Is specified from the stop result table for the disconnection result stored in advance in the main ROM 83, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result, the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result, and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result. It is different from the information on the aspect of the picture.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S2913). In the specification process of the variable display period, if the current state is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, if a big hit result is generated in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information to be executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type counter CS at that time. By collating the numerical information of the above with respect to the reach-compatible table in the table group for high-frequency support, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In addition, when a small hit result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for high frequency support. Read out the information of the variation display period of the hit mode. In addition, if the big hit result, the missed reach display and the small hit result do not occur in this game round, if the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, the special figure side as the variable display period of this game round. The information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) of is read out. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round when the big hit result, the missed reach display and the small hit result do not occur in this game round, the special figure side as the variable display period of this game round. Information for a medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) is read out.

If the current state is the low frequency support mode, it corresponds to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is the execution target as well as the result of the jackpot result occurring in this game round or the result of the hit / fail judgment process being out of order. If the numerical information corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is displayed in the reach-compatible table in the table group for low frequency support. By collating with each other, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out. In addition, when a small hit result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the small hit in the table group for low frequency support. Read out the information of the variation display period of the hit mode. In addition, when a time saving result occurs in this game round, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the time saving corresponding table in the table group for low frequency support, so that the time saving mode can be obtained. Read the information of the variable display period. In addition, if the big hit result, the missed reach display, the small hit result, and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, if the second hold information is the execution target of the game round, it is set as the variable display period of this game round. The information of the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special map side is read out. This makes it possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the execution target of the game round when the big hit result, the missed reach display, the small hit result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round, 3 in the first special drawing area 171. If the game is started in a situation where a plurality of first hold information is stored, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the variation display period of this game. , If the game is started in a situation where one or two first hold information is stored in the first special map area 171, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is used for low frequency support. By collating with the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group of, the information of the variation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is read out.

After the variation display period specifying process is executed in step S2913, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93 (step S2914). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S2913, and the game times to be started are set to either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The variable command does not include information on whether to execute reach display, but the variable display period when reach display occurs is longer than the variable display period when reach display does not occur. Since it is set, the sound / light side MPU 93 can specify the presence / absence of reach display from the information of the variable display period. The type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any type of jackpot result. Contains information indicating whether or not. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the time saving result, and if it corresponds to the time saving result, which type of time saving result is supported. Contains information indicating whether or not. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game times to be started this time correspond to the small hit result, and if it corresponds to the small hit result, which type is used. It contains information indicating whether it is a small hit result.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S2915). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S2916). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" corresponding to the special figure change processing (step S2706).

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S2706 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game times has not elapsed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game times. When it is the update timing of the contents, the data for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is set. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result, and the symbol display device. It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a predetermined multiple update timings occur, the display contents of the pattern make one round and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the fluctuation display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. After that, at the start of the game round, the patterns of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 in any one of step S2905, step S2907, step S2911 and step S2912 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 51). Read the information on the stop mode. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "2" corresponding to the special figure finalizing process (step S2707).

When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the final stop command, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits the corresponding command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the command, the display-side MPU 103 confirms and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the special figure finalizing process executed in step S2707 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3001: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S3002: YES). ), Information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side (step S3003), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound light side (step S3004). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 3 (step S3005). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S2710).

If the game result of this game is not a big hit result (step S3002: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed in step S3006, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S3007, and the step. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in S3008. The subtraction process of the time reduction state counter 134 in step S3006 is the subtraction process of the time reduction state counter 134 in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1601 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. It is the same as FIG. 30). Further, the setting process for the time saving result in step S3007 is the setting process for the time saving result in the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1302 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist. It is the same as FIG. 25). Further, in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in step S3008, the process of step S1501 is not executed because the high probability mode does not exist, and the second high frequency support mode occurs when the ceiling time is shortened. Is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment, except that the information of 10 times, which is the number of times of continuation of the first time reduction, is set in the time reduction state counter 134.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is a small hit result (step S3009). When the game result of this game is a small hit result (step S3009: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3010). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the distribution start processing (step S2708). When the game result of this game is not a small hit result (step S3009: NO), the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3011). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

<Processing for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S2708 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

First, the distribution start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the distribution start command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output of the speaker unit 65 are executed so that the effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Take control. Further, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits a distribution start command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the distribution start command from the sound light side MPU 93, the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress after the display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has been started is executed. Is displayed and controlled so that the symbol display device 41 is executed.

After that, "5" is set in the distribution winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. The distribution winning counter triggers the switching of the distribution winning device 161 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 161 that is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 82. In addition, the set processing of the distribution opening period is executed. In the distribution release period set processing, the information corresponding to the 2 seconds is sent to the timer counter of the main RAM 84 so that the period in which the distribution winning device 161 is maintained in the open state is the distribution release period of 2 seconds. set. Then, in order to open the distribution winning device 161, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 163 for the distribution inlet is started. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the distribution processing (step S2709).

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution process executed in step S2709 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161, "1" is set in the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 84. The V winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 169. Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU93. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives the V prize command from the main side MPU 82, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker so that the effect corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V prize detection sensor 169 is executed. The sound output control of unit 65 is executed. Further, the sound / light side MPU 93 transmits a V winning command to the display side MPU 103. When the display side MPU 103 receives the V prize command from the sound light side MPU 93, the display side MPU 103 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that a display effect indicating that the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 169 is executed. ..

In the distribution process, it is determined whether or not the distribution release period measured by using the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has elapsed in the situation where the distribution winning device 161 is in the open state. If the distribution opening period has not elapsed, the distribution winning device 161 is awarded a prize by determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161. Judges whether or not has occurred. When a prize has been awarded to the distribution winning device 161, the value of the distribution winning counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0".

When the distribution opening period has elapsed or when the value of the distribution winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the closing condition of the distribution winning device 161 is satisfied, so that the drive for the distribution entrance is satisfied. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the unit 163, the distribution winning device 161 is closed. After that, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until the game ball is surely no longer present in the distribution winning device 161, the timer counter of the main RAM 84 is set with the information corresponding to the waiting period. The waiting period is set as a period longer than the longest period required for the game ball entered in the distribution winning device 161 to be detected by either the count detection sensor 168 or the V winning detection sensor 169. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the waiting period elapses in this way, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 161 immediately before the distribution winning device 161 is closed is tentatively detected as a V winning. When it is detected by the sensor 169, it can be treated as valid.

In the distribution process, it is determined whether or not the waiting period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 84 has elapsed. When the waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 84. When "1" is set in the V winning flag, the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the display start processing of the special display unit 191 provided on the game board 24 is executed. In the display start process, the display control of the special display unit 191 is performed so that the display state of the special display unit 191 becomes a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the open / close execution mode. After that, the same processing as in steps S3003 to S3005 in the processing during determination of the special figure (FIG. 52) is executed. As a result, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is started, and the value of the special electric power counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S2710). It should be noted that the display mode of the special display unit 191 is set to a predetermined display state corresponding to the execution of the open / close execution mode when the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed even in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 52). The special display unit 191 may be displayed and controlled.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 84, the flag clearing process is executed. In the flag clearing process, various flags of the main RAM 84 used in this game round are cleared to "0". For example, in the distribution execution mode, "1" is set in any of the first to third small hit flags of the main RAM 84, but the flag in which the "1" is set is cleared by "0". .. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

Here, if the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 169 even though the distribution execution mode is shifted, the process for shifting to the support mode is not executed. As a result, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after shifting to the distribution execution mode, the support mode corresponding to the type of the small hit result that triggered the distribution execution mode and the duration table of the game times are displayed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being performed. Then, after the end of the distribution execution mode, the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, when the game round of the small hit result is executed, the value of the time-saving state counter 134 is 1 in the subtraction process (step S3006) of the time-saving state counter 134. If the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the subtraction is 1 is "0", the process for shifting to the low frequency support mode is executed. Therefore, the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode or the second Even if the game round of the small hit result is started in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode may be set in the distribution execution mode. In this case, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round is executed in the low frequency support mode.

Even in the game times of the small hit result, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ceiling counter 131 is executed in the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (step S3008), and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0". In the case of ", the process for shifting to the second high frequency support mode is executed with the ceiling time reduction as a trigger, so even if the game round of the small hit result is started in the low frequency support mode, the distribution is executed. The mode may be the second high frequency support mode. In this case, if the open / close execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode, a new game round is executed in the situation of the second high frequency support mode.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start process executed in step S2710 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

The opening / closing count setting process is executed on condition that the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed. In this case, if the current game result is a low-frequency jackpot result or a high-frequency jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter of the main RAM 84, and if the current game result is the first small hit result, the main RAM 84 Set "1" to the round counter of, and if the result of this game is the result of the second small hit, set "4" to the round counter of the main RAM 84, and if the result of this game is the result of the third small hit. For example, "9" is set in the round counter of the main RAM 84. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 82. In addition, information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit pieces by the main MPU 82. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S2711).

<Processing while the special electric train is open>
Next, the special electric power opening processing executed in step S2711 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has elapsed, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 and the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power is transmitted. By stopping the output, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the main RAM 84 By subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter and stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for special electric power, the special electric power winning device 32 is closed. When the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1, if the value of the round counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side. , The value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S2712). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the information of the ending period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side, and the ending command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound light side. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "8" corresponding to the special electric power end processing (step S2713). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the ending command, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process executed in step S2712 of the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the information on the open continuation period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter. .. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S2711).

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric stop processing executed in step S2713 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

When the value of the special figure side timer counter is "0", that is, when the ending period has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high frequency jackpot result, the first. If it is a 2 small hit result or a 3rd small hit result (step S3102: YES), "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3103), and the second of the main RAM 84 is set. The high frequency flag is cleared to "0" (step S3104). The first high frequency flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode by the main MPU 82 as already explained, and the second high frequency flag is the support mode as already explained. Is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not is the second high frequency support mode. When the first high frequency flag is set to "1" and the second high frequency flag is cleared to "0", the support mode becomes the first high frequency support mode.

After that, the information of "10" which is the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 (step S3105). The time saving state counter 134 is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) by the main MPU 82. As a result, the first high-frequency support mode is maintained until the ten game times, which is the first time-saving continuation number, are exhausted. In the first high frequency support mode, the special winning device 151 is frequently opened. When the game ball enters the special winning device 151, the small hit result is selected with a high probability, and the small hit result is selected to execute the distribution execution mode. Then, in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is generated by detecting the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 of the distribution winning device 161.

Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the first time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the information of "10" which is the first time saving continuation number is set in the time saving state counter 134. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is the second time saving result and the second high frequency support mode is set, the time saving state counter 134 is set to the second time saving continuation more than the number of times of the first time saving continuation. Information of "15" which is the number of times is set. That is, when the second high-frequency support mode is set due to the second time-saving result, the time-saving continuation is performed more times than when the first high-frequency support mode is set with the big hit result or the small hit result as a trigger. The number of times is set. This makes it possible to increase the advantage that the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result.

On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low frequency big hit result or a first small hit result (step S3102: NO), the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 Both of the frequency flags are cleared to "0" (step S3106). Further, the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As a result, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

When the process of step S3105 or the process of step S3107 is executed, the state specification command transmission process is executed (step S3108). In the transmission process, the state designation command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 determined by the processes of steps S3102 to S3107 is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. The sound / light side MPU 93 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute the effect corresponding to the content of the received state designation command.

After that, the information of "500" corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3109). Then, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S2705).

As described above, when the open / close execution mode ends, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a big hit result, the game shifts to the open / close execution mode when the game round is completed, and when the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result. Shifts to the open / close execution mode when the distribution execution mode in which the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 has ended, not when the game round has ended. That is, there are a plurality of types of routes for shifting to the open / close execution mode. In this configuration, when the open / close execution mode ends, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, so that the open / close execution mode occurs regardless of the route. It is possible to consolidate the process of setting the information on the number of fixed ceilings into one process. Therefore, while reducing the program capacity, it is possible to set the information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times of ceiling, in the ceiling counter 131 when the opening / closing execution mode is generated.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a power failure monitoring process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. The power failure monitoring process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

When a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85 (step S3201: YES), the game result is that the current state is in the open / close execution mode and the transition to the open / close execution mode is triggered. Is a low-frequency jackpot result or a first small hit result (step S3202 and step S3203: YES), and the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of "800" corresponding to the number of special ceilings (step S3204). The number of special ceilings is larger than the number of fixed ceilings set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S3109 of the special electric termination process (FIG. 53). On the other hand, when the current state is not the open / close execution mode (step S3202: NO), or even if the current state is the open / close execution mode, the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency jackpot result, the second small. If it is either a hit result or a third small hit result (step S3202: NO), the process of step S3204 is not executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3202, a negative determination is made in step S3203, or the process of step S3204 is executed, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3205), and the main RAM 84 The checksum of the above is calculated, the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 84 (step S3206), and the output port clearing process is further executed (step S3207). After that, the progress of the process is waited until the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

In the configuration in which the fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when the open / close execution mode ends as in the present embodiment, when the open / close execution mode is started triggered by the low frequency jackpot result, or the first When the distribution execution mode is generated triggered by the small hit result and the opening / closing execution mode is started by detecting the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 169 in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is set. If the setting value update process (step S117) or RAM clear process (step S119) is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is restarted, the set value is set. In the update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as in the first embodiment, while the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small while gaining the benefit of the opening / closing execution mode until the supply of the operating power is stopped. In particular, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result is executed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode, so that the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result or the first small hit result. Even if the above-mentioned fraudulent activity is performed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the hit result, no disadvantage occurs to the fraudulent person in relation to the support mode. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result, the ceiling counter 131 is performed before the supply of operating power is stopped. Information of "800" corresponding to the number of special ceilings is set in. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned fraudulent activity is performed, the number of special ceilings, which is a number larger than the number of fixed ceilings set when the open / close execution mode ends, is set in the ceiling counter 131. Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

On the other hand, even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body 12 When the supply of the operating power is started in the open state, the information of "500", which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 in step S114 in the main process (FIG. 13). As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the open / close execution mode triggered by the low-frequency jackpot result or the first small hit result, even though the above-mentioned fraudulent activity has not been performed. , The operating power is supplied in a situation where the game hall administrator does not execute any of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" and the game machine main body 12 is in the open state. By performing the operation to start the operation, it is possible to set the information of "500", which is the fixed number of ceilings, in the ceiling counter 131 as in the case where the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

<7th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the mode of selecting the variable display period of the game times is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a process during specific determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S3301: YES), and the game result of this game is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES). ), Information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side (step S3303), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound light side (step S3304). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S3305). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of starting the open / close execution mode, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or RAM clear processing (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times of ceiling, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, the game count counter provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3306). The game count counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the number of executions of the game rounds started after the open / close execution mode ends has reached the reference count. The reference number of times is the number of times that the last digit of the number of times the game is executed becomes the reference number. "7" is set as the reference number. Therefore, the number of executions of the game rounds started after the opening / closing execution mode ends is "7", "17", "27", "37", "47", "57", "67", "77", The number of executions of the game times in which the last digit is "7", such as "87", "97", "107", ..., Which is started after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, is the reference number of times. Will be. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3307). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric power start processing (step S609).

When the game result of the current game times is not the jackpot result (step S3302: NO), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is executed (step S3308). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 30) of the time saving state counter 134 in the first embodiment. After that, the setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S3309). The content of the process is the same as the setting process (FIG. 25) for the time saving result in the first embodiment. After that, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 29) of the ceiling counter 131 in the first embodiment. After that, the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 is executed (step S3311). The content of the process is the same as the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 in the first embodiment. After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3312). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S606).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a variable display period specifying process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is added by 1 (step S3401). That is, the game count counter is cleared to "0" in step S3306 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 55) when the open / close execution mode is started, and is displayed in a variable manner every time the game round is started regardless of the game state. 1 is added in step S3401 in the period specifying process (FIG. 56). In addition, the value of the game count counter is either when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs triggered by the time reduction result or when the transition to the second high-frequency support mode occurs triggered by the ceiling time reduction. However, it is not updated including "0" clear. As a result, the main MPU 82 can measure the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode is terminated by using the game number counter. Even when the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed in the main process (FIG. 13) when the supply of operating power is started, the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is also executed. Is cleared to "0". As a result, if the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the main side is until the open / close execution mode is newly generated. The MPU 82 can measure the number of game times executed after the start of supply of operating power by using the game number counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 is the reference count (step S3402). As described above, the reference number is the number of times the last digit of the number of times the game is executed becomes the reference number (specifically, "7"). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result has been selected in the hit / fail determination process of this game round (step S3403).

When the jackpot result is selected (step S3403: YES), the table for the jackpot result is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3404). In the situation where the variation display period selection process is executed in step S3411 with reference to the jackpot result table, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the jackpot result table. , Read out the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods of the reach display mode, but any of the variable display periods of the reach display mode is longer than the variable display period when the reach display does not occur. When the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is selected, the reach display is surely generated by the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

If the jackpot result is not selected (step S3403: NO), the non-reach table is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3405). In the situation where the variation display period selection process is executed in step S3411 with reference to the reach non-occurrence table, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is collated with the reach non-occurrence table. By doing so, the information of the variable display period in the mode in which the reach display does not occur is read out. There are a plurality of types of variable display periods in which reach display does not occur, but any of the plurality of types of variable display periods is shorter than the variable display period when reach display occurs. When the information of the variable display period in the mode in which the reach display does not occur is selected, the reach display is surely not generated in the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S3402 and "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: YES), the table group for high probability is changed from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84. (Step S3407). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for high probability is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, when "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: NO), "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. If it is set (step S3408: YES), the table group for high frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3409). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for high frequency support is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, when "1" is not set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3406: NO), "1" is set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. Is not set (step S3408: NO), the table group for low frequency support is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S3410). The mode of selecting the variable display period when the table group for low frequency support is referred to is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the process of step S3404, the process of step S3405, the process of step S3407, the process of step S3409, or the process of step S3410 is executed, the variable display period selection process is performed with reference to the table group read in any of these processes. Is executed (step S3411). The content of the selection process is as described above. Then, the information of the fluctuation display period selected in step S3411 is set in the special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3412). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

According to the above configuration, in the game times in which the number of executions after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the reference number of times, the reach display does not occur on the symbol display device 41 unless a big hit result is obtained. In this case, in the reference number of game times, the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed when the reach display occurs. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41 in relation to the number of times the game round is executed.

The game count counter for measuring the reference number of times is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode is executed, and when the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result occurs or when the ceiling time is shortened. "0" is not cleared in any case when the second high frequency support mode occurs. As a result, even if the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result or the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to make the reach display occur only when a big hit result is obtained in the game times in which the number of executions is the reference number of times. Therefore, the game times, which is the reference number of times, is easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that the symbol display device 41 may display the number of times the game has been executed since the opening / closing execution mode has ended. In this case, the display of the number of executions of the game times on the symbol display device 41 is when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the time reduction result occurs or when the second high-frequency support mode triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs. Do not clear "0" in any of the above. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the game times, which is the reference number of times.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3501). When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3501: YES), the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3502. In the high-probability state, the support mode becomes the first high-frequency support mode, but since the end trigger of the high-probability state is specified by using the high-probability state counter 133 as described above, the high-probability flag is set to "1". If is set, the process for subtracting the value of the time saving state counter 134 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3502: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the first high. In the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3503), and the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3504: YES). , The first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3505). As a result, the first high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is set. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

After that, the transmission process of the status specification command is executed (step S3506). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag and "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3507: YES), that is, the low probability mode and the second high. In the frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3508), and the value of the time saving state counter 134 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3509: YES). , The second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3510). As a result, the second high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is set. That is, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set. In addition, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3511). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time saving state has ended is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Upon receiving the state designation command, the sound / light side MPU 93 ends the execution of the effect corresponding to the time saving state in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65, and produces an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state. Let's get started.

After that, the setting process of the variable selection state counter 132 is executed (step S3512). In this case, information of 50 times, which is a predetermined switching reference number, is set in the fluctuation selection state counter 132 of the main RAM 84. Even in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the game round is consumed once in a situation where the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the variable selection state counter 132 at the end of the game round The value is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is decremented by 1 in a situation where the value of the variable selection state counter 132 is 1 or more and the value of the variable selection state counter 132 becomes “0”, the main RAM 84 "1" is set in the reach high frequency status flag of. When "1" is set in the reach high frequency state flag in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variable display period identification process is performed as in the first embodiment (FIG. 21). The variable display period of the game times is selected by referring to the table group for high reach frequency.

In other words, if either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed and the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted in the low probability mode, the low frequency support is provided. In the mode, the reach high frequency state is set in which the table group for high reach frequency is referred. Then, in the high reach state, the reach display is selected when the result is different from the situation in which the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not the high frequency state as in the first embodiment. In addition to increasing the probability of being reached, the variable display period when the reach display is selected tends to be longer than in the situation where the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used and the reach is not in the high frequency state. Therefore, if either the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed and the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted, the reach high frequency state occurs. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the short time state, the digestion efficiency of the game times is high, whereas in the high reach state, the digestion efficiency of the game times is low. In this case, it is possible to prevent the digestion efficiency of the game times from becoming excessively high by causing the reach high frequency state to occur after the time saving state is completed.

When the time reduction state ends, the reach high frequency state does not occur immediately, but when the game times of the predetermined switching reference number are exhausted after the time reduction state ends, the reach high frequency state shall be established. This makes it possible to prevent the digestive efficiency of the game from suddenly changing from a high state to a low state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration when the time reduction result or the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a time saving result in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When the game result of this game is a time saving result (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3602). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3602: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the process after step S3603. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. Time saving results are invalidated without setting the mode.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), as described above, the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is decremented by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high-probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed before the high-probability flag and the first high-frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. Then, when the setting process for the time saving result (FIG. 58) is executed at the relevant timing, "1" is still set in the high probability flag, so that the setting of the second high frequency support mode triggered by the time saving result is set. Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the time saving result in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the setting process (FIG. 58) for the time saving result is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3603). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. When the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S3603: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3604), and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If there is (step S3603: YES), the process of step S3604 is not executed. As a result, when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-reduced result is obtained in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603 or when the process of step S3604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S3605). When the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S3605: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. (Step S3606). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S3606: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S3607). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3608). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that a time saving state occurs and an image showing the first time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the reserved area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S3608 is executed after the process of step S3607 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the first time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the reserved area, the display of the image showing that the time reduction continuation number in the time reduction state has been reset and the image showing the reset first time reduction continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

When the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S3605: NO), the information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number is input to the time saving state counter 134 regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S3609). After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3610). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols (“3.4.1”) is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that a time saving state occurs and an image showing the second time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the reserved area and the image showing the number of times of the second time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S3610 is executed after the process of step S3609 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the second time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the reserved area, the display of the image showing that the time reduction continuation number in the time reduction state has been reset and the image showing the reset second time reduction continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3701). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S3701: YES), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3702. That is, in the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, and further, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133 as described above. As a result, in the final game round in the situation of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the high probability state counter 133 is subtracted by 1 in the subtraction process (FIG. 24) of the high probability state counter 133. When the value of the high probability state counter 133 becomes "0", the subtraction process (FIG. 59) of the ceiling counter 131 is executed before the high probability flag and the first high frequency flag are cleared to "0". Become. When the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed at that timing, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted because "1" is still set in the high probability flag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 from being executed in the game times in which the hit / fail determination process is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the high probability mode. Further, in the process of determining such an effect (FIG. 22), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 (FIG. 59) is executed before the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 (FIG. 24). It can be realized by setting.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. Similar to the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started when the 12 is in the open state, step S122 when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 is generated when the supply of the operating power is started, and the opening / closing execution. Only in step S1005 when the mode is started, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. .. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S3702: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3703. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and the game times of the number of times of continuation of the time reduction are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time reduction state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3702: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S3703), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction is 1 is "0". (Step S3704). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S3704: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1" regardless of whether "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. 1 ”is set (step S3705). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In some cases, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are set. The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode occur after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result is completed, and when 100 game times, which is the first time-shortening continuation number, are exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 game times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is exhausted in the low-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, is the first high-frequency support mode. It does not occur in the situation where.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number (step S3706). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S3706: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S3707). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S3708). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 are the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time reduction. A combination of out-of-design symbols (including a combination of out-of-reach symbols) that is a combination of symbols other than the combination of generated symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols ("3 ・ 4 ・ 1"). Is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and an image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation are displayed. .. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S3708 is executed after the process of step S3707 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the resetting of the first time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbols corresponding to the jackpot results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 Combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbol ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbol ("3 ・ 4 ・ 1"). (Including the combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving and the first time saving continuation number are reset. The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing that the first time saving continuation number is reset is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3706 or the process of step S3708 is executed, the reach high frequency state flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the reach high frequency state ends regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 22), the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 59) is executed after the time saving result setting process (FIG. 58) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. In the process (FIG. 59), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the process of step S3707 and step S3708 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the number of continuations of the first time reduction triggered by the ceiling time reduction in the game times that resulted in the first time reduction or the second time reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the time reduction result and the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being executed in duplicate. In particular, if the second time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the second time reduction result and then the first time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction continuation number will decrease. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Next, the subsequent gaming state when the time saving result or the ceiling time saving occurs in the time saving state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 60 (a) shows a period in which the open / close execution mode is set, FIG. 60 (b) shows a period in which “1” is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and FIG. 60 (c) shows a main period. The period in which "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the side RAM 84 is shown, FIG. 60 (d) shows the state of the time saving state counter 134, and FIG. 60 (e) shows the timing at which the first time saving result occurs. 60 (f) shows the timing at which the second time reduction result occurs, and FIG. 60 (g) shows the timing at which the ceiling time reduction occurs.

First, the case where the second time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (e) at the timing of t1, when the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the first time saving result and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). The flag. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, when the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and the timing of t2 is the second high frequency support mode, the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (f). When the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, the information of "150" corresponding to the second time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the second time saving continuation.

Next, a case where a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, but the profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction is not given will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (f) at the timing of t3, the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result, and when the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "150" information corresponding to the second time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). To. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the second time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, when the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 1 or more and the timing of t4, which is the second high frequency support mode, the ceiling time reduction occurs as shown in FIG. 60 (g). In this case, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is larger than the first time reduction continuation number set when the ceiling time reduction occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the value of the time saving state counter 134 is maintained as it is. Even if the ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the time reduction state, the remaining number of continuations at that time in the time reduction state is larger than the first time reduction continuation number set triggered by the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction. The occurrence of ceiling time reduction is invalidated.

Next, a case where a ceiling time reduction occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, and a profit due to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction is given will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60 (e) at the timing of t5, when the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the first time saving result and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed ends, it is shown in FIG. 60 (c). As shown in FIG. 60 (d), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84, and "100" information corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). The flag. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, when the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 1 or more and the timing of t6 which is the second high frequency support mode is t6, the ceiling time reduction occurs as shown in FIG. 60 (g). In this case, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is smaller than the first time reduction continuation number set when the ceiling time reduction occurs. Therefore, at the timing of t6 when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the first time saving continuation.

Next, a case where the first time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

When the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated as shown in FIG. 60 (a) at the timing of t7, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “1 high frequency flag” as shown in FIG. 60 (b). 1 ”is set, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the information of“ 100 ”corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), the result of the hit / miss determination process becomes the first time saving result at the timing of t8 in which the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more and is the first high frequency support mode. In this case, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is smaller than the number of times of the first time saving continuation set triggered by the occurrence of the first time saving result. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the hit / fail determination process is the first time reduction result is completed, the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is stored in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). It is set. As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time reduction result, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state in the first high frequency support mode is set to the first time reduction continuation number.

Next, a case where the second time saving result occurs in the middle of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode will be described.

When the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result is terminated as shown in FIG. 60 (a) at the timing of t9, the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “1 high frequency flag” as shown in FIG. 60 (b). 1 ”is set, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the information of“ 100 ”corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134. As a result, the time saving state of the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode is set, and the first time saving continuation number is set as the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state. Then, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is subtracted as shown in FIG. 60 (d) by repeatedly executing the game times that do not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

After that, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more, and the result of the hit / fail determination process becomes the second time saving result as shown in FIG. 60 (f) at the timing of t10 which is the first high frequency support mode. The number of times of the second time reduction continuation set triggered by the occurrence of the second time reduction result is larger than the number of times of the first time reduction continuation set in the time reduction state when the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R low probability result ends. be. Therefore, when the game round in which the result of the hit / fail determination process is the second time reduction result is completed, the information of "150" corresponding to the second time reduction continuation number is stored in the time reduction state counter 134 as shown in FIG. 60 (d). It is set. As a result, in the middle of the time saving state, the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state increases from the number of times less than the number of times of the first time saving continuation to the number of times of the second time saving continuation. In addition, the support mode in the time-saving state is not changed to the second high-frequency support mode, but the first high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second high-frequency support mode, is maintained. With the occurrence of the time reduction result, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state in the first high frequency support mode is set to the second time reduction continuation number.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it shifts to the time saving state of the time saving continuation number corresponding to the type of the time saving result. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the open / close execution mode based on the result of the pass / fail determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, and the low probability mode and the first high Frequency support mode continues. Further, when the second time reduction result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number, and the low probability mode and the first time are set. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than the second high-frequency support mode, is continued until then. A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state is larger than that. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the occurrence of the first time saving result this time The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without making new settings for the time saving state. Further, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the first time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. Further, when the second time reduction result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second time reduction mode and the second time reduction mode and the second time reduction mode are set in the state where the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is larger than before while continuing the second high frequency support mode. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When the time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of times of the time saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time saving result is the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. It will be the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of generating a time saving result in the time saving state.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the process shifts to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening / closing execution mode based on the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the first time reduction continuation number, the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction this time causes a new time reduction state. The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Further, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is the first. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. That is, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations of the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number that can be set by the newly generated ceiling time reduction is the subsequent time reduction state. It will be the remaining number of continuations. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is larger than before, so that the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA provided on the game board 24 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the game area PA in the present embodiment.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are used to guide means. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game board 24 has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, and a general drawing unit 38. Is provided. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided in place of the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. The configuration of the special winning device 151 is the same as that of the sixth embodiment.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game media can be used by the player. The payout of the game ball is executed. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and 15 when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. When the payout of one game ball is executed and the ball is entered into the first operating port 33, the payout of three game balls is executed, and when the ball is entered into the special winning device 151, the ball is paid out. One game ball is paid out. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 and the special winning device 151 may be the same.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball moves to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player operates the launch operation device 28 on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 of the left side region PA2 and the right side region PA3, and also the right side region. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first actuating port 33 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating port 33 is not provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating port 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down from the game area PA toward the first operating port 33. Further, the first actuating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage portion 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage portion 36b via the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the center of the stage portion 36b in the lateral direction to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33.

As described above, the first operating port 33 is provided in the lower region PA4, but on the upstream side of the first operating port 33 toward the right region PA3, a game ball flowing down the right region PA3 is the first. A regulation nail 24c is provided so as not to reach the 1 actuating port 33. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided for the left side region PA2, and is not provided for the right side region PA3. With these configurations, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the first operating port 33 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the launching operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, it is not possible to win a prize in the first operating port 33. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball can play in the right side region PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage portion 36b is provided with respect to the right side region PA3. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so as to flow down, the first actuating port 33 may be configured to be able to win a prize.

The special winning device 151 is installed in the right area PA3. That is, the special winning device 151 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

A through gate 35 is provided above the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If is operated, a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, a special winning device 151 is provided at a position vertically below the through gate 35, and a special electric winning device 32 is provided downstream of the special winning device 151 in the right region PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the special winning device 151 or the special electric winning device 32.

The right side region PA3 in which the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35 are centrally arranged is defined by the side wall 36f whose left side is bulging in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the gaming board 24 in the variable display unit 36. The right side is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and is defined by a regulation wall protruding in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side region PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower region PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the ball entry devices of the game balls in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning device 151 and the through gate 35.

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through gate 35 in the right region PA3 is set to guide the game ball flowing down the right region PA3 to the through gate 35. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 is easy to enter the through gate 35, and as the ball is easy to enter the through gate 35, it is easy to enter the special winning device 151.

The guidance unit 152 of the special prize device 151 is switched from the non-induction state to the guidance state based on the winning of the through gate 35, so that the special prize device 151 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the winning / failing determination process is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner of the gaming area PA where the game ball does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 38a. Then, when the result of the normal map pass / fail determination process is the electric combination open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variation display of the normal figure display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the normal electric open state. In the normal power open state, the guidance unit 152 is in the guidance state in a predetermined mode, so that the special winning device 151 is in the open state in the predetermined mode.

Even in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode, a first high-frequency support mode, and a second high-frequency support mode are set as support modes. The probability of winning an open prize, the mode of selecting the duration of the variable display times in the normal map display unit 38a, and the mode of selecting the stop result in the normal map display unit 38a are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the mode (opening continuation period, number of times of opening, maximum number of winnings, interval period) in which the special winning device 151 is opened when the normal electric power is opened in each support mode is described in each of the first embodiments. This is the same as the mode in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state (opening continuation period, open number of times, maximum number of winnings, interval period) when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in the support mode.

In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the special winning device 151, but in the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode, the first operating port The probability of winning the special winning device 151 is higher than that of 33. Then, when a prize is won in the special winning device 151, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the player holds too many balls. You can play the game without reducing it.

The winning / failing determination process is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151. Then, the result of the hit / fail determination process is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b as in the first embodiment. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a change display of a pattern is performed by performing a hit / fail determination process on the first hold information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the first special figure display unit 37a is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result on the first special figure display unit 37a is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the winning / failing determination process is performed on the second reserved information acquired by the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 151, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the result corresponding to the determination result of the hit / fail determination process is displayed. In this case, as the determination result of the hit / fail determination process, there are a jackpot result, a time saving result, and a missed result as in the first embodiment, but the content of the stop result of the second special figure display unit 37b is the jackpot result. There is a difference between the time saving result and the off result. The display of the stop result on the second special figure display unit 37b is maintained until the next game round is started and the new pattern variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure holding display unit 37c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Further, in the special figure unit 37, a second special figure holding display unit 37d is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display unit 37b. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the special prize device 151 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

The display range of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure hold display unit 37c, and the second special figure hold display unit 37d is also the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is a narrower range than. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 is higher than that of the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure hold display unit 37c, and the second special figure hold display unit 37d. It will be possible to increase.

When the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b performs variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is executed, the symbol display device 41 performs a display effect accordingly. When the effect for game rounds is executed in the symbol display device 41, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first hold display area 42a, the second hold display area 42b, and the state suggestion area 43 are displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Set. Further, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect for the game round but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts to after the big hit result is performed.

When a jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the special winning device 151, the game shifts to the open / close execution mode after the game rounds corresponding to the jackpot result are completed. In the open / close execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device 32. The special electric winning device 32 is provided at a position below the special winning device 151 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric winning device 32 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 32 causes the game ball to flow down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when a jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process. ing. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state. Further, the execution content of the open / close execution mode is the same as that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 82 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the present embodiment also includes a hit random number counter C1, a type random number counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variable type counter CS, and a general electric random number counter C4. The contents of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variable type counter CS and the general electric random number counter C4, and the contents of the processing using these counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS It is the same as the first embodiment. Further, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, the numerical information of the normal number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 84c, and the configuration of the normal figure holding area 84c is the same as that of the first embodiment. Is.

Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the first special feature of the main RAM 84 as in the first embodiment when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33. It is stored in the holding area 111. In each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, when a prize is generated in the special winning device 151, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 in the first embodiment. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 112 of the main RAM 84 in the same manner as in the case of the above.

The execution area 192 for the special drawing includes the execution area 192a for the first special drawing and the execution area 192b for the second special drawing. The execution area 192a for the first special figure is an area in which the first hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail determination process, the distribution determination process, or the like is stored when the variation display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. be. The execution area 192b for the second special figure is an area in which the second hold information to be subjected to the hit / fail determination process, the distribution determination process, etc. is stored when the variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b. be. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the first hold information stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure hold area 111 is executed for the first special figure. It will be shifted to area 192a. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the second hold information stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure hold area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Will be shifted.

In the present embodiment, at least a part of the period of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b can overlap. That is, even while the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, and the game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. The game round in the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even during the process.

When the pass / fail determination process is executed for the first hold information, the first pass / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is referred to in the low probability mode as in the first embodiment, and the high probability mode may be used. For example, the hit / fail table 123 at the time of high probability is referred to. Further, when the hit / fail determination process is executed for the second hold information, the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability is referred to in the low probability mode as in the first embodiment, and the high probability mode is performed. If so, the hit / miss table 123 at the time of high probability is referred to. Further, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is referred to in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the minute determination process is executed and the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the first reserved information, the time saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is referred to as in the first embodiment. The distribution determination process for shortening the time is executed. Further, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second reserved information, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is referred to in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the minute determination process is executed and the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process for the second reserved information, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is referred to as in the first embodiment. The distribution determination process for shortening the time is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the special figure special electric control process, the first special figure special electric control process corresponding to the first hold information and the second special figure special electric control process corresponding to the second hold information are set. These processes will be described below.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric control process executed by the main MPU 82, and FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric control process executed by the main MPU 82. Since the processing configurations of the first special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are similar, the corresponding processing configurations will be described.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the first hold information acquisition process is first executed (step S3801). Further, in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), first, the second hold information acquisition process is executed (step S3901).

In the process of acquiring the first reserved information, a prize is generated in the first operating port 33, and the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit storage number. , The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the first hold information, and the first hold information in the first area 111a to the fourth area 111d of the first special figure hold area 111 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been used. When the first reserved information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the first special figure reserved display unit 37c in accordance with the increase in the number of the first reserved information this time is set. conduct. In addition, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 displays the number of the first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of holds. To change in correspondence with.

In the process of acquiring the second reserved information, when the special winning device 151 has won a prize and the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit storage number. The hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the second hold information, and the second hold information in the first area 112a to the fourth area 112d of the second special figure hold area 112 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the non-existent areas. When the second hold information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold information this time is set. conduct. In addition, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 displays the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of holds. To change in correspondence with.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after the hold information acquisition process (step S3801 or step S3901) is executed, the information is stored in the main ROM 83. Read the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902). In the special figure special electric address table, the start of a program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special electric special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84. The address is set. The first special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) by the main MPU 82. The second special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) by the main MPU 82. The value of each special figure special electric counter corresponds to the start address, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S3805, step S3905) is executed, and each When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure fluctuation processing (step S3806, step S3906) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure is confirmed. The middle processing (step S3807, step S3907) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric counter is "3", the special electric start processing (step S3808, step S3908) is executed, and the value of each special figure special electric counter is executed. When is "4", the special electric power opening process (step S3809, step S3909) is executed, and when the value of each special figure special electric power counter is "5", the special electric power closing process (step S3810, step S3910) is executed. ) Is executed, and when the value of each special electric power counter is "6", the special electric power end processing (step S3811, step S3911) is executed.

In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S3802, step S3902), the corresponding special figure special electric counter The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S3803, step S3903), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3804, step S3904). Hereinafter, the special figure change start process (step S3805, step S3905), the special figure change process (step S3806, step S3906), and the special figure determination process (step S3807, step S3907) will be described. The special electric start processing (step S3808, step S3908), the special electric opening processing (step S3809, step S3909) and the special electric closing processing (step S3810, step S3910) are described in steps S609 to S611 in the first embodiment. It is the same. Further, in the special electric termination processing (step S3811, step S3911), when the high probability state counter 133 is not provided in the main RAM 84 and the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability result or the 10R high probability result ends. The special electric termination process in the first embodiment is described in the above, except that the high-probability mode and the high-probability state of the first high-frequency support mode are continued until the next game round that results in a big hit occurs. The same process as (FIG. 23) is executed.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing of step S3805 and step S3905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65.

First, it is determined whether or not the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time (step S4001). As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed in the other. In this case, if step S4001 is executed and the process for the jackpot state is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time, the processes after step S4002 are executed. The start of new game rounds is restricted without any restrictions. As a result, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is executed triggered by the game times in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times in the other are not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more. If this is the case, the processing after step S4002 is not executed, and if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. It is a configuration in which it is determined in step S4001 whether or not it is, and if it is 3 or more, the processing after step S4002 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the corresponding number of reserved items is one or more (step S4002). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not one or more first reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 111, and this time In the case of the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not one or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, the data setting process is executed (step S4003). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the data stored in the first area 111a of the first special figure holding area 111 is transferred to the execution area 192a for the first special figure. Moving. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 111 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d to the lower area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 111a to 111d, and the second area 111b → the first area 111a and the third area 111c → the third area 111c. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 111b, 4th area 111d → 3rd area 111c, the 4th area 111d is cleared to “0”. In this case, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure hold area 111 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. By transmitting the command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 responds to the decrease in the number of hold information by displaying the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41. Let me change it.

In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64), the data stored in the first area 112a of the second special figure holding area 112 is transferred to the execution area 192b for the second special figure. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 112a to 112d to the lower area side, and the second area 112b → the first area 112a and the third area 112c → the third area 112c. After the data in each area is shifted such as 2 area 112b, 4th area 112d → 3rd area 112c, the 4th area 112d is cleared to “0”. In this case, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure hold area 112 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93. By transmitting the command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 103, the sound light side MPU 93 responds to the decrease in the number of hold information by displaying the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41. Let me change it.

After the data setting process is executed, the game round is executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64), and the hold information that triggered the start of the game round is the jackpot result. (Step S4004). If a negative determination is made in step S4004, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S4005). In the win / fail determination process, if the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the first win / fail table 121 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, and the win / fail lottery mode has a low probability. If the mode is the mode and the start target of the game round is the second hold information, the second hit / miss table 122 at the time of low probability is read from the main ROM 83, and if the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the start target of the game round is the first. Whether it is the 1st hold information or the 2nd hold information, the pass / fail table 123 at the time of high probability is read from the main ROM 83. After reading the hit / fail table, the hit / fail judgment is made from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read, and it is determined which game result in the hit / miss table the read numerical information corresponds to.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S4006: YES), the distribution determination process for the jackpot is executed (step S4007). In the jackpot distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the jackpot distribution table 125 for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the game round is the second hold information. If so, the jackpot distribution table 126 for the second special figure is read out. Then, from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round, the information for distribution determination, that is, the type random number is used. By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is possible to specify which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process for the jackpot, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S4008). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S4009). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of this game, is stored in advance in the main ROM 83 for the stop for the jackpot result. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S4009, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S4008 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a time saving result (step S4010: YES), the distribution determination process for time saving is executed (step S4011). In the time-saving distribution determination process, if the start target of the game round is the first hold information, the time-saving distribution table 127 for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the game round is the second hold information. If so, the time saving distribution table 128 for the second special figure is read out. Then, from the hold information stored on the side of the execution area 192a for the first special figure and the execution area 192b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round, the information for distribution determination, that is, the type random number is used. By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is possible to specify which kind of time saving result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the time saving determination process, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in the distribution determination process (step S4012). After that, the stop result setting process for the time saving result is executed (step S4013). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the time saving result stop. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the time saving result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the time saving result. In step S4013, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of the time saving result specified in step S4012 is stored in the main RAM 84. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each time reduction result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the time reduction results. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in step S4013 is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither the jackpot result nor the time saving result (step S4010: NO), the stop result setting process for the missed result is executed (step S4014). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the time saving result, and further, the first special feature. It is one type common to the figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S4004, that is, the game round is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time, and the hold that triggered the start of the game round is held. When the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the missed result already described is executed without executing the hit / fail determination process (step S4014). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be started in the other. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already executed game round corresponds to one of the jackpot results, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly executed game round is used. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it will be a game time corresponding to the off result. This makes it possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being executed in duplicate. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game round is prevented when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information for which the game round is to be started has been acquired. Regardless of this, it may become clear that the game times currently being executed are the game times corresponding to the jackpot result when the new game times are not started, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by configuring the configuration so that a new game round can be started.

When the processing of step S4009, the processing of step S4013, or the processing of step S4014 is executed, the time saving state counter 134 of the main side RAM 84 is provided with the condition that the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 1 or more (step S4015: YES). The value is subtracted by 1 (step S4016). Then, when the value of the time reduction state counter 134 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4017: YES), the special time reduction end flag and the second time reduction end flag provided in the main RAM 84 are specified this time. Figure “1” is set in the time saving end flag on the side corresponding to the special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) (step S4018). The first time reduction end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the time reduction state should be ended and the normal game state should be entered when the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a is completed. be. The second time reduction end flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the time reduction state should be ended and the normal game state should be entered when the game round in the second special figure display unit 37b is completed. be.

When a negative determination is made in step S4015, a negative determination is made in step S4017, or the process of step S4018 is executed, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S4019). The process for specifying the variable display period will be described later. After that, the variable command and the type command corresponding to the game times to be started this time are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93 (step S4020). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S4019, and the game times to be started are included in either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Contains information that indicates whether it is supported. The type command contains information indicating whether the game times to be started this time correspond to the jackpot result, the time saving result, or the missed result, and when it corresponds to the jackpot result. Contains information indicating which type of jackpot result it is, and if it corresponds to a time saving result, it contains information indicating which type of time saving result it is.

In the low frequency support mode, the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the variation command and the type command indicating that the first hold information is the start target of the game round, and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are received. While the variable display of the symbol in the above is started and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol is performed by the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65, it is shown that the second hold information is the start target of the game round. Even if the variation command and the type command are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are not executed. Therefore, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the low frequency support mode, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. In contrast to the variable display of the symbol in, when the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed in the low frequency support mode, the variable display of the symbol is performed in the second special symbol display unit 37b. On the other hand, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol is not performed.

A small divided display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and when the game round triggered by the second hold information is executed in the low frequency support mode, the display area is used. It may be configured so that blinking display or color switching display is performed. In addition, when a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the second hold information in the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 announces the occurrence of the jackpot result at the timing when the game round ends. When the time saving result is generated in the game round triggered by the second hold information in the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 announces the occurrence of the time saving result at the timing when the game round is finished. Is done.

In the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the sound-light side MPU 93 has a symbol when it receives a variable command and a type command indicating that the second hold information is the start target of the game round. While the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are used to start the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41 and to perform the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol, the first hold information is the game time. Even if a variation command and a type command indicating that the start target is received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the corresponding effects in the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 are displayed. Do not let it run. Therefore, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of the symbol is not performed, whereas in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, the game round triggered by the second hold information is performed. When this is executed, the second special symbol display unit 37b displays the variation of the symbol, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 display the variation of the symbol.

A small divided display area is set on the outer edge side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed in the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode. If so, a blinking display or a color switching display may be performed in the display area. In addition, if a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 displays the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of a jackpot result, and if a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the relevant game round is performed. At the end timing, the symbol display device 41 performs an effect of notifying the occurrence of the time saving result.

After that, in the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the current game round, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S4021). If the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special electric power counter is added by 1 (step S4022).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a variable display period specifying process executed in step S4019.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4101: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, this game round. It is determined whether or not the start target of is the first reserved information (step S4102). When the target for starting the game round this time is the first hold information (step S4102: YES), the table group for the normal variable period is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4103). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the normal variable period (step S4104), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selection process is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S4105). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the first special figure side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the situation where the variation display period selection process in step S4104 is executed with reference to the table group for the normal variation period, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for the normal variable period, the information of the variable display period of the reach display mode is read out.

When a time saving result occurs in this game, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is collated with the table corresponding to the time saving result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period, so that the variation display corresponding to the time saving result is displayed. Read the period information. Multiple types of information on the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result are set, and it corresponds to the fact that reach display occurs longer than the shortest period on the special map side regardless of the variable display period corresponding to the time saving result. The period is shorter than the variable display period. Specifically, 10 seconds, 11 seconds, 12 seconds, and 13 seconds are set as the variation display period corresponding to the time saving result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS is the period of this game. Selected as the variable display period of times.

If the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the game starts in the situation where three or more first hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 111. If the game times have been played, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game times this time. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game round and the off-reach display does not occur, the first hold information is the execution target of the game round and one in the first special figure hold area 111 or In the case of a game round started in a situation where two first hold information is stored, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is applied to the table corresponding to the complete deviation result in the table group for the normal fluctuation period. By collating with each other, the information of the variable display period corresponding to the complete deviation result is read out. Multiple types of information on the variable display period for complete deviation results are set, and any variable display period for complete deviation results is longer than the shortest period on the special map side, and the variable display period for time-saving results is set. And the period is shorter than the variable display period corresponding to the occurrence of reach display. Specifically, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, and 8 seconds are set as the fluctuation display period corresponding to the complete deviation result, and the period corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS is this time. It is selected as the variable display period of the game times.

In the case of the low frequency support mode (step S4101: NO), when the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4102: NO), the special figure is set as the variable display period of the current game round. Information on the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the side is set in the second special figure side timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S4106). The update of the numerical information set in the second special figure side timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

As described above, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. If the second hold information is the start target of the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special map side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. .. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4101: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency flag. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4107). When the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4107: YES), the long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special figure side is mainly used as the variable display period of the current game round. It is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the side RAM 84 (step S4108).

In the case of the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4101: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4107: NO), a short period of time. The table group for fluctuation is read from the main ROM 83 to the main RAM 84 (step S4109). Then, the variation display period selection process is executed using the table group for short-term variation (step S4110), and the information of the variation display period selected in the selection process is input to the second special figure side of the main RAM 84. It is set in the timer counter (step S4111).

In the situation where the variation display period selection process in step S4110 is executed with reference to the table group for short-term variation, if a big hit result occurs in this game round, or the result of the hit / fail determination process is out of order. If the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that is being executed at the same time corresponds to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display and the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round, the variation type counter at that time. By collating the numerical information of CS with the reach-corresponding table in the table group for short-term variation, the information of the variation display period of the reach display mode is read out.

If the jackpot result does not occur and the reach display does not occur in this game, the game is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. If it is a time, the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game time this time. This makes it possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the second hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if the game round is started in a situation where two or more second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. The information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side is read out.

On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot result does not occur and the reach display does not occur in this game round, the game round started in the situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112. In the case of, the information of the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special figure side is read out as the fluctuation display period of the game times this time. This makes it possible to secure the situation in which the second hold information is acquired in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Further, even if a time saving result occurs in this game round, if it is a game round started in a situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 112, the special figure is set. The information for the middle period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the drawing side is read out.

As described above, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, if the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the variation display of the game round is referred to with reference to the table group for short-term fluctuation. While the period is selected, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the game is played for a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side regardless of the game result of the game round. Selected as the variable display period of times. The long term on the special map side is longer than the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special map side selected in the game times of the off result that the reach display does not occur triggered by the second hold information. be. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3 to play the game.

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S3806 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3906 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64) will be described.

When the fluctuation display period of the current game times on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not elapsed and the display content of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is updated, the special figure is concerned. Set the data for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the following order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. , It is performed in a certain manner regardless of the content of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41. For example, when a predetermined multiple update timings occur, the display contents of the pattern make one round and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period elapses, the display pattern is concerned. Regardless of which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b whose variable display period has elapsed. After that, the information on the stop mode of the pattern of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 at the start of the game round, which is the end target this time, is read out. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 67 for the special figure finalizing process executed in step S3807 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63) and step S3907 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 64). I will explain while doing.

When the final stop period has elapsed (step S4201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S4202: YES), the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to FIG. 64) is "0", the special figure on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64). It is determined whether or not the game times are being executed on the display units 37a and 37b (step S4203). When the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. 64) is not "0" (step S4203: NO), the current special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63, FIG. The variation display of the pattern on the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side not corresponding to FIG. 64) is terminated in a state where the disengagement result is stopped and displayed (step S4204). Then, the special figure special electric counter on the side that does not correspond to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to “0” (step S4205). As a result, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the variable display of one of the patterns is stopped, resulting in a big hit result and the opening / closing execution mode is set. If it occurs, the variable display of the other pattern is forcibly terminated with the result being stopped and displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S4203 or when the process of step S4205 is executed, the information corresponding to the opening period (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponds to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63, 64). It is set in the timer counter on the side of the sound (step S4206), and the opening command is transmitted to the MPU93 on the sound and light side (step S4207). When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the opening command, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

After that, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131 of the main RAM 84 (step S4208). That is, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the open / close execution mode is started, information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is set in the ceiling counter 131. In the case of a configuration in which the fixed ceiling count is set in the ceiling counter 131 during the open / close execution mode or when the open / close execution mode ends, instead of starting the open / close execution mode, the operation is performed after the open / close execution mode is started. If a fraudulent act is performed so that the set value update process (step S117) or the RAM clear process (step S119) is executed when the power supply is stopped and the operating power supply is restarted, the set value update process (step S117) is performed. In step S117) or RAM clear processing (step S119), the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is cleared as described above, whereas the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained, so that the operating power is supplied. While gaining the benefit of the open / close execution mode until is stopped, there is a risk that the game will be restarted in a situation where the number of remaining ceilings is small. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with information of 500 times, which is the fixed number of times of ceiling, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be neutralized.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is added by 1, and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S4209).

If the game result of the current game is not a big hit result (step S4202: NO), the end determination process of the time saving state is executed in step S4210, the setting process for the time saving result is executed in step S4211, and the setting process for the time saving result is executed. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed at. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63), the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0", and this process is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 63). If it corresponds to FIG. 64), the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S4213).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the end determination process of the time saving state executed in step S4210 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67).

First, in the main RAM 84, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving end flag corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) this time (step S4301). That is, if this processing corresponds to the first special power control processing (FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84, and this time. If the process corresponds to the second special electric power control process (FIG. 64), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the time saving end flag corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 63 and 64) is cleared to "0" (step S4302). After that, both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0" (step S4303). As a result, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is set.

Even while the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, and the game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. In the configuration in which the game rounds on the first special figure display unit 37a can be started even while the game is in progress, the time saving state is when the end-corresponding game rounds started in the situation where the remaining number of continuations is one is completed. finish. In this case, even if the game rounds started after the end-corresponding game rounds are started and end earlier than the end-corresponding game rounds, the time-saving state continues and ends when the end-corresponding game rounds are finished. .. On the other hand, in the time-saving state (that is, the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), if the game is a game in which the second hold information is executed, the game is played with reference to the table group for short-term fluctuation. While the variable display period of the times is selected, the long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side is uniquely selected in the game times in which the first hold information is the execution target. Then, in the time saving state, basically, by operating the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3, the game times with the second hold information as the execution target are repeatedly executed, and the time saving state is achieved. By operating the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 so that the first hold information becomes the execution target of the game times when the remaining number of continuations of is one. It is possible to make the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state the game times for which the first hold information is executed. Then, since the end-corresponding game round is started with the first hold information as the execution target, the end-corresponding game round is executed for a long period of time (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special drawing side. While the game round corresponding to the end is being executed, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3 so that the game round with the second hold information as the execution target is repeatedly executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to substantially increase the number of continuations of the time saving state.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the time saving result executed in step S4211 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67).

When the game result of this game is a time saving result (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4402). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S4402: YES), the setting process for the time saving result is terminated without executing the processes after step S4403. That is, even if the time saving result (first time saving result or second time saving result) is selected in the winning / failing determination process of the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the second high frequency support is triggered by the time saving result. Time saving results are invalidated without setting the mode.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4403). That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. When the support mode is not the first high frequency support mode (step S4403: NO), "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4404), and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. If there is (step S4403: YES), the process of step S4404 is not executed. As a result, when the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode are maintained, and the time saving result is obtained in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode. If this happens, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are maintained, and if the time-reduced result is obtained in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4403 or when the process of step S4404 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current time saving result is the first time saving result (step S4405). When the time saving result this time is the first time saving result (step S4405: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the number of times of the first time saving continuation. (Step S4406). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S4406: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S4407). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4408). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S4408 is executed after the process of step S4407 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbols (“1, 2, 3”) is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that a time saving state occurs and an image showing the first time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the reserved area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S4408 is executed after the process of step S4407 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the first time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the first time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the reserved area, the display of the image showing that the time reduction continuation number in the time reduction state has been reset and the image showing the reset first time reduction continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

When the current time saving result is the second time saving result (step S4405: NO), the information of "150" corresponding to the second time saving continuation number is input to the time saving state counter 134 regardless of the current value of the time saving state counter 134. Set (step S4409). After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4410). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the second time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbols (“3.4.1”) is stopped and displayed. Then, after these stop results are stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 displays an image showing that a time saving state occurs and an image showing the second time saving continuation number. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state occurs in the reserved area and the image showing the number of times of the second time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S4410 is executed after the process of step S4409 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, it indicates that the second time saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the second time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. In this case, in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, a combination of the first time-saving generated symbols (“1 ・ 2 ・ 3”), and a combination of the second time-saving generated symbols (“3”).・ 4.1 ”) and the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, which is a combination of symbols other than the out-of-reach symbol combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that the time saving continuation number in the time saving state is actually reset and an image showing the second time saving continuation number are displayed. Is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. In the reserved area, the display of the image showing that the time reduction continuation number in the time reduction state has been reset and the image showing the reset second time reduction continuation number is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

When the process of step S4408 or the process of step S4410 is executed, each of the first time reduction end flag and the second time reduction end flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4411). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game times corresponding to the end in the time-saving state are being executed for a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target. If a time reduction result occurs in the game times, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first reserved information as the execution target.

With the above configuration, when a time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it shifts to the time saving state of the time saving continuation number corresponding to the type of the time saving result. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the open / close execution mode based on the result of the pass / fail determination process in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

When the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is reset to 100 times which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, and the low probability mode and the first high Frequency support mode continues. Further, when the second time reduction result occurs in the low probability mode and the first high frequency support mode, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number, and the low probability mode and the first time are set. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the first high-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, in which the second operating port 34 is more likely to be opened than the second high-frequency support mode, is continued until then. A situation occurs in which the number of remaining continuations of the time saving state is larger than that. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

If the value of the time saving state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the occurrence of the first time saving result this time The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue without making new settings for the time saving state. Further, if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the number of times of the first time saving continuation, when the first time saving result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time saving state counter 134 is set. The low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue in a state where the first time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. Further, when the second time reduction result occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second time reduction mode and the second time reduction mode and the second time reduction mode are set in the state where the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is set to 150 times, which is the second time reduction continuation number. High frequency support mode continues. As a result, when a time saving result occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is larger than before while continuing the second high frequency support mode. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the time saving result in the time saving state.

When a time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of times of the time saving continuation that can be set by the newly generated time saving result is the remaining number of times in the subsequent time saving state. It will be the number of continuations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of generating a time saving result in the time saving state.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 executed in step S4213 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4501). Then, when "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S4501: YES), the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4502. That is, in the game times executed in the situation of the high probability mode, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, and further, the subtraction of the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not executed, so that the ceiling time is shortened. Nor.

When "1" is not set in the high probability flag (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. Similar to the first embodiment, the process of setting information in the ceiling counter 131 is a situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed, and the gaming machine main body. Step S114 when the supply of the operating power is started when the 12 is in the open state, step S122 when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 is generated when the supply of the operating power is started, and the opening / closing execution. Only in step S4208 when the mode is started, after the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", the value of the ceiling counter 131 is maintained at "0" unless any of the above processes is executed. .. On the other hand, the ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 and the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more. In this case, if the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" as described above (step S4502: NO), the subtraction process of the main ceiling counter 131 is terminated without executing the processes after step S4503. As a result, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 becomes "0", and a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs, and the game times of the number of times of continuation of the time reduction are digested without the big hit result occurring in the time reduction state. When the time reduction state ends and the game state becomes the normal game state, the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction does not occur even if the digestion of the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is 1 or more (step S4502: YES), the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted by 1 (step S4503), and whether or not the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the subtraction is 1 is "0". (Step S4504). When the value of the ceiling counter 131 is "0" (step S4504: YES), the second high frequency flag is set to "1" regardless of whether "1" is set in the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84. 1 ”is set (step S4505). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained, and the ceiling time is shortened in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In some cases, the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are set. The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode occur after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R low-probability result is completed, and when 100 game times, which is the first time-shortening continuation number, are exhausted. Since the first high-frequency support mode ends, the ceiling time reduction that occurs when 500 game times, which is the fixed number of ceilings, is exhausted in the low-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends, is the first high-frequency support mode. It does not occur in the situation where.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 134 of the main RAM 84 is "100" or more corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number (step S4506). When the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than the value of the first time reduction continuation number (step S4506: NO), the information of "100" corresponding to the first time reduction continuation number is set in the time reduction state counter 134 (step S4507). ..

After that, the transmission process of the state specification command is executed (step S4508). In the transmission process, a state specification command indicating that the time reduction state has started or the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU93.

If the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in a situation where the current gaming state is not the time-saving state, the state specification command indicates that the time-saving state of the first time-saving continuation number is started. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the time saving state of the first time saving continuation number is started is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 are the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result, the first time reduction. A combination of out-of-design symbols (including a combination of out-of-reach symbols) that is a combination of symbols other than the combination of generated symbols ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time-saving generated symbols ("3 ・ 4 ・ 1"). Is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, an image showing that a time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs and an image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation are displayed. .. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing the number of times of the first time saving continuation is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

If the process of step S4508 is executed after the process of step S4507 is executed in the situation where the current gaming state is the time-saving state, it indicates that the first time-saving continuation number has been reset to the state specification command. Contains information. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the state designation command, the effect indicating that the first time reduction continuation number has been reset is executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Execute the process to make it. Since the resetting of the first time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs in the game times in which neither the jackpot result nor the time reduction result occurs, the symbols corresponding to the jackpot results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 Combination of symbols other than the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbol ("1 ・ 2 ・ 3") and the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbol ("3 ・ 4 ・ 1"). (Including the combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed. Then, after the stop result is stopped and displayed and the definite display over the final stop period is completed, the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving and the first time saving continuation number are reset. The image shown is displayed. Since the timing at which the image is displayed is the timing at which the game round ends, a new game round can be started immediately. In this case, the area where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set is reduced on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and the reduced area is used to display the variation of the symbol corresponding to the new game times. The display of the image showing that the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving occurs in the secured area and the image showing that the first time saving continuation number is reset is continued. The display of the image ends when the game round ends once, and when the display of the image ends, the area in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set returns to the original size.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4506 or when the process of step S4508 is executed, each of the first time reduction end flag and the second time reduction end flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S4509). As a result, the second hold information is executed while the game times corresponding to the end in the time-saving state are being executed for a long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special figure side with the first hold information as the execution target. If a time reduction result occurs in the game times, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first reserved information as the execution target.

Here, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 67), the ceiling counter 131 subtraction process (FIG. 70) is executed after the time saving result setting process (FIG. 69) is executed, and the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted. In the process (FIG. 70), even if the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction is "0", if the value of the time saving state counter 134 is "100" or more, the processes of steps S4507 and S4508 are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the number of continuations of the first time reduction triggered by the ceiling time reduction in the game times that resulted in the first time reduction or the second time reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the time reduction result and the resetting of the time reduction continuation number triggered by the ceiling time reduction from being executed in duplicate. In particular, if the second time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the second time reduction result and then the first time reduction continuation number is reset triggered by the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction continuation number will decrease. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

With the above configuration, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the process shifts to the time reduction state of the first time reduction continuation number. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the transition to the time saving state occurs without going through the opening / closing execution mode based on the digestion of the game times of the number of ceilings in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

If the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is 100 times or more, which is the number of continuations of the first time reduction when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the time reduction state is newly related to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction this time. The low-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue without any setting. Further, if the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is less than 100 times, which is the first time reduction continuation number, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the low probability mode and the second high frequency support mode, the value of the time reduction state counter 134 is the first. The low-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode continue in a state where the time reduction continuation number is set to 100 times. That is, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations of the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number that can be set by the newly generated ceiling time reduction is the subsequent time reduction state. It will be the remaining number of continuations. As a result, when the ceiling time reduction occurs in the second high frequency support mode, a situation may occur in which the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is larger than before, so that the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state. It is possible to increase the advantage.

Next, the left-handed notification process executed by the sound-light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. The left-handed notification process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When it is not the high probability mode (step S4601: NO) but the high frequency support mode (first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) (step S4602: YES), the current high frequency support mode is started. It is determined whether or not the number of game times executed after that is the notification reference number (step S4603). The notification reference number is when the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode (that is, the time saving state) is five. This 5 times is set as the number of times of the value which added 1 to the holding upper limit number of the 2nd holding information in the 2nd special figure holding area 112.

The left-handed notification process is executed in step S4603 (step S4604). In the left-handed notification process, a process for displaying the left-handed notification image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. As a left-handed notification image, an image that makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game ball should be launched by aiming at the left area PA2 so that the execution target of the game round 5 times after the current situation is the first hold information. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to perform the firing operation so that the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target.

Next, a state in which the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72. FIG. 72 (a) shows a period in which the time is shortened, FIG. 72 (b) shows a period during which the game round for which the first hold information is executed is executed, and FIG. 72 (c) shows the second hold information. 72 (d) shows a period in which "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84, and FIG. 72 (e) shows a period in which the game times for execution are executed. The occurrence timing of the time reduction result is shown, and FIG. 72 (f) shows the occurrence timing of the ceiling time reduction.

First, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and neither the time-saving result nor the ceiling time-saving occurs in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t1 which is a time saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round in which the first hold information is executed is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t1. "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and t6, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are executed. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed at each of the plurality of timings including the timing of. In this case, since each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t2 to the timing of t6 is in a time-saving state as shown in FIG. 72 (a), each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t2 to the timing of t6 is used. For the game times started in, the fluctuation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for which the first hold information is to be executed ends. In this case, since "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and the time reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (a). The state ends.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, in the game times corresponding to the end, about 30 game times have occurred triggered by the second hold information, which is the shortest variable display period. As a result, in the current time reduction state, the game times of the first time reduction continuation number and the second time reduction continuation number are executed about 30 times more than the continuation number set as the setting target.

Next, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and the time-saving result occurs in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t8, which is a time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round in which the first hold information is executed is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t8. "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and t14, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are executed. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed at each of the plurality of timings including the timing of. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 is in a time-saving state. For the game times started at each of a plurality of timings including the timing, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the variation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Will be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Of the respective game times of a plurality of timings including the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, the game times of the timing of t11 are determined as shown in FIG. 72 (e). The result of processing is a time-saving result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 when the game round ends, and if it is the first time reduction result, the time reduction state counter 134 The first time reduction continuation number is reset to, and if the second time reduction result is obtained, the second time reduction continuation number is reset to the time reduction state counter 134. Therefore, the time saving state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for which the first hold information is to be executed ends. However, since the first time reduction end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t12 and the time reduction state is extended, the time reduction state does not end at the timing of t14.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, the time saving state is extended because the second hold information executed in the game time corresponding to the end causes the time saving result in the game time to be executed. By executing the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it becomes possible to give the benefit of extending the time saving state.

Next, a case will be described in which the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state are executed with the first hold information as the execution target, and the ceiling time is shortened in the middle of the end-corresponding game times.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), at the timing of t15, which is a time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the game round for executing the first hold information is started. The variable display period of the game times is 2 minutes, which is a long period on the special map side. Since the game round is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the time saving state is one, it is a game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d) at the timing of the t15. "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and t21, which are the situations in which the end-corresponding game times with the first hold information as the execution target are executed. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are executed at each of the plurality of timings including the timing of. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), each of the plurality of timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21 is in a time-saving state. For the game times started at each of a plurality of timings including the timing, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21, the variation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term variation. Will be done. Each of these game rounds is started in a situation where two or more second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 112, and neither the jackpot result nor the missed reach display occurs. The variable display period is the shortest period on the special map side (specifically, 3 seconds).

Of the multiple timings including the timing of t16, the timing of t17, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, and the timing of t21, one subtraction is made at the timing of t20, which is the timing at which the timing of t19 ends. Later, the value of the ceiling counter 131 becomes "0", and as shown in FIG. 72 (f), the ceiling time is shortened. At the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and the time reduction state counter 134 is reset to the first time reduction continuation number. Therefore, the time saving state is extended.

After that, at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end-corresponding game round for which the first hold information is to be executed ends. However, since the first time reduction end flag is cleared to "0" at the timing of t20 and the time reduction state is extended, the time reduction state does not end at the timing of t21.

As described above, the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed are executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, and in the game times corresponding to the end, the variation display period of the game times is a long period on the special figure side (specifically). Is 2 minutes). Then, the second hold information executed in the game times corresponding to the end is triggered by the game times to be executed, and the ceiling time reduction occurs, so that the time reduction state is extended. By executing the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed as the game times corresponding to the end in the time saving state, it becomes possible to give the benefit of extending the time saving state.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a variable display period specifying process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4701: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4702 to step. The process of S4706 is executed. These steps S4702 to S4706 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. If the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special map side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4701: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency flag. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4707). When the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4707: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4708). That is, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the first hold information of this time is the execution target is the game times corresponding to the end in the reduced working hours state. When "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4708: YES), the information of the shortest period (specifically, 3 seconds) on the special figure side as the variation display period of this game round is displayed. If it is set in the timer counter on the first special figure side of the main RAM 84 (step S4709) and "1" is not set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4708: NO), the fluctuation display of the game times this time is displayed. As the period, long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special figure side is set in the first special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4710).

In the case of the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4701: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4707: NO), step S4711 -The process of step S4713 is executed. These steps S4711 to S4713 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed as a game round other than the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the special figure is set as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. A long term (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side is the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. (Specifically, 3 seconds) is selected. The shortest period on the special figure side is a period selected as a variable display period of the game times in which the reach display does not occur, which is the game times triggered by the second hold information in the time saving state. As a result, when the game times triggered by the first hold information become the game times corresponding to the end in the reduced working hours state, the game triggered by the second hold information in the situation where the game times corresponding to the end are executed. It is possible to prevent the times from being executed repeatedly.

In addition, when the game time corresponding to the end in the time saving state becomes the game time triggered by the first hold information, and if a big hit result occurs in the game time, the shortest duration of the game time on the special figure side. A period longer than the period may be selected. For example, the configuration may be such that the medium period (specifically, 10 seconds) on the special map side is selected, or the long period (specifically, 2 minutes) on the special map side may be selected. Further, by using the value of the jackpot table included in the table group for short-term fluctuation read in step S4711 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time, the fluctuation display period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery. It may be a determined configuration. As a result, even if the end-corresponding game times in the time-saving state becomes the game times triggered by the first hold information, it is possible to secure a certain period until the jackpot result occurs.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the variable display period executed by the main MPU 82 is different from the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the tenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a variable display period specifying process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in both the first high frequency flag and the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4801: NO), that is, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, steps S4802 to step. The process of S4806 is executed. These steps S4802 to S4806 are the same as steps S4102 to S4106 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low frequency support mode, if the first hold information is the start target of the game round, the variable display period of the game round is selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. If the second hold information is the target for starting the game round, the longest period (specifically, 10 minutes) on the special map side is selected as the variable display period of the game round regardless of the game result of the game round. The longest period on the special map side is longer than any of the variable display periods selected by referring to the table group for the normal variable period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 to play the game.

When "1" is set in either the first high frequency flag or the second high frequency flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4801: YES), that is, the support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency flag. In the support mode, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4807). When the start target of the current game round is the first hold information (step S4807: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4808). That is, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the first hold information of this time is the execution target is the game times corresponding to the end in the reduced working hours state.

When "1" is set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4808: YES), the table group for the end timing is read from the main side ROM 83 to the main side RAM 84 (step S4809). Then, the variable display period selection process is executed using the table group for the end timing (step S4810), and the information of the variable display period selected in the selection process is input to the first special figure side timer of the main RAM 84. It is set in the counter (step S4811).

In the situation where the selection process of the variable display period in step S4810 is executed with reference to the table group for the end timing, if a big hit result or a time saving result occurs in this game round, the shortest period on the special figure side (specifically). 3 seconds) information is read out. Even in this embodiment, in the sound light side MPU 93, in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the second hold information is the start target of the game round, as in the tenth embodiment. When a variation command and a type command indicating that the symbol is displayed are received, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the symbol is displayed. Even if the change command and the type command indicating that the first hold information is the start target of the game round are received by the speaker unit 65, the symbols in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 are received. The variable display and the corresponding display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 do not execute the effect. In addition, when a jackpot result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 41 displays the timing when the game round ends. An effect is performed to announce the occurrence of a jackpot result, and if a time-saving result occurs in a game round triggered by the first hold information in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the relevant game round is performed. At the end timing, the symbol display device 41 is used to announce the occurrence of the time saving result. If both the jackpot result and the time saving result do not occur in this game, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that time is ended. By collating with the table corresponding to the end timing in the table group for timing, the information of the variable display period corresponding to the end is read out. As the information of the variation display period corresponding to the end, the shortest period of 3 seconds on the special map side, the medium period of 10 seconds on the special map side, and the long term of 2 minutes on the special map side are set. In the table corresponding to the end timing, the shortest period on the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3, the middle period on the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the length of the special map side is selected with a probability of 1/3. The period is set to be selected.

If "1" is not set in the first time reduction end flag (step S4808: NO), long-term (specifically, 2 minutes) information on the special figure side is displayed as the variation display period of this game round. , Set to the first special figure side timer counter of the main RAM 84 (step S4812).

In the case of the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode (step S4801: YES) and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information (step S4807: NO), step S4813. -The process of step S4815 is executed. These steps S4813 to S4815 are the same as steps S4109 to S4111 in the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 66) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is executed as a game round other than the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the special figure is set as the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. A long term (specifically 2 minutes) on the side is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times triggered by the first hold information in the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the game round triggered by the first hold information is started as the game round corresponding to the end in the time saving state, the shortest period on the special figure side is the variable display period of the game round triggered by the first hold information. (Specifically, 3 seconds), a medium period on the special map side (specifically, 10 seconds), or a long period on the special map side (specifically, 2 minutes) are selected by lottery. When the shortest period on the special figure side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end corresponding to the first hold information are executed repeatedly, and the game times triggered by the second hold information may be repeatedly executed. If the middle period on the special map side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end corresponding to the first hold information are executed, and the game times triggered by the second hold information are executed a small number of times. If a long period of time on the special map side is selected, the game times corresponding to the end corresponding to the first hold information are executed, and the game times triggered by the second hold information are repeated many times. .. As a result, when the game round corresponding to the end is executed with the first hold information as a trigger, the player expects that a longer variable display period is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

<13th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the main control device 71 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 75, the main control device 71 has a main control board 81 housed in a board box 71a. The main MPU 82 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 81. The substrate box 71a is transparently formed so that the main MPU 82 housed in the substrate box 71a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 71a. Although the substrate box 71a is formed to be colorless and transparent, even if the main MPU 82 housed in the substrate box 71a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 71a, the substrate box 71a may be formed to be colored and transparent. good. The main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 71a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 71b of the substrate box 71a. The main MPU 82 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 71b.

The substrate box 71a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 71c back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 71c prevent the case bodies 71c from being separated and trace the case bodies 71c when they are separated. A joint portion 71d for leaving the above is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 71d are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 71a having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the part of the coupling portion 71d is destroyed and the case body 71c is separated in a state where the separation of the case body 71c is prevented by using a part of the coupling portion 71d, another coupling is subsequently performed. By putting the portion 71d in the coupled state, it is possible to prevent the case body 71c from being separated again. Further, when the case body 71c is separated, the joint portion 71d is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body 71c is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 71d. It will be possible. Further, a sealing seal 71e is attached to the side of the substrate box 71a opposite to the side on which the connecting portions 71d are arranged side by side so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 71c. When the seal seal 71e is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 71c. As a result, when the sealing seal 71e is peeled off when the case body 71c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 71 having the above configuration, the main control board 81 has a setting key insertion unit 195, a reset button 196, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a setting display device 205, and an abnormality display device. 206 is provided. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6" and is arbitrary.

The setting key insertion unit 195, the reset button 196, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting display device 205, and the abnormality display device 206 are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. Further, the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the facing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a as described above, but the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 are not covered by the facing wall portion 71b. That is, in the facing wall portion 71b, the regions facing each of the setting key insertion portion 195 and the reset button 196 are designated as individual openings. As a result, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion unit 195 without opening the board box 71a, and the reset button 196 can be pressed.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 195 and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on. In this state, by pressing the reset button 196 and starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 (that is, by starting the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71), the pachinko machine It becomes possible to change the setting state of 10. Then, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in ascending order. If the reset button 196 is operated in the state of "setting 6", it is updated to "setting 1". Further, the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned off by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion unit 195 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the ON operation position to return to the initial position. Become. When the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned off, the state in which the set value can be changed ends, and the game can be played in the state of the set value at that time. It should be noted that the set value cannot be changed even if the reset button 196 is operated after the state in which the set value can be changed ends.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 195 is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 starts). Therefore, even if the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 195a is performed after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71, the set value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger n of "setting n" (n is an integer of "1" to "6"), the larger the value (that is, the setting). (The higher the value), the higher the advantage. There are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as a winning / losing lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result. It is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result in each of the mode and the high probability mode is high.

By starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71) while the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on and the reset button 196 is not pressed. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed. Further, when the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned off, the state in which the set value can be confirmed ends.

By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 without turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 (that is, supplying the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71). The data in the predetermined area in the main RAM 84 is cleared. The ON operation for the reset button 196 is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71 starts). Therefore, even if the reset button 196 is pressed after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the main MPU 82 of the main control device 71, the data in the main RAM 84 cannot be cleared.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are both segment display devices in which eight LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device is not limited thereto. It may be an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are both installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces, and the board box 71a. It is covered by the facing wall portion 71b. In this case, since the board box 71a is transparently formed, the display surfaces and setting displays of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 71a from the outside of the board box 71a. It becomes possible to visually check the display surface of the device 205. Further, since the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the facing wall portion 71b. It is possible to visually check the display surface of ~ 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205.

The game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, in the setting display device 205, the set value to be selected is displayed under the situation where the setting value update process for changing the setting value is being executed, and the setting value is confirmed for confirming the setting value. When the process is being executed, the set value to be set is displayed. That is, when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 1", "1" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 2". In the case of, "2" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and "3" is displayed on the setting display device 205 when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 3". When the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 4", "4" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 5". If there is, "5" is displayed on the setting display device 205, and "6" is displayed on the setting display device 205 when the setting value of the selection target or the setting target is "setting 6". .. The setting display device 205 is maintained in the off state when neither the setting value update process nor the setting confirmation process is executed.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the management result of the game history and the setting display device 205 for displaying the set value are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81. .. As described above, the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notifications are provided through the facing wall portion 71b. It is possible to visually check the display surface of the display devices 201 to 204 and the display surface of the setting display device 205. Since the setting key insertion unit 195 and the reset button 196 are provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, when the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the gaming machine main body 12 is attached to the outer frame 11. The back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening it to the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 as described above are elements. By being provided on the mounting surface, not only the display of the selection target or the setting value of the setting target in the setting display device 205, but also the display of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. It becomes possible to visually check.

The abnormality display device 206 is provided with a monochromatic light emitting type LED. The abnormality display device 206 is installed so that its light emitting surface faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, and is covered with the facing wall portion 71b of the board box 71a. In this case, since the substrate box 71a is transparently formed, the abnormality display device 206 housed in the substrate box 71a can be visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 71a. Further, since the main control device 71 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 71a so that the facing wall portion 71b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 81 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the abnormality display device 206 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 71b. Will be. When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the abnormality display device 206 changes from the off state to the lit state, and the lit state continues until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped.

<Specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the execution contents of various controls in the main MPU 82 will be described.

Various controls executed by using the program in the main MPU 82 are distinguished by specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, the control related to the management of the game history and the monitoring of fraud is defined as non-specific control, and the control other than the non-specific control including the control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player is defined as specific control. ing. Specifically, the control by the main process (FIG. 81) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started includes all the processes other than the first management process described later in the specific control. The first management process is included in the non-specific control. Further, there are a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) as processes that are periodically interrupted and started, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is the same. All the processes are included in the specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) includes the fraud detection process and the process other than the second management process, which will be described later, in the specific control. 2 Management processing is included in non-specific control.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a program and data setting mode in the main ROM 83. Corresponding to the distinction between the specific control and the non-specific control in the control executed by the main MPU 82, as shown in FIG. 76, the main ROM 83 also has the specific control program and the specific control. The address of the area where the data and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored is clearly distinguished.

Specifically, the program for specific control is collectively stored in the area of each consecutive address within the range of the address X (1) to the address X (k + 2). Further, the addresses X (k + 3) to the addresses X (k + 5) consecutive to the addresses X (1) to the addresses X (k + 2) are the addresses of unused areas in which the data is not stored, and the addresses are subsequently followed. Data for specific control is aggregated and stored in a continuous area of each address within the range of X (k + 6) to address X (m + 2). Further, the addresses X (m + 3) to the addresses X (m + 5) consecutive to the addresses X (k + 6) to the addresses X (m + 2) are the addresses of unused areas in which the data is not stored, and the addresses are subsequently followed. Programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in a continuous area of addresses within the range of X (m + 6) to address X (n + 2). Further, the addresses X (n + 3) to the addresses X (n + 5) consecutive to the addresses X (m + 6) to the addresses X (n + 2) are the addresses of unused areas in which the data is not stored, and the addresses are subsequently followed. Data for non-specific control is aggregated and stored in a continuous area of addresses within the range of X (n + 6) to address X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and data and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 83 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 82.

As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are irrespective of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding control. By storing in areas of addresses in different ranges, when checking only the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the address range in which the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored. It is only necessary to check the area of, and when checking only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, the address range in which the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored. You only have to check the area. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work when the program and the data are checked separately for the specific control and the non-specific control. In addition, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work when the program and the data are distinguished and corrected by the specific control and the non-specific control accordingly.

No data is stored between the address range of the area where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored and the address range of the area where the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored. Since the address range of the unused area that has not been set is set, it becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control during the check work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, the program and the data are stored in the area of the address in a different range regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently perform the work when checking the program and the data separately. In addition, the address range of the unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored. It becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range and the data address range during the check work.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. 77, the work for specific control is also performed in the main RAM 84 in correspondence with the fact that the control executed by using the program in the main MPU 82 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control. The address range of the area 211 and the stack area 212 for specific control and the address range of the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, a continuous area of each address within the range of the address Y (1) to the address Y (r + 2) is set as the work area 211 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y (r + 3) to the addresses Y (r + 5) consecutive to the addresses Y (1) to the address Y (r + 2) are the addresses of the unused areas, and the addresses Y (r + 6) to the addresses are subsequently followed. Areas of consecutive addresses within the range of Y (s + 2) are set as the stack area 212 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y (s + 3) to the addresses Y (s + 5) consecutive to the addresses Y (r + 6) to the addresses Y (s + 2) are the addresses of the unused areas, and the addresses Y (s + 6) to the addresses are subsequently followed. Areas of consecutive addresses within the range of Y (t + 2) are set as work areas 213 for non-specific control. Further, the addresses Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5) consecutive to the address Y (s + 6) to the address Y (t + 2) are the addresses of the unused areas, and the addresses Y (t + 6) to the address are subsequently followed. Areas of consecutive addresses within the range of Y (u + 2) are set as stack areas 214 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 84 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 82.

When the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are set separately as described above, the case where the specific control is executed and the case where the non-specific control is executed in the main MPU 82 Therefore, different areas of the main RAM 84 will be used when performing various operations and the like. This makes it possible to make it difficult for an event such as the information of the main RAM 84 required for the other to be erased when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 211,213 and reading information from each work area 211,213, a load command is issued by the main MPU 82.

Since the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are set separately, the main is the case where the specific control is executed and the case where the non-specific control is executed in the main MPU 82. A different area of the main RAM 84 is used when saving the information stored in the register of the side MPU 82 and when storing the information of the return address on the program. As a result, it is used in the situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, when the information stored in the register of the main MPU 82 is saved and when the information of the return address in the program is stored in the other. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the information to be deleted to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 212, 214, a push instruction is issued by the main MPU 82, and when reading information from each stack area 212, 214, a pop instruction is issued by the main MPU 82. Further, when reading the information from the stack areas 212 and 214, the writing order to the stack areas 212 and 214 is the read target first from the later information.

Here, when the main MPU 82 executes the process corresponding to the specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 211 for the specific control and the stack area 212 for the specific control. Information can be read from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes the process corresponding to the specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 213 for the non-specific control and the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. Information cannot be written to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent accidentally erasing the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

Further, when the main MPU 82 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can write information to the work area 213 for the non-specific control and the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. At the same time, it is possible to read information from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main MPU 82 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main MPU 82 can read information from the work area 211 for the specific control and the stack area 212 for the specific control. It is not possible to write information to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent accidentally erasing the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

The backup power is supplied to the main RAM 84 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the backup power is the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, and the non-specific control. It is supplied to all of the work area 213 for use and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 10. Even after that, the memory is retained while the backup power is supplied.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in the work area 211 for specific control and various storage areas provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

The work area 211 for specific control includes a first security counter 211a, a special power monitoring delay timer counter 211b, a general power monitoring delay timer counter 211c, a confirmation flag group 211d, a previous value storage area 211e, a security flag 211f, and checking. A counter 211g is provided. In the work area 213 for non-specific control, the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, the 2nd security counter 213k, and the 1st to 3rd general prize abnormalities. Flags 213l to 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t are provided.

Both the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control and the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. It is a counter used to specify whether or not it is necessary for the main MPU 82, and in the case of external output, the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal is specified by the main MPU 82. It is a counter used. Events that trigger the external output of a pulsed security signal include execution of set value update processing, execution of clear processing of the main RAM 84, disconnection detection of a predetermined detection sensor, short circuit detection of a predetermined detection sensor, and winning abnormality. Detection, detection of magnetic abnormality, and the like. The events that trigger the external output of pulsed security signals are not limited to those listed above, and in addition to or in place of at least some of these, detection of radio wave abnormalities and the main body of the gaming machine Twelve opening operations and the like may be included. Further, when the external output of the security signal and the processing associated therewith are executed as described above, the previous value storage area 211e and the security flag 211f are used.

The special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b of the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric winning device 32, and the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is closed. It is a counter used to specify the period to be treated as valid later by the main MPU 82. The monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general power of the work area 211 for specific control detects the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second operating port 34, and the second operating port 34 is in an open state. This is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify the period to be treated as valid even after the is closed. In the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control, each of the out port 24a, the three general winning ports 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 Various confirmation flags are provided for confirming the entry of the game ball in the main MPU 82. The checking counter 211g of the work area 211 for specific control is used when the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed.

The first to third prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c of the work area 213 for non-specific control have a one-to-one correspondence with the three general prize openings 31 provided. The first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c detect one game ball by the winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31, and then invalidate the detection of the next game ball. It is a counter used to specify the period to be treated as by the main MPU 82. In the first embodiment, four general winning openings 31 are provided, but in this embodiment, three general winning openings 31 are provided.

The fourth prize monitoring timer counter 213d of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a of the special electric winning device 32, and then treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. It is a counter used for specifying by the main MPU 82. The fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball by the first operation port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation port 33, and then the next game ball. It is a counter used for specifying the period for treating detection as invalid by the main MPU 82. The sixth prize monitoring timer counter 213f of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball by the second operation port detection sensor 236a of the second operation port 34, and then invalidates the detection of the next game ball. It is a counter used to specify the period to be treated as by the main MPU 82. The seventh prize monitoring timer counter 213g of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball by the out port detection sensor 237a provided in the out port 24a, and then invalidates the detection of the next game ball. It is a counter used to specify the period to be handled by the main MPU 82. The eighth prize monitoring timer counter 213h of the work area 213 for non-specific control detects one game ball by the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35, and then treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid. It is a counter used to specify the period in the main MPU 82.

Details will be described later, but whether or not the game ball is normally entered into the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the out port 24a. The process for monitoring is included in the non-specific control. In this case, whether or not the game ball is normally entered into the three general winning openings 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the out port 24a. Of the various timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h provided for monitoring the above, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. On the other hand, the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Since the measurement of the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is started by the detection result of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start trigger is the processing of the specific control. It is possible to specify by non-specific control processing without taking the result into consideration. Therefore, by providing the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided without considering the processing result of the specific control. It is possible to measure the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the non-specific control process. Under such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control can be reduced. It will be possible.

On the other hand, the measurement of the valid period of the detection of the game ball using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started with the execution of the process of changing the special electric winning device 32 from the open state to the closed state, and also the monitoring for general electric power. The measurement of the valid period of the detection of the game ball using the delay timer counter 211c is started with the execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Then, since the process of closing the special electric winning device 32 and the second operating port 34 is executed as the process of the specific control, the process of the non-specific control is performed without taking the start trigger and the process result of the specific control into consideration. It is impossible to identify. In this case, if the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer are provided. The processing configuration for specifying the start trigger of the measurement of the valid period in the counter 211c may be complicated. On the other hand, by providing the monitoring delay timer counter 211b for special electric power and the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general electric power in the work area 211 for specific control instead of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the work area for specific control is provided. Although the required storage capacity in 211 increases by that amount, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

The 1st to 3rd general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n of the work area 213 for non-specific control are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the three general winning openings 31, and the 1st to 3rd winning monitoring timers are provided. As a result of the monitoring process using the counters 213a to 213c, when it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entry has occurred, the first step is performed by the non-specific control process. "1" is set to the corresponding flag among the third general winning abnormality flags 213l to 213n. The special electric winning abnormality flag 213o of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and is the result of monitoring processing using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d. If it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entry has occurred, "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the non-specific control process. ..

The first operation winning abnormality flag 213p of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33, and as a result of the monitoring process using the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e, the game is not normal. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of the ball entry has occurred, "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the non-specific control process. The second operation winning abnormality flag 213q of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34, and the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general electric power or the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is used. As a result of the monitoring process, when it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entry has occurred, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is set to the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the non-specific control process. 1 ”is set.

The out abnormality flag 213r of the work area 213 for non-specific control is provided corresponding to the out port 24a, and as a result of the monitoring process using the 7th winning monitoring timer counter 213g, an abnormal entry of a game ball is performed. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection has occurred, "1" is set in the out abnormality flag 213r in the non-specific control process. The gate winning abnormality flag 213s of the work area 213 for specific control is provided corresponding to the through gate 35, and as a result of the monitoring process using the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h, an abnormal game ball entry is performed. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection has occurred, "1" is set in the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the non-specific control process.

The magnetic detection counter 213i of the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for specifying the number of times that the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is specified by the main MPU 82. In the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the game board 24, and the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor is input to the main MPU 82. The magnetic detection sensor outputs a LOW level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82 when magnetism is not detected, and outputs a HI level magnetic detection signal to the main MPU 82 when magnetism is detected. The magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j of the work area 213 for non-specific control is a counter for specifying the period during which the magnetic abnormality is not monitored by the main MPU 82. The magnetic anomaly flag 213t of the work area 213 for non-specific control is measured by the magnetic detection counter 213i in a situation where the magnetic anomaly is not monitored by the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the number of occurrences of the timing abnormality has reached the abnormality reference number (specifically, "3"), "1" is set in the non-specific control process. ..

<Configuration of command transmission>
FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for transmitting a command from the main MPU 82 to the sound light side MPU 93.

The main MPU 82 is provided with a specific control processing unit 221 as a function of executing a specific control process by using a specific control program and specific control data stored in the main ROM 83, and is mainly provided with the specific control processing unit 221. The non-specific control processing unit 222 is provided as a function of executing the non-specific control process by using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data stored in the side ROM 83. When the specific control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, information is read from and written from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control as described above. At the same time, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control. When the specific control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, information is not written to the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. When the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing, as described above, information is read from the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and information is read from the information. At the same time as writing is performed, information is read from the work area 211 for specific control. When the non-specific control processing is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, information is not written to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 executes the specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing, the register provided in the main MPU 82 Information is read from the area 223 and information is written to the register area 223. The register area 223 is provided with a general-purpose register area 223a and a command transmission buffer 223b. In the general-purpose register area 223a, a flag register, various general-purpose registers, an auxiliary register, an index register, and the like exist. WA registers, BC registers, DE registers, HL registers, IX registers, IY registers, and the like are provided as various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers.

The command transmission buffer 223b needs to transmit a predetermined command to the sound light side MPU 93 provided on the voice light emission control board 92 of the voice light emission control device 91 because the specific control process is executed by the specific control processing unit 221. Is generated, the predetermined command to be transmitted is stored. Further, the command transmission buffer 223b is specified as a transmission target when it becomes necessary to transmit a specific command to the sound light side MPU 93 due to the execution of the non-specific control processing by the non-specific control processing unit 222. Command is stored. The command transmission buffer 223b is provided as a ring buffer provided with a plurality of unit storage areas capable of storing one type of command. The command to be transmitted is written in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the write pointer provided on the main MPU 82. In this case, the unit storage areas to be written are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and the unit storage areas in the last order are the write targets, and then the unit storage areas in the first order are the write targets.

The command written in each unit storage area of the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 provided in the main side MPU 82. The command transmission circuit 224 is provided with a read pointer, and transmits a command stored in the unit storage area corresponding to the information of the read pointer to the sound / light side MPU 93. In this case, the unitable areas to be read are sequentially switched according to a specific order, and the unit storage area in the last order is the read target, and then the unit storage area in the first order is the read target.

The command transmission circuit 224 does not intervene the execution of the processing using the program in the specific control processing unit 221 and the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82, that is, without intervening the execution of the processing using the program. A command is read from the unit storage area to be read from the command transmission buffer 223b, and the read command is transmitted. Therefore, even in a situation where the command transmission circuit 224 is transmitting a command to the sound / light side MPU 93, the specific control processing unit 221 can execute the specific control processing, and the non-specific control processing unit 222 can execute the specific control processing. Non-specific control processing can be executed. Furthermore, even in a situation where the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224 by executing the specific control process in the specific control processing unit 221, the specific control processing unit 221 The non-specific control processing unit 222 can execute the non-specific control processing, and the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing. As a result, even in a situation where the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, not only the non-specific control processing can be executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also the specific control processing can be executed. The configuration is such that the specific control process can be executed by the unit 221.

The command transmission speed of the command transmission circuit 224 to the sound light side MPU 93 is overwritten by the untransmitted command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b by storing a new command in the command transmission buffer 223b. It is set to a speed that does not end up.

The state in which the command is transmitted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 80A shows a period during which the specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221, and FIG. 80B shows the non-specific control processing being executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222. The period is shown, FIG. 80 (c) shows the timing when the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, and FIG. 80 (d) shows the period when the command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224.

As shown in FIG. 80A, the specific control process in the specific control processing unit 221 is started at the timing of t1. After that, when the specific control process is executed at the timing of t2, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80 (c). Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmission of the command at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 80 (d). Since the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221 and the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 is as shown in FIG. 80 (d). Even during the period in which the command is transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224, the specific control processing unit 221 executes the specific control process as shown in FIG. 80 (a).

After that, in the situation where the specific control processing unit 221 is executing the specific control processing as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the command is again sent to the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80 (c) at the timing of t4. Stored. Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmission of the command at the timing of the t4 as shown in FIG. 80 (d).

After that, in the situation where the transmission of the command started at the timing of t4 is continued, the specific control processing unit 221 performs the specific control processing at the timing of t5 as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). The situation in which the non-specific control processing is executed is switched to the situation in which the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing. In this case, the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 is not only performed independently of the specific control process in the specific control processing unit 221 but also independently of the non-specific control process in the non-specific control processing unit 222. Will be done. Therefore, even if the situation in which the specific control process is executed is switched to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed at the timing of t5, the command transmission is continued as shown in FIG. 80 (d). .. The transmission of the command ends at the timing of t6.

After that, the non-specific control process is executed at the timing of t7, so that the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80 (c). Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmission of the command at the timing of the t7 as shown in FIG. 80 (d). Since the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222 and the operation of transmitting a command in the command transmission circuit 224 are performed independently of each other, the timings from t7 to t8 as shown in FIG. 80 (d). As shown in FIG. 80B, the non-specific control processing unit 222 executes the non-specific control processing even during the period in which the command is transmitted by the command transmission circuit 224.

After that, in a situation where the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing the non-specific control processing as shown in FIG. 80 (b), a command is sent to the command transmission buffer 223b as shown in FIG. 80 (c) at the timing of t9. Is stored again. Since there is an untransmitted command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the command transmission circuit 224 starts transmission of the command at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 80 (d).

After that, in a situation where the transmission of the command started at the timing of t9 is continued, the non-specific control processing unit 222 performs non-specific control at the timing of t10 as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). The situation in which the processing is being executed is switched to the situation in which the specific control processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221. In this case, the operation of transmitting the command in the command transmission circuit 224 is not only performed independently of the non-specific control processing in the non-specific control processing unit 222, but also independently of the specific control processing in the specific control processing unit 221. Will be done. Therefore, even if the situation in which the specific control process is executed is switched to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed at the timing of t10, the command transmission is continued as shown in FIG. 80 (d). .. The transmission of the command ends at the timing of t11.

As described above, the transmission target is in either the situation where the specific control processing is being executed by the specific control processing unit 221 or the situation where the non-specific control processing is being executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222. The command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223. That is, even if the area to which the information is written in the main RAM 84 is different between the situation where the specific control process is executed and the situation where the non-specific control process is executed, the transmission target The area for writing the command of is also used in the situation where the specific control process is being executed and the situation where the non-specific control process is being executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to consolidate the processing for storing the command into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, so that the processing configuration for storing the command is not complicated. It will be possible.

The command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates independently of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. As a result, it is not necessary to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so that it is possible to simplify the process configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. Will be.

<Main processing>
Next, various processes executed by using the program on the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a main process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Of the processes from step S4901 to step S4932 in the main process, the processes other than the first management process called and executed in step S4927 mainly use the program for specific control and the data for specific control. It is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the side MPU 82, and the first management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control. The program.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step S4901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for weight (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted.

After that, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S4902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is changed to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 mm). The interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which will be described later and is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically while being set to (seconds), is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. Set to the second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

That is, in the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) exist as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). If both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) have not been executed, those cycles have elapsed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started first regardless of the elapsed order of. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is set to a predetermined register of the main MPU 82, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is mainly set. Set to a specific register on the side MPU 82. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

After that, the protect setting process is executed (step S4903). In the protect setting process, by setting "1" in the protect register 223c provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack for specific control in each area of the main RAM 84 are set. Unused areas other than the area 212, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are excluded from the target of writing information (including clearing "0"). ..

Specifically, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to the main RAM 84 and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of the area to be read information is specified by the execution of the process by the program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads the information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82. When the address of the area to which the information is to be written is specified by the execution of the process by the program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the main ROM 83 has an address range (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) in an unused area in the main RAM 84. ~ Address Y (t + 5)) is stored in advance. When the protection setting is set for the RAM management circuit 225, when the address of the area to which the information is written is specified, the address is set in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83. If it is included, the information is not written. Writing this information also includes clearing "0". This makes it possible to prevent information from being written to an unused area in the main RAM 84.

The RAM management circuit 225 specifies that the address specified as the information to be written is included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 in the situation where the protection setting is made. If so, the configuration may be such that not only the information is not written but also the abnormality notification is executed. The execution mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but for example, the display light emitting unit 64 may be configured to emit light for the abnormality, or the speaker unit 65 may be configured to output the sound for the abnormality, and the symbol display device may be used. The configuration may be such that the display for abnormalities is displayed at 41, or the management computer provided in the game hall may be configured to perform external output for abnormalities.

As shown in FIG. 79, a protect register 223c is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. The protect register 223c is for an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) in the main RAM 84. This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether or not information can be written. When the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above protect setting is performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. Even if specified, information is not written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above protect setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When specified as a target, information is written to the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area. The case where "1" is set in the protect register 223c corresponds to the case where the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, and the case where the information in the protect register 223c is "0" corresponds to the case where the protect register 223c is set. Applicable when the protection information is not set in. When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the protection information is not set because the information in the protect register 223c is "0", but the protection setting process in step S4903 is executed. As a result, "1" is set in the protect register 223c and the protection information is set. As a result, information for unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) in the main RAM 84). Cannot be written.

The protect register 223c is not limited to a configuration in which it is a 1-bit area, and may be configured as an area of 2 bits or more, a 1-byte area, or a 2-byte area.

After that, "1" is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4904). Even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), which will be described later, is activated, the start-up processing flag can be used for power failure monitoring and updating of various counters among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). , And while the process for managing the game history is executed, the main MPU 82 indicates that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game. It is a flag to specify in.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is started in the main process (FIG. 81), and the process at the start of supply of operating power is set. "0" is cleared before (step S4901 to step S4928) are completed and the residual processing (step S4929 to step S4932) is started. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process of steps S5506 to S5520 is not executed, so that the operation power supply is started. Among the processes (steps S4901 to S4928), it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process or the set value update process described later is being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the operating power is executed by executing the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521. Even in the situation where the setting confirmation process or the set value update process, which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (steps S4901 to S4928), the power failure monitoring is executed and the hit random number counter C1 and type. The random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the game history is further managed.

By the way, in the situation where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, interrupts are not prohibited in either the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). It is possible to interrupt at any timing. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process or the set value update process, the timer interrupt that is the activation target is interrupted. Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) for returning after the process is completed is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and various registers of the main MPU 82 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started. Information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing to be started is completed, the processing returns to the main processing (FIG. 81) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main MPU 82.

After setting "1" to the start-up processing flag in step S4904, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4905). .. When the power failure processing is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S5501) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the power failure processing was properly performed at the time of the previous power failure.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S4905: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step S4906). Specifically, first, the checksum is calculated for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. After that, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 211 for specific control, which are calculated in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped and stored in the work area 211 for specific control, are used. The checksum for the stack area 212 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the main process of this time. Then, it is determined whether or not those checksums match.

When the checksums match (step S4906: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area in the work area 211 for specific control is within the normal range (step S4906: YES). Step S4907). The setting reference area is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main MPU 82 is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step S4907, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area is any of "1" to "6".

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S4905 to S4907, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4908). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting value update process described later is being executed, and when "1" is set in the setting update display flag, the main control device. The setting display device 205 of 71 displays the setting value being updated. Since the setting update display flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the setting value update processing is started and "0" is cleared when the setting value update processing is completed, the setting value update processing is executed. In the situation where it is not set, basically, "1" is not set in the setting update display flag. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the setting update display is displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started thereafter. The flag is set to "1". The state in which "1" is set in this setting update display flag is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update display flag "0" is executed in the setting value update process.

When a negative determination is made in step S4908 because "1" is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4909). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 196 is being pressed to start supplying the operating power to the main MPU 82.

When the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4909: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4910). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5505 to perform the step. The processes of S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power off for at least one, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and playing games While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4910, the processes of steps S4924 and S4925, which will be described later, are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S4910, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by using the setting key (step S4911). When the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by using the setting key (step S4911: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913). Even when the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned on by using the setting key (step S4911: NO), "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. If it is set (step S4912: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S4913).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the setting confirmation process is being executed, and when "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the main control device 71 A display indicating the currently set value is displayed on the setting display device 205. Since the setting confirmation display flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the setting confirmation process is started and "0" is cleared when the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation process is executed. In the situation where it is not set, basically, "1" is not set in the setting confirmation display flag. However, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation display is displayed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started thereafter. The flag is set to "1". When "1" is set in this setting confirmation display flag, whether the RAM clear processing (step S4919) described later is executed, the setting value update processing described later is executed, or the setting confirmation is performed in the setting confirmation processing. It is maintained until the process of clearing the display flag "0" is executed.

Not only when the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed) as described above, the reset button 196 is pressed. Even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" even when the pressing operation is not performed, the setting confirmation process is executed, so that the setting confirmation process is executed and the power failure process is executed. Is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. This makes it possible to continue checking the current set values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing is being executed, if the reset button 196 is pressed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted, the setting confirmation processing is performed. Is not executed, but the process corresponding to the operation performed at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power among the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the set value update process is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S4919) or the set value update process over the setting confirmation process.

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step S4913 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. The processes of steps S5001 to S5007 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the interrupt permission is set (step S5001). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing is performed. And interrupts are allowed in the setting value update process. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process and the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (step S4901 to step S4928), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process are performed. Execution of (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted in a situation where the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is being executed. To. However, since "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the situation where the setting confirmation processing or the setting value update processing is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started. Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and managing the game history is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is terminated without any notice.

After that, "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag on condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5002). By setting "1" in the setting confirmation display flag, a display indicating the setting value currently set by the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 is performed.

After that, the confirmation start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5003). By storing the confirmation start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the confirmation start command, the sound / light side MPU 93 displays an image indicating that the setting confirmation process is being executed and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process. The display control of the display side MPU 103 is performed so that it is displayed by the device 41. As a result, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and the operation contents necessary for completing the setting confirmation process can be performed. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step S5004). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. .. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 195 is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case as well, a negative determination is made in step S5004. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: NO), the process of step S5004 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5004: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5005). As a result, the display indicating the currently set value in the setting display device 205 ends.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5006). As a result, when the setting confirmation process is terminated and the process returns to the process (step S4901 to step S4928) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 81), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). 2 Interrupts of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited.

After that, the return command at the time of confirmation is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5007). By storing the return command at the time of confirmation in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound / light side MPU 93 can recognize an image indicating that the setting confirmation process in the symbol display device 41 is being executed and the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process. End the display of the image to be displayed.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 196, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 starts. In order to proceed with the game in the main process (FIG. 81), the reset button 196 is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned ON in the situation where the main process (FIG. 81) is started. The setting confirmation process is executed in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the process of is executed, is being executed. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where the game is not performed.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 81), when the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned on by using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step S4911 and Step S4912: NO), the normal return command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4914). By storing the normal return command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the normal return command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the normal return command, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing (steps S4901 to S4928) at the start of supply of the operating power has been completed in the main MPU 82, and at the time of starting the supply of the operating power this time. In the process (step S4901 to step S4928), it is specified that none of the RAM clear process (step S4919), the setting confirmation process, and the set value update process is executed. Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 is being pressed, and when it is determined in step S4915 that the setting key insertion unit 195 is being turned on using the setting key, or in step. When it is determined in S4908 that "1" is set in the setting update display flag, the setting value update process is executed (step S4916). Not only when the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed) as described above, but also when the reset button 196 is pressed. The set value update process is executed by executing the set value update process even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the pressing operation and the setting key insertion unit 195 are turned on. If the power failure process is executed in the above situation, the operation contents at the start of the subsequent operation power supply are "no operation", "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" and "setting confirmation operation". Regardless of which of the above, the setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update process.

Here, the setting value update process executed in step S4916 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the set value update process. The processes of steps S5101 to S5115 in the set value update process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the interrupt permission is set (step S5101). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are basically prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing is performed. And interrupts are allowed in the setting value update process. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process and the set value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of the operating power (step S4901 to step S4928), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process are performed. Execution of (FIG. 114) is prohibited, and execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted in a situation where the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is being executed. To. However, since "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the situation where the setting confirmation processing or the setting value update processing is being executed, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started. Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the process for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and managing the game history is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is terminated without any notice.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5102). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value currently selected by the setting display device 205 of the main control device 71 is displayed.

After that, the initial setting at the start is performed (step S5103). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is set to the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 211 for specific control when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power cutoff (step S4905: NO). If the checksums do not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power failure for at least one of the stack areas 212 for specific control (step S4906: NO), or in the setting reference area. This is a flag in which "1" is set in step S4922 of the main process (FIG. 81) when the set value corresponding to the stored information is not in the normal range (step S4907: NO). By setting "1" to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5505 to perform the step. The processes of S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, when the above-mentioned information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and managing the game history is executed, while the process for advancing the game is executed. Will not be executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step S5103, it is possible to cancel the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 is specified when the set value update process is executed. ..

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area in the work area 211 for specific control (step S5104). The setting update area is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated in the setting value update process is stored. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area, the setting value to be selected is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area in step S5104, the set value to be selected becomes "setting 1". That is, regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10, when the set value update process is started, the set value to be selected becomes "setting 1". The configuration may be such that the process of step S5104 is not executed. In this case, when the setting value update process is started, the information in the setting reference area is written to the setting update area, so that when the setting value update process is started, the setting target at that time is set. The set value of is the set value to be selected.

After that, the update start command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5105). By storing the update start command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the update start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the update start command, the sound light side MPU 93 has an image indicating that the set value update process is being executed, an image for making the operation content for changing the set value recognizable, and an image for updating the set value. The display control is performed on the display side MPU 103 so that the image for making the operation content for terminating the processing recognizable is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the game hall administrator to recognize that the set value is being changed, and to end the operation content and the set value update process necessary for changing the set value. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation contents necessary for.

After that, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting update area is any of "1" to "6" (step S5106). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step S5106: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area (step S5107). As a result, the set value to be selected becomes "setting 1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5106 or when the process of step S5107 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step S5108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 195 has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 195 is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 195 is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case as well, a negative determination is made in step S5108.

When a negative determination is made in step S5108, the value of the setting update area is added by 1 (step S5110), provided that the reset button 196 is pressed (step S5109: YES). As a result, each time the reset button 196 is pressed once, the set value is updated one step higher. Further, when the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S5109: NO) or when the value of the setting update area is added by 1, the process returns to the process of step S5106, but the setting is updated in step S5106. If it is determined that the value of the area is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area in step S5107. As a result, if the reset button 196 is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 195 has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5108: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area is overwritten in the setting reference area (step S5111). ). As a result, the information of the setting value of the result updated in the current setting value update process is set in the setting reference area, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the setting of the current pachinko machine 10. It becomes a value.

After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step S5112). As a result, when the set value update process is terminated and the process returns to the process (step S4901 to step S4928) at the start of supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 81), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). 2 Interrupts of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) are prohibited.

After that, the RAM clear process is executed (step S5113). In the RAM clear processing, the specific control work area 211 excludes the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag. Clear the work area 211 of "0" and execute the initial setting. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal figure holding area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the holding information for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display are displayed. The hold information for the unit 37b is deleted, and the hold information for the normal map display unit 38a is deleted. In addition, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. For the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the process for clearing "0" and the process for performing initial setting are not executed.

After that, the return command at the time of update is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5114). By storing the return command at the time of update in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of update, the sound / light side MPU 93 makes it possible to recognize an image indicating that the set value update process in the symbol display device 41 is being executed and the operation content for changing the set value. The display of the image and the image for making the operation content for terminating the setting value update process recognizable is terminated. After that, the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5115).

Based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 196 as described above, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 with the setting key. The setting value update process is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process is executed based on the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion unit 195 by the setting key without pressing the reset button 196. As a result, it is possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 195 common as an operation for executing the setting-related processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation contents for generating the setting-related processing easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 196 is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When the pressing operation of the button 196 is added, the set value update process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the process to be executed different from the setting confirmation process and the set value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process among the setting confirmation process and the set value update process easy to understand for the manager of the game hall. Further, by increasing the operation contents for executing the setting value update process rather than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the act of illegally performing the setting value update process.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 81), after executing the set value update process in step S4916, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4917). ). As described above, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

In the main process (FIG. 81), when it is determined in step S4909 that the reset button 196 is pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned on by using the setting key. (Step S4915: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4918). The game stop flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the power failure flag is not set, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. By setting "1" to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5505 to perform the step. The processes of S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power off for at least one, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and playing games While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step S4918: NO), the RAM clear process is executed (step S4919). In the RAM clear processing, the specific control work area 211 excludes the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area) and the setting update display flag. Clear the work area 211 of "0" and execute the initial setting. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so that the winning / failing lottery is performed regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not executed, the open / close execution mode is not executed, and the normal map display unit 38a is not variablely displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It becomes a situation. Further, since the special figure holding area 84a and the normal figure holding area 84c provided in the work area 211 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the holding information for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display are displayed. The hold information for the unit 37b is deleted, and the hold information for the normal map display unit 38a is deleted. In addition, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 212 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the RAM clear processing, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main MPU 82 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S4902 is executed. For the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the process for clearing "0" and the process for performing initial setting are not executed.

After that, the value of the first security counter 211a provided in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1 (step S4920). As described above, the first security counter 211a is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

After that, the return command at the time of clearing is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S4921). By storing the return command at the time of clearing in the command transmission buffer 223b, the return command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound and light side MPU 93 specifies that the processing at the start of supply of the operating power (step S4901 to step S4928) has been completed in the main MPU 82, and the supply of the operating power this time is started. It is specified that the RAM clear processing of step S4919 is executed in the time processing (step S4901 to step S4928). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of clearing is executed.

Here, when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed, the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 81) when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. The contents of the above will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84.

When the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process nor the setting confirmation process is executed, the process executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. The contents will be explained first.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the "no operation" situation, none of the RAM clear processing (step S4919), the set value update process, and the setting confirmation process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81). Further, when the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the set value update process and setting are performed. The confirmation process is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the setting confirmation are performed. No processing is performed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the set value update. No processing is performed.

Next, when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing is executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main operation power supply is restarted thereafter. The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 81) will be described.

If the operating power supply is resumed in the "no operation" situation, if the operating power supply is resumed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the operation is performed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed. The setting value update process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) regardless of whether the power supply is restarted or the operating power supply is restarted in the situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. On the other hand, the RAM clear process (step S4919) and the setting confirmation process are not executed. That is, if the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing is being executed, the setting value update processing is newly performed regardless of the operation content when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. It will be started.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion unit 195 and the reset button when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on It is possible to newly start the set value update process regardless of the operation content to 196. This makes it possible to surely generate an opportunity to complete the update of the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from starting even though the update of the set value has not been completed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process, the set value update process is uniquely executed regardless of the operation content when restarting the supply of operating power. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed according to each operation content.

Next, when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing is executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the main operation power supply is restarted thereafter. The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 81) will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), while the set value update process and the setting confirmation process are performed. Is not executed. That is, even if the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted, the setting confirmation processing (Fig.) The RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed without newly executing 81). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step S4919) for the "RAM clear operation". By executing the RAM clear process (step S4919), the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0".

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update processing is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), but the setting confirmation process is not executed. That is, even if the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing is being executed, the setting confirmation processing is newly performed when the "setting change operation" is performed when the subsequent operation power supply is restarted. Execute the setting value update process without executing. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update process for the "setting change operation". Further, even if the setting confirmation process is not executed in this way, the set value to be selected is displayed on the setting display device 205 by executing the setting value update process, and at the end of the set value update process. Since the information of the set value to be selected at that time is set in the setting reference area, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step S5113) in the setting value updating process.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation is performed on condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, and set value in the main process (Fig. 81). Execute the process. As a result, even if the power failure processing is executed during the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to resume the confirmation of the set value by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation of "no operation", the setting key insertion unit 195 is provided with the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, and set value in the main process (FIG. 81). The setting confirmation process is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process and the subsequent operation power supply is restarted, even if there is no operation, the setting value confirmation can be resumed. It will be possible.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907 in the main process (FIG. 81), that is, when "1" is not set in the power failure flag, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If this is the case, "1" is set in the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S4922). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5555. By doing so, the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power failure, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power off for at least one, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and playing games While the process for managing the history is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4923). When the reset button 196 is not pressed (step S4923: NO), an error command indicating that an error has occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is issued to the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. It is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in (step S4924). When the abnormal command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 65 "Please change the setting." Is output. In addition, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is restarted when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value update process is executed. It will be.

After that, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step S4920). In the external output processing at the time of abnormality, the processing for externally outputting the abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that the abnormal signal is displayed. The signal output may be stopped.

When the reset button 196 is pressed (step S4923: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on by using the setting key (step S4915). When the reset button 196 is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned ON by using the setting key (step S4915 and step S4923: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S4916). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, it is denied in any of steps S4905 to S4907 because an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84. Even when the determination is made, the set value update process is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to changing the set value. Further, in the set value update process, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step S5103 as described above. As a result, when the set value update process is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 84 after the update of the set value is completed.

On the other hand, when the reset button 196 is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 195 is not turned ON (step S4923: YES, step S4915: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 211 for specific control is set to "1". Is set or not (step S4918). In the process of step S4918 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step S4922, as a matter of course, "1" is set to the game stop flag, so an affirmative determination is made in step S4918. In this case, in step S4924, a process for transmitting an abnormal command to the sound / light side MPU93 is executed, and in step S4925, an abnormal signal is output to the outside.

That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps S4905 to S4907, the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. Even if the power supply is started, the RAM clear process (step S4919) is not executed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the RAM clear process (RAM clear process) Step S4919) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag can be prevented from being resolved. It will be possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag, and the set value update process is performed. The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step S5103) at the start. As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process in order to eliminate the state in which "1" is set in the game stop flag. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 211 for specific control, it is possible to require not only the process for initializing the work area 211 for specific control but also the resetting of the set value. ..

Further, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation where "1" is set in the game stop flag, the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation". In the case of In step S4925, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", the operation to the main MPU 82 is performed regardless of the processing results of steps S4905 to S4907 in the subsequent main processing, unless the set value update processing is executed. Every time the power supply is started, the pachinko machine 10 is notified of the abnormality and the pachinko machine 10 is output to the outside when the abnormality occurs. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the set value should be changed.

When the process of step S4913 is executed, the process of step S4914 is executed, the process of step S4917 is executed, the process of step S4921 is executed, or the process of step S4925 is executed, the specific control is used. Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter 211g (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 (step S4926). The value set in the checking counter 211g is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter 211g, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The contents of the check display will be described in detail later.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, it will be described later after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps S4901 to S4928) is completed in the main MPU 82. The initial check period is started before the residual processing (step S4929 to step S4932) is started. As a result, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed is reduced. Is possible.

Further, the setting confirmation process and the set value update process are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps S4901 to S4928), whereas the process at the start of the supply of the operating power ends during the initial check period. Will be started when you do. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set value can be displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to prevent the influence.

After that, the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction (step S4927). The CALLI instruction and the first management process will be described in detail later.

After that, the start-up processing flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S4928). Processing of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 by making a negative determination in step S5505 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is activated by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0". Not only that, the processes of steps S5506 to S5520 are executed, and the state in which the processes for advancing the game are not executed is released. In step S4928, the power failure flag in the work area 211 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S4929 to S4932. That is, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), but between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. There will be some remaining time. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S4929 to S4932 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S4929 to S4932 is an irregular processing that is executed irregularly. In steps S4929 to S4932, the same processes as in steps S127 to S130 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the process of step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81) will be described.

In step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81), the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction as described above. The first management process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, when the situation in which the specific control process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) changes to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, the non-specific control process is called by using the CALLI instruction.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the first management process which is the non-specific control process is started, the call of the first management process and the start of the first management process are started. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the change afterwards in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the flag register information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt described later are executed. Interruption of processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are the specific control processes, are interrupted and started during the execution of the first management process, which is the non-specific control process. It is possible to prevent it from being interrupted.

When the first management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are saved. ) Is disabled, then the program corresponding to the first management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the first management process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction (“CALLI”). At the same time, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the first management process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program for executing the first management process is reduced as compared with the case where the instruction for executing the first management process and the instruction for starting the program for the first management process are provided separately. be able to. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program can be reduced.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the first management process. The processes of steps S5201 to S5216 in the first management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5201). The stack pointer is an area in which the address information for specifying the storage area to which the information to be written by the push instruction is to be written by the main MPU 82 in the stack areas 212 and 214 is set. Each time a push instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is the write target in the previous order. It is updated with the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5201, the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The fact that information is stored from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address in this way is the same for the stack area 212 for specific control.

By the way, in both the stack area 212 for specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, when the push instruction is additionally executed even though the information is set in all the storage areas, the push instruction is executed. Assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage process, the entire area of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is even though an abnormality has occurred in the memory processing.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information of the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S5202). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information of the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5203). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5204). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information of the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5205). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information of the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5206). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information of the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5207).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S5202 to S5207, information on WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

These WA registers, BC registers, DE registers, HL registers, IX registers, and IY registers are registers used in the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. be. The information set in such a register is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209), and is used for specific control. The information in these registers can be saved before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is returned to these registers to return the state of these registers. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the initial setting process (step S5208) and disconnection, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the short circuit process (step S5209) to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the non-specific control is performed. It is possible to suppress the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, the register information as described above is saved while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used in the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209). Is possible.

As a matter of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register correspond to non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and retained until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Further, by saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be suppressed to a small size. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of the information is read first from the later information as described above, so that the reading order of the information is displaced due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all the subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

After executing the processes of steps S5202 to S5207, the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are executed. When executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209), the subroutine corresponding to the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) set in the program for non-specific control. In order to specify the return address of the first management process after the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are executed when the program of the subroutine is executed. Information is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) are completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the first management process indicated by the return address is read. Return to the program. Details of the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209) will be described later.

After executing the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209), the first management process is terminated at the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction as "LD SP, Y (r + a)". Y (r + a) is set as a fixed address when returning to the specific control later (step S5210). The address of Y (r + a) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the first management process is called in step S4927 of the main process (FIG. 81), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant, and accordingly, the main MPU 82 at that timing. The stack pointer information (ie, the stack pointer value) is constant. In this case, examples of the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control include information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first management process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + a). Therefore, when the initial setting process (step S5208) and the disconnection short circuit process (step S5209), which are processes corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the constant information is Y. By setting (r + a) in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the main side corresponding to the specific control can be restored. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the MPU 82 to the main RAM 84 before starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure the area for evacuation in the main RAM 84.

After that, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5211). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5212). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5213). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5214). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5215). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5216). By executing the processes of steps S5211 to S5216, the processes corresponding to the non-specific control of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 are started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the operation.

After executing the processes of steps S5211 to S5216, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 81) included in the specific control process by the RETI instruction. By executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management process is returned to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt is interrupted. The state in which the generation of the process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to the state in which the process is permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing can be newly executed.

Due to the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management process by one instruction (“RETI”) is stored in the main MPU 82. By returning to the flag register, it is possible to switch from the state in which the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted. Therefore, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the first management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). ) And an instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted are individually provided in the non-specific control processing program. The number of instructions can be reduced. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for the non-specific control process can be reduced.

Here, the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. That is, the information required for a plurality of processing times of the non-specific control processing executed with the specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control or the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the initial setting process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5208 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process. The processes of steps S5301 to S5304 in the initial setting process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

In the initial setting process, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and the second described above have already been described. Security counter 213k, 1st to 3rd general prize abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric prize abnormality flag 213o, 1st operation prize abnormality flag 213p, 2nd operation prize abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate prize abnormality flag 213s and A process for initializing the magnetic abnormality flag 213t is executed. These 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, magnetic detection counter 213i, magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, 2nd security counter 213k, 1st to 3rd general prize abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric prize prize abnormality flag 213o , 1st operation winning abnormality flag 213p, 2nd operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and each of these areas has a data capacity of 1 byte. The addresses are set so that they are serial numbers. 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, respectively → magnetic detection counter 213i → magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j → 2nd security counter 213k → 1st to 3rd general prize abnormality flags 213l to 213n → special electric prize abnormality flag The address increases by "1" in the order of 213o → 1st operation winning abnormality flag 213p → 2nd operation winning abnormality flag 213q → out abnormality flag 213r → gate winning abnormality flag 213s → magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the initial setting process, first, the start address is set as the initial setting target address in the predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S5301). The start address is the address of the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a.

After that, the initial setting is performed for the area corresponding to the initial setting target address (step S5302). When the initial setting target address is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a, so the initial setting is performed for the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a. Specifically, the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is cleared to "0" as an initial setting.

After that, it is determined whether or not the initial setting target address is the final address (step S5303). The final address is the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t. When the initial setting target address is not the final address (step S5303: NO), the initial setting target address is updated to the address in the following order (step S5304). Specifically, the initial setting target address is added by 1. Then, the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition is initially set in step S5302, and the process of step S5303 is executed.

When the process of step S5304 is executed in the situation where the initial setting target address is the start address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b, and the initial setting target address is the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b. Initial settings are made. Specifically, the second prize monitoring timer counter 213b is cleared to "0" as an initial setting. If the process of step S5304 is executed in a situation where the address of the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is the initial setting target address, the initial setting target address becomes the address of the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c. Initial settings are made for the third prize monitoring timer counter 213c. Specifically, the third prize monitoring timer counter 213c is cleared to "0" as an initial setting.

When the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the initial setting target address in the process of step S5304 by repeating the processes of steps S5302 to S5304, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is set as the initial setting. After clearing "0", a positive determination is made in step S5303. By making an affirmative determination in step S5303, this initial setting process is terminated. In the initial setting process (FIG. 86), a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target, which will be described later, are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The initial setting of step S5302 is not executed for the counter 255.

Next, the disconnection short-circuit processing executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5209 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a disconnection short circuit process. The processes of steps S5401 to S5411 in the disconnection short-circuit process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, the value of the monitored counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5401). The monitoring target counter is a counter for specifying the type of the detection sensor to be monitored for the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit by the main MPU 82. As detection sensors to be monitored for the occurrence of disconnection or short circuit, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided for each of the three general winning openings 31 and the special electric winning device 32 are provided. The special electric detection sensor 234a, the first actuating port detection sensor 235a provided in the first actuating port 33, the second actuating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second actuating port 34, and the out port detection provided in the out port 24a. There is a gate detection sensor 238a provided on the sensor 237a and the through gate 35 (see FIG. 90). When the value of the monitoring target counter is "0", it corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and when the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", it corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. When the value of the monitored counter is "2", it corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and when the value of the monitored counter is "3", it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 234a. , The case where the value of the monitoring target counter is "4" corresponds to the first actuating port detection sensor 235a, and the case where the value of the monitoring target counter is "5" corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 236a. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "6", it corresponds to the out port detection sensor 237a, and when the value of the monitoring target counter is "7", it corresponds to the gate detection sensor 238a.

A voltage of 12V is applied to each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a through an electric path for input. Further, the detection sensors 231a to 238a are connected to the main MPU 82 through an electric path for output, and a voltage corresponding to the detection result of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is applied to the main MPU 82. In this case, a plurality of resistances are connected to the electric path for output, and the voltage applied to the main MPU 82 by these resistances is set to a predetermined value or less, and the supplied current is set to a predetermined value or less. The function is fulfilled.

An electric signal is input to the main MPU 82 depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection unit of each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In this case, a LOW level electric signal is input to the main MPU 82 when the game ball does not pass through the detection units of the above detection sensors 231a to 238a, and HI level electricity when the game ball passes through the detection unit. The signal is input to the main MPU 82.

For each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, when a disconnection occurs in each of the electric paths or inside the sensor, the voltage input from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 is lower than in the case of the LOW level. It becomes a voltage (that is, 0V). Further, when a short circuit occurs between the electric paths or inside the sensor, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a to the main MPU 82 becomes higher than that at the HI level. The main MPU 82 determines that a disconnection has occurred when the voltage applied from the detection sensors 231a to 238a is lower than the voltage at the LOW level, and is applied from the detection sensors 231a to 238a. When the voltage is higher than that at the HI level, it is determined that a short circuit has occurred.

In the disconnection short-circuit process, after the value of the monitored counter is cleared to "0" in step S5401, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter is lower than that at the LOW level. By determining whether or not it is (that is, 0V), it is determined whether or not a disconnection has occurred (step S5402). Then, when it is determined that the disconnection has occurred (step S5403: YES), the disconnection occurrence command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5404). By storing the disconnection occurrence command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the disconnection occurrence command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the disconnection generation command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 are notified that the disconnection has occurred. In this disconnection notification, the types of the detection sensors 231a to 238a that have identified the occurrence of the disconnection this time may also be notified.

After that, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S5405). As described above, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

When a negative determination is made in step S5403 or when the process of step S5405 is executed, the voltage input from the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitored counter becomes a higher voltage than in the case of the HI level. By determining whether or not there is a short circuit, it is determined whether or not a short circuit has occurred (step S5406). When it is determined that a short circuit has occurred (step S5407: YES), the short circuit occurrence command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S5408). By storing the short-circuit generation command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the short-circuit generation command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the short-circuit generation command, the sound-light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to be notified that a short circuit has occurred. In this short-circuit notification, the types of the detection sensors 231a to 238a that have identified the occurrence of the short-circuit this time may also be notified.

After that, the value of the second security counter 213k provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S5409). As described above, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

When a negative determination is made in step S5407, or when the process of step S5409 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitored counter is "7", which is the maximum value (step S5410). When a negative determination is made in step S5410, after adding 1 to the value of the monitoring target counter (step S5411), steps S5402 to 238a with respect to the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter after the 1 addition. The process of S5409 is executed. When it is determined in step S5410 that the value of the monitored counter is the maximum value, the main disconnection short-circuit process is terminated.

<1st timer interrupt processing>
Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process. Of the processes in steps S5501 to S5521 in the first timer interrupt process, processes other than the fraud detection process called and executed in step S5509 and the second management process called and executed in step S5521. Is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and the specific control data, and the fraud detection process and the second management process are the non-specific control program and the non-specific control process. It is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the data for specific control.

First, the power failure monitoring process is executed (step S5501). In the power failure monitoring process, whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 85 is monitored, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure processing is executed. .. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 84, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S5502). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S5503, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S4930 of the main process (FIG. 81), and in step S5504, the variable counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S4931 of the main process (FIG. 81). do.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S5505). When "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag (step S5505: YES), the game history in step S5521 is managed without executing the processes of steps S5506 to S5520. Proceed to the process for. As a result, when "1" is set in the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag, power failure monitoring, random number update, and game history management are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). However, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 from being executed.

When "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S5505: NO), the process for advancing the game in steps S5506 to S5520 is executed. Specifically, first, the port output process is executed (step S5506). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous first timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S5507). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S5508). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the detection sensors 231a to 238a are read, and the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through port are read. A process for specifying whether or not a ball has entered the gate 35 is executed.

After that, the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction (step S5509). The fraud detection process will be described in detail later. After that, a timer update process for specific control for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the work area 211 for specific control of the main RAM 84 is executed (step S5510). In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured. After that, the fraud handling process is executed (step S5511). The fraud handling process will be described in detail later.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S5512). In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle as in the first embodiment. After that, as the input state monitoring process, the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S5507 (step S5513).

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S5514), and the display control of the normal figure display unit 38a and the execution control of the normal electric open state are performed. (Step S5515). The processing contents of the special figure special electric control process and the normal figure general electric control process are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. The processing configuration of the different parts will be described later.

In the following step S5516, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S5514 and S5515, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the first reserved information in the first special figure reserved display unit 37c is set, and the second reserved information is set. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number in the second special figure hold display unit 37d and the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the normal figure side in the normal figure hold display unit 38b are set. Further, in step S5516, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S5514 and S5515. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S5517). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S5518). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the first timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S5519).

After that, the setting monitoring process is executed (step S5520). In the setting monitoring process, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area of the main RAM 84 is set as a target for use by determining whether or not it is any of "1" to "6". It is determined whether or not the set value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6". If the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area is "0" or 7 or more, it means that the set value set as the target of use is abnormal, so the game stop flag of the main RAM 84 Set to "1". As a result, the game cannot proceed until the set value to be used is newly set in the set value update process (FIG. 83).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5555 or when the process of step S5520 is executed, the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction (step S5521). The second management process will be described in detail later.

<Structure related to winning>
Next, the configuration related to winning will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball flowing down the game area PA.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. To. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 231 to 237 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 231 to 237 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 231 to 237, and are directed to the discharge ball recovery part (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 231a to 237a for detecting the game ball are provided in each discharge passage portion 231 to 237. The discharge passage portions 231 to 237 and the detection sensors 231a to 237a will be described below. Since three general winning openings 31 are provided, discharge passage portions 231 to 233 exist corresponding to each of the three general winning openings 31. The first winning opening detection sensor 231a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharging passage portion 231 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31, and the general winning opening on the right side thereof. The second winning opening detection sensor 232a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the second discharging passage portion 232 corresponding to the mouth 31, and the third discharging passage portion corresponding to the rightmost general winning opening 31. The third winning opening detection sensor 233a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the 233.

The fourth discharge passage portion 234 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 234a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 234, and the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 234. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. A fifth discharge passage portion 235 exists corresponding to the first actuating port 33. The first actuating port detection sensor 235a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 235, and the game ball that has entered the first actuating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 235. It is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 235a on the way through. The sixth discharge passage portion 236 exists corresponding to the second actuating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 236a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage portion 236, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 236. It is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 236a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 237 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 237a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 237, and the game ball that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 237. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 237a.

The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 231a to 237a is not the detection target of the other detection sensors 231a to 237a. Further, the gate detection sensor 238a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a.

As the various detection sensors 231a to 238a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 231a to 238a are electrically connected to the main MPU 82, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 231a to 238a are output to the main MPU 82. Specifically, the various detection sensors 231a to 238a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Next, based on the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a on the main MPU 82, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the game will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a are input to the main MPU 82.

The main MPU 82 is provided with an input port 241. The input port 241 is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 241. However, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 241 depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S5508) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the signal group to be input to the input port 241 is set to the signal group from each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 234a. , The 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st actuating port detection sensor 235a, and the 5th bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2nd actuating port detection sensor 236a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out port detection sensor 237a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 238a.

Each of the above detection sensors 231a to 238a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that the detection is not being performed as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and when the passage of the game ball is detected. Outputs a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress as a detection signal. Then, the input port 241 stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information about. That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is not detected is stored, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In this situation, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S5508 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). The processes of steps S5601 to S5623 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

First, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S5601). In the various flag clearing processes, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, and the first operation winning confirmation flag provided in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control are provided. , The second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag and the gate winning confirmation flag are cleared to "0". The contents of each of these confirmation flags will be described later. The ball entry detection process is executed in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the situation where a negative determination is made in step S5505 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). In, after the ball entry detection process is executed in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the execution of the process corresponding to the state of the above confirmation flag is completed, so that every time the ball entry detection process is started. Even if the above confirmation flag is cleared to "0", no problem occurs.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S5602: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first prize confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5603), and the value of the counter for 10 prize balls provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set to 1. Add (step S5604). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times for paying out 10 game balls by the main MPU 82. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and 10 pieces are output. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S5605: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second prize confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5606), and the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. Step S5607). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S5608: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third prize confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5609), and the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. Step S5610). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is set by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S5611: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5612), and the value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. (Step S5613). The special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32. In the special electric power control process (step S5514) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric power winning confirmation flag, one game to the special electric power winning device 32 is performed. It is specified that the ball has entered, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. Further, since the content of the special electric winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management processing (step S5521) executed after the special electric special electric control processing (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). Even if the information of the special electric winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special electric special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the special electric winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the 15 game balls should be paid out by the main MPU 82. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 and 15 pieces are output in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first operation port detection sensor 235a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S5614: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5615), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set. 1 is added (step S5618). The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times one game ball should be paid out by the main MPU 82. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 and one piece is output in the payout output process of step S5518 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. The processes of steps S5701 to S5710 in the pending information acquisition process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

When "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag (step S5701: YES), the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit stored number. As a condition (step S5702: YES), the process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S5703). The display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure holding display unit 37c corresponds to the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 111. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 111, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S5703. Store in the area (step S5704). After that, the first hold command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5705). By storing the first hold command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the first hold information.

The content of the first operation winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Therefore, even if the information of the first operation prize confirmation flag is confirmed in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the first operation prize confirmation flag is still available. It will be maintained as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 5th bit D5 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored. , It is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a (step S5617: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5618), and the value of the counter for one prize ball in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. (Step S5619).

In the hold information acquisition process shown in FIG. 92, when “1” is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag (step S5706: YES), the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 112 is stored. On condition that the number of items is less than the upper limit storage number (step S5707: YES), the process for acquiring the second hold information is executed. In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S5708). The display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure holding display unit 37d corresponds to the number of the second holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 112. After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 112, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S5708. Store in the area (step S5709). After that, the second hold command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S5710). By storing the second hold command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second hold information.

Since the content of the second operation winning confirmation flag is also referred to in the second management process (step S5521) executed after the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Even if the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is confirmed in the special figure special electric control process (step S5514), the information of the second operation winning confirmation flag is maintained as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored. , It is determined that one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 237a (step S5620: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the out confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5621). The out confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the out port detection sensor 237a.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is released by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S5622: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S5623). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal figure normal power control process (step S5515) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), it is stored in the normal figure hold area 84c by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning confirmation flag. On condition that the number of pending information on the Fuzu side is less than the upper limit of 4, the numerical information of the current Fuden random number counter C4 is stored in the Fuzu holding area 84c as the holding information on the Fuzu side. Execute the process.

Next, the process of step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described.

In step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction as described above. The fraud detection process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, when the situation in which the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) changes to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program for fraud detection processing, which is a non-specific control process, is started, the information changes after the call for the fraud detection process or the start of the fraud detection process. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the operation to the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the flag register information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process described later are performed. The interrupt of (FIG. 114) is disabled. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are the specific control processes, are interrupted and started during the execution of the fraud detection process, which is the non-specific control process. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

When the fraud detection process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are saved. After the interrupt of is disabled, the program corresponding to the fraud detection process is started.

In this way, by configuring the fraud detection process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction (“CALLI”). At the same time, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, a program corresponding to the fraud detection process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. It is possible to reduce the number of instructions set in the program to execute the fraud detection process, as compared with the case where the instruction for executing the fraud detection process and the instruction for starting the fraud detection process are provided separately. can. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program can be reduced.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a fraud detection process. The processes of steps S5801 to S5818 in the fraud detection process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S5801). The stack pointer is an area in which the address information for specifying the storage area to which the information to be written by the push instruction is to be written by the main MPU 82 in the stack areas 212 and 214 is set. Each time a push instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is the write target in the previous order. It is updated with the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S5801, the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information of the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5802). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information of the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5803). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5804). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information of the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5805). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information of the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5806). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information of the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S5807).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S5802 to S5807, information on WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), and timer update of non-specific control, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. This is a register used in the process (step S5810) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811). The information set in such a register is used to execute information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). By saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control in advance, the information of these registers used in the specific control can be saved before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is returned to these registers to return the state of these registers. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clear processing (step S5808), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, and test firing. WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register to be used in test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810) and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). By selectively saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to suppress the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, a work area for non-specific control that can be used for information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811). It is possible to save the register information as described above while securing a large capacity of 213.

As a matter of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register correspond to non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and retained until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Further, by saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be suppressed to a small size. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of the information is read first from the later information as described above, so that the reading order of the information is displaced due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all the subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

After executing the processes of steps S5802 to S5807, information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are performed. Execute. Information clear processing (step S5808), test firing test processing (step S5809), non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are set in the program for non-specific control. The program of the subroutine corresponding to the information clearing process (step S5808), the test firing test process (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update process (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) is executed. However, when the program of the subroutine is executed, after the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are executed. Information for specifying the return address of the fraud detection process in the above is written in the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811) are completed, the return address is given by a pop instruction. The information for specifying is read out, and the program returns to the fraud detection processing program indicated by the return address.

In the test firing test process of step S5809, the test firing test information is generated, and the generated test firing test information is stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the timer update process for non-specific control in step S5810, the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control of the main RAM 84 is collectively updated. The timer counter includes the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h and the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j. All of these timer counters 213a to 213j are decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5810 is executed, and 1 is already decremented in the situation of "0", so that "1" is set in the carry flag (or borrow flag). Timer The counter is cleared to "0". Details of the information clearing process (step S5808) and the fraud detection execution process (step S5811) will be described later.

After executing the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the non-specific control timer update processing (step S5810), and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811), "LD SP, Y (r + b)". As a load instruction, Y (r + b) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address when returning to the specific control after the completion of the fraud detection process (step S5812). The address of Y (r + b) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the fraud detection process is called in step S5509 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant, and the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 is always constant. The information of the stack pointer of the side MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, examples of the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control include information on the return address of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the fraud detection process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + b). Therefore, the information clear processing (step S5808), the test firing test processing (step S5809), the timer update processing (step S5810) of the non-specific control, and the fraud detection execution processing (step S5811), which are the processes corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the certain information Y (r + b) is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, so that the information of the stack pointer is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the information immediately before the start of. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure the area for evacuation in the main RAM 84.

After that, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5813). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5814). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5815). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5816). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5817). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S5818). By executing the processes of steps S5813 to S5818, the processes corresponding to the non-specific control of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 are started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the operation.

After executing the processes of steps S5813 to S5818, the process returns to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) included in the specific control process by the RETI instruction. By executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the fraud detection process is returned to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process is performed. (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are switched from the prohibited state to the permitted state. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing can be newly executed. In the RETI instruction in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93), the state in which the generation of the first timer interrupt process is prohibited may be maintained.

Due to the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, the flag register information saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the fraud detection process by one instruction (“RETI”) is the flag of the main MPU 82. By returning to the register, it is possible to switch from the state in which the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted. Therefore, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control to the flag register of the main MPU 82 before the execution of the fraud detection process, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). And an instruction set in the non-specific control processing program, as compared with the case where an instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted is provided separately. You can reduce the number of. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for the non-specific control process can be reduced.

Here, the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. That is, the information required for a plurality of processing times of the non-specific control processing executed with the specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control or the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the information clearing process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5808 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the information clearing process. The processes of steps S5901 to S5904 in the information clearing process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 by using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

In the information clear processing, among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, and the special electric winning abnormality have already been described. A process for clearing "0" of the flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t is executed. These 1st general prize abnormality flag 213l, 2nd general prize abnormality flag 213m, 3rd general prize abnormality flag 213n, special electric prize prize abnormality flag 213o, 1st operation prize abnormality flag 213p, 2nd operation prize abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag The 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t all have a data capacity of 1 byte, and the addresses are set so as to be serial numbers for each of these areas. 1st general prize abnormality flag 213l → 2nd general prize abnormality flag 213m → 3rd general prize abnormality flag 213n → special electric prize abnormality flag 213o → 1st operation prize abnormality flag 213p → 2nd operation prize abnormality flag 213q → out abnormality flag 213r → The address increases by “1” in the order of the gate winning abnormality flag 213s → the magnetic abnormality flag 213t.

In the information clearing process, first, the start address is set as the clear target address in the predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S5901). The start address is the address of the first general winning abnormality flag 213l.

After that, "0" is cleared for the area corresponding to the address to be cleared (step S5902). When the clear target address is the start address, the area corresponding to the start address is the first general prize abnormality flag 213l, so the first general prize abnormality flag 213l is cleared by "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the clear target address is the final address (step S5903). The final address is the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t. When the clear target address is not the final address (step S5903: NO), the clear target address is updated to the address in the next order (step S5904). Specifically, the clear target address is added by 1. Then, "0" is cleared in step S5902 for the area corresponding to the address after the addition of 1, and the process of step S5903 is executed.

When the process of step S5904 is executed in the situation where the clear target address is the start address, the clear target address becomes the address of the second general prize abnormality flag 213 m, and "0" is given to the second general prize abnormality flag 213 m. "Clearing is done. If the process of step S5904 is executed in a situation where the address of the second general prize abnormality flag 213m is the address to be cleared, the address to be cleared becomes the address of the third general prize abnormality flag 213n, and the third general prize abnormality flag 213n is used. "0" is cleared for the general prize abnormality flag 213n.

When the address of the magnetic anomaly flag 213t corresponding to the final address is set as the clear target address in the process of step S5904 by repeating the processes of steps S5902 to S5904, the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5903, an affirmative determination is made. By making an affirmative determination in step S5903, this information clearing process is terminated. In the initial setting process (FIG. 86), the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The clearing process of step S5902 is not executed for the normal counter area 251, the calculation result storage area 252, the display target setting area 253, the switching timing counter 254, and the display target counter 255.

By executing the information clear processing as described above, the first general winning abnormality flag 213l, the second general winning abnormality flag 213m, and the third general winning abnormality flag 213n, before the fraud detection execution processing described later is executed. It is possible to clear the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, the second operating winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, and the magnetic abnormality flag 213t. The effect of clearing these flags 213l to 213t to "0" before executing the fraud detection execution process will be described later.

Next, the fraud detection execution process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S5811 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the fraud detection execution process. The processes of steps S6001 to S6019 in the fraud detection execution process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6001). As described above, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, to the second operating port 34. When one of the game balls is won, "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag.

When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag (step S6001: YES), whether or not "1" is set in the general electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. (Step S6002), and at the same time, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for the general electric power of the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6003).

Here, the normal power control process executed in the normal power control process of step S5515 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96. The normal power control process is a process for controlling the normal power open state of the normal power accessory 34a in the second operating port 34, as in the first embodiment. The processes of steps S6101 to S6111 in the general electric control process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the second operating port 34 is in the open state by determining whether or not "1" is set in the normal power open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. (Step S6101). The normal power open state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the drive signal is output to the normal power drive unit 34b and the second operating port 34 is in the open state. When the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the normal power is started in the normal figure finalizing process (step S309) of the normal power control process (FIG. 15), the normal power open state flag is set to "1". Is set, and also when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the normal power is started in step S6110 described later, the normal power open state flag is set to "1".

When "1" is set in the normal power open state flag (step S6101: YES), the closing determination process is executed (step S6102). In the closing determination process, when "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, that is, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34. In this case, the value of the general electric winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. As with the first embodiment, whether the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit of 10 on the side of the normal power, as in the first embodiment. It is a counter for specifying whether or not it is on the main MPU 82. When the value of the general electric winning counter after subtraction is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the second operating port 34 is satisfied. Further, when the second operating port 34 has not been won or the value of the general electric winning counter is not "0", the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set. By determining whether or not it is "0", it is determined whether or not the continuation period of one opening at the second operating port 34 has elapsed. When the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the second operating port 34 is satisfied.

When the closing condition of the second operating port 34 is satisfied (step S6103: YES), the closing setting process is executed (step S6104). In the closing setting process, the output of the driving signal to the driving unit 34b for general electric power is stopped, so that the second operating port 34 is closed. After that, the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6105).

After that, the information of the monitoring delay period for the general power is set in the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for the general power in the work area 211 for the specific control (step S6106). The monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general electric power detects the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a provided in the second operating port 34, after the second operating port 34 in the open state is closed. Is a counter used to specify the period treated as valid by the main MPU 82. The monitoring delay period for general electric power is set as a period equal to or longer than the maximum period assumed as the period until the game ball winning in the second operating port 34 in the open state is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. Specifically, it is set to 1 second.

After that, the end branch process is executed (step S6107). In the end branch processing, when the value of the normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the normal power counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is set as the end of the current normal power open state. Clear "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307). When the value of the general electric winning counter is 1 or more, the value of the general electric opening counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1. Similar to the first embodiment, the normal power release counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the normal power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened in the current normal power open state by the main MPU 82. Is. When the value of the normal power release counter after subtraction 1 is "0", the value of the normal power open counter in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" as the current normal power open state is completed. .. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S307). When the value of the normal power release counter after subtraction 1 is 1 or more, the information of the interval period (specifically, 2 seconds) on the normal power side is sent to the timer counter on the normal power side of the work area 211 for specific control. set. In this case, since the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is maintained, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control processing is maintained in the Fuzu control processing (FIG. 96).

When it is determined in the normal power control process that the value of the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6101: NO), the timer counter on the normal power side in the work area 211 for specific control By determining whether or not the value of is "0", it is determined whether or not the interval period on the normal electric side has elapsed (step S6108). When the interval period on the normal power side has elapsed (step S6108: YES), the information corresponding to the duration of the long open on the normal power side (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the normal power side (specifically, 2 seconds). Step S6109). Further, the second operating port 34 is opened in the open state by outputting the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power again (step S6110). After that, "1" is set in the normal power open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6111). In this case, since the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is maintained, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the Fuzu Fuden control processing is maintained in the Fuden control processing (FIG. 96).

Returning to the description of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in the situation where "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6001: YES), the work for specific control "1" is not set in the normal power open state flag in the area 211 (step S6002: NO), and the value of the normal power monitoring delay timer counter 211c in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". In the case (step S6003: YES), the second actuating port 34 is closed, and the second actuating port detection sensor 236a has passed a period in which the detection of the game ball is treated as valid. It means that the game ball is detected by the operation port detection sensor 236a. In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6004). As described above, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entry has occurred as a result of the monitoring process using the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general use or the 6th prize monitoring timer counter 213g. , "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the process of the non-specific control.

After that, the Fuden winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6005). By storing the Fuden winning abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the Fuden winning abnormality command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the general electric winning abnormality command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 are notified that an abnormality has occurred in relation to the winning of the second operating port 34. To be done.

After that, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S6006). As described above, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

When a negative judgment is made in step S6001, an affirmative judgment is made in step S6002, a negative judgment is made in step S6003, or the process of step S6006 is executed, a special electric prize is awarded in the work area 211 for specific control. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the confirmation flag (step S6007). As described above, when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a in the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, that is, one to the special electric winning device 32. When a game ball is won, "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag.

When "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag (step S6007: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the special electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. At the same time (step S6008), it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b of the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009).

Here, FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) regarding the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, and the special electric closing processing executed in the special electric special electric control processing of step S5514 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). ) Will be explained with reference to the flowchart. The special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, and the special electric closing processing are processing for controlling the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode as in the first embodiment. The processes of steps S6201 to S6208 in the special electric start processing, steps S6301 to S6307 in the special electric opening process, and steps S6401 to S6407 in the special electric closing process use the program for specific control and the data for specific control. Then, it is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the special electric start processing, the open / close execution mode is determined by determining whether or not the value of the special figure side timer counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is “0”. It is determined whether or not the opening period of (step S6201) has elapsed (step S6201). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, information on the number of round games corresponding to the game result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set in the round counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control ( Step S6202). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 82 as in the first embodiment. Further, the information on the open continuation period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special figure side (step S6203). Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6204). The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of the winning upper limit number by the main MPU 82 as in the first embodiment. Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened in the open state by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b (step S6205).

After that, "1" is set in the special electric open state flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6206). The special electric power open state flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the special electric power winning device 32 is in the open state because the drive signal is output to the special electric power driving unit 32b.

After that, the special electric release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6207). By storing the special electric release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the special electric release command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. ..

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1 (step S6208). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (FIG. 97 (b)).

In the process during opening of the special electric power shown in FIG. 97 (b), the process for determining closure is executed (step S6301). In the closing determination process, it is specified when "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, that is, when the special electric winning device 32 is won. The value of the winning counter in the control work area 211 is subtracted by 1. When the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. If no prize has been awarded to the special electric winning device 32 or the value of the winning counter is not "0", is the value of the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control "0"? By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the open continuation period of the round game has elapsed. When the value of the timer counter on the special figure side is "0", it is determined that the closing condition of the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied.

When the closing condition of the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied (step S6302: YES), the closing setting process is executed (step S6303). In the closing setting process, the special electric winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the driving signal to the special electric driving unit 32b. After that, the special electric open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6304).

After that, the information of the special electric monitoring delay period is set in the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6305). The special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b treats the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a provided in the special electric winning device 32 as valid even after the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is closed. It is a counter used for specifying by the main MPU 82. The special electric monitoring delay period is set as a period longer than the maximum period assumed as the period until the game ball winning the special electric winning device 32 in the open state is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. Is set to 1 second.

Then, after subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6306), the ending branch processing is executed (step S6307). In the ending branch processing, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is 1 or more, the interval period information (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. , The value of the special electric power counter in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1. As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric power closing process (FIG. 97 (c)). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the ending period information (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control. Further, the ending command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82. By storing the ending command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display / light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the ending effect of the opening / closing execution mode. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electric end process (step S612) of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18).

In the special electric closing processing shown in FIG. 97 (c), whether the interval period has elapsed by determining whether or not the value of the special figure side timer counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S6401). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, the information on the open duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter on the special drawing side (step S6402). Further, "10" is set in the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6403). Further, the special electric winning device 32 is opened in the open state by outputting the drive signal to the special electric driving unit 32b (step S6404).

After that, "1" is set in the special electric open state flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6405). After that, the special electric release command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6406). By storing the special electric release command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the special electric release command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state. .. After that, the value of the special electric power counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6407). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (FIG. 97 (b)).

Returning to the description of the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), in the situation where "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6007: YES), the work area 211 for specific control When "1" is not set in the special electric open state flag in (step S6008: NO), and the value of the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" (step S6009). : YES), the game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a even after the period for treating the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a as valid has elapsed after the special electric winning device 32 is closed. It means that it was done. In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6010). As already described, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is provided corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. When it is specified by the non-specific control process that the detection of an abnormal game ball entry has occurred as a result of the monitoring process using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213e. In the non-specific control process, "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o.

After that, the special electric winning abnormality command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6011). By storing the special electric winning abnormality command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the special electric winning abnormality command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. When the sound / light side MPU 93 receives the special electric winning abnormality command, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 are notified that an abnormality has occurred in relation to the special electric winning device 32. To do so.

After that, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S6012). As described above, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

A confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control when a negative determination is made in step S6007, an affirmative determination is made in step S6008, a negative determination is made in step S6009, or the process of step S6012 is executed. Of the 1st prize confirmation flag, the 2nd prize confirmation flag, the 3rd prize confirmation flag, the special electric prize confirmation flag, the 1st operation prize confirmation flag, the 2nd operation prize confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag and the gate prize confirmation flag of the group 211d. , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the confirmation flag corresponding to the value of the monitored counter provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6013).

The monitoring target counter is a counter for specifying the type of the confirmation flag to be the target of the monitoring processing in steps S6014 to S6016 by the main MPU 82. At the timing when the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is started, the value of the monitored counter is "0". The type of confirmation flag to be monitored in steps S6014 to S6016 is the first winning confirmation flag when the value of the monitored counter is "0", and the value of the monitored counter is "1". The case is the second prize confirmation flag, the case where the value of the monitored counter is "2" is the third prize confirmation flag, and the case where the value of the monitored counter is "3" is the special electric prize confirmation flag. , The case where the value of the monitoring target counter is "4" is the first operation winning confirmation flag, and the case where the value of the monitoring target counter is "5" is the second operation winning confirmation flag, and the value of the monitoring target counter. Is "6" for the out confirmation flag, and the value of the monitored counter is "7" for the gate winning confirmation flag.

When "1" is set in the confirmation flag corresponding to the current value of the monitoring target counter (step S6013: YES), the non-specific control among the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control. It is determined whether or not the values of the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the values of the monitoring target counters in the work area 213 are 1 or more (step S6014).

As described above, the first to third winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213c detect one game ball by the winning opening detection sensors 231a to 233a provided in the corresponding general winning opening 31, and then the next game ball. It is a counter used for specifying the period for treating the detection of the above as invalid by the main MPU 82. As already explained, the fourth prize-winning monitoring timer counter 213d determines the period in which the detection of the next game ball is invalidated by the main MPU 82 after the special electric power detection sensor 234a of the special electric power winning device 32 detects one game ball. A counter used to identify. As described above, the fifth prize monitoring timer counter 213e treats the detection of one game ball as invalid after the first operation port detection sensor 235a provided in the first operation port 33 detects one game ball. It is a counter used to specify the period in the main MPU 82. As already explained, the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f mainly treats the detection of the next game ball as invalid after the detection of one game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a of the second operation port 34. It is a counter used for specifying by the side MPU 82. As already explained, the 7th prize monitoring timer counter 213g has a period in which the detection of the next game ball is invalidated after the detection of one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 237a provided in the out port 24a. It is a counter used for specifying by MPU 82. As already explained, the eighth prize monitoring timer counter 213h treats the period after detecting one game ball by the gate detection sensor 238a provided in the through gate 35 as invalid for the detection of the next game ball, on the main side MPU82. It is a counter used to specify in.

When the value of the monitoring target counter is "0", the first winning monitoring timer counter 213a is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", the second winning monitoring timer counter 213b is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "2", the third winning monitoring timer counter 213c is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "3", the fourth winning monitoring timer counter 213d is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "4", the fifth winning monitoring timer counter 213e is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "5", the sixth winning monitoring timer counter 213f is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "6", the 7th prize monitoring timer counter 213g is the confirmation target. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "7", the eighth winning monitoring timer counter 213h is the confirmation target.

When the value of the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter is 1 or more (step S6014: YES), the detection result of the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter is one. It means that the detection result of the detection sensors 231a to 238a becomes the detection result of the new game ball before the detection invalid period (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the detection result of the game ball. When such a situation occurs, for example, chattering of a game ball occurs in the detection range of the detection sensors 231a to 238a, so that the detection sensors 231a to 238a detect the passage of one game ball. The result may be a detection result corresponding to the passage of a plurality of game balls. The detection invalid period is set as a period during which new detection of the game ball does not occur when the game ball is normally passed without chattering.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S6014, it means that the detection of the game ball has occurred before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the values of the monitoring target counters. In this case, the first general prize abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize abnormality flag 213m, the third general prize abnormality flag 213n, the special electric prize prize abnormality flag 213o, the first operation prize abnormality flag 213p, in the work area 213 for non-specific control, Of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, the out abnormality flag 213r, and the gate winning abnormality flag 213s, "1" is set in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s corresponding to the values of the monitored counters (step S6015). When the value of the monitoring target counter is "0", "1" is set in the first general winning abnormality flag 213l. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "1", "1" is set in the second general winning abnormality flag 213m. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "2", "1" is set in the third general winning abnormality flag 213n. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "3", "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "4", "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "5", "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. When the value of the monitoring target counter is "6", "1" is set in the out abnormality flag 213r. When the value of the monitored counter is "7", "1" is set in the gate winning abnormality flag 213s. As a result, if the detection of the game ball occurs before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the value of the monitoring target counter, "1" is set in the corresponding abnormality flags 213l to 213s. To.

When a negative determination is made in step S6014 or the process of step S6015 is executed, the detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the values of the monitoring target counters (step S6016). As a result, in either the case where the detection of the game ball occurs before the detection invalid period elapses in the detection sensors 231a to 238a corresponding to the monitoring target counter, or the case where the detection of the game ball occurs after the detection invalid period elapses. Even if there is, the detection invalid period is set in the winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h corresponding to the monitoring target counters.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitored counter is "7", which is the maximum value (step S6017). If the value of the monitored counter is less than the maximum value (step S6017: NO), the value of the monitored counter is added by 1 (step S6018), and then the process returns to step S6013. As a result, the monitoring processes of steps S6014 to S6016 are executed for the detection sensors 231a to 238a to be monitored in the next order. By executing the processes of steps S6013 to S6018 as described above, it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball within the detection invalid period has occurred for each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a.

When the value of the monitoring target counter is the maximum value (step S6017: YES), the magnetic monitoring process is executed (step S6019). FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the magnetic monitoring process. The processing of steps S6501 to S6509 in the magnetic monitoring process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 by using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control is “0” (step S6501). As described above, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is a counter for specifying the magnetic monitoring delay period during which the magnetic abnormality is not monitored by the main MPU 82. The magnetic monitoring delay period is arbitrary, but is set to 0.5 seconds in the pachinko machine 10.

When the value of the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j is "0" (step S6501: YES), whether or not the detection result of the magnetic detection sensor provided on the back surface of the game board 24 is the detection result corresponding to the magnetic detection. (Step S6502). When a negative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6503). As described above, the magnetic detection counter 213i is a counter for specifying the number of times the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly is specified by the main MPU 82.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S6502, the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S6504). Then, when the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i after the addition is 1 or more (specifically, “3”) or more (step S6505: YES), the magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control Is set to "1" (step S6506). When the magnetic anomaly flag 213t is set to "1", the main MPU 82 executes a process for dealing with the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly.

After that, the magnetic anomaly command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (step S6507). By storing the magnetic anomaly command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the magnetic anomaly command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. By receiving the magnetic anomaly command, the sound / light side MPU 93 causes the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 to perform notification indicating that a magnetic anomaly has occurred.

After that, the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S6508). As described above, the second security counter 213k is a counter used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not it is necessary to externally output a pulsed security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall. In the case of external output, the counter is used to specify the number of external outputs of the pulsed security signal by the main MPU 82.

When a negative determination is made in step S6505 or the process of step S6508 is executed, the magnetic monitoring delay period is set in the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6509). As a result, the measurement of the magnetic monitoring delay period without monitoring the magnetic anomaly is started. In this way, when the magnetic monitoring delay period in which the magnetic anomaly is not monitored is set and the value of the magnetic detection counter 213i becomes equal to or greater than the abnormality reference number set as a plurality of times as described above, the magnetic anomaly occurs. By configuring the configuration to identify the occurrence, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly from being identified even when magnetism is generated by electrical noise instead of an illegal magnetic output.

Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 99 for the fraud handling process executed in step S5511, which is a processing order after the fraud detection process including the fraud detection execution process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). I will explain while doing. The processes of steps S6601 to S6625 in the fraud handling process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

When "1" is set in the first general winning error flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6601: YES), this error occurs in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. The detection of the game ball (that is, the winning of the general winning opening 31) by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the processing order prior to the corresponding processing, is chattering or the like. It means that it is caused by the abnormality caused by. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set for the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the first winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6602). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and before the second management process described later. It is set in the processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a in the second management process described later.

After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6603). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the game ball in the first winning opening detection sensor 231a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the processing order prior to the fraud handling process. The value of the 10 prize ball counters is incremented by 1 with the detection of. Further, when the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the process order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). A process is executed so that the 10 prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt processing of the processing times in which the values of the 10 prize ball counters are added by 1 ( In FIG. 88), the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process in step S5518 is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

In steps S6604 to S6606, the same processing as in step S6601 to step S6603 is executed for the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, and in steps S6607 to S6609, the same processing as in step S6601 to step S6603 for the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. To execute. Specifically, when "1" is set in the second general prize abnormality flag 213m in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6604: YES), the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control The second prize confirmation flag of "0" is cleared (step S6605), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6606). Further, when "1" is set in the third general prize abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6607: YES), the third of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control. The winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6609).

When "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6610: YES), this illegal response processing is performed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. The detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a specified in the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the processing order prior to that, is abnormal or closed due to chattering or the like (that is, winning the special electric winning device 32). It means that it is caused by the fraudulent act of making the special electric winning device 32, which should be, win a game ball. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set for the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the special electric winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6611). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is a special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and a later description. The processing order is set before the second management processing to be performed. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the special electric power detection sensor 234a in the special electric power opening processing (FIG. 97 (b)) or the second management processing described later.

After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6612). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this process, the special electric detection sensor 234a detects the game ball in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the process sequence prior to the fraud response process. As an opportunity, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is added by 1. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the process order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). A process is executed so that the 15 prize ball command instructing the payout of the 15 game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first timer interrupt processing of the processing times in which the values of the 15 prize ball counters are added by 1 (FIG. In 88), the value of the 15 prize ball counters is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process in step S5518 is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

When "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6613: YES), this error occurs in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. Chattering is the detection of a game ball (that is, winning a prize in the first operating port 33) by the first operating port detection sensor 235a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to the corresponding processing. It means that it is caused by an abnormality caused by such as. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the first operation winning confirmation flag is cleared by "0" (step S6614). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is a special figure special electric control process (step S5514) and a later description. The processing order is set before the second management processing to be performed. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a in the holding information acquisition process (FIG. 92) or the second management process described later.

After that, the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6615). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the game ball in the first actuating port detection sensor 235a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. The value of one prize ball counter is incremented by 1 with the detection of. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the process order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). A process is executed so that the one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the first operating port detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality, the first timer interrupt processing of the processing times in which the value of the one prize ball counter is added by 1 ( In FIG. 88), the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) before the payout output process in step S5518 is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

When "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6616: YES), this error occurs in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing time. Chattering is the detection of a game ball (that is, winning a prize in the second operating port 34) by the second operating port detection sensor 236a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a processing order prior to the corresponding processing. It means that it is caused by an illegal act of winning a game ball in the second operating port 34, which should be abnormal or closed due to the above. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set for the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6617). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is a special figure special electric control process (step S5514). Figure The processing order is set before the timer control process (step S5515) and the second management process described later. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92), the general electric control process (FIG. 96), or the second management process described later.

After that, the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S6618). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this process, the game ball in the second actuating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. The value of one prize ball counter is incremented by 1 with the detection of. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, in the payout output process of step S5518, which is the process order after the fraud handling process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). A process is executed so that the one prize ball command instructing the payout of one game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 77. In this case, if the detection of the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first timer interrupt of the processing time in which the value of the one prize ball counter is added by 1. Before the payout output process of step S5518 is executed in the process (FIG. 88), the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1 in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99). This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being paid out excessively.

When "1" is set in the out error flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6619: YES), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the current processing time is performed from this illegal response processing. The detection of the game ball (that is, the ball entering the out port 24a) by the out port detection sensor 237a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the previous processing order, is caused by an abnormality due to chattering or the like. It means that it is a thing. In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set in the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the out confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6620). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and before the second management process described later. It is set in the processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the out port detection sensor 237a in the second management process described later.

When "1" is set in the gate winning abnormality flag 213s in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6621: YES), this illegal response process is performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in this process. The detection of a game ball (that is, winning a prize in the through gate 35) by the gate detection sensor 238a specified in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is the previous processing order, is caused by an abnormality due to chattering or the like. Means that In this case, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the current process, the work area 211 for specific control is performed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in step S5508, which is a process sequence prior to the fraud handling process. Although "1" is set in the gate winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the above, the gate winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S6622). The fraud handling process (FIG. 99) is a process sequence after the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) in the process order of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), and is from the normal-figure-current control process (step S5515). Is also set to the previous processing order. Therefore, it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the gate detection sensor 238a in the process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side in the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S5515).

When "1" is set in the magnetic anomaly flag 213t in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S6623: YES), "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control. (Step S6624). When "1" is set in the game stop flag, the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 and step S5521 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), while the affirmative determination is made in step S5505 to perform the step. The processes of S5506 to S5520 are not executed. As a result, when it is identified that a magnetic anomaly has occurred, the process for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and managing the game history is executed, while the process for advancing the game is performed. It will not be executed.

In the fraud handling process, after executing the processes of steps S6601 to S6624, the security process is executed in step S6625. The security process will be described in detail later.

A state in which monitoring of whether or not the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 236a is normal will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 100. FIG. 100 (a) shows the period during which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed, and FIG. 100 (b) shows the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process. FIG. 100 (c) shows the period, and FIG. 100 (c) shows the state of the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 100 (d) shows the fraud handling process included in the specific control process. (99) shows a period during which (FIG. 99) is executed, FIG. 100 (e) shows a period during which the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) included in the specific control process is executed, and FIG. 100 (f) shows. The period during which the information clearing process (FIG. 94) included in the non-specific control process is executed is shown, and FIG. 100 (g) shows the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process being executed. FIG. 100 (h) shows the state of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

First, a case where the detection of the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is not due to an abnormality or fraud will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 100A, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started at the timing of t2, which is the situation in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the process is being executed. In the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), first, the first prize confirmation flag, the second prize confirmation flag, the third prize confirmation flag, the special electric prize prize flag, and the first operation prize of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control Clear the confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag by "0". Further, since it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified as shown in FIG. 100 (c) at the timing of t3. "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for control.

After that, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command at the timing of t4, and FIG. 100 As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clear processing (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general prize abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize abnormality flag are as described above. 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0".

After that, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 100 (f), and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 100 (g). Will be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for the specific control. 2 The set of "1" to the operation winning confirmation flag is not specified to be caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100 (h), "1" is not set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the information of the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is ". It is maintained at "0".

After that, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 100 (g), and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 100 (d). Will be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that "1" is not set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The process of clearing the second operation winning confirmation flag of "0" in the work area 211 for is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the state in which "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag is maintained.

After that, the fraud response process (FIG. 99) is completed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 100 (d), and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) is completed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 100 (e). It will be started. In the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100 (c), “1” is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control, so that the second special figure is held. The process for acquiring the second reserved information is executed on condition that the number of the second reserved information stored in the area 112 is less than the upper limit stored number. In the state where "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag, "0" is cleared in the ball entry detection processing (FIG. 91) in the next processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88). It will be canceled by being interrupted. After that, as shown in FIG. 100A, the current processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends at the timing of t8.

Next, a case where the detection of the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is due to an abnormality or fraud will be described.

At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 100A, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started at the timing of t10, which is the situation in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the process is being executed. In the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), first, the first prize confirmation flag, the second prize confirmation flag, the third prize confirmation flag, the special electric prize prize flag, and the first operation prize of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control Clear the confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag by "0". Further, since it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), it is specified as shown in FIG. 100 (c) at the timing of t11. "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for control.

After that, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command at the timing of t12, and FIG. 100 As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clear processing (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general prize abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize abnormality flag are as described above. 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared by "0".

After that, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100 (f) at the timing of t13, and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100 (g) at the timing of the t13. Will be done. In the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process, it is specified that "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for the specific control. Then, it is specified that the set of "1" to the second operation winning confirmation flag is caused by an abnormality or fraud. Therefore, at the timing of t14, “1” is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control as shown in FIG. 100 (h).

After that, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) ends at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 100 (g), and the fraud response process (FIG. 99) starts at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 100 (d). Will be done. In the fraud handling process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process, it is specified that "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control is cleared to "0".

After that, the fraud response process (FIG. 99) is completed at the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 100 (d), and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92) is completed at the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 100 (e). It will be started. In the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 92), as shown in FIG. 100 (c), “1” is not set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control, so that the second hold information is set. Do not execute the process for acquisition. After that, as shown in FIG. 100A, the current processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) ends at the timing of t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 100A, a new processing round of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is started at the timing of t20, which is the situation in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) of the process is being executed. When it is specified that the game ball is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91), the work area 211 for specific control is specified as shown in FIG. 100 (c). "1" is not set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in.

After that, the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) is completed at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is called by the CALLI command at the timing of the t21. As shown in (f), the information clearing process (FIG. 94) is started. In the information clear processing (FIG. 94), among the storage areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first general prize abnormality flag 213l, the second general prize abnormality flag 213m, and the third general prize abnormality flag are as described above. 213n, special electric winning abnormality flag 213o, first operation winning abnormality flag 213p, second operation winning abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate winning abnormality flag 213s and magnetic abnormality flag 213t are cleared to "0". Therefore, at the timing of t22, the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 100 (h). After that, the information clearing process (FIG. 94) ends as shown in FIG. 100 (f) at the timing of t23, and the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) starts as shown in FIG. 100 (g) at the timing of the t23. Will be done.

As described above, each detection sensor 231a to 238a that detects the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the out port 24a, and the through gate 35. A ball entry detection process for identifying whether or not a game ball has been detected in (FIG. 91) and a process for advancing the game in response to the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. (The process of acquiring the hold information (FIG. 92), the process of controlling the normal power (FIG. 96), the process of opening the special electric power (FIG. 97 (c)), the process of paying out output (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control process. On the other hand, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is included in the non-specific control process. .. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control process. , The data capacity allocated to the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to the processing other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the ball entry detection processing is included in the specific control processing and is a processing for specifying whether or not the game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. After that, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 91) is included in the non-specific control process and is used to monitor whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), the game is advanced in response to the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a while being included in the specific control process. Processing (holding information acquisition processing (FIG. 92), timer control processing (FIG. 96), special electric power opening processing (FIG. 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) are executed. As a result, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in response to the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a caused by the abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for the specific control is set. "1" is set in each confirmation flag provided, and it is specified that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process. If this is done, "1" is set in each abnormality flag 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and "1" is set in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s. In the fraudulent response process (FIG. 99) included in the control process, the confirmation flag corresponding to the error flags 213l to 213s in which "1" is set is cleared by "0". As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read out in both the specific control process and the non-specific control process, whereas the information in the specific control work area 211 can be read. Is possible in the specific control process but not in the non-specific control process, and the reading of the information stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is the specific control process and the non-specific control process. While it is possible in either case, writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process. It is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

Fraud handling processing included in the specific control process (FIG. 95) after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again. FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag "0" is cleared and the counters for various prize balls are cleared according to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s for which information is set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Execute the subtraction process. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), after first clearing the abnormality flags 213l to 213s to "0", a process for setting information in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process, an error occurs at an appropriate timing in the non-specific control process. It is possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s by "0".

<Structure related to security signals>
Next, the security process executed in step S6625 of the fraud response process (FIG. 99) included in the specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101. The processes of steps S6701 to S6714 in the security process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control has increased since the previous execution of the security process (step S6701). The work area 211 for specific control is provided with a previous value storage area 211e (see FIG. 78) for storing the value of the second security counter 213k when the security process is executed. In step S6701, it is determined whether or not the value of the second security counter 213k is larger than the value of the previous value storage area 211e.

When the value of the second security counter 213k is larger than the value of the previous value storage area 211e (step S6701: YES), the value of the previous value storage area 211e is subtracted from the value of the second security counter 213k, and the value after the subtraction is performed. Is added to the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control as the value of the increase (step S6702). After that, the value of the second security counter 213k is overwritten in the previous value storage area 211e (step S6703).

As described above, the trigger for adding "1" to the first security counter 211a is when the set value update process (step S4916) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) and the main process (step S4917) and the main process (FIG. 81). ), The RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed (step S4920). As described above, the trigger for adding "1" to the second security counter 213k is that when the occurrence of disconnection is confirmed in the disconnection short circuit process (FIG. 87) (step S5405), the short circuit occurs in the disconnection short circuit process (FIG. 87). (Step S5409), when it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34, which is closed in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) (step S6006), fraud detection is executed. When it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 which is closed in the process (FIG. 95) (step S6012), and when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is confirmed in the magnetic monitoring process (FIG. 98) (FIG. 98). Step S6508).

When a negative determination is made in step S6701 or when the process of step S6703 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704). When the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6704: YES), "1" is set in the security flag 211f (see FIG. 78) provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step). S6705). When "1" is set in the security flag 211f, the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the main control board 81 of the main control device 71 is in the light emitting state. When the value of the security flag 211f is "0", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in the off state. The state in which "1" is set in the security flag 211f is maintained when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) or the set value in the main processing (FIG. 81) is maintained. When the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the security flag 211f is cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S6704 or when the process of step S6705 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current situation is that a security signal is externally output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall (step). S6706). When the security signal is not output externally (step S6706: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more (step S6707), and the work area 211 for specific control is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the duration counter provided in is "0" (step S6708). The continuation period counter measures the output continuation period when the output of the security signal is continued for the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds), and stops the output of the security signal for the stop continuation period (specifically). Is a counter for measuring the stop duration in the case of continuing for 200 milliseconds) on the main MPU 82. The value set in the duration counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process of the specific control in step S5510 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed.

When the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more and the value of the duration counter is "0" (step S6707 and step S6708: YES), the security signal output start processing is executed (step S6709). As a result, the external output of the security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall is started. After that, the information corresponding to the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the continuation period counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6710). Further, the value of the first security counter 211a is subtracted by 1 (step S6711).

When the security signal is output externally (step S6706: YES), the output continuation period is determined by determining whether or not the value of the continuation period counter in the work area 211 for specific control is "0". Is determined (step S6712). When the value of the continuation counter is "0" (step S6712: YES), the security signal output stop processing is executed (step S6713). As a result, the external output of the security signal from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. After that, the information corresponding to the stop duration (specifically, 200 milliseconds) is set in the duration counter in the work area 211 for specific control (step S6714).

Next, a state in which the security signal is output to the outside will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 102. 102 (a) shows the period during which the specific control process is executed, FIG. 102 (b) shows the value of the first security counter 211a in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 102 (c) shows the non-existence. FIG. 102 (d) shows the period during which the specific control process is executed, FIG. 102 (d) shows the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and FIG. 102 (e) is included in the specific control process. FIG. 102 (f) shows the state of the security flag 211f in the work area 211 for specific control, and FIG. 102 (g) shows the main of the main control device 71. FIG. 102 (h) shows a period during which the abnormality display device 206 mounted on the control board 81 is in a light emitting state, and FIG. 102 (h) shows a period during which a security signal is externally output from the main MPU 82 to the management computer of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the specific control process is executed on the main MPU 82 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3. In this case, the main process (FIG. 81) is executed by starting the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82. Then, the set value update process (step S4916) or the RAM clear process (step S4919) is executed in the main process (FIG. 81), so that the first security counter is executed at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 102 (b). The value of 211a is added by 1.

After that, the first management process (FIG. 85) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI instruction in the situation where the specific control process is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) at the timing of t3 (step S4927). ). The first management process (FIG. 85) is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 102 (c). In this case, the occurrence of disconnection or the occurrence of short circuit is specified by the disconnection short circuit process (FIG. 87) in the first management process (FIG. 85). Therefore, at the timing of t4, the value of the second security counter 213k is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 102 (d).

After that, when the first management process (FIG. 85) is completed at the timing of t5, the specific control process is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 102 (a). In the specific control process, the processes of steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and the processes of steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, in the situation where the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) at the timing of t6, the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI instruction (FIG. 93). Step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 102 (c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93), the second operating port 34 in the closed state is won, the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state is won, and the magnetic abnormality is found. Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being added by 1.

After that, when the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at the timing of t7, the specific control process is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 102 (a). In the specific control process, the processes of steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed. In this case, the security process (FIG. 101) is executed in the fraud response process (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102 (e) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9.

In the security process (FIG. 101), it is specified that the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is larger than the value of the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control. By doing so, the value of the increase is added to the first security counter 211a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the value of the first security counter 211a increases from "1" to "2" at the timing of t8.

In the security process (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, "1" is set in the security flag 212f at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 102 (f). do. When the security flag 212f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is in the light emitting state at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 102 (g).

In the security process (FIG. 101), by specifying that the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, the external output of the security signal is started at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 102 (h). As shown in FIG. 102 (b), the value of the first security counter 211a is subtracted by 1.

After that, in a situation where the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) at the timing of t10, the second management process (FIG. 107) described later included in the non-specific control process by the CALLI instruction is performed. Called (step S5521), the second management process (FIG. 107) is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 102 (c).

After that, when the second management process (FIG. 107) is completed at the timing of t11, the specific control process is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 102 (a). In the specific control process, the processes of steps S4927 to S4932 in the main process (FIG. 81) and the processes of steps S5501 to S5508 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed.

After that, in the situation where the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) at the timing of t12, the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) included in the non-specific control process is called by the CALLI instruction (FIG. 93). Step S5509). The fraud detection process (FIG. 93) is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 102 (c). In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) in the fraud detection process (FIG. 93), the second operating port 34 in the closed state is won, the special electric winning device 32 in the closed state is won, and the magnetic abnormality is found. Since the occurrence is not specified, the value of the second security counter 213k is maintained without being added by 1.

After that, when the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) ends at the timing of t13, the specific control process is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 102 (a). In the specific control process, the processes of steps S5510 to S5520 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) are executed. In this case, the security process (FIG. 101) is executed in the fraud response process (step S5511) as shown in FIG. 102 (e) from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15.

In the security process (FIG. 101), the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control does not change from the value of the previous value storage area 211e in the work area 211 for specific control, so FIG. 102. As shown in (b), the process of increasing the value of the first security counter 211a according to the value of the second security counter 213k is not executed. Further, the state in which "1" is set in the security flag 211f is maintained when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81) is performed. Alternatively, since the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the set value update process (FIG. 83) is not executed, the light emitting state of the abnormality display device 206 is maintained as shown in FIG. 102 (g). Further, since the output continuation period (specifically, 200 milliseconds) has not elapsed since the external output of the security signal was started, the external output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 102 (h).

After that, in a situation where the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) at the timing of t16, the second management process (FIG. 107) described later, which is included in the non-specific control process by the CALLI instruction, is performed. Called (step S5521).

As described above, the process for specifying whether or not the event subject to the external output of the security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. As a result, the process for monitoring whether or not the event subject to the external output of the security signal has occurred is assigned to the non-specific control process, and the program or data related to the specific control process is assigned. Capacity can be allocated to other processes.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. When it is specified that it has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is added by 1, and it is specified that an event that is the target of external output of the security signal has occurred in the non-specific control processing. If so, the value of the second security counter 213k is added by 1. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is possible in the processing of specific control and not possible in the processing of non-specific control, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is not possible. Although it is possible in the specific control process and not possible in the specific control process, an event that is the target of external output of the security signal has occurred in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. Can be identified appropriately.

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a, and the first security counter 211a is added. When the value of is 1 or more, the security signal is externally output in the security process (FIG. 101). Then, the external output of the pulse-shaped security signal over the predetermined output continuation period with the predetermined stop continuation period in between is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". As a result, in a configuration in which identification of the occurrence of an event that is the target of external output of the security signal is performed in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process, the process for externally outputting the security signal. Can be integrated into the processing of specific control.

When the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, "1" is set in the security flag 211f, and when "1" is set in the security flag 211f, the abnormality display device 206 is in the light emitting state. .. Further, the state in which "1" is set in the security flag 211f is maintained when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81) is maintained. ) Or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the set value update process (FIG. 83) is maintained, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in the light emitting state. To. As a result, at least when the game hall is open, the manager of the game hall is made to recognize whether or not an event subject to external output of the security signal has occurred regardless of the confirmation timing of the abnormality display device 206. Is possible.

<Structure related to game history management>
Next, the configuration related to the management of the game history will be described.

The contents of various areas 251 to 254 of the work area 213 for non-specific control used for managing the game history will be described. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the work area 213 for non-specific control used for managing the game history.

The work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a counter area 251 for normal use. The normal counter area 251 is provided with a general winning counter 251a, a special electric winning counter 251b, a first operation counter 251c, a second operation counter 251d, and an out counter 251e. The general winning counter 251a is a counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counter 251b is a counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counter 251c is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 251d is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 251e is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each of the counters 251a to 251e of the normal counter area 251 is a target ball entry portion 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is neither an open / close execution mode nor a high frequency support mode. , 31-34 are used to measure the number of game balls that have entered. The situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not subject to measurement because the game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is to exclude the number of balls entered from the measurement target when the ball is hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be configured to be the measurement target in the same manner as the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

The work area 213 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 252 in addition to the normal counter area 251. The calculation result storage area 252 is an area for storing information on the management result of the game history calculated by using the normal counter area 251. The game history management result information stored in the calculation result storage area 252 is stored and retained until the newly calculated information is overwritten by newly calculating the game history management result information.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 252 in the work area 213 for non-specific control.

Information on the base value calculated by the main MPU 82 is stored in the calculation result storage area 252. The base value is relative to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls to be paid out.

In a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the general winning counter 251a is added by 1, and the special electric winning device 32 When one game ball enters the ball, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b is added by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operation port 33, the value of the first operation counter 251c is added. 1 is added, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the second operation counter 251d is added by 1, and when one game ball enters the out port 24a, one is added. The value of the out counter 251e is incremented by 1. Then, when the values of the various counters 251a to 251e of the normal counter area 251 in the situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result are set to K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
-Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "to the first operating port 33""Number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K94 x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

The calculation of the base value is performed every time the result calculation process (FIG. 110) described later is executed in the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process, and the normal counter area 251 is used. The values of the various counters 251a to 251e are either the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number, "0" is cleared and management starts. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, supplied to the game area PA) in the situation where "1" is set in the flag and neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is set. "0" is cleared when the total number of game balls played) becomes the shift reference number.

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is less than the shift reference number. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, an operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, and in that case, a game ball is maintained in each entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value under such a situation can be a value different from the situation where a normal game is performed. Therefore, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the game) in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag and neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is set. When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the management start reference number, which is less than the shift reference number, the various counters 251a to 251e of the normal counter area 251 are temporarily cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the operation check on the base value in the situation where the normal game is performed after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. The management start reference number is not limited to 300, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of pieces, may be set to a number less than 300, or may be set to a number larger than 300. May be good.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. Since the pachinko machine 10 launches a maximum of 100 gaming balls per minute, 60,000 is the maximum number of launches in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the game hall are about 13 hours, of which the game is played for about 10 hours in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is performed based on the jackpot result. Therefore, the shift reference number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls to be launched in one business day. By clearing "0" from the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 each time the number of shift reference numbers is reached, the base value can be calculated within the range of the shift reference number. The shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of pieces, may be set to a number less than 60,000, or may be set to a number larger than 60,000. good.

The calculation result storage area 252 is provided with a current area 256, a first history area 257, a second history area 258, and a third history area 259 as storage areas for storing the information of the base value. There is. All of these various areas 256 to 259 have the same storage capacity, and specifically, the capacity is 1 byte so that information on the base value can be stored.

The base value calculated in the latest result calculation process (FIG. 110) is stored in the current area 256. That is, the latest base value is stored in the current area 256.

The final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the first history area 257. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 257 is set to the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Will be stored. If "1" is set in the management start flag after the previous calculation period has elapsed, the first history area 257 has an open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode is Will be stored.

The final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the second history area 258. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the second history area 258 has an open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period two times before. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Will be stored. If "1" is set in the management start flag after the calculation period two times before has elapsed, the second history area 258 has an open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period two times before. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode is Will be stored.

The final base value in the calculation period three times before is stored in the third history area 259. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is after the management start flag is set to "1", the third history area 259 is set to the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Will be stored. If "1" is set in the management start flag after the calculation period three times before has elapsed, the third history area 259 has an open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode is Will be stored.

The base values stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 256 → the first history area 257 → the second history area 258 → the third history area 259 in a predetermined order. The base value to be notified is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified is repeated in the predetermined order.

105 (a) to 105 (d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in various areas 256 to 259 are notified in a situation where "1" is set in the management start flag. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display contents of display devices 201-204. FIG. 105 (a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 256 is notified, and FIG. 105 (b) shows the first history. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 257 is notified is shown, and FIG. 105 (c) shows the base stored in the second history area 258. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the value is notified is shown, and FIG. 105 (d) shows the case where the base value stored in the third history area 259 is notified. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (d), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 each have eight display segments 201a to 204a. Of the eight display segments 201a to 204a, seven display segments 201a to 204a all have rod-shaped light emitting regions having the same shape and size, and are arranged so as to generate the character "8". Has been done. On the other hand, one display segment 201a to 204a is a circular light emitting region, and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 201a to 204a arranged in the shape of "8". It is provided. Regardless of which base value of the various areas 256 to 259 is notified, at least one display segment 201a to 204a is in the light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the first notification display device 201, a display indicating that the base value is being notified is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of which base value of the various areas 256 to 259 is notified. When information other than the base value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character "b" is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the game hall bases on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to grasp that the value is notified.

In the second notification display device 202, a display indicating which of the various areas 256 to 259 the base value is being notified is displayed. Specifically, in the situation where the base value of the current area 256 is notified, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105 (a). In the situation where the base value of the first history area 257 is notified, the character "1." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105 (b). In the situation where the base value of the second history area 258 is notified, the character "2." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105 (c). In the situation where the base value of the third history area 259 is notified, the character "3." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 105 (d). As a result, by confirming the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the manager of the game hall can determine the base value notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to grasp whether it is in the calculation period of.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 201a to 204a are in the light emitting state regardless of the situation in which the base value of any of the various areas 256 to 259 is being notified. In the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any number from "0" to "9" is displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any number "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. It will be lined up and it will be difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 201a to 204a provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in the light emitting state, “1” to “1” to “1” to “1” in the second notification display device 202. Even if any of the numbers of "3" is displayed, the numbers displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the numbers displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. It is possible to distinguish it from the numbers and grasp it.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the numerical value of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value will be calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, but the number with the first decimal place will be displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the decimal point of the base values will be displayed. The second digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the base value is not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 that are the notification targets, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display are shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106 (a). The character "-" is displayed on each of the devices 204. As a result, even when the two display devices of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 notify the base value calculated as a decimal point to the second decimal place, the base value is notified. It is possible to distinguish the display content between the case where is "1.00" and the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 256 to 259 which are the notification targets.

The display content of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 is the same when the base value is "1.00" and when the base value is "0.00". On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured such that the light emitting state of the display of "00" is maintained and the display of "00" is in the blinking state of the other.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, it is determined whether or not the display segments 201a to 204a provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally emit light. The check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period elapses so that the administrator of the above can confirm. Specifically, as the check display, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106 (b), all the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emitting state. ..

In the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106 (c). In the situation where all the display segments 201a and 202a are in the light emitting state in each of the above, the number with the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 is displayed. At the same time, the number having the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. While all the display segments 201a and 202a are set to the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the numbers corresponding to the base values are displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the base value currently notified is the base value in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag.

Next, the process of step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) will be described.

In step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction as described above. The second management process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, when the situation in which the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) changes to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the second management process which is the non-specific control process is started, the call of the second management process and the start of the second management process are started. It is possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the change afterwards in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the flag register information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt described later are executed. Interruption of processing (FIG. 114) is prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are the specific control processes, are interrupted and started during the execution of the second management process, which is the non-specific control process. It is possible to prevent it from being interrupted.

When the second management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are saved. ) Is disabled, then the program corresponding to the second management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the second management process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction (“CALLI”). At the same time, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the second management process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program for executing the second management process is reduced as compared with the case where the instruction for executing the second management process and the instruction for starting the program for the second management process are provided separately. be able to. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program can be reduced.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the second management process. The processes of steps S6801 to S6816 in the second management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S6801). The stack pointer is an area in which the address information for specifying the storage area to which the information to be written by the push instruction is to be written by the main MPU 82 in the stack areas 212 and 214 is set. Each time a push instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is the write target in the previous order. It is updated with the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information of the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S6802). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information of the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6803). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6804). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information of the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6805). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information of the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6806). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information of the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S6807).

In the general-purpose register area 223a in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S6802 to S6807, information on WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

These WA registers, BC registers, DE registers, HL registers, IX registers, and IY registers are registers used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. be. The information set in such a register is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), and is used for the specific control. The information in these registers can be saved before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is returned to these registers to return the state of these registers. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808), which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, is performed instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 213 for non-specific control. By selectively saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the check process (step S6809) to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the non-specific control is performed. It is possible to suppress the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 213 for specific control. Therefore, the register information as described above is saved while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used in the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809). Is possible.

As a matter of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register correspond to non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and retained until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Further, by saving the register information in the work area 213 for non-specific control instead of saving it in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 214 for non-specific control can be suppressed to a small size. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of the information is read first from the later information as described above, so that the reading order of the information is displaced due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all the subsequent read order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

After executing the processes of steps S6802 to S6807, the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are executed. When executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the subroutine corresponding to the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) set in the program for non-specific control. In order to specify the return address of the second management process after the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are executed when the program of the subroutine is executed. Information is written to the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) are completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the second management process indicated by the return address is read. Return to the program. Details of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809) will be described later.

After executing the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), the second management process is terminated by the load instruction as "LD SP, Y (r + c)" on the stack pointer of the main MPU 82. Y (r + c) is set as a fixed address when returning to the specific control later (step S6810). The address of Y (r + c) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the second management process is called in step S5521 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant, and the amount of information is always constant accordingly. The information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, examples of the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control include information on the return address of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) after the second management process is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + c). Therefore, when the information abnormality monitoring process (step S6808) and the check process (step S6809), which are processes corresponding to the non-specific control, are completed and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the constant information is Y. By setting (r + c) in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure the area for evacuation in the main RAM 84.

After that, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6811). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6812). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6813). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6814). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6815). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S6816). By executing the processes of steps S6811 to S6816, the processes corresponding to the non-specific control of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 are started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the operation.

After executing the processes of steps S6811 to S6816, the process returns to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) included in the specific control process by the RETI instruction. By executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the second management process is returned to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt is interrupted. The state in which the generation of the process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to the state in which the process is permitted. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing can be newly executed.

Due to the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the second management process by one instruction (“RETI”) is stored in the main MPU 82. By returning to the flag register, it is possible to switch from the state in which the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted. Therefore, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the second management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). ) And an instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence is permitted are individually provided in the non-specific control processing program. The number of instructions can be reduced. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for the non-specific control process can be reduced.

Here, the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. That is, the information required for a plurality of processing times of the non-specific control processing executed with the specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control or the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

Next, the check process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S6809 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the check process. The processes of steps S6901 to S6906 in the check process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

In the check process, when the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S6901: NO), is not in the open / close execution mode (step S6902: NO), and is not in the high frequency support mode (step S6903: NO), it is normally turned on. After executing the ball management process (step S6904), the result calculation process (step S6905) and the display process (step S6906) are executed. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S6901: YES), when it is in the open / close execution mode (step S6902: YES), or when it is in the high frequency support mode (step S6903: YES), it is normally turned on. The result calculation process (step S6905) and the display process (step S6906) are executed without executing the ball management process (step S6904).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a normal ball entry management process in step S6904. The processes of steps S7001 to S7014 in the normal ball entry management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control. ..

When "1" is set in the first winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7001: YES), a prize is generated in the general winning opening 31 and the first winning opening is entered. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the detection sensor 231a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7002). Further, when "1" is set in the second prize confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7003: YES), a prize is generated in the general prize opening 31 and the second prize is generated. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the winning opening detection sensor 232a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7004). Further, when "1" is set in the third winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7005: YES), a prize is generated in the general winning opening 31 and the third prize is won. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the winning opening detection sensor 233a. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7006).

When "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7007: YES), a winning is generated in the special electric winning device 32 and the special electric detecting sensor 234a is used. It means that one game ball has been detected normally. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7008).

When "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7009: YES), a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 and the first operation is won. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the operation port detection sensor 235a. In this case, the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7010).

When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7011: YES), a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 and the second operation is won. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the operation port detection sensor 236a. In this case, the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7012).

When "1" is set in the out confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7013: YES), the game ball enters the out opening 24a and the out opening is detected. It means that one game ball is normally detected by the sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S7014).

The first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, the third winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operation winning confirmation flag and the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for specific control. The information of the out confirmation flag is read out in the normal ball entry management process included in the non-specific control process, but the update of the information for these flags is not executed in the normal ball entry management process. The process of clearing these flags to "0" and the process of setting "1" are executed in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process as described above.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a result calculation process executed in step S6905 of the check process (FIG. 108). The processes of steps S7101 to S7115 in the result calculation process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, the operation process of the base value is executed (step S7101). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated by using the values of various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251. The calculation method of the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 256 (step S7102).

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7103). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Further, even when the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" including the management start flag and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the situation where the management start flag is a value of "0" and neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, the game area PA) When the total number of supplied game balls) becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. Further, when "1" is set in the management start flag, the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0", and a new calculation period is started. As a result, the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to affect the base value in the situation where the normal game is performed after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

When a negative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7104). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than the management start reference number of 300 (step S7105). It should be noted that the configuration may be configured to determine whether or not the total number is 300 or more, which is the management start reference number.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, "1" is set in the management start flag (step S7106). After that, the data shift process is executed (step S7107). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the third history area 259. , 1st history area 257 → 2nd history area 258, current area 256 → 1st history area 257. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored. Is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value last calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the calculation period one time before. 1 It is stored in the history area 257. In the data shift process, the LDIR instruction is used when shifting the information as described above. In the LDIR command, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address. It becomes.

However, in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the base value information is basically not stored in the first to third history areas 257 to 259, so that the management is substantially managed in step S7107. Only the shift of the final base value of the calculation period to the first history area 257 in the situation where "1" is not set in the start flag is performed. After that, all the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7108).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 (step S7109). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S7110). When a negative determination is made in step S7110, "1" is set in the operation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7111), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S7110, the relevant calculation is made. The operation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S7112). The calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is performed after the calculation period of the base value is newly started (that is, the game area). This is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

When the process of step S7111 or step S7112 is executed, it is determined whether or not the total number calculated in step S7109 is 60,000 or more, which is the shift reference number (step S7113). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7113, the data shift process is executed (step S7114). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 is transferred from the second history area 258 to the second history area 259 in the same manner as in step S7107. 3 The history area 259, the first history area 257 → the second history area 258, the current area 256 → the first history area 257 are shifted in this order. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 259 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before is stored. Is stored in the second history area 258 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value last calculated in the current calculation period is the final base value in the calculation period one time before. 1 It is stored in the history area 257. In the data shift process, the LDIR instruction is used when shifting the information as described above. In the LDIR command, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by specifying the address of the information storage source area and the information storage destination area address. It becomes. After that, all the counters 251a to 251e in the normal counter area 251 are cleared to "0" (step S7115).

Next, a configuration for notifying the base value will be described. First, a configuration for controlling the display of various display units on the main MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for displaying and controlling various display units on the main MPU 82.

The first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, the first special figure hold display unit 37c, the second special figure hold display unit 37d, and the normal figure display are the targets for which display control is performed by the main MPU 82. At least a unit 38a, a general drawing hold display unit 38b, a setting display device 205, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are present. All of these are provided as a segment display unit in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged. These segment display units are set to the light emitting state by setting the data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, the data of "1" which is one of the binary data), and the data corresponding to the extinguished state (for example, the data of the binary data). When the other data (data of "0") is set, the light is turned off.

The main control board 81 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a, and is provided with a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b. , A third display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the first special figure holding display unit 37c, and a fourth display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the second special drawing holding display unit 37d. A fifth display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the normal drawing display unit 38a, and a sixth display circuit (not shown) is provided corresponding to the normal drawing holding display unit 38b. The seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205, and the eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure display unit 37a. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure display unit 37a is put into a light emitting state or an extinguished state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, although the first display circuit 261 can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. Will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the first special figure display unit 37a, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261, does not provide new display data to the first display circuit 261 for a predetermined period. As the time passes, the light is gradually turned off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the first special figure display unit 37a is changed but also when the display content of the first special figure display unit 37a is not changed, the previous display is performed. The same display data as the data output processing times is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure display unit 37b. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure display unit 37b is put into a light emitting state or an extinguished state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". Will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the second special figure display unit 37b, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262, does not provide new display data to the second display circuit 262 for a predetermined period. As the time passes, the light is gradually turned off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the second special figure display unit 37b is changed but also when the display content of the second special figure display unit 37b is not changed, the previous display is performed. The same display data as the data output processing times is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The third display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the first special figure holding display unit 37c. As a result, each display segment of the first special figure hold display unit 37c is put into a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit. In this case, although the third display circuit can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. It will be closer to the state. Therefore, the display segment of the first special figure holding display unit 37c, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the third display circuit, has a predetermined period without providing new display data to the third display circuit. As it elapses, it gradually turns off. Further, not only when the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c is changed due to such a configuration, but also when the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c is not changed, the previous time. The same display data as the output processing times of the display data of is supplied to the third display circuit.

The fourth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the second special figure holding display unit 37d. As a result, each display segment of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is put into a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit. In this case, although the fourth display circuit can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. It will be closer to the state. Therefore, the display segment of the second special figure holding display unit 37d, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit, has a predetermined period without providing new display data to the fourth display circuit. As it elapses, it gradually turns off. Further, not only when the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is changed due to such a configuration, but also when the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is not changed, the previous time. The same display data as the output processing times of the display data of is supplied to the fourth display circuit.

The fifth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general map display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the normal drawing display unit 38a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit. In this case, although the fifth display circuit can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. It will be closer to the state. Therefore, the display segment of the normal drawing display unit 38a, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit, has passed a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the fifth display circuit. It gradually turns off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the normal map display unit 38a is changed but also when the display content of the normal map display unit 38a is not changed, the output processing of the previous display data is performed. The same display data as the times is supplied to the fifth display circuit.

The sixth display circuit provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general drawing reservation display unit 38b. As a result, each display segment of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is put into a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit. In this case, although the sixth display circuit can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. It will be closer to the state. Therefore, the display segment of the normal figure holding display unit 38b, which is in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the sixth display circuit, elapses for a predetermined period without providing new display data to the sixth display circuit. As a result, the lights are gradually turned off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is changed but also when the display content of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is not changed, the display data of the previous time is displayed. The same display data as the output processing times is supplied to the sixth display circuit.

The seventh display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the setting display devices 205. As a result, each display segment of the setting display device 205 is put into a light emitting state or an extinguished state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the seventh display circuit 263. In this case, although the seventh display circuit 263 can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" after the predetermined period elapses. Will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the setting display device 205, which is in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the 7th display circuit 263, elapses for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the 7th display circuit 263. As a result, the lights are gradually turned off. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the setting display device 205 is changed but also when the display content of the setting display device 205 is not changed, the output processing times of the previous display data The same display data is supplied to the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state or a light emitting state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264. In this case, the eighth display circuit 264 can store and retain the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". Will approach the state of. Therefore, new display data is provided to the eighth display circuit 264 for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which are in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the eighth display circuit 264. After a predetermined period of time has passed, the light is gradually turned off. Further, not only when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed due to such a configuration, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if this is not done, the same display data as the output processing times of the previous display data is supplied to the eighth display circuit 264.

Eight display segments are provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. On the other hand, the display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the eighth display circuit 264, the 8-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit unit data. After that, the 8-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit unit data, and then the 8-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. Finally, the 8-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit unit data.

In the configuration in which the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 supplies display data to the display IC 266. That is, the display ICs 266 are not provided on a one-to-one basis in the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, but one so as to be common to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. Display IC 266 is provided. When the main MPU 82 supplies the display data to the display IC 266, the main MPU 82 also supplies the display IC 266 with the type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 corresponds to the display data.

For details on the electrical connection between the main MPU 82 and the display IC 266, the main MPU 82 and the display IC 266 are the type data signal line LN1, the type clock signal line LN2, the display data signal line LN3, and the display clock signal. It is electrically connected to the wire LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting a signal from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

The type data is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, the delimiter of each 1 bit of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 corresponds to the display data to be transmitted. The type data is transmitted as 8-bit data by the 1st bit to the 8th bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit, the third bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the 4th display circuit, the 4th bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit, the fifth bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the sixth display circuit, the sixth bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the 7th display circuit 263, the 7th bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the eighth display circuit 264, the eighth bit becomes the HI level and the other bits become the LOW level.

The display data is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, the delimiter of each 1 bit of the display data by serial communication is indicated by the display clock signal transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units by the 1st to 8th bits.

The main MPU 82 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) described later. In this case, in one processing of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one display circuit among the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264, and the nth display circuit → n + 1 display. The display circuits 261 to 264 to be transmitted of the display data are changed one by one each time a new processing time of the second timer interrupt processing occurs according to the order of the circuits. Further, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing round following the processing round in which the display data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264, which is the last order in the order, is transmitted, the first display circuit 261 is the first in the above order. Send the display data corresponding to. In the process of the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to any of the first to seventh display circuits 261 to 263, only one 8-bit unit display data is transmitted, but the eighth display circuit 264 In the processing round of the second timer interrupt process for transmitting the display data to, four 8-bit units of display data are transmitted corresponding to the numbers of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

As described above, in the configuration in which the main MPU 82 transmits display data, various storage areas referred to by the main MPU 82 for transmitting display data to the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is set. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 278 provided in the work area 211 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 112, the work area 211 for specific control includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display. A data buffer 275, a sixth display data buffer 276, a seventh display data buffer 277, and an eighth display data buffer 278 are provided.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a as described above, the first display data buffer 271 is to cause the first special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. Display data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the content of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the first display circuit 261 is reached, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed. Instead, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even when the display data has not been changed.

The second display data buffer 272 stores display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262. Since the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b as described above, the second display data buffer 272 is used to cause the second special figure display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display. Display data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the content of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the second display circuit 262 is reached, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed. Instead, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even when the display data has not been changed.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit. As described above, the third display circuit is provided corresponding to the first special figure holding display unit 37c, so that the third display data buffer 273 causes the first special drawing holding display unit 37c to perform a predetermined display. Display data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the third display data buffer 273 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the content of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the third display circuit is reached, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed. Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit. As described above, the fourth display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure holding display unit 37d, so that the fourth display data buffer 274 causes the second special drawing holding display unit 37d to perform a predetermined display. Display data will be stored. In this case, the storage of the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed in the display control process (step S5516) based on the content of the special figure special electric control process (step S5514) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the fourth display circuit is reached, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed. Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit. Since the fifth display circuit is provided corresponding to the normal map display unit 38a as described above, the fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the normal map display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Will be done. In this case, the display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Will be interrupted. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit is reached, only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed. Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The sixth display data buffer 276 stores display data to be supplied to the sixth display circuit. Since the sixth display circuit is provided corresponding to the normal figure holding display unit 38b as described above, the display data for causing the normal figure holding display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display in the sixth display data buffer 276. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 in the display control process (step S5516) based on the contents of the normal power control process (step S5515) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88). Will be interrupted. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114) for transmitting the display data to the sixth display circuit is reached, only when the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is changed. Even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 276 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data to be supplied to the seventh display circuit 263. Since the seventh display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the setting display device 205 as described above, the seventh display data buffer 277 stores display data for causing the setting display device 205 to perform a predetermined display. Will be. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed, the setting display device 205 performs the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is the process corresponding to the specific control. Display data for displaying the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the pachinko machine 10 in the setting display device 205 is subjected to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. Display data for displaying the current set value of the above is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. When the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the seventh display circuit 263 is reached, not only the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is changed, but also the display data. Is not changed, the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 277 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The eighth display data buffer 278 stores display data to be supplied to the eighth display circuit 264. Since the eighth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above, the eighth display data buffer 278 has the first to fourth notification display devices 201. Display data for causing a predetermined display to be performed is stored in ~ 204. When the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the eighth display circuit 264 is reached, not only when the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is changed, but also the display data is concerned. Is not changed, the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 278 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Here, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the base value is performed. In this case, since the eighth display data buffer 278 is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, the process of storing the display data in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the base value is performed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, and each base stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259. The values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103, the work area 213 for non-specific control is not limited to the calculation result storage area 252 for storing each base value, but also the current area 256, the first history area 257, and the second history area 258. A display target setting area 253 for storing the base values to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the third history area 259 is provided. .. Since the period during which one base value is continuously displayed is 5 seconds, the base to be displayed according to the predetermined display order every 5 seconds in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The value is read from the calculation result storage area 252, and the read base value is stored in the display target setting area 253. Then, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display target is displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data stored in the setting area 253 is read out, and the read display data is stored in the eighth display data buffer 278.

In the configuration in which the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 are provided as described above, the main MPU 82 is displayed data corresponding to each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). The display data is read from the buffers 271 to 278, the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and the type data indicating which of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 corresponds to the display data is displayed. It is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 113, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. The display data buffer 283 stores the display data received from the main MPU 82. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264. The type data buffer 281 stores the type data received from the main MPU 82. The selection signal output unit 282 is a selection signal for designating the display circuits 261 to 264 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 as the reception destination of the display data. Is output.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 111, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected to each other by using the display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided so as to enable transmission of 8-bit display data at one time, and 8-bit unit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes a second display circuit 262, a third display circuit, a fourth display circuit, a fifth display circuit, and a sixth display circuit. It is electrically connected to each of the display circuit, the seventh display circuit 263, and the eighth display circuit 264. The branch signal group 292 is provided so as to enable transmission of 8-bit display data at one time like the display signal group 291. The 8-bit unit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. To.

When the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284 because the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, the display data is the first. It is supplied to all of the eighth display circuits 261 to 264. In this case, the first to eighth selection signal lines 301 to 304 are provided in order to specify the display circuits 261 to 264 to receive and use the supplied display data.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the first display circuit 261 for use. , The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the second display circuit 262 for use. , The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the second display circuit 262.

The third selection signal line (not shown) is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit. When the type data corresponding to the third display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is displayed in order to be received by the third display circuit and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit through the third selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the third display circuit.

The fourth selection signal line (not shown) is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit. When the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is displayed in order to be received by the fourth display circuit and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit through the fourth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fourth display circuit.

The fifth selection signal line (not shown) is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit. When the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is displayed in order to be received by the fifth display circuit and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit through the fifth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fifth display circuit.

The sixth selection signal line (not shown) is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the sixth display circuit. When the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is displayed in order to be received by the sixth display circuit and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the IC 266 transmits the sixth selection signal to the sixth display circuit through the sixth selection signal line. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the sixth display circuit.

The seventh selection signal line 303 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the seventh display circuit 263. When the type data corresponding to the 7th display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the 7th display circuit 263 for use. , The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the 7th selection signal to the 7th display circuit 263 through the 7th selection signal line 303. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the seventh display circuit 263.

The eighth selection signal line 304 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the eighth display circuit 264. When the type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the eighth display circuit 264 for use. , The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the eighth selection signal to the eighth display circuit 264 through the eighth selection signal line 304. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to eighth display circuits 261 to 264 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the eighth display circuit 264.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114. The processes of steps S7201 to S7213 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7201). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started by. Further, since the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, even if the second timer interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt is interrupted. It is possible to prevent the process (FIG. 114) from being started twice.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7202). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82. As described above, the set value update process (FIG. 83) is performed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Although it will be executed, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started, the interrupt is permitted in step S5101. Therefore, even if the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started.

The situation where "1" is set in the setting update display flag means that the setting value update processing (FIG. 83) is being executed by the main MPU 82 this time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 114). It means that it is the processing time that was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, the setting process for the seventh display data buffer 277 during the setting update is executed (step S7203). In the setting process, display data for causing the setting display device 205 to display a setting value indicating the current selection target of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. As a result, the setting display device 205 displays the setting value currently being selected.

When a negative determination is made in step S7202 or when the process of step S7203 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7204). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed by the main MPU 82. As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is a situation in which the process at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 81) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. Although it will be executed, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is started, the interrupt is permitted in step S5001. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed by the main MPU 82, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is interrupted and started.

The situation where "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag means that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) is being executed by the main MPU 82 this time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). It means that it is the processing time that was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7204, the setting process for the seventh display data buffer 277 during the setting confirmation is executed (step S7205). In the setting process, display data for displaying the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 on the setting display device 205 is stored in the seventh display data buffer 277. As a result, the setting display device 205 displays the setting values that are the current setting targets.

When a negative determination is made in step S7204 or the process of step S7205 is executed, the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 is executed (step S7206). FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278. The processes of steps S7301 to S7310 in the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 278 are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the specific control program and the specific control data. To.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more (step S7301). When the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7301: YES), it means that it is the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds). In this case, the check display data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7302). The display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is display data for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above. Further, the check display data is display data for causing the check display to be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, that is, on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is display data for setting all the display segments 201a to 204a into a light emitting state. By supplying the data of the check display to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106 (b), all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have the check display as the check display. The display segments 201a to 204a of the above are in the light emitting state. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not each of the display segments 201a to 204a of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally in the light emitting state.

After that, the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S7303). As a result, when the initial check period is being measured using the checking counter 211g, the value of the checking counter 211g is periodically set every time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is started. Will be subtracted.

When the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" and not the initial check period (step S7301: NO), whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. (Step S7304). When "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S7304: NO), the management start display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7305). In the setting process, the display data for setting all the display segments 201a and 202a in the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set in the eighth display data buffer 278. The first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 201a and 202a are in the light emitting state, respectively, and the first and second notification display devices 201, In each of the 202, the blinking display may be performed in all the display segments 201a and 202a.

After that, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read (step S7306), and the read calculation result data is sent to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. It is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as the display data to be applied (step S7307). Although the details will be described later, when the management start flag is not set to "1" in the display process (FIG. 116) included in the non-specific control process, the base value is read from the current area 256 and the read base value is used. The calculation result data corresponding to the number having the first decimal place and the number having the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 253. In step S7307, this calculation result data is set in the eighth display data buffer 278 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

By supplying the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 278 in steps S7305 and S7307 to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 106 (c), the first and second notification displays are displayed. In the situation where all the display segments 201a and 202a are in the light emitting state in each of the devices 201 and 202, the first decimal place of the base value calculated by the third notification display device 203 in the current calculation period. Is displayed, and the number with the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period on the fourth notification display device 204 is displayed. While all the display segments 201a and 202a are set to the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the numbers corresponding to the base values are displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the base value currently notified is the base value in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag.

In the situation where "1" is set in the management start flag, as described above, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 256 → the first history area 257 → the second history. While the base values to be notified are switched by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the predetermined order of area 258 → third history area 259, the management start flag is set to "1". In the situation where is not set, the base value of the current area 256 is maintained as the notification target. As a result, when the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is checked at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be confirmed at an arbitrary timing.

When "1" is set in the management start flag (step S7304: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is read, and the read display data is used as the first. 8 Set to the display data buffer 278 (step S7308). If the display data is supplied to the display IC 266 and the base value of the current area 256 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105 (a) is for the first to fourth notifications. If the display devices 201 to 204 perform and the base value of the first history area 257 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105 (b) is the display for the first to fourth notifications. If the display is performed by the devices 201 to 204 and the base value of the second history area 258 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105 (c) is the display device for the first to fourth notifications. If it is performed in 201 to 204 and the base value of the third history area 259 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105 (d) is the display device 201 for the first to fourth notifications. It will be held at ~ 204.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the initial display flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7309). The initial display flag is the first notification display device 201 in order to notify that the base value in the current area 256 is the base value at the initial stage of calculation after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value is the notification target. This is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be blinked and displayed. When "1" is set in the initial display flag (step S7309: YES), the blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S7310).

In the blinking setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is displayed blinking. Make settings to make it so. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, for transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the eighth display data buffer 278 is used. The corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then all the display segments 201a and 202a of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. The data to be in the state is transmitted to the display IC 266 until the predetermined extinguishing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then the predetermined lighting period and the predetermined extinguishing period are alternately repeated. As a result, if the base value of the current area 256 becomes the notification target immediately after the start of a new calculation period of the base value, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 display the initial calculation. Therefore, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall understand that the current base value notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It will be possible.

Here, in order to display the set value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) separately from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value. The setting display device 205 is provided, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). Not only the process for displaying the set value on 205 (step S7202 to step S7205), but also the process for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) is executed. .. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall places the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating to expose the front side of the main control device 71, the set value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new set value while checking the past base value in the set value update process (FIG. 83), or set the past base value and the current state in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), after executing the process of step S7206, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S7207). ), The transmission state of the signal through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is set to the OFF state (step S7208). After that, the type counter provided in the work area 211 for specific control is updated (step S7209).

The type counter is a counter for specifying the transmission target of the display data among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 in the main MPU 82 in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When it becomes a transmission target and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "6", the display of the sixth display data buffer 276 is displayed. When the data is the transmission target and the value of the type counter is "7", the display data of the 7th display data buffer 277 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the 8th display data buffer 278 The display data of is the transmission target. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is added by 1, and if the value of the type counter after the addition exceeds the upper limit of "8", the value of the type counter is set to "1". .. As a result, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 278 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 83 (step S7210). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the second type counter is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit is read from the main ROM 83, and the value of the type counter is "3". If it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit is read from the main ROM 83. Read, when the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the 6th display circuit is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "7", the 7th display circuit 263 is used. The corresponding type data is read from the main ROM 83, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 83.

After that, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 278 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S7211). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273 when the value of the type counter is "3", and the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274 when the value of the type counter is "4". The display data is read, the display data is read from the 5th display data buffer 275 when the value of the type counter is "5", and the display data is read from the 6th display data buffer 276 when the value of the type counter is "6". The display data is read, the display data is read from the 7th display data buffer 277 when the value of the type counter is "7", and the display data is read from the 8th display data buffer 278 when the value of the type counter is "8". Read the display data.

After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S7212). In the transmission process, signal output is performed for the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S7210 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signal output is performed to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S7211 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

After that, interrupt permission is set to allow the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) (step S7213).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a display process executed in step S6906 of the check process (FIG. 108). The processes of steps S7401 to S7420 in the display process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is 1 or more (step S7401). When the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more (step S7401: YES), “1” is set in the previous checking flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7402). The previous checking flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that the value of the checking counter 211g is 1 or more in the previous processing round of the display processing.

When the value of the checking counter 211g is "0" (step S7401: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7403). .. When "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S7403: NO), the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7404).

After that, the base value is read from the current area 256, and the calculation result data corresponding to the number having the first decimal place and the number having the second decimal place in the read base value is displayed in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Set to 253 (step S7405). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number having the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 256 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 256 is displayed. The number having the second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. Will be done.

In the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253, but the display type data is not set. When the base value is notified in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are managed as described above. The display content is different from the case where the base value is notified in the situation where "1" is set in the start flag. Specifically, in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, all the display segments 201a and 202a are in the light emitting state.

When "1" is set in the management start flag (step S7403: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7406). ). When "1" is not set in the flag being checked last time (step S7406: NO), the value of the switching timing counter 254 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step). S7407). The switching timing counter 254 is used for the first to fourth notifications among the base values stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 of the calculation result storage area 252. This is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify that it is the timing to switch the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204. As already explained, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 256 → the first history area 257 → the second history area 258 → the third history area 259 is notified in a predetermined order. The target base value is switched, and the switching of the target base value to be notified is repeated in the predetermined order.

When the process of step S7407 is executed, the base value currently being notified becomes the notification target by determining whether or not the value of the switching timing counter 254 after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined whether or not the display continuation period has elapsed since then (step S7408). When an affirmative determination is made in step S7408, the value of the display target counter 255 (see FIG. 103) provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S7409). Then, when the value of the display target counter 255 after 1 addition exceeds the maximum value "3" (step S7410: YES), the value of the display target counter 255 is cleared to "0" (step S7411).

The display target counter 255 is used for the first to fourth notifications among the base values stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. It is a counter for specifying the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204 by the main MPU 82. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 256 becomes the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is "1", the first history area The base value stored in 257 is the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 258 is the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is "3". In the case of ", the base value stored in the third history area 259 is the notification target.

When a negative determination is made in step S7410, or when the process of step S7411 is executed, the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is displayed as a value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target (display continuation period). Specifically, a value corresponding to (5 seconds) is set (step S7412).

When a negative determination is made in step S7408, or when the process of step S7412 is executed, the display data corresponding to the base value to be notified this time is displayed in the display target setting area 253 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Executes the process for setting. Specifically, first, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 is set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7413). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a base value, and a base of the notification target. The second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating which of the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252 the value corresponds to. Includes display data to be done.

After that, the base value was read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255 among the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, and the read was read out. The calculation result data corresponding to the number having the first decimal point and the number having the second decimal point in the base value is set in the display target setting area 253 (step S7414). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display the number corresponding to the first decimal place in the base value of the notification target, and the second decimal place number in the base value of the notification target. Includes display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display the corresponding display.

As described above, the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 253. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the display corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Further, the process of step S7414 is executed every time the display process (FIG. 116) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As described above, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 110) is executed, a base value is calculated using the current values in the counters 251a to 251e of the normal counter area 251, and the calculated base value is calculated. It is stored in the current area 256 of the calculation result storage area 252. In this case, each time the processing of step S7414 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 253 is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target (FIG. 116). In the situation where the base value of the current area 256 is the notification target, if the base value is changed, the changed base value can be notified.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 256 is the notification target based on the value of the display target counter (step S7415), and the operation initial flag provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to ". It is determined whether or not "1" is set (step S7416). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is performed after the calculation period of the base value is newly started. This is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number. When an affirmative judgment is made in both step S7415 and step S7416, "1" is set in the initial display flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7417), and the initial display flag is denied in either step S7415 or step S7416. When the determination is made, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S7418).

The initial display flag is the first notification display device 201 in order to notify that the base value in the current area 256 is the base value at the initial stage of calculation after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value is the notification target. This is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be blinked and displayed. When it is specified that "1" is set in the initial display flag in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is not only transmitted to the display IC 266 but also transmitted to the display IC 266. When the display corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and the third notification display device 202 is displayed. The display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on and displayed. When it is specified in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) that "1" is not set in the initial display flag, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 253 is displayed from the first to the first. When the fourth notification display device 201 to 204 is used, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on and displayed.

When the value of the checking counter 211g in the work area 211 for specific control is "0" and the management start flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7401: NO, step S7403: YES), when the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S7406: YES), the management start flag is set to "1". It means that the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) has elapsed when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started in the situation. In this case, after the previous checking flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7419), the setting process of the switching timing counter 254 is executed (step S7420).

In the setting process of the switching timing counter 254, the value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) as the value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target to the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. To set. On the other hand, the value of the display target counter 255 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is maintained without being updated. The display target counter 255 is used for the first to fourth notifications among the base values stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. It is a counter for specifying the base value to be notified in the display devices 201 to 204 by the main MPU 82.

After executing the processes of step S7419 and step S7420, the processes of steps S7413 to S7418 are executed. As a result, among the base values stored in the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252, the base corresponding to the value of the display target counter 255. The display of the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started (steps S4901 to S4928). ) Is executed to start displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) ends. When the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs, and when the initial check period ends, the current area 256, the first history area 257, and the second history area 258 in the calculation result storage area 252. Of the base values stored in each of the third history area 259 and the third history area 259, the display of the base value that was the notification target immediately before the start of the initial check period is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon resumption, the display of the reopened base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period is started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

The switching timing counter 254 and the display target counter 255 are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control as described above. In the set value update process (FIG. 83), the RAM clear process (step S5113) is executed, but in the RAM clear process (step S5113), the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are relative to each other. The clear process is executed, but the clear process for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is not executed. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step S5113) is executed in the set value updating process (FIG. 83), the information of the switching timing counter 254 and the information of the display target counter 255 are maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 117 is a time chart showing how various displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. FIG. 117 (a) shows the period during which the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 82, FIG. 117 (b) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, and FIG. 117 (c) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed. The period in which the base value stored in the current area 256 in the calculation result storage area 252 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown, and FIG. 117 (d) shows the calculation result storage area 252. The period in which the base value stored in the first history area 257 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown, and FIG. 117 (e) shows the second in the calculation result storage area 252. The period in which the base value stored in the history area 258 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown, and FIG. 117 (f) shows the third history area 259 in the calculation result storage area 252. The period in which the base value stored in is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown, and FIG. 117 (g) shows the switching timing counter 254 in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The values are shown, FIG. 117 (h) shows the period during which the set values are displayed on the setting display device 205, and FIG. 117 (i) is checked by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Indicates the period during which the display is being performed.

First, a case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83) are not executed when the supply of operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the off state, and the display of the base value is not started.

After that, at the timing of t2, the setting process (step S4926) of the checking counter 211g is executed, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117 (i). By visually checking the check display, the manager of the game hall can identify whether or not a failure has occurred in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, when the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses from the timing of t2, the checks on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 117 (i). Display ends. When the check display ends in the situation where the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value stored in the current area 256 is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (c). It is started by the 1st to 4th notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t4, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (c) is at the timing of t4. ) And FIG. 117 (d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base stored in the first history area 257. It changes to a value. After that, each time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses as shown in FIG. 117 (g), including the timing of t5, the timing of t6, and the timing of t7, FIGS. 117 (c) to FIGS. As shown in 117 (f), the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a predetermined order (current area 256 → first history area 257 → second history area 258 →. It is sequentially switched according to the third history area 259). Further, after the display of the base value in the third history area 259, which is the final order, is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds), the base value in the current area 256, which is the first order, is displayed. The display is performed over the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds).

Next, a case where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of the operating power is started will be described.

At the timing of t8, supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started as shown in FIG. 117 (a). In this case, execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Since the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the off state, and the display of the base value is not started.

After that, at the timing of t9, the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started on the main MPU 82 as shown in FIG. 117 (b). When the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started, the display of the currently selected set value is started on the setting display device 205 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 117 (h). To.

Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started, the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. When the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value stored in the current area 256 as shown in FIG. 117 (c) at the timing of t9 is displayed for the first to fourth notifications. It is started by the display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the set value is displayed on the setting display device 205 as shown in FIG. 117 (h), and the base is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117 (c). The value is displayed. Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t10, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (c) is at the timing of the t10. ) And FIG. 117 (d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base stored in the first history area 257. It changes to a value. Further, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t11, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (d) is at the timing of the t11. ) And FIG. 117 (e), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the second history area 258 from the base value stored in the first history area 257. It will be changed to the base value that is. Further, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t12, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (e) occurs at the timing of t12. ) And FIG. 117 (f), the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are stored in the third history area 259 from the base value stored in the second history area 258. It will be changed to the base value that is. Further, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter 254.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed as shown in FIG. 117 (b) at the timing of t13 during the measurement of the display continuation period in the switching timing counter 254. When the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed, the display of the set value in the setting display device 205 is completed at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 117 (h). In this case, the setting display device 205 is turned off.

Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed, the display of the base value is completed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 117 (f). Further, at the timing of t13, the setting process (step S4926) of the checking counter 211g is executed, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. .. Therefore, at the timing of t13, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 117 (i). By visually checking the check display, the manager of the game hall can identify whether or not a failure has occurred in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, when the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses from the timing of t13, the checks on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performed at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 117 (i). Display ends. When the check display ends in the situation where the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted, the display of the base value is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117 (f), the base value to be notified of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the third history area that was performed immediately before the check display was started. It is a base value of 259. Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), information corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is newly set in the switching timing counter 254. As a result, the display of the type of base value that was performed immediately before the start of the check display is resumed after the end of the check display, and the display of the base value remains immediately before the start of the check display. It is not performed over the display continuation period of, but is performed over the display continuation period by setting a new display continuation period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t15, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (c) is at the timing of the t15. ) And FIG. 117 (f), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is from the base value stored in the third history area 259 to the base stored in the current area 256. It changes to a value. Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (g) at the timing of t16, the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) measured by the switching timing counter 254 elapses, so that FIG. 117 (c) is at the timing of the t16. ) And FIG. 117 (d), the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is from the base value stored in the current area 256 to the base stored in the first history area 257. It changes to a value.

Aside from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, the setting display for displaying the set value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83). In the situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the device 205 is set in the setting display device 205. Not only the process for displaying the value (steps S7202 to S7205) but also the process for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) is executed. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall places the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating to expose the front side of the main control device 71, the set value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new set value while checking the past base value in the set value update process (FIG. 83), or set the past base value and the current state in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the process (step S4901 to step S4928) at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. By doing so, after the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initial setting is completed. When the check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs and the initial check period ends, the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 252 in the calculation result storage area 252. Of the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base value that was the notification target immediately before the start of the initial check period is resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the display of the restarted base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period is started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

<Processing for erasing information>
Next, the process for erasing the information will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process executed in step S4919 of the main process (FIG. 81) or step S5113 of the set value update process (FIG. 83). The processing of steps S7501 to S7506 in the RAM clear processing is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the protection release process is executed (step S7501). In the protection release processing, in each area of the main RAM 84, in an area other than the work area 211 for specific control, the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 213 for non-specific control, and the stack area 214 for non-specific control. A process for canceling the state in which a certain unused area is excluded from the target of writing information (including clearing "0") is executed.

As described above, the main MPU 82 is provided with a RAM management circuit 225 (see FIG. 79) for writing information to the main RAM 84 and reading information from the main RAM 84. When the address of the area to be read information is specified by the execution of the process by the program in the main MPU 82, the RAM management circuit 225 reads the information from the area of the specified address and supplies it to the main MPU 82. When the address of the area to which the information is to be written is specified by the execution of the process by the program in the main MPU 82, the specified information is written in the area of the specified address. In this case, the data for specific control in the main ROM 83 includes the address range of the unused area in the main RAM 84 (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5). , Address Y (t + 3) to Address Y (t + 5)) are stored in advance. When the protection setting is made, the RAM management circuit 225 has an unused area address range in which the address is stored in the main ROM 83 when the address of the area to which the information is written is specified. If it is included in, the information is not written, while if the protection setting is canceled, if it is included in the address specified as the information to be written, it is in the unused area. Even if it is an address range, information is written to the area of the address range. Writing this information also includes clearing "0".

As described above, the protect register 223c is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 (see FIG. 79). The protect register 223c is for an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) in the main RAM 84. This is a storage area for specifying in the RAM management circuit 225 whether or not information can be written. When the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, the above protect setting is performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. Even if specified, information is not written to the area of the address as described above. On the other hand, if the protect information is not set in the protect register 223c, the above protect setting is not performed, and the address included in the address range of the unused area stored in the main ROM 83 is written. When specified as a target, information is written to the area of that address.

The protect register 223c is set as a 1-bit area, and the case where "1" is set in the protect register 223c corresponds to the case where the protect information is set in the protect register 223c, and the protect register is set. The case where the information of 223c is "0" corresponds to the case where the protection information is not set in the protect register 223c. In the protection release process in step S7501, the protect register 223c is cleared to "0".

After that, the address Y (3) is set as the target address in the predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7502). As shown in FIG. 77, the address Y (3) is the address of the area included in the work area 211 for specific control in the main RAM 84, and the start address Y (in the main RAM 84 and the work area 211 for specific control) ( It is an address set in the following order with respect to 1) and the second address Y (2). The area corresponding to the start address Y (1) is a setting reference area in which information on the set value to be used is stored. Further, the area corresponding to the second address Y (2) is a setting update display flag. In the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the clearing process is executed for the area corresponding to the third address Y (3) and subsequent addresses, but the setting reference area corresponding to the start address Y (1) and the second address. The clearing process is not executed for the setting update display flag corresponding to the address Y (2) of. This makes it possible to prevent the information of the set value to be used from being erased by the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and the setting value update process (FIG. 83) is in the middle of execution. It is possible to prevent the information indicating the above from being erased. As the area excluded from the target of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the ceiling counter 131 may be included as in the first embodiment.

After that, "0" is cleared for the area corresponding to the target address, and the initial setting is executed (step S7503). When the address to be cleared is the address Y (3), the area corresponding to the address Y (3) is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. If the address to be cleared is any of the address Y (r + 3) to the address Y (r + 5), the corresponding area becomes an unused area, but the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" in step S7501. Therefore, even for the unused area, "0" is cleared and the initial setting is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address is the address Y (s + 1) (step S7504). As shown in FIG. 77, the address Y (s + 1) is an address of an area included in the stack area 212 for specific control, and is one for the final address Y (s + 2) in the stack area 212 for specific control. Addresses in the previous order. Since the information of the return address on the program after the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is completed is set in the final address Y (s + 2) in the stack area 212 for specific control, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is performed. Excluded from the target.

When the target address is not the address Y (s + 1) (step S7504: NO), the target address is updated to the address in the next order (step S7505). Specifically, the target address is added by 1. Then, "0" is cleared and the initial setting is performed in step S7503 for the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition, and the process of step S7504 is executed.

When the process of step S7505 is executed in the situation where the target address is the final address Y (r + 2) in the work area 211 for specific control, the target address becomes the address Y (r + 3) corresponding to the unused area. "0" is cleared and initial settings are performed for the unused area. In this case, since the initial setting is not performed, "0" is simply cleared. If the process of step S7505 is executed in a situation where the target address is the address Y (r + 5) corresponding to the unused area, the target address is the start address Y (r + 6) in the stack area 212 for specific control. Then, "0" is cleared and the initial setting is performed for the area of the start address Y (r + 6) in the stack area 212 for the specific control. In this case, since the initial setting is not performed, "0" is simply cleared.

By repeating the processes of steps S7503 to S7505, the area of the address Y (3) to the address Y (r + 2) in the work area 211 for the specific control, the work area 211 for the specific control, and the stack area for the specific control For an unused area in the address range (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) between 212 and an area of address Y (r + 6) to address Y (s + 1) in the stack area 212 for specific control. "0" is cleared and initial settings are performed. Then, an affirmative determination is made in step S7504 after clearing "0" and performing initial setting for the area of the address Y (s + 1).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7504, the protect setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S4903 of the main process (FIG. 81) (step S7506). In the protect setting process, "1" is set in the protect register 223c as described above. When "1" is set in the protect register 223c and the protect information is set, the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) in the main RAM 84 is set. -Information cannot be written to the address Y (s + 5) and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5). After that, the RAM clearing process is terminated.

By executing the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) as described above, when the supply of operating power is started, a part of the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are required as needed. It is possible to execute the clear process for the area of. In this case, an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) is set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control in the main RAM 84. When the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protect release process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", so that an unused area (address Y (r + 3)) is executed. -The state in which information cannot be written to the address Y (r + 5), the address Y (s + 3) to the address Y (s + 5), and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)) is released. As a result, in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), when the clear process is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, the work area 211 for specific control and the work area 211 for specific control are used. A series from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control, including the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) set between the stack area 212 and the stack area 212. The clearing process may be executed by designating an address range (addresses Y (3) to Y (s + 1)) to be a range. Therefore, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with.

Even if the protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, the clear process is executed for the area of the address range to be cleared. When is completed, the protect setting process (step S7506) is executed and "1" is set in the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is completed, the unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5) in the main RAM 84, It is possible to disable writing of information to the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)) again.

In the protect release process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), "1" is set in the protect register 223c. .. As a result, while reducing the processing load in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5) in the main RAM 84). , Processing to enable writing of information to address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5), and the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to It is possible to perform processing for disabling writing of information to the address Y (s + 5) and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)).

Next, the information abnormality monitoring process executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) included in the non-specific control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119. The processes of steps S7601 to S7606 in the information abnormality monitoring process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, the monitoring process of the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed (step S7601). In the monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range, and the value exceeds the normal numerical range. If so, identify that there is an abnormality. Further, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the normal counter area 251 in the work area 213 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal information. For example, in the normal counter area 251 when the value of the out counter 251e is "0" but the value of the general winning counter 251a is 1000 or more, it is specified that there is an abnormality.

When it is specified that there is an abnormality in the monitoring process in step S7601 (step S7602: YES), the address Y (s + k) is set as the target address in the predetermined register of the main MPU 82 (step S7603). In the work area 213 for non-specific control, the area from the start address Y (s + 6) to the address Y (s + k-1) is the WA of the main MPU 82 when the specific control process to the non-specific control process are executed. It is a WA buffer, a BC buffer, a DE buffer, an HL buffer, an IX buffer, and an IY buffer in which information of a register, a BC register, a DE register, an HL register, an IX register, and an IY register is saved. In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clear process is executed for the area corresponding to the address after the address Y (s + k) in the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed. Clear processing is not executed for the area in the address range from the start address Y (s + 6) to the address Y (s + k-1) in. As a result, even if the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the WA register, BC register, and DE of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed from the specific control process. It is possible to prevent the information saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control from being erased from the register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register.

After that, "0" is cleared for the area corresponding to the target address, and the initial setting is executed (step S7604). When the address to be cleared is the address Y (s + k), the area corresponding to the address Y (s + k) is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address is the address Y (t + 2) (step S7605). The address Y (t + 2) is the final address in the work area 213 for non-specific control as shown in FIG. 77.

When the target address is not the final address (t + 2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control (step S7605: NO), the target address is updated to the address in the next order (step S7606). Specifically, the target address is added by 1. Then, "0" is cleared and the initial setting is performed in step S7604 for the area corresponding to the address after the 1 addition, and the process of step S7605 is executed. As a result, "0" is cleared and initial settings are performed for the area included in the predetermined address range (address Y (s + k) to address Y (t + 2)) in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In the area of the address range (address Y (s + k) to address Y (t + 2)), the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the magnetic detection counter 213i, the magnetic monitoring delay timer counter 213j, and the second security counter 213k, 1st to 3rd general prize abnormality flags 213l to 213n, special electric prize abnormality flag 213o, 1st operation prize abnormality flag 213p, 2nd operation prize abnormality flag 213q, out abnormality flag 213r, gate prize abnormality flag 213s, magnetic abnormality It includes a flag 213t, a normal counter area 251, a calculation result storage area 252, a display target setting area 253, a switching timing counter 254, and a display target counter 255. When the clear process is executed for the final address (t + 2) in the work area 213 for non-specific control and an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, this information abnormality monitoring process ends.

As described above, when it is specified in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the main side in the work area 213 for non-specific control. The clearing process is executed for the area other than the area where the register information in the MPU 82 is saved. This makes it possible to deal with information abnormalities.

In the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clear process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clear process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. An unused area (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but for non-specific control. There is no unused area in the work area 213 of. Therefore, even if the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to specify a series of address ranges and execute the clear process, it is not necessary to execute the protect release process and the protect setting process.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A work area 211 for specific control and a stack area 212 for specific control are provided as a storage area of the main RAM 84 to which information is written when the processing of specific control is executed by the main MPU 82. This makes it possible to properly use the storage area for writing information between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control according to the role. Further, at the address of the main RAM 84, an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) is provided between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control. Since information is not written to the unused area when the specific control process is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are clarified at the address of the main RAM 84. It becomes possible to distinguish between.

In this case, when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is executed, the protect release process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0", so that the unused area (address Y (address Y)) is executed. The state in which information cannot be written to r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), and address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) is released. As a result, in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (address Y (r + 3)) set between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control Clear processing is executed by designating an address range (addresses Y (3) to Y (s + 1)) that is a series of ranges from the work area 211 for specific control to the stack area 212 for specific control including r + 5)). do it. Therefore, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is executed by distinguishing between the address range to be cleared in the work area 211 for specific control and the address range to be cleared in the stack area 212 for specific control. It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with.

Even if the protection release process (step S7501) is executed and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) is started, the clear process is executed for the area of the address range to be cleared. When is completed, the protect setting process (step S7506) is executed and "1" is set in the protect register 223c. As a result, when the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118) is completed, unused areas in the main RAM 84 (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), It is possible to disable writing of information to the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)) again.

In the protect release process (step S7501), the protect register 223c in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 is cleared to "0", and in the protect setting process (step S7506), "1" is set in the protect register 223c. .. As a result, while reducing the processing load in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5) in the main RAM 84). , Processing to enable writing of information to address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5), and the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to It is possible to perform processing for disabling writing of information to the address Y (s + 5) and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)).

In the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the clear process is executed for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, including unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)). However, the clear process is not executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control used in the process for non-specific control. As a result, in a configuration in which the clear process is executed including the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) in order to simplify the process configuration, the target for executing the clear process is also for specific control. Work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control used in the processing of, work area 213 for non-specific control and stack for non-specific control used in the processing for non-specific control. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the area 214.

When it is specified in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the register in the main MPU 82 in the work area 213 for non-specific control The clear process is executed for the area other than the area where the information is saved. This makes it possible to deal with information abnormalities. In this case, in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119), the clear process is executed for the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the clear process is not executed for the stack area 214 for non-specific control. An unused area (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) exists between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control, but for non-specific control. There is no unused area in the work area 213 of. In this configuration, even if the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to specify a series of address ranges and execute the clear process, the protect release process and the protect setting process are not executed. This eliminates the need to release protection for unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)). It is possible to prevent it from being done in.

Aside from the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for displaying the base value, the setting display for displaying the set value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83). In the situation where the device 205 is provided and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), the device 205 is set in the setting display device 205. Not only the process for displaying the value (steps S7202 to S7205) but also the process for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (step S7206) is executed. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the manager of the game hall places the game machine main body 12 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. By rotating to expose the front side of the main control device 71, the set value displayed on the setting display device 205 and the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Both can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can set a new set value while checking the past base value in the set value update process (FIG. 83), or set the past base value and the current state in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). It is possible to check the correspondence with the set value.

In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on which the base value is displayed are mounted on the element mounting surface of the main control board 81, the setting display device 205 on which the set value is displayed is also mounted on the element mounting surface. It is provided. This makes it easy to check both the base value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the set value displayed on the setting display device 205.

When the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth settings are executed when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is started. The display of the base value in the notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display of the base value from being started before the manager of the game hall starts the work for changing the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 use the display segments 201a to 201a to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. A check display is executed so that it can be confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred in 204a. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is normally performed at the timing before the game is started. In this case, when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed when the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed. It will be started. As a result, in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first to fourth notifications are given priority while displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to perform a check display on the display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83). When the process of advancing the game is to be started, the check display is first started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the base value display is started after the check display is completed. Will be done. This makes it possible to prioritize the check display over the start of the base value display in the situation.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed in the process (step S4901 to step S4928) at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started. By doing so, after the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is completed and the initial setting is completed. When the check period (specifically, 5 seconds) occurs and the initial check period ends, the current area 256, the first history area 257, the second history area 258, and the third history area 252 in the calculation result storage area 252. Of the base values stored in each of the history areas 259, the display of the base value that was the notification target immediately before the start of the initial check period is resumed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, the display of the restarted base value is performed over the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the initial check period is started. This makes it possible to appropriately display the base value after the end of the initial check period.

When the specific control process is executed, the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control are the targets for writing information, but the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 214 is not the target for writing information, and when the non-specific control process is executed, the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are specified as the target for writing information. The work area 211 for control and the stack area 212 for specific control are not the targets for writing information. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written depending on whether the specific control process is executed or the non-specific control process is executed. On the other hand, even when the specific control process is executed, not only from the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, but also the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack for non-specific control. Information can be read from the area 214, and even when the non-specific control process is executed, the specific control is performed not only from the work area 213 for the non-specific control and the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. Information can also be read from the work area 211 for use and the stack area 212 for specific control. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the non-specific control process, the corresponding process is executed in the specific control process. Will be done. As a result, the specific control is performed by executing the process for identifying whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud as a non-specific control process instead of a specific control process. Even if there is a margin in the process that can be executed as the process of, the process corresponding to the fact that the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is defined as the process of the specific control. It will be possible to execute.

In a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a game ball is detected by each detection sensor 231a to 238a in the specific control process is executed, a game in each detection sensor 231a to 238a in the non-specific control process. When it is specified that the detection of the ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud, a process for invalidating the detection of the game ball is executed in the process of the specific control. As a result, the specific control is performed by executing the process for identifying whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud as a non-specific control process instead of a specific control process. A process for specifying whether or not a game ball has been detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a and a process for invalidating the detection of the game ball, while allowing a margin in the process that can be executed as the process of It is possible to perform the processing collectively in the specific control process.

The game is played by the detection sensors 231a to 238a that detect the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the out port 24a, and the through gate 35. A ball entry detection process for identifying whether or not a ball has been detected (FIG. 91) and a process for advancing the game in response to the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a (holding information). The acquisition process (FIG. 92), the normal power control process (FIG. 96), the special electric power opening process (FIG. 97 (c)), the payout output process (step S5518), etc.) are included in the specific control process. The non-specific control process includes a fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud in the specific control process. , The data capacity allocated to the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main ROM 83 can be allocated to the processing other than the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95).

In the processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88), the ball entry detection processing is included in the specific control processing and is a processing for specifying whether or not the game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a. After that, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 91) is included in the non-specific control process and is used to monitor whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud. 95) is executed, and after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), the game is advanced in response to the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a while being included in the specific control process. Processing (holding information acquisition processing (FIG. 92), timer control processing (FIG. 96), special electric power opening processing (FIG. 97 (c)), payout output processing (step S5518), etc.) are executed. As a result, the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) for monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is due to an abnormality or fraud is executed as a non-specific control process. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in response to the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a caused by the abnormality or fraud.

When it is specified that the game ball is detected by the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 91) included in the specific control process, the confirmation flag group 211d in the work area 211 for the specific control is set. "1" is set in each confirmation flag provided, and it is specified that the detection of the game ball is caused by an abnormality or fraud in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process. If this is done, "1" is set in each abnormality flag 213l to 213s provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, and "1" is set in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s. In the fraudulent response process (FIG. 99) included in the control process, the confirmation flag corresponding to the error flags 213l to 213s in which "1" is set is cleared by "0". As a result, the information stored in the work area 211 for specific control can be read out in both the specific control process and the non-specific control process, whereas the information in the specific control work area 211 can be read. Is possible in the specific control process but not in the non-specific control process, and the reading of the information stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is the specific control process and the non-specific control process. While it is possible in either case, writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process. It is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

Fraud handling processing included in the specific control process (FIG. 95) after the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) included in the non-specific control process is executed until the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) is executed again. FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the fraud handling process (FIG. 99), the confirmation flag "0" is cleared and the counters for various prize balls are cleared according to the abnormality flags 213l to 213s for which information is set in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95). Execute the subtraction process. In this case, in the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95), after first clearing the abnormality flags 213l to 213s to "0", a process for setting information in the abnormality flags 213l to 213s is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which writing information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is possible in the non-specific control process but not in the specific control process, an error occurs at an appropriate timing in the non-specific control process. It is possible to clear the flags 213l to 213s by "0".

In a configuration in which identification of whether or not the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed by a non-specific control process, the special electric monitoring delay referred to at the time of the identification is performed. The timer counter 211b and the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general electric power are provided in the work area 211 for specific control. As a result, it becomes possible to perform the process for measuring the period by using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c by the specific control process.

Further, the measurement of the valid period of the detection of the game ball using the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b is started with the execution of the process of changing the special electric winning device 32 from the open state to the closed state, and the monitoring delay for general electric power is started. The measurement of the valid period of the detection of the game ball using the timer counter 211c is started with the execution of the process of changing the second operating port 34 from the open state to the closed state. Then, since the process of closing the special electric winning device 32 and the second operating port 34 is executed as the process of the specific control, the start trigger is the process of the non-specific control without taking into account the process result of the specific control. It is impossible to identify. In this case, if the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer are provided. The processing configuration for specifying the start trigger of the measurement of the valid period in the counter 211c may be complicated. On the other hand, by providing the monitoring delay timer counter 211b for special electric power and the monitoring delay timer counter 211c for general electric power in the work area 211 for specific control instead of the work area 213 for non-specific control, the work area for specific control is provided. Although the required storage capacity of 211 increases by that amount, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

In a configuration in which identification of whether or not the detection of a game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud is executed by a non-specific control process, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, The 1st to 8th prize monitoring timers referred to when monitoring whether or not the game ball has normally entered the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the out port 24a. The counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Since the measurement of the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h is started by the detection result of each detection sensor 231a to 238a, the start trigger is the processing of the specific control. It is possible to specify by non-specific control processing without taking the result into consideration. Therefore, by providing the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the invalid period of the detection of the game ball using the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h Can be measured by non-specific control processing. Under such circumstances, by providing the first to eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h in the work area 213 for non-specific control, the storage capacity required in the work area 211 for specific control can be reduced. It will be possible.

The command to be transmitted is the command to be transmitted regardless of whether the specific control processing unit 221 is executing the specific control processing or the non-specific control processing unit 222 is executing the non-specific control processing. , It is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223. That is, even if the area to which the information is written in the main RAM 84 is different between the situation where the specific control process is executed and the situation where the non-specific control process is executed, the transmission target The area for writing the command of is also used in the situation where the specific control process is being executed and the situation where the non-specific control process is being executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to consolidate the processing for storing the command into only one of the specific control processing and the non-specific control processing, so that the processing configuration for storing the command is not complicated. It will be possible.

The command transmission buffer 223b is provided in the register area 223 of the main MPU 82 instead of the main RAM 84. As a result, the storage area of the main RAM 84 in which information can be written in the specific control process and the storage area of the main RAM 84 in which the information can be written in the non-specific control process are divided into the work area 211 for specific control. In a configuration in which the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished, commands are written while avoiding using these areas 211 to 214. The storage area can be shared between the specific control process and the non-specific control process.

The command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates independently of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. As a result, it is not necessary to adjust the command transmission timing in relation to the execution content of the process using the program in the main MPU 82, so that it is possible to simplify the process configuration of the process using the program in the main MPU 82. It becomes.

The process for specifying whether or not an event that is the target of the external output of the security signal has occurred is executed not only in the specific control process but also in the non-specific control process. As a result, the process for monitoring whether or not the event subject to the external output of the security signal has occurred is assigned to the non-specific control process, and the program or data related to the specific control process is assigned. Capacity can be allocated to other processes.

A first security counter 211a is provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and a second security counter 213k is provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. When it is specified that it has occurred, the value of the first security counter 211a is added by 1, and it is specified that an event that is the target of external output of the security signal has occurred in the non-specific control processing. If so, the value of the second security counter 213k is added by 1. As a result, writing of information to the work area 211 for specific control is possible in the processing of specific control and not possible in the processing of non-specific control, and writing of information to the work area 213 for non-specific control is not possible. Although it is possible in the specific control process and not possible in the specific control process, an event that is the target of external output of the security signal has occurred in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process. Can be identified appropriately.

In the security process (FIG. 101) included in the specific control process, the increase in the value of the second security counter 213k in the work area 213 for non-specific control is added to the first security counter 211a, and the first security counter 211a is added. When the value of is 1 or more, the security signal is externally output in the security process (FIG. 101). Then, the external output of the pulse-shaped security signal over the predetermined output continuation period with the predetermined stop continuation period in between is repeatedly executed until the value of the first security counter 211a becomes "0". As a result, in a configuration in which identification of the occurrence of an event that is the target of external output of the security signal is performed in each of the specific control process and the non-specific control process, the process for externally outputting the security signal. Can be integrated into the processing of specific control.

When the value of the first security counter 211a is 1 or more, "1" is set in the security flag 211f, and when "1" is set in the security flag 211f, the abnormality display device 206 is in the light emitting state. .. Further, the state in which "1" is set in the security flag 211f is maintained when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is continued, and the RAM clear processing (step S4919) in the main processing (FIG. 81) is maintained. ) Or the RAM clear process (step S5113) in the set value update process (FIG. 83) is maintained, and when the security flag 211f is set to "1", the abnormality display device 206 is maintained in the light emitting state. To. As a result, at least when the game hall is open, whether or not an event subject to external output of the security signal has occurred is determined regardless of the confirmation timing of the abnormality display device 206 by the game hall administrator. It becomes possible to make the administrator recognize it.

<14th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 82 is different from the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. Of the processes from step S7701 to step S7719 in the first timer interrupt process, the processes other than the management process called and executed in step S7719 use the specific control program and the specific control data. It is executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82, and the management process is executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control. ..

In steps S7701 to S7707, the same processing as in steps S5501 to S5507 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. In step S7708, the ball entry detection process is executed.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process in step S7708. The processes of steps S7801 to S7818 in the ball entry detection process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

First, the setting process of the prize ball counter is executed (step S7801). The prize ball counter setting process is for setting each prize ball counter according to the processing content of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) and the processing content of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the previous processing round. It is the processing of. The details of the setting process of the prize ball counter will be described later.

After that, various flag clearing processes are executed (step S7802). In the various flag clearing processes, as in the various flag clearing processes (step S5601) in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning confirmation flag, the second winning confirmation flag, and the second winning confirmation flag in the confirmation flag group 211d of the work area 211 for specific control are used. 3 Clear the winning confirmation flag, the special electric winning confirmation flag, the first operation winning confirmation flag, the second operating winning confirmation flag, the out confirmation flag, and the gate winning confirmation flag by "0".

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S7803: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7804). The first winning confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S7805: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7806). The second winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S7807: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7808). The third winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is set by the special electric detection sensor 234a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S7809: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7810). The special electric winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first operation port detection sensor 235a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S7811: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7812). The first operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 5th bit D5 has been switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second operation port detection sensor 236a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S7813: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7814). The second operation winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is used by the out-port detection sensor 237a. Is detected (step S7815: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S7816). The out confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 237a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is released by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S7817: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning confirmation flag of the work area 211 for specific control (step S7818). The gate winning confirmation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 238a, as in the thirteenth embodiment.

Returning to the description of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), after executing the ball entry detection process in step S7708, the step of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in step S7709. Similar to S5510, the timer update process of specific control is executed. After that, the processes of steps S7710 to S7718 are executed. In steps S7710 to S7718, the same processing as in steps S5512 to S5520 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed.

In this embodiment, the fraud detection process (step S5509) and the fraud response process (step S5511) set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) in the thirteenth embodiment are not executed. Instead, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the present embodiment, the management process is called by the CALLI instruction in step S7719, and the fraud detection execution process is executed in the management process. The process of step S7719 is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S7705 or when the process of step S7718 is executed.

Next, the process of step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) will be described.

In step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction as described above. The management process is included in the non-specific control process. That is, when the situation in which the specific control process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) changes to the situation in which the non-specific control process is executed, the non-specific control process uses the CALLI instruction. Called.

When the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is first saved in the stack area 212 for specific control. The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the management process which is the non-specific control process is started, the information before the call of the management process or the change after the start of the management process is started. The status flag register information can be saved in the stack area 212 for specific control.

When the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the flag register information is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and then the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114). ) Interrupts are prohibited. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114), which are the specific control processes, are interrupted and started during the execution of the management process, which is the non-specific control process. It is possible to avoid it.

When the management process is executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are saved. After the interrupt is disabled, the program corresponding to the management process is started.

In this way, by configuring the management process to be executed by the CALLI instruction, the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control by one instruction (“CALLI”). , The interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited. Then, the program corresponding to the management process can be started. Therefore, the instruction for saving the information of the flag register of the main MPU 82 to the stack area 212 for specific control and the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) are prohibited. The number of instructions set in the program for executing the management process can be reduced as compared with the case where the instruction for executing the management process and the instruction for starting the management process program are provided separately. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program can be reduced.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a management process. The processes of steps S7901 to S7902 in the management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 by a load instruction (step S7901). The stack pointer is an area in which the address information for specifying the storage area to which the information to be written by the push instruction is to be written by the main MPU 82 in the stack areas 212 and 214 is set. Each time a push instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is the write target in the previous order. It is updated with the information of the address of the storage area. Further, when the stack area 214 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, and each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 214 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S6801, the information of the last address in the stack area 214 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information in the WA register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7902). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information of the BC register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the BC buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S7903). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S7904). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the information of the HL register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the HL buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S7905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the information of the IX register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IX buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S7906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information of the IY register of the main MPU 82 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the load instruction (step S7907).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), and timer update of non-specific control, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. It is a register used in the process (step S7910), the fraud detection execution process (step S7911), the information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912), and the check process (step S7913). Information set in such registers is information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality. By saving the information in the work area 213 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913), the non-specific control starts the information of these registers used in the specific control. It is possible to evacuate to the front. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the work area 213 for the non-specific control is returned to these registers to return the state of these registers. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 213 for non-specific control, information clear processing (step S7908), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, and test firing. WA to be used in test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing (step S7913). By selectively saving the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register information to the work area 213 for non-specific control, the register information is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control. It is possible to reduce the capacity to be secured for this purpose. Therefore, information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing. It is possible to save the register information as described above while securing a large capacity of the work area 213 for non-specific control that can be used in (step S7913).

As a matter of course, among various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main MPU 82, registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register correspond to non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process to be performed is stored and retained until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

After executing the processes of steps S7902 to S7907, information clear process (step S7908), test firing test process (step S7909), non-specific control timer update process (step S7910), fraud detection execution process (step S7911), The information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913) are executed. Information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step). When executing S7913), information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), and fraud detection execution processing set in the program for non-specific control are executed. (Step S7911), the program of the subroutine corresponding to the information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913) is executed, but the information clear process (step S7908) is executed when the program of the subroutine is executed. , Test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and management after execution of check processing (step S7913). Information for specifying the return address of the processing is written in the stack area 214 for non-specific control by a push instruction. Then, information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912), and check processing. When (step S7913) is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

The processing content of the information clearing process (step S7908) is the same as the information clearing process (FIG. 94) executed in step S5808 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the test firing test process (step S7909) is the same as the test firing test process executed in step S5809 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the non-specific control timer update process (step S7910) is the same as the non-specific control timer update process executed in step S5810 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is the same as the fraud detection execution process (FIG. 95) executed in step S5811 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 93) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the information abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) is the same as the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) executed in step S6808 of the second management process (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment. The processing content of the check processing (step S7913) is the same as the check processing (FIG. 108) executed in step S6809 of the second management processing (FIG. 107) in the thirteenth embodiment.

Information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), information abnormality monitoring processing (step S7912) and check processing (step). After executing S7913), Y (r + d) is set as "LD SP, Y (r + d)" to the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 as a fixed address when returning to the specific control after the end of the management process. ) Is set (step S7914). The address of Y (r + d) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 212 for specific control.

Immediately before the management process is called in step S7719 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the amount of information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control is always constant, and accordingly, the main side at that timing. The information of the stack pointer of the MPU 82 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, examples of the information stored in the stack area 212 for specific control include information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 81) after the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) is completed. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y (r + d). Therefore, information information clear processing (step S7908), test firing test processing (step S7909), non-specific control timer update processing (step S7910), fraud detection execution processing (step S7911), and information, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. When the abnormality monitoring process (step S7912) and the check process (step S7913) are completed and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, Y (r + d), which is certain information, is set in the stack pointer of the main MPU 82. By doing so, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main MPU 82 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 84 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure the area for evacuation in the main RAM 84.

After that, as "LD WA, (_WABUF)", the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7915). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7916). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7917). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7918). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7919). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 213 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main MPU 82 by the load instruction (step S7920). By executing the processes of steps S7915 to S7920, the processes corresponding to the non-specific control of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main MPU 82 are started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the operation.

After executing the processes of steps S7915 to S7920, the process returns to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) included in the specific control process by the RETI instruction. By executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process is returned to the flag register of the main MPU 82, and the first timer interrupt process (1st timer interrupt process). The state in which the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited is switched to the enabled state. As a result, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is restored to the information for executing the specific control, and the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing can be newly executed.

Due to the configuration for executing the RETI instruction, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process by one instruction (“RETI”) is stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82. It is possible to switch from the state in which the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is permitted. Therefore, an instruction for returning the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 212 for specific control before the execution of the management process to the flag register of the main MPU 82, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and Compared to the case where an instruction for switching from the state in which the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 114) is prohibited to the state in which the generation is permitted is provided separately, the instruction set in the non-specific control processing program You can reduce the number. As a result, the storage capacity in the main ROM 83 for storing the program for the non-specific control process can be reduced.

Here, the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers when the non-specific control process is executed is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the specific control process is restarted. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control.

Further, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82 when the non-specific control process is executed is when the non-specific control process is restarted after returning to the specific control process. Information that is not used. That is, the information required for a plurality of processing times of the non-specific control processing executed with the specific control processing in between is stored in the work area 213 for the non-specific control or the stack area 214 for the non-specific control. It is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main MPU 82. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register of the main MPU 82 and various registers is not saved in the main RAM 84 when the non-specific control process is executed, a problem arises in executing the non-specific control process. do not have.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-specific control processes are not distributed and set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), but are collectively set as one process. As a result, the process for saving the information of various registers of the main MPU 82 to the main RAM 84 when the situation where the specific control process is executed changes to the situation where the non-specific control process is executed, and the non-specific control The process of returning the information saved in the main RAM 84 to the various registers of the main MPU 82 when the process of the above is completed and the process returns to the specific control process is one process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). There is no need to repeat the execution at each time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120).

The non-specific control processes collectively set as one process in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) are set in the final process order in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the non-specific control process in each process of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) based on the process contents of all the specific control processes in the process. Further, since the non-specific control process is set in the final processing order in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) after the non-specific control process is completed. There is no need to store the information of the return address in the main RAM 84.

Since the non-specific control processing is collectively set in the final processing order in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120). The fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not executed before the execution of the special figure special electric control process (step S7712), the normal figure normal electric control process (step S7713), and the payout output process (step S7716). In this case, the processing result of the ball entry detection processing (step S7708) in the predetermined processing time of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) is the special figure special electric control processing (step S7712) in the predetermined processing time. If it is used as it is in the timer control process (step S7713) and the payout output process (step S7716), it is a process for advancing the game or a game for the player with the winning result of the game ball caused by an abnormality or fraud as an opportunity. There is a risk that the process for paying out the ball will be executed. The processing configuration for preventing such inconvenience will be described below.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. The processes of steps S8001 to S8022 in the pending information acquisition process are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

In step S8001, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first storage standby flag provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and in step S8008, the second is provided in the work area 211 for specific control. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the storage standby flag. The first storage standby flag is a situation in which the storage of the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 111 is waiting after it is specified that the game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a. It is a flag for specifying the existence by the main MPU 82. The second storage standby flag is in a situation where the storage of the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 112 is waiting after it is specified that the game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a. It is a flag for specifying the existence by the main MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in the first storage standby flag (step S8001: NO) and "1" is not set in the second storage standby flag (step S8008: NO), for specific control. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 (step S8015). When "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag (step S8015: YES), the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 111 is less than the upper limit stored number. As a condition (step S8016: YES), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8017). .. In the first standby area, the first hold information acquired when the game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a is abnormally detected by the first operation port detection sensor 235a. This is an area for waiting without being stored in the first special figure holding area 111 until it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that the cause is not caused. After that, "1" is set in the first storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8018).

When "1" is set in the first storage standby flag (step S8001: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Determination (step S8002). That is, the detection of the game ball by the first operating port detection sensor 235a, which triggered the setting of "1" in the first storage standby flag, is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the previous processing round. It is determined in the execution process (step S7911) whether or not the cause is identified as an abnormality.

When "1" is not set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p (step S8002: NO), the game in the first operation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of "1" in the first storage standby flag. It means that the detection of the sphere was not identified as being caused by the abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the value of the first special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S8003). The display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure holding display unit 37c corresponds to the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 111. After that, the first hold information waiting in the first wait area is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure hold area 111, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of hold storages added by 1 in step S8003 ( Step S8004). After that, the first hold command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8005). By storing the first hold command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the first hold display area 42a of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the first hold information.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p (step S8002: YES), the first operation port detection sensor 235a that triggered the setting of "1" in the first storage standby flag. It means that the detection of the game ball in the above is specified to be caused by an abnormality in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the first hold information waiting in the first wait area is deleted (step S8006). Further, when the process of step S8005 or the process of step S8006 is executed, the first storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8007).

When a negative determination is made in step S8015, a negative determination is made in step S8016, or the process of step S8018 is executed, "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control. It is determined whether or not it is (step S8019). When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag (step S8019: YES), the number of the second reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 112 is less than the upper limit stored number. As a condition (step S8020: YES), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the type random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second standby area provided in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8021). .. In the second standby area, the second hold information acquired when the game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a is abnormally detected by the second operation port detection sensor 236a. This is an area for waiting without being stored in the second special figure reservation area 112 until it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) that it is not caused by fraud. After that, "1" is set in the second storage standby flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8022).

When "1" is set in the second storage standby flag (step S8008: YES), whether or not "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Determination (step S8009). That is, the detection of the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a, which triggered the setting of "1" in the second storage standby flag, is the fraud detection in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the previous processing round. It is determined in the execution process (step S7911) whether or not the cause is identified as an abnormality.

When "1" is not set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q (step S8009: NO), the game in the second operation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the setting of "1" in the second storage standby flag. It means that the detection of the sphere was not identified as an abnormality or the cause of the fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the value of the second special figure hold counter is added by 1 (step S8010). The display content of the second special figure hold display unit 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure holding display unit 37d corresponds to the number of the second holding information stored in the second special drawing holding area 112. After that, the second hold information waiting in the second wait area is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure hold area 112, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of hold storages added by 1 in step S8010 (. Step S8011). After that, the second hold command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b of the register area 223 (step S8012). By storing the second hold command in the command transmission buffer 223b, the second hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 93 by the operation of the command transmission circuit 224. As a result, the display side MPU 103 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display content of the second hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 41 becomes the display content corresponding to the increase in the second hold information.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q (step S8009: YES), the second operation port detection sensor 236a that triggered the setting of "1" in the second storage standby flag. It means that the detection of the game ball in the above is identified as an abnormality or the cause of the fraud in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the previous process. In this case, the second hold information waiting in the second wait area is deleted (step S8013). Further, when the process of step S8012 or the process of step S8013 is executed, the second storage standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S8014).

With the above configuration, the game ball is used by the first actuating port detection sensor 235a or the second actuating port detection sensor 236a in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in the predetermined processing times of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). Even if it is specified that is detected, in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined process times, the hold information corresponding to the hold information is temporarily on standby. Wait in the area. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined process times, the detection of the game ball that triggered the acquisition of the hold information was caused by an abnormality or fraud. When it is specified that the information is not the same, it waits in the standby area in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the next process cycle for the predetermined process cycle. The reserved information is stored in the corresponding special figure holding areas 111 and 112. As a result, the non-specific control processing including the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) is integrated in the final processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), resulting in the first timer interrupt processing. Even if the configuration is such that the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not set between the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 123) in (FIG. 120), it is abnormal or fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the hold information from being stored in the special figure hold areas 111 and 112 triggered by the detection of the game ball caused by the above.

As described above, the execution of the predetermined process triggered by the detection of the game ball is temporarily waited, and then the detection of the game ball in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) is not caused by an abnormality or fraud. When it is specified, the configuration for executing the standby predetermined process is the hold on the normal map side in the normal map normal electric control process (step S7713) triggered by the detection of the game ball by the gate detection sensor 238a. It is also used in the process for acquiring information.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a prize ball counter setting process executed in step S7801 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121). The processes of steps S8101 to S8120 in the setting process of the prize ball counter are executed by the specific control processing unit 221 of the main MPU 82 by using the specific control program and the specific control data.

When "1" is set in the first prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8101: YES), "1" is set in the first general prize abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is not set (step S8102: NO), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8103). When it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process that the detection of the game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a is caused by an abnormality. The first general prize abnormality flag 213l is set to "1". When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and 10 pieces are output. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out. The first prize confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

When "1" is set in the second prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8104: YES), "1" is set in the second general prize abnormality flag 213 m in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is not set (step S8105: NO), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8106). When it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process that the detection of the game ball by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a is caused by an abnormality. The second general prize abnormality flag 213m is set to "1". When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and 10 pieces are output. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out. The second prize confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

When "1" is set in the third prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8107: YES), "1" is set in the third general prize abnormality flag 213n in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is not set (step S8108: NO), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8109). When it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process that the detection of the game ball by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a is caused by an abnormality. Is set to "1" in the third general prize abnormality flag 213n. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120), and 10 pieces are output. When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out. The third prize confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

When "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8110: YES), "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control. (Step S8111: NO), the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1 (step S8112), and the winning counter in the work area 211 for specific control is added. When the value is 1 or more, this value is subtracted by 1 (step S8113). When it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality or fraud. "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 and 15 pieces are output in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 15 game balls are paid out. Further, when the value of the winning counter becomes "0", the processing for closing the special electric winning device 32 which is in the open state in the special electric special electric control processing (step S7712) is executed. The special electric prize confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

When "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8114: YES), "1" is set in the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is not set (step S8115: NO), and the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8116). When it is specified in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process that the detection of the game ball by the first actuating port detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality. The first operation winning abnormality flag 213p is set to "1". When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 and one piece is output in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. The first operation prize confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8117: YES), "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control. Is not set (step S8118: NO), the value of the one prize ball counter in the work area 211 for specific control is added by 1 (step S8119), and the work area 211 for specific control is added. When the value of the Fuden winning counter in is 1 or more, this value is subtracted by 1 (step S8120). In the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) in the previous process, it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the second actuating port detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud. In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 and one piece is output in the payout output process of step S7716 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). When the prize ball command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out. Further, when the value of the Fuden winning counter becomes "0", a process for closing the second operating port 34, which is in the open state in the Fuden control process (step S7713), is executed. .. The second operation winning confirmation flag is cleared to "0" in step S7802 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) after the setting process (FIG. 124) of the prize ball counter this time is completed.

With the above configuration, it was specified that the game ball was detected by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a in the ball entry detection process (step S7708) in the predetermined process times of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). However, in the payout output process (step S7716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined process times, the process for executing the corresponding payout of the game ball is not executed, and the predetermined process is performed. In the special figure special electric control processing (step S7712) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120) of the processing time, the processing for advancing the round game is not executed, and the first timer interrupt processing (step S7712) of the predetermined processing time is not executed. In the timer control process (step S7713) in FIG. 120), the process for advancing the timer open state is not executed. Then, in the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) of the predetermined process times, the detection of the game ball by the various detection sensors 231a to 236a is not caused by an abnormality or fraud. When it is specified, a process for executing the payout of the game ball, a process for advancing the round game, and a process for advancing the open state of the timer are executed. As a result, the non-specific control processing including the fraud detection execution processing (step S7911) is integrated in the final processing order of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 120), resulting in the first timer interrupt processing. Fraud detection execution process between the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and the payout output process (step S7716), the special figure special electric control process (step S7712), and the normal figure normal electric control process (step S7713) in (FIG. 120). Even if (step S7911) is not set, the process for executing the payout of the game ball triggered by the detection of the game ball caused by an abnormality or fraud, the process for advancing the round game, and the timer. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the open state from being executed.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a normal ball entry management process executed in the check process in step S7913 of the management process (FIG. 122). The processes of steps S8201 to S8221 in the normal ball entry management process are executed by the non-specific control processing unit 222 of the main MPU 82 using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control. ..

When "1" is set in the first prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8201: YES), the first general prize abnormality flag 213l in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set. When "1" is not set (step S8202: NO), it means that a prize is generated in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball is normally detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 231a. do. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8203). Further, when "1" is set in the second prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8204: YES), the second general prize abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set. When "1" is not set in 213m (step S8205: NO), a prize is generated in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball is normally detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 232a. Means. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8206). Further, when "1" is set in the third prize confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8207: YES), the third general prize abnormality flag in the work area 213 for non-specific control is set. When "1" is not set in 213n (step S8208: NO), a prize is generated in the general winning opening 31 and one game ball is normally detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 233a. Means. In this case, the value of the general winning counter 251a in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8209).

When "1" is set in the special electric winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8210: YES), "1" is set in the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o in the work area 213 for non-specific control. If is not set (step S8211: NO), it means that a prize has been generated in the special electric winning device 32 and one game ball has been normally detected by the special electric detection sensor 234a. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 251b in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8212).

When "1" is set in the first operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8213: YES), the first operation winning abnormality flag 213p in the work area 213 for non-specific control When "1" is not set in (step S8214: NO), a prize is generated in the first operating port 33, and one game ball is normally detected by the first operating port detection sensor 235a. Means. In this case, the value of the first operation counter 251c in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8215).

When "1" is set in the second operation winning confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8216: YES), the second operation winning abnormality flag 213q in the work area 213 for non-specific control When "1" is not set in (step S8217: NO), a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, and one game ball is normally detected by the second operating port detection sensor 236a. Means. In this case, the value of the second operation counter 251d in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8218).

When "1" is set in the out confirmation flag in the work area 211 for specific control (step S8219: YES), "1" is set in the out abnormality flag 213r in the work area 213 for non-specific control. If not (step S8220: NO), it means that a game ball has entered the out port 24a and one game ball has been normally detected by the out port detection sensor 237a. In this case, the value of the out counter 251e in the normal counter area 251 of the work area 213 for non-specific control is added by 1 (step S8221).

The normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is after the ball entry detection process (step S7708) and after the fraud detection execution process (step S7911) at each processing time in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120). Will be executed. Therefore, after it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball by the various detection sensors 231a to 237a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, a normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125) is executed. Then, in the normal ball entry monitoring process (FIG. 125), when the abnormality flags 213l to 213r are set to "1", even if the corresponding confirmation flag is set to "1", the "1" is set. Do not add "1" to the counters 251a to 251e corresponding to the confirmation flag in which is set. This makes it possible to accurately manage the game history.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of each of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, the combination of the first embodiment, the seventh embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment). Combination of the embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the combination of the first embodiment, the eighth embodiment and the thirteenth embodiment, the combination of the sixth embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment), each of the above. The configurations of the embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following different configurations may be applied individually or in combination thereof.

(1) The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is not limited to the configuration in which the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 is executed after the setting process for the time saving result is executed in the specific finalizing process in each of the above embodiments. May be configured in which the setting process for the time saving result is executed after the execution of. In this case, if the time reduction result is selected in the hit / fail determination process in the game times in which the time reduction state can be set and the ceiling time reduction occurs in which the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the ceiling time reduction is performed. The setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result has priority over the setting of the time saving state triggered by the time saving result. Therefore, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is set in the number of times equal to or greater than the time reduction continuation number set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result or in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result. It is preferable that the number of times is larger than the number of times of shortening the time.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first time saving result and the second time saving result are set as the time saving result, but only one of the first time saving result and the second time saving result is set. May be good. Further, a configuration in which three or more types of time saving results are set may be used. In this case, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result is set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction regardless of the type of time reduction result as in each of the above embodiments. The number of continuations may be greater than or equal to the number of continuations, and at least for some of the time reduction results, the number of times of shortening of time may be less than the number of times of continuation of time reduction set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reduction continuations set in the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result may be less than or equal to the time reduction continuation number set in the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. The number of times may be less than the number of times of continuation of time reduction set in the time reduction state triggered by.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result, the first high frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high frequency support mode. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the jackpot result or the time-saving result, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the second high-frequency support mode may be set instead of the second high-frequency support mode in the time-saving state triggered by the ceiling time reduction. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the jackpot result or the ceiling time reduction, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the time-saving result.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the first high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by one of the first time-saving result and the second time-saving result, and the second high-frequency support mode is set in the time-saving state triggered by the other. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to set the high frequency support mode according to the type of time saving result.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of winning the electric service opening is different between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode in the judgment of whether or not the normal figure is correct. However, in addition to or in place of the probability, other embodiments may be different. For example, one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may have a configuration in which the duration of the variable display times on the normal map display unit 38a is longer than that of the other, and the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be configured. One of the high-frequency support modes may have a configuration in which the average period of the duration of the variable display times on the normal map display unit 38a is longer than that of the other, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be used. The second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 may be opened more frequently than the other in the open state, and one of the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode may be open more than the other. However, the total period during which the second operating port 34 or the special winning device 151 is open in the open state may be long. In this case, the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode in any of the execution modes, and the second high-frequency support mode may be used in any of the execution modes. May be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode, and for some execution modes, the first high-frequency support mode is more advantageous than the second high-frequency support mode, and the remaining execution modes. The second high-frequency support mode may be configured to be more advantageous than the first high-frequency support mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode is generated regardless of whether the time saving result occurs or the ceiling time saving occurs, but the configuration is limited to this. For example, when a time reduction result occurs, the time reduction state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time reduction occurs, the time reduction state of the second high frequency support mode occurs. Also, when a time reduction result occurs, the time reduction state of the second high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when the ceiling time reduction occurs, the time reduction state of the first high frequency support mode occurs. Often, when a time saving result occurs, the time saving state of the first high frequency support mode occurs, whereas when a ceiling time saving occurs, a high probability state may occur, and the time saving result occurs. In this case, the time saving state of the second high frequency support mode may occur, whereas the high probability state may occur when the ceiling time saving occurs.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is obtained in the pass / fail determination process and the time saving state occurs, it is notified that the time saving state is generated by the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop result corresponding to the time saving result is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, and then the game round is stopped. Until the end timing, the notification may be executed so that the player can recognize that the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is started. However, in the case of this configuration, since it is necessary to specify whether or not a time saving state is generated triggered by the time saving result at the stage of determining the effect for the game round, the setting process for the time saving result is the start of the game round. Need to be executed from time to time.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a time reduction state occurs triggered by a ceiling time reduction, the notification that the time reduction state occurs is not executed depending on the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop result corresponding to the ceiling time reduction is stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 in the middle of the variable display period of the game round, and then the game round is stopped. Until the end timing, the notification may be executed so that the player can recognize that the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is started. However, in the case of this configuration, since it is necessary to specify whether or not a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction occurs at the stage of determining the effect for the game round, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 starts the game round. Need to be executed from time to time.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is obtained in the hit / fail determination process and the game round in which the hit / fail determination process is executed is completed, the start of a new game round in the time saving state triggered by the time saving result is immediately started. Although the configuration is permissible, the configuration is not limited to this, and if a time saving state occurs due to a time saving result, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the game round that resulted in the time saving result is completed. ) May be configured to prevent the start of a new game round. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the notification for making the player recognizable that the time saving state is started triggered by the time saving result.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when a game round in which a ceiling time reduction occurs is completed, a new game round in a time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is allowed to start immediately, but the configuration is limited to this. If the time reduction state occurs due to the ceiling time reduction, a new game rotation will be started for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) when the game rotation with the ceiling time reduction is completed. It may be configured to be blocked. In this case, using the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification for the player to be able to recognize that the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction is started.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, when the game round is completed, the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134, the subtraction process of the variation selection state counter 132, the setting process for the time saving result, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are executed. However, these processes may be executed after the pass / fail determination process is executed and before the variable display period specifying process is executed. In this case, since it is possible to specify whether or not the ceiling time reduction occurs before executing the variation display period specifying process, the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction is dealt with as a result of stopping the special figure display units 37a and 37b. The stop result may be selected, or the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction may be selected as the stop result in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the setting process for the time saving result are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 is not limited to this. The subtraction process may be executed at the start of the game round, and the setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the end of the game round.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, both the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 is not limited to this. The subtraction process may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving state is configured to end when the game times of a predetermined time saving continuation number are exhausted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ending lottery process executed in the time saving state is not limited to this. When the result of the end lottery is reached, the time saving state may be terminated. In this case, if the end lottery process is executed and the end lottery result is obtained, the process of ending the time saving state is executed before the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. May be good. As a result, it becomes possible to start a new time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the ceiling time saving in the game times when the time saving state is completed.

(17) In the first embodiment and the like, both the setting process for the time saving result and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. The setting process for the time saving result may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, both the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 are executed at the end of the game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. The subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 may be executed at the start of the game round, and the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 may be executed at the end of the game round.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is not subtracted even if the game is executed in the high probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the high probability state. When the game times are executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 may be subtracted. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter 131 after subtraction of 1 may become "0" in the high probability state, but in this case, it is preferable to invalidate the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and continue the high probability state.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is subtracted when the game is executed even in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state is not limited to this. Even if the game times are executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 may not be subtracted.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, a numerical value such as a fixed number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when a predetermined opportunity occurs, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 is decremented by 1 when the game round is executed. The configuration is such that a time saving state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", but the configuration is not limited to this, and the ceiling counter 131 becomes "" when a predetermined opportunity occurs. When "0" is cleared and the game round is executed, the value of the ceiling counter 131 is added by 1, and the value of the ceiling counter 131 after the addition is 1 and becomes a value corresponding to the occurrence trigger such as the fixed number of ceilings. It may be configured to generate a time saving state.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the hit random number counter C1 is used to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result in the hit random number counter C1. May be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result by another determination process using another random number counter. In this case, the third embodiment may be configured to determine whether or not to generate a time saving result in the fall determination process using the fall random number counter C5.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the type random number counter C2 is used to determine the type of the time saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number counter different from the type random number counter C2 is used. It may be configured to determine the type of time saving result. Further, instead of deciding whether or not to generate a time saving result in the winning / failing determination process using the hit random number counter C1, the big hit result, the first time saving result, and the first time saving result in the winning / failing determination process using the winning random number counter C1. It may be configured to determine whether to generate a two-time reduction result or an out-of-time result.

(24) In the first embodiment, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 84, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the same fixed ceiling number of times as when the open / close execution mode occurs. The present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed number of times when the opening / closing execution mode occurs may be set. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the set value update process is executed when the information abnormality of the main RAM 84 occurs, the ceiling counter 131 corresponds to the same fixed number of ceilings as when the open / close execution mode occurs. Although the configuration is such that information is set, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the number of times less than the number of fixed ceilings when the open / close execution mode occurs is set.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, when an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a time reduction state triggered by a ceiling time reduction occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the ceiling counter 131 is set to the ceiling counter 131. The configuration is such that the information on the number of ceilings is set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and an information abnormality occurs in a configuration in which a high probability state occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0". An information error may occur in a configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode occurs when the value of the ceiling counter 131 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", which may be a configuration in which information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 when it occurs. In this case, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings.

(26) In the first embodiment or the like, when the set value update process is executed, the information on the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131, but when the set value update process is executed, the ceiling is used. The counter 131 may be configured to set information on the number of ceilings. This makes it possible to set the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131 when the set value is changed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, when the RAM clear processing is executed, the information on the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131. However, when the RAM clear processing is executed, the number of ceilings is not set in the ceiling counter 131. It may be configured to set the information of. This makes it possible to set the ceiling count information in the ceiling counter 131 when the main RAM 84 is cleared.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the operating power supply is started in the situation where the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The ceiling counter 131 is configured to set information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation, information corresponding to a larger number of times than the fixed number of ceilings may be set. In the situation, the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed number of ceilings may be set. Further, when the operation power supply is started in the situation where the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RAM clear operation are not performed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the ceiling is fixed to the ceiling counter 131. The configuration may be such that the information corresponding to the number of times is set, the information corresponding to the number of times larger than the fixed ceiling number may be set, or the information corresponding to the number of times less than the fixed ceiling number may be set. .. Further, when the supply of operating power is started in the situation where the dedicated operation button is operated, the information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131, and the number of times may be larger than the number of fixed ceilings. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is set, or the configuration may be such that the information corresponding to the number of times less than the number of fixed ceilings is set.

(29) In the first embodiment or the like, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the ceiling counter 131 is set with the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the process during the determination of the special figure, but the configuration is limited to this. It may be configured to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing in the middle of the opening period, and the ceiling counter 131 may be set at the timing immediately before the first round game in the open / close execution mode is started. The configuration may be such that information corresponding to the number of ceilings is set. Even in these cases, it is possible to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 when the open / close execution mode is started.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, when it is confirmed that the ending period has elapsed in the special electric power ending process, the ceiling counter 131 is configured to set the information corresponding to the number of ceilings, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the information corresponding to the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing when the last round game in the open / close execution mode is completed, and the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131 immediately before the ending period starts. The information corresponding to the number of times of ceiling may be set in the ceiling counter 131 at the timing in the middle of the ending period.

(31) In the sixth embodiment, when it is specified in the power failure monitoring process that the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the low frequency big hit result or the first small hit result, the number of times is larger than the fixed ceiling number. The configuration is such that the information corresponding to a certain number of special ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the above situation, the information corresponding to the fixed number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131. Often, in the above situation, the ceiling counter 131 may be configured to set information corresponding to a number of times less than the fixed number of ceilings. Further, in the power failure monitoring process, even if the trigger is not the low frequency big hit result or the first small hit result in the open / close execution mode, the information corresponding to the number of ceilings may be set in the ceiling counter 131.

(32) In the first embodiment or the like, when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach high frequency state is set and the reach display is likely to occur. The configuration is not limited, and when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", an effect indicating that the ceiling time reduction is approaching may be performed. By selecting a variable display period different from the case where the reach display occurs and the case where the result is completely off, the variable display period of the game times in this state is selected from the information of the variable display period. Can identify that it is in a state where an effect indicating that the ceiling time is approaching is to be executed.

(33) In the first embodiment or the like, when the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 triggered by the open / close execution mode, the information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is set in the variable selection state counter 132, but the operation is performed. When the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main processing when the power supply is started, the information corresponding to the reference number of period switching is not set in the variable selection state counter 132. When the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131 in the main processing when the supply of operating power is started, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number is set in the variable selection state counter 132. May be configured to set. That is, when the information on the number of ceilings is set in the ceiling counter 131, the information corresponding to the period switching reference number may be set in the variable selection state counter 132 at all times. In this case, if there are a plurality of types of ceilings set in the ceiling counter 131, the information corresponding to the number of times less than the predetermined number of times is set in the variable selection state counter 132. Regardless of which number of ceilings is set, it is possible to achieve a high reach frequency state in the game times before the predetermined number of times the ceiling time is shortened.

(34) In the first embodiment or the like, even if the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach high frequency state does not occur when the time is shortened. However, even if the time is shortened, the reach frequency may be high. When the reach frequency is high in the short time state, the probability that the reach display will occur in the game times that result in the loss is high, and the variable display period for a long period is selected in the game times that the jackpot result or the loss reach display occurs. Although the probability of being played is high, the shortest period on the special map side will be selected in the game times of the off result where the reach display does not occur.

(35) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 becomes the reference number of times, the jackpot result does not occur in any of the game states, and the reach display does not occur in the game times. The configuration is such that the control is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and even if the reference number is reached in the high probability state, the control may not be performed, and the reference number is reached in the time saving state. Even if the control is not performed, the control may not be performed.

(36) In the seventh embodiment, when the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 84 becomes the reference number, the control that the reach display does not occur in the game times where the jackpot result does not occur only in that game time is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reach display occurs in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur from the game times that became the reference number to the game times that are a specific number of times (for example, 3 times). It may be configured so that the control that does not perform is executed.

(37) In the seventh embodiment, the control that the reach display does not occur is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the reference number. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reach display is displayed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode or the time saving state ends becomes the reference number. The control that does not occur may be executed, and the control that the reach display does not occur is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result does not occur every time the number of game times executed after the time saving state ends becomes the reference number. It may be configured as such.

(38) In the eighth embodiment, the variable selection state counter 132 corresponds to the predetermined number of switching reference times regardless of whether the time saving state triggered by the time saving result or the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving is completed. Information is set, and when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter 132 after 1 subtraction becomes "0", the reach high frequency state is set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the fluctuation selection state counter 132 is not limited to this. The process of setting the information corresponding to the predetermined number of switching reference times is executed when the time saving state triggered by the time saving result ends, but is not executed when the time saving state triggered by the ceiling time saving ends. However, it may be executed when the time reduction state triggered by the ceiling time reduction ends, but not executed when the time reduction state triggered by the time reduction result ends.

(39) In the ninth embodiment, when the time reduction result or the ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state, the larger number of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state and the time reduction continuation number corresponding to the new time reduction state. The number of times is set to be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time saving state, but it is not limited to this, and is smaller than the remaining number of continuations in the current time saving state and the number of time saving continuations corresponding to the new time saving state. The number of times on the side may be the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state, and the number of time reduction continuations corresponding to the new time reduction state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state regardless of the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state. The configuration may be the number of continuations, and the number of results obtained by adding the number of continuations corresponding to the new time reduction to the remaining number of continuations in the current time reduction state is the remaining number of continuations in the subsequent time reduction state. May be good.

(40) In the ninth embodiment, when a time reduction result or a ceiling time reduction occurs in the time reduction state in the first high frequency support mode, the remaining number of continuations of the time reduction state is the first time reduction continuation number or the second time reduction continuation number. Although it can be set to, the configuration is such that the time saving state, which is the first high frequency support mode, continues, but it is not limited to this, and the remaining number of times of the time saving state is the first time saving continuation number or the second time saving continuation. It may be configured to be set to the number of times and to be in the time saving state which is the second high frequency support mode.

(41) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process in the high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is used in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. The combination of the above is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination of the out-of-reach symbols may be stopped and displayed. Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the time saving result is invalid from the stop results in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process in the high probability state or the like and the time saving result is invalidated, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is used in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. However, the combination is not limited to this, and even if the time saving result is invalidated, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped as in the case where the time saving result is not invalidated. As a result, the combination of the first time reduction occurrence symbol or the combination of the second time reduction occurrence symbol may be stopped and displayed.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, when the time saving result is selected in the hit / fail determination process and the time saving result is invalidated in a high probability state or the like, the case where the time saving result is the first time saving result and the case where the time saving result is the second time saving result. However, the display content of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 is different, but the present invention is not limited to this. In any case of the result, the display contents of the state suggestion area 43 may be the same.

(44) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the hold that triggered the start of the game round until the game round that triggered the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction to become "0" is completed. The configuration is such that the time saving state does not end even if the game round triggered by the hold information on the side different from the information ends, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction in the time saving state If the specific game times started before the predetermined game times that triggered the value to be "0" are continued, the specific game times will be performed even if the predetermined game times are completed. The configuration may be such that the time saving state is continued until the end. When the predetermined game time is a game time triggered by the second hold information and the specific game time is a game time triggered by the first hold information, the tenth embodiment or the twelfth embodiment is the first. 1 When a long period on the special map side is selected as the variable display period of the game times triggered by the hold information, even after the predetermined game times triggered by the second hold information are completed, the above By the time a specific game round is completed, it is possible to repeatedly digest the game round triggered by the second hold information.

(45) In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, when the fluctuation display period of the game times is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuations in the game times triggered by the second hold information in the time-saving state. Even if the result of the hit / fail determination process of the game round is a time-saving result, the variable display period is determined in the same manner as the game round of the off-result without the reach display, but the configuration is limited to this. In the case where the variation display period of the game round is determined by referring to the table group for short-term fluctuation in the game round triggered by the second hold information, the result of the success / failure determination process of the game round is shortened. If it is a result, the variable display period may be determined in a manner different from that of the game times of the off-result in which the reach display does not occur. As a result, when the time saving result occurs in the time saving state, the mode of determining the variation display period of the game times can be set to the corresponding mode.

(46) In the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments described above, as a result of the hit / fail determination process of the main MPU 82, a small hit result exists in addition to the big hit result, the time saving result and the missed result. May be. The small hit result is a hit / fail result that does not trigger a shift to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, although it serves as a trigger for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once or twice in a short period (for example, 1 second), so that the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is used. The number of balls to be entered is about 1 to 3. Even if the open / close execution mode is generated triggered by the small hit result, it is preferable not to set the number of ceilings in the ceiling counter 131 and the number of times in the variable selection state counter 132. As a result, it is possible to generate a ceiling time reduction and a high reach frequency state based on the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result.

(47) When the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case where the time reduction result is obtained in each of the above embodiments, the second high frequency support mode is set or not set with the time reduction result as a trigger. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the stop result of the state suggestion area 43 of the symbol display device 41 in the case of a time saving result is triggered by the time saving result, and the second high frequency support mode is set. The configuration may be the same depending on whether it is set or not. For example, when the first time reduction result is obtained, the blue color is stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set with the first time reduction result as a trigger, and the second time reduction is performed. When a result is obtained, the green color may be stopped and displayed in the state suggestion area 43 regardless of whether or not the second high frequency support mode is set triggered by the second time saving result.

(48) In the thirteenth embodiment, the unused areas of the main RAM 84 (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address. Although the protection setting is made for Y (t + 5)), the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y The protection setting may not be made for (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)). Even in this case, in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 118), an unused area (address Y) existing between the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control at the address of the main RAM 84 By configuring the clear process to be executed including (r + 3) to the address Y (r + 5)), it is possible to simplify the process configuration for specifying the address range to be executed of the clear process. Become.

(49) In the thirteenth embodiment, the storage area to be cleared in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119) is configured to be the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, the storage area to be cleared may be a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, there is an unused area (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) between the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84. Therefore, before executing the clear process, the protect release process is executed in the same manner as in step S7501 of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and the protect register 223c is cleared to "0" to release the protection. A series of addresses from the address included in the work area 213 for non-specific control to the address included in the stack area 214 for non-specific control, including the unused area (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)). Is specified to execute the clear process, and after the clear process is executed, the protect setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S7506 of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), and the protect register 223c is set to "1" for protection. May be configured to set again. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration when the clear processing is executed not only in the work area 213 for non-specific control but also in the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the information abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 119). Become.

(50) In the thirteenth embodiment, when the protection release process (step S7501) is executed in the RAM clear process (FIG. 118), the work area 211 for specific control and the specific control are used at the address of the main RAM 84. Unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) provided between the stack area 212 and the stack area 212 for specific control and the work area for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84. An unused area (address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5)) provided between 213, and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area 214 for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84. All of the unused areas (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) provided between and are released from protection, but the protection is not limited to this, and the target of clear processing is not limited to this. The unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) included in the address range is released from protection, but the other unused areas (address Y (s + 3) to address Y (address Y) The protection of s + 5) and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)) may not be released.

In this case, an unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) included in the address range targeted for clear processing and an unused area not included in the address range targeted for clear processing (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)). A protect register 223c is provided corresponding to each of the address Y (s + 3) to the address Y (s + 5) and the address Y (t + 3) to the address Y (t + 5)), and the protect setting process (step S4903) of the main process (FIG. 81) is provided. Then, by setting "1" in all of these protect registers 223c, all unused areas (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5), address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y Protect is set for (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)), and an unused area (address Y) included in the address range to be cleared in the protection release process (step S7501) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118). While clearing the protect register 223c corresponding to (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) to "0" to release the protection, an unused area (address Y (s + 3)) not included in the address range to be cleared is processed. ) -Address Y (s + 5), Address Y (t + 3) -Address Y (t + 5)) The protect register 223c may be configured so that the protection is not released by not clearing "0". Further, in the protect setting process (step S7506) of the RAM clear process (FIG. 118) after the clear process is completed, the protect register 223c corresponding to the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) is set to ". By setting "1", the protection is set again for the unused area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)). This makes it unnecessary to protect unused areas (address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5), address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) that are not included in the address range to be cleared. It is possible to prevent it from being released.

(51) In the thirteenth embodiment, in the RAM clearing process (FIG. 118), the clearing process for the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control is executed, but the work area 213 for non-specific control is executed. And the configuration is such that the clearing process for the stack area 214 for non-specific control is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the work area 211 for specific control and the stack area 212 for specific control, the non-specific control is not executed. The clear processing for the work area 213 for control may also be executed, or the clear processing for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control may also be executed. In the configuration in which the clearing process for the work area 213 for non-specific control is also executed, the unused stack area 212 for specific control and the work area 213 for non-specific control are provided at the address of the main RAM 84. Area (address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5)) is also included in a series of address ranges to be executed for the clear process. Further, in the configuration in which the clear processing for the work area 213 for non-specific control and the stack area 214 for non-specific control is also executed, the stack area 212 for specific control and the work for non-specific control are executed at the address of the main RAM 84. An unused area (address Y (s + 3) to address Y (s + 5)) provided between the area 213, and a work area 213 for non-specific control and a stack area for non-specific control at the address of the main RAM 84. An unused area (address Y (t + 3) to address Y (t + 5)) provided between the area and 214 is also included in a series of address ranges to be executed for the clear process.

(52) In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting display device 205 is provided, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display device 205 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the setting value update process (FIG. 83). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting display device 205 may not be provided, and the setting value may be displayed by the symbol display device 41. Further, the display of the set value may be performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83) are for the first to fourth notifications. The display devices 201 to 204 may be configured such that the display of the set value and the display of the base value are alternately displayed at predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). As a result, even if the set values are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on which the base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the setting confirmation work or the setting change work while checking both the base value and the set value.

Further, in the configuration in which the set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed. The set value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83) is The display of the set value may be terminated when the configuration is completed. In this case, in the configuration in which the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83) are started, the set value is displayed when the display of the set value is completed. The display of the base value of the type to be displayed on the 1st to 4th notification display devices 201 to 204 is restarted on the 1st to 4th notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the display of is started. It may be configured to be. Further, at the time of this resumption, the display of the base value of the resumed type may be performed over the display continuation period regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the resumption is stopped last time.

Further, in the configuration in which the display of the base value is started before the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) and the set value update process (FIG. 83) are started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. When the set value is displayed, the check display may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before or after the display. In this case, when the display of the set value is finished and the display of the base value is restarted, or when the display for checking is finished and the display of the base value is restarted, the check display or the display of the set value is immediately before the start. The display of the base value of the type to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be restarted on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, at the time of this resumption, the display of the base value of the resumed type may be performed over the display continuation period regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the resumption is stopped last time.

(53) In the thirteenth embodiment, the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the base value is replaced or added. The configuration may be such that at least one of the following parameters is calculated and displayed. The number of game balls entering the out port 24a is "K1", the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is "K2", and the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is "K3" is used, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is "K4", and the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is "K5".
・ First parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Second parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K3 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Third parameter: Total number of game balls ejected into the first operating port 33 K4 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Fourth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fifth parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Sixth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 " ”) Ratio ・ Seventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out in all game states (K2 ד Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31 ”+ K3 ד Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 ” + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in all gaming states Ratio of (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

In the above configuration, for example, the first parameter is set as a notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first parameters having a plurality of different timings are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 to 4. In 204, the display may be sequentially switched and displayed every time a predetermined display continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. In this case, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). ) Or, in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the above-mentioned sequential switching display of the first parameter may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, when the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the situation where the sequential switching display of the first parameter is performed, the check display is completed after the check display is completed. The display of the first parameter of the type that was the display target immediately before the start of the check display may be restarted, or the measurement of the predetermined display continuation period may be newly started at the restart. ..

Further, for example, the first to seventh parameters are set as notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to seventh parameters are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 to 4. In 204, the display may be sequentially switched and displayed every time a predetermined display continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. In this case, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82) or the set value update process (FIG. 83) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 82 is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 82). ) Or, in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 83) is being executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to sequentially switch and display the first to seventh parameters. Further, when the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the situation where the sequential switching display of the first to seventh parameters is performed, after the check display is completed. May be configured to restart the display of the type of parameter that was the display target immediately before the start of the check display, or may be configured to newly start the measurement of the predetermined display continuation period at the time of restarting. ..

(54) In the thirteenth embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the main control device 71 mounted on the back surface of the gaming board 24, and the first to fourth are provided. In order to confirm the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205, the locked state of the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released, and the game machine main body 12 is rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10. Although the configuration is necessary, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the setting display device 205 may be used. The configuration may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, or both the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in a configuration in which at least one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the display device provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 displays other information. It may be configured to be also used as a display device for displaying. For example, in a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the open / close execution mode in addition to the base value. The number of payouts of the game balls may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the setting display device 205 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the setting display device 205 may be configured to display a display corresponding to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the set value.

Further, the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting display device 205 are provided on the front surface of the gaming machine may be applied to the slot machine. In this case, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in addition to the base value, the number of virtual medals owned by the player and the game medium given to the player when the small winning combination is established. One of the numbers may be displayed, and the setting display device 205 may display the other of the number of the virtual medals and the number of the given gaming media in addition to the set value.

(55) In the thirteenth embodiment, after the check display is completed, the operating power is continuously supplied to the main MPU 82 regardless of whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state or the open state. Is configured to continue displaying the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but is not limited to this, and the first is when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The display of the base value in the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be started. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the type of display target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 immediately before the gaming machine main body 12 is closed last time. The display of the base value may be restarted on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, at the time of this restart, the display of the base value of the restarted type is newly displayed over the display continuation period of the restarted type regardless of the remaining display continuation period at the timing when the restarted type was stopped last time. It may be configured to be performed in.

(56) In the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-specific control process on the main MPU 82, it is monitored whether or not the detection of the game ball by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud. And the process for monitoring whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor is executed, and the process corresponding to those monitoring results is executed in the specific control process on the main MPU 82. However, in the non-specific control process, some of the processes for monitoring may be executed. Further, in addition to or instead of these monitoring processes, a process for monitoring whether or not a radio wave is detected by a radio wave detection sensor is executed in a non-specific control process, and the process for specific control is performed. The configuration may be such that the processing corresponding to the monitoring result is executed.

(57) In the thirteenth embodiment, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b for identifying whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, is used for general electric power. Of the monitoring delay timer counters 211c and the first to eighth winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h, the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b and the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c are provided in the work area 211 for specific control, and the first The eighth prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h are provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h may be provided in the work area 211 for specific control. For example, all of the timer counters 211b, 211c, 213a to 213h may be used for non-specific control. The configuration may be provided in the work area 213.

(58) In the 14th embodiment, after executing the prize ball counter setting process (step S7801) in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), various flag clear processes (step S7802) are executed to clear the various flags. By executing the process (step S7803 to step S7818) for monitoring whether or not the game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 231a to 238a after executing the process (step S7802), the first of the predetermined process times. The setting process for various prize ball counters according to the monitoring results of the detection sensors 231a to 238a in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) is the next process time for the predetermined process times. The configuration is such that the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 120) is reserved, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121) is performed at each processing time. Processing for monitoring whether or not a game ball is detected is executed by each detection sensor 231a to 238a, and setting processing for various prize ball counters according to the monitoring result is executed, and subsequent fraud detection is performed. When it is specified in the execution process (step S7911) that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to the detection sensors 231a to 238a. May be configured to be subtracted by 1. In this case, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is added by 1 in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 121), and the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is "1" in the subsequent payout output process (step S7716). The value of the predetermined prize ball counter is output after the corresponding prize ball command is output and the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0". When it is specified that the detection of the game ball that triggered the addition of 1 is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the value of the predetermined prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 to obtain "-1". The predetermined prize ball counter that becomes "-1" is subsequently added by 1 when it is newly specified that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined prize ball counter. It becomes "0". Therefore, the payout amount of the game ball executed based on the detection of the game ball caused by the abnormality or fraud is supplemented by the subsequent payout of the game ball based on the detection of the regular game ball.

(59) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, when it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the first operating port detection sensor 235a is caused by an abnormality or fraud, the first of the first hold information The configuration is such that both the storage in the special figure holding area 111 and the payout of one game ball are not executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and only one of these may not be executed. Further, the configuration may be applied to a process when it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the second operating port detection sensor 236a is caused by an abnormality or fraud.

(60) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the detection of a game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a in relation to the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b provided in the work area 211 for specific control. Is a game in the special electric detection sensor 234a in relation to the time when it is identified that the cause is fraudulent and the period measured by the fourth prize monitoring timer counter 213e provided in the work area 213 for non-specific control. In any case where it is identified that the detection of the ball is caused by an abnormality, the special electric winning abnormality flag 213o is set to "1", but the configuration is not limited to this, and each of them is not limited to this. In some cases, "1" is set in a different abnormality flag according to the case of, and the process corresponding to the abnormality flag in which the "1" is set is executed. For example, when it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a is caused by fraud, "1" is set in the predetermined abnormality flag, and "1" is set in the predetermined abnormality flag. If this is the case, not only the value of the 15 prize ball counters is not added by 1, but also the game stop flag is set to "1" to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game. When it is specified that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 234a is caused by an abnormality, "1" is set in the specific abnormality flag, and "1" is set in the specific abnormality flag. Although the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is not added to 1, the game stop flag may not be set to "1" so that the execution of the process for advancing the game is not prevented. This makes it possible to execute the corresponding processing.

(61) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, in relation to the period measured by the special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b or the general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c provided in the work area 211 for specific control. Monitoring of whether or not the detection of the game ball by the special electric detection sensor 234a or the second operating port detection sensor 236a is caused by fraud is executed by the non-specific control process, and the work area for the non-specific control is performed. Monitoring whether or not the detection of the game ball by the detection sensors 231a to 238a is caused by an abnormality in relation to the period measured by the 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h provided in the 213. Is executed by the non-specific control process, but it is not limited to this. For example, the former monitoring is executed by the non-specific control process and the latter monitoring is executed by the specific control process. It may be a configuration to be executed.

(62) In the thirteenth embodiment, the command stored in the command transmission buffer 223b is configured to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by the command transmission circuit 224 that operates without using a program, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 by control using a program. In this case, the control may be executed as a specific control process, or may be executed as a non-specific control process.

(63) In the thirteenth embodiment, the command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, but in addition to or instead of this, the command transmitted to the payout control device 77. May be stored in the command transmission buffer 223b.

(64) In the thirteenth embodiment, when it becomes necessary to transmit a command to the sound and light side MPU93 in the specific control process, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b and the non-specific control process. Even when it becomes necessary to send a command to the sound and light side MPU93, the command is stored in the command transmission buffer 223b, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the sound is processed by specific control processing. When it becomes necessary to send a command to the optical side MPU 93, the command is stored in the work area 211 for specific control or the stack area 212 for specific control, and the command is sent to the sound optical side MPU 93 in the non-specific control process. When it becomes necessary to transmit the command, the command may be stored in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control. In this case, the process for transmitting the stored commands may be performed by the command transmission circuit 224, may be performed by the specific control process, or may be performed by the non-specific control process. May be.

(65) In the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the second security counter 213k is added to the value of the first security counter 211a in the security process (FIG. 101), and corresponds to the value of the first security counter 211a after the addition. The number of security signals to be output is externally output, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the total value of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k is stored in the register of the main MPU 82. The number of security signals stored and corresponding to the total value stored in the register may be output externally.

(66) In the thirteenth embodiment, the process for outputting the security signal is executed by the specific control process, but the process may be executed by the non-specific control process. In this case, the value of the first security counter 211a may be added to the value of the second security counter 213k, and the number of security signals corresponding to the value of the second security counter 213k after the addition may be externally output. Further, in the non-specific control process, the total value of the value of the first security counter 211a and the value of the second security counter 213k is stored in the register of the main MPU 82, and the number corresponding to the total value stored in the register. The security signal may be output to the outside.

(67) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, when the non-specific control process is started in the situation where the specific control process is being executed, the information in the flag register of the main MPU 82 is used for the specific control process. The configuration is such that the information of other registers is saved in the stack area 212 for specific control and the information of other registers is saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control by the processing of non-specific control, but the configuration is not limited to this. , The information of the flag register may be saved in the work area 211 for specific control, and the information of other registers may be saved in the stack area 214 for non-specific control.

Further, both the information of the flag register and the information of other registers may be saved in the work area 211 for the specific control or the stack area 212 for the specific control in the process of the specific control. In this case, when the non-specific control process ends and returns to the specific control process, the information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the specific control process.

Further, both the flag register information and the other register information may be saved in the work area 213 for non-specific control or the stack area 214 for non-specific control in the non-specific control process. In this case, when the non-specific control process ends and returns to the specific control process, the information is returned to the flag register and other registers in the non-specific control process.

(68) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the operation in which the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on and the reset button 196 is pressed is the setting change operation, and the setting key insertion unit 195 is turned on. The operation in which the reset button 196 is pressed and the reset button 196 is not pressed is the setting confirmation operation, but the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are not limited to this, and the setting key insertion unit 195 sets the setting. In a configuration in which the setting key insertion unit 195 can be switched to the OFF position, the first position, and the second position by the key, the setting key insertion unit 195 is switched to the first position by the setting key, which is a setting change operation. The setting confirmation operation may be such that the 195 is switched to the second position by the setting key and arranged.

(69) Display control based on the command output from the main control device 71 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the voice emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 101 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the voice emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the voice emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

(70) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the decorative member provided movably. However, the effect for game rounds may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above embodiments. good.

(71) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball is placed in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Game times control means (first to eighth embodiments) that controls game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) of the main MPU 82 in
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode) is started. Predetermined start processing that does not start the predetermined gaming state when it is specified that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred (setting process for time saving result or ceiling executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments). Predetermined start execution means for executing the subtraction process of the counter 131 (a function for executing the setting process for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments). (Function to execute the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131) and
When it is specified that a predetermined end trigger (the value of the time saving state counter 134 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state is terminated and the predetermined end trigger is reached. Is executed (subtraction processing of the time saving state counter 134 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) that does not terminate the predetermined gaming state when it is specified that the above-mentioned predetermined gaming state is not terminated. Predetermined end execution means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature A1, it is specified that the predetermined game state is started when the predetermined start trigger is specified in the predetermined start process, and the predetermined end trigger is generated in the predetermined end process. In that case, the predetermined gaming state ends, so that the player who expects to be in the predetermined gaming state expects that a predetermined start opportunity will occur if the predetermined gaming state is not present, and if the predetermined gaming state is in effect. Expects that a predetermined termination opportunity does not occur. In this case, the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. As a result, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round, and the current predetermined game state is terminated. , The predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. Therefore, it is possible to continue the predetermined game state even in the game times when the predetermined end trigger occurs. Further, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game is the order in which the predetermined start process is executed after the execution of the predetermined end process.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined start executing means invalidates the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A2, since the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalid in the predetermined game state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from being newly started in the middle of the predetermined game state. In this case, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end processing is executed first in the game round, so that the current predetermined game state is terminated. Later, in the game round, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later. As a result, in a configuration in which the predetermined gaming state is not newly started in the middle of the predetermined gaming state, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined start is started. It is possible to treat the occurrence of an opportunity as effective and to allow a situation in which a predetermined gaming state continues for a long time.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein both the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation in the game turn execution means is completed in the game turn.

According to the feature A3, since both the predetermined end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation is completed, these processes advance the process for starting the game turn operation and the game turn operation. It will be executed in the situation where the processing for the purpose is not executed, and the processing load can be distributed. Further, even in such a configuration in which the processing load is distributed, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start processing is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round, so that the predetermined start processing is executed once. When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in the game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round to end the current predetermined game state, and then the predetermined start trigger is later in the game round. When the process is executed, the predetermined gaming state is restarted.

Feature A4. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first to fourth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and the number of first ceilings or the first in the fifth embodiment. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the number of ceilings is the number of times, or the number of fixed ceilings or the number of special ceilings in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature A4, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and a predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed later, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, so that the current predetermined game is executed. After the state is terminated, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process in the game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined gaming state will occur when a predetermined number of gaming times are executed.

Feature A5. Predetermined lottery means (main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for executing a predetermined lottery process (holding information acquisition process and pass / fail determination process executed by the main side MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments). It is equipped with a function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information and the process of determining whether the result is correct or not.
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to have an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature A5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined end process is executed in one game round. Since the predetermined start process is executed after this, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, which is the current situation. After the predetermined game state is completed, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a predetermined gaming state will occur when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result.

Feature A6. A specific measuring means (time saving state counter 134) for measuring the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined game state is provided.
A feature characterized in that the predetermined end trigger occurs when the number of executions of the game round measured by the specific measuring means becomes the specific trigger number (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

According to the feature A6, since the predetermined game state ends based on the number of times the game times executed in the predetermined game state becomes the specific number of triggers, the end trigger of the predetermined game state is clear to the player. Will be.

Feature A7.1 When both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in the predetermined game round, the number of the game rounds executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed. The total number of times of the game times executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed is set when the game state is changed from the game state other than the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the number of times the predetermined gaming state can be continued is greater than the number of times the predetermined gaming state can be continued.

According to the feature A7, when both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end processing is executed in one game round. Since the process is executed, if both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round, the predetermined end process is executed first in the game round, and the current predetermined game state ends. After that, the predetermined game state is restarted by executing the predetermined start process later in the game times. When such an event occurs, the number of game times executed in the predetermined game state before the predetermined end process is executed and the number of game times executed in the predetermined game state after the predetermined start process is executed. The total number of times with the number of times may be larger than the number of times that the predetermined gaming state can be continued, which is set when the predetermined gaming state changes from the gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage that both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger occur in one game round.

Feature A8. Predetermined ball entry means on which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment). When,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment), and
With the grant determination means (function for executing the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. ,
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments).
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to eighth embodiments) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state). ,
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature A8, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the player is expected to be in the predetermined gaming state and to continue the predetermined gaming state for a long time. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided and the predetermined start process is executed after the predetermined end process is executed in one game round, both the predetermined start trigger and the predetermined end trigger are executed in one game round. When is generated, the predetermined game state is changed by executing the predetermined start process later in the game after the current predetermined game state is completed by executing the predetermined end process first in the game times. It will be started again. Therefore, if a predetermined end trigger occurs, the player expects that the predetermined start trigger will occur at the game times in which the predetermined end trigger occurs.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably execute a process for advancing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Game times control means (first, fourth, fourth) that controls game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game rotation operation is executed in game times. , A function to execute the special figure change start process, the special figure change process, and the special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh to ninth embodiments).
When it is specified that a specific end trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred in the game times, the specific game state (high probability state) is terminated. , The specific end process that does not end the specific game state when it is specified that the specific end opportunity has not occurred (in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). The subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments for executing the specific end execution means (subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 to be executed). Function to execute) and
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred in the game round, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode) is started. A predetermined start process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) in which the predetermined game state is not started when it is specified that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred. Setting process for time saving result or setting for time saving result of main MPU 82 in the predetermined start execution means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for executing the setting process for the time saving result or the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131. A function to execute the process, a function to execute the subtraction process of the ceiling counter 131 of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments), and
Equipped with
The predetermined start executing means is for preventing the predetermined start trigger from occurring when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, or the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. In such a case, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature B1, it is specified that the specific game state is terminated when the specific end trigger is specified in the specific end process, and the predetermined start trigger is generated in the predetermined start process. In that case, the predetermined gaming state is started, so that the player who expects to be in the specific gaming state expects that the specific end trigger does not occur in the specific gaming state and expects to be in the predetermined gaming state. Expects that a predetermined start trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not a predetermined gaming state.

In this case, if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger becomes invalid. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming states from being duplicated in the specific gaming state.

Further, since the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game, even if the specific game state ends, the predetermined start process is executed in the specific game state. If the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or if the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger becomes invalid. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from occurring in the gaming rounds started in the specific gaming state even in the last gaming round in the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the giving of profits to the player from becoming excessive. Further, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by a simple configuration in which the execution order of the processes in one game is the order in which the specific end process is executed after the execution of the predetermined start process.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B2, since the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, the player can use the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the game times executed in the specific gaming state. It is possible not to give a big disadvantage.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation in the game turn execution means is completed in the game turn.

According to the feature B3, since both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game turn operation is completed, these processes advance the process for starting the game turn operation and the game turn operation. It will be executed in the situation where the processing for the purpose is not executed, and the processing load can be distributed. Further, even in such a configuration in which the processing load is distributed, the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided, and when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state, the predetermined start trigger does not occur, or the predetermined start is predetermined in the specific gaming state. In a configuration in which the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger is invalidated when the start process is executed, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that a profit is given to the player. Can be prevented from becoming excessive.

Feature B4. Predetermined lottery means (1st, 4th, 5th, 7th to 9th embodiments of the 1st, 4th, 5th, 7th to 9th embodiments, in which the holding information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process are executed) are executed. It is provided with a function of executing the hold information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to have an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The configuration is such that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).
The predetermined start executing means has one of the features B1 to B3 characterized in that when the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state, the generation of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature B4, in the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided, and the predetermined start process is executed in the specific gaming state. In this case, in a configuration in which the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalid, the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, so that the profit is excessively given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature B5. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
The predetermined start execution means, as the predetermined start process, is a number update process (first, fourth) for updating the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed. , Step S1503 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, step S3703) executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and measured by the predetermined measuring means. When the number of executions of the game is the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments), the predetermined start trigger is generated as the predetermined game. Start execution process for starting the state (step S1506 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). Step S3705) is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the number-of-times updating process is not executed in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature B5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the execution of a predetermined number of gaming times, even if the gaming times are executed in the specific gaming state, the measurement is performed by the predetermined measuring means. The number update process for updating the number of executions of the existing game times is not executed. As a result, in the specific gaming state, it is possible not only that the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also that the renewal process for the number of times that the predetermined gaming state is brought close to is not executed. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature B1 is provided and the specific end process is executed after the predetermined start process is executed in one game round, the predetermined game state is executed even in the game round in which the specific game state ends. It is possible to prevent the update process from being executed the number of times that the occurrence of the above is approached.

Feature B6. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the main MPU 82 (Function to execute the process of step S704 and step S709) and
The grant determination means (main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process) and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions for executing special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, special electric closing processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The specific gaming state is described in any one of features B1 to B5, which is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). Gaming machine.

According to the feature B6, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is high, so that the specific gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature B7. Predetermined ball entry means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second holding information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (main side in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). (Function to execute the process of step S709 in MPU82) and
The grant determination means (main side MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process) and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions for executing special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, special electric closing processing, and special electric end processing of the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments).
The predetermined ball entry control means (first, fourth, fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, in which the predetermined ball entry control means can be switched between the closed state and the open state) of the main MPU 82. Function to execute electric control processing) and
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature B7, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B8, the specific gaming state is more advantageous than the predetermined gaming state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a great disadvantage even if the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the gaming times executed in the specific gaming state.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. The game turn control means (main side MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing, and special figure confirmation processing),
A state storage means (start high accuracy flag of the main RAM 84) for storing information on the game state when the game round is started, and
When it is specified that a predetermined start trigger (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction) has occurred after the game rotation operation is completed, the predetermined game state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode) is the time reduction state. ), And the predetermined start process (setting for the time saving result executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not start the predetermined game state when it is specified that the predetermined start trigger has not occurred. Predetermined start execution means for executing processing or subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the ceiling counter of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment). Function to execute the subtraction process of 131) and
Equipped with
The predetermined start execution means has executed the predetermined start process in a situation where specific state information is stored in the state storage means (a situation in which "1" is set in the start high probability flag of the main RAM 84). In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated.

According to the feature C1, the predetermined game state is started when the predetermined start trigger is specified in the predetermined start process, so that the player who expects to be in the predetermined game state is in the predetermined game state. It is expected that a predetermined start opportunity will occur in a game state that is not. Further, since the predetermined start process is executed after the game rounding operation is completed, the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game rounding operation and the process for advancing the game rounding operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, when the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined gaming states from being duplicated in the gaming states that trigger the storage of the specific state information. Further, the state storage means stores information on the gaming state when the gaming round is started. As a result, in the configuration in which the predetermined start process is executed after the game round operation is completed, the game state when the game round is started is a game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, and is predetermined in the game round. Even if the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the start process is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times in which the profit of the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information is given, and the profit is excessively given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

Feature C2. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
When it is specified that the specific end trigger (the value of the high probability state counter 133 after 1 subtraction becomes "0") has occurred after the game rotation operation is completed. A specific end process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) that does not end the specific game state when the specific game state (high probability state) is terminated and it is specified that the specific end trigger has not occurred. It is characterized by having a specific end execution means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133 of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for executing the subtraction process of the high probability state counter 133. Features The gaming machine according to C1.

According to the feature C2, since the specific game state is terminated when it is specified that the specific end trigger has occurred in the specific end process, the player who expects to be in the specific game state is in the specific game state. It is expected that the specific termination opportunity will not occur in. Further, since the specific end process is executed after the game rounding operation is completed, the specific end process is executed in a situation where the process for starting the game rounding operation and the process for advancing the game rounding operation are not executed. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load.

In this case, both the specific end process and the predetermined start process are executed after the game rounding operation is completed. Then, depending on the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process, the predetermined start process may be executed after the game state is not the specific game state even if the game times are started in the specific game state. .. On the other hand, in the game rounds having the configuration of the above feature C1 and started in the specific gaming state, the specific state information is stored in the information storage means when the game round is started, and the specific state is stored in the state storage means. When the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the information is stored, the predetermined start trigger is prevented from occurring or the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. Therefore, regardless of the execution order of the specific end process and the predetermined start process, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times started in the specific game state.

Feature C3. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature C3, since the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, the player can use the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the game times started in the specific gaming state. It is possible not to give a big disadvantage.

Feature C4. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first hold information, second hold information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S704 and S709 in the main MPU 82). When,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment),
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to allow the diversion operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature C4, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result is high, so that the specific gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature C5. Predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of hold information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) (acquisition process of hold information of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment). And a function to execute the pass / fail judgment process)
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to have an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The configuration is such that the predetermined start trigger occurs when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).
The predetermined start executing means is characterized in that when the predetermined start process is executed in a situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, in a configuration in which a predetermined gaming state is generated based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided, and the gaming state when the game round is started. If the information is stored in the state storage means and the predetermined start process is executed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means, the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is invalidated, so that the game round starts. Even if the game state in the case of being played is a game state that triggers the storage of specific state information and the end condition of the game state is satisfied before the predetermined start process is executed in the game time, the game time is concerned. It is possible to prevent a predetermined gaming state from occurring in the game.

Feature C6. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed is provided.
As the predetermined start process, the predetermined start execution means updates the number of times the game times have been executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (second embodiment). Step S2103) executed by the main MPU 82 in the above, and when the number of times the game is executed measured by the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings in the second embodiment). The start execution process (step S2106 executed by the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for starting the predetermined gaming state as the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the number-of-times update process is not executed when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means.

According to the feature C6, in the configuration in which the predetermined game state is generated based on the execution of the game times of the predetermined number of triggers, the game times are executed when the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. Even so, the number update process for updating the number of times the game has been executed measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed. As a result, in the gaming state that triggers the storage of the specific state information, it is possible not only that the predetermined gaming state does not occur, but also that the update process of the number of times that the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state approaches is not executed. In this case, the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided, and the information of the game state when the game round is started is stored in the state storage means, and the predetermined start is performed in the situation where the specific state information is stored in the state storage means. When the process is executed, the number update process for updating the number of times the game is executed measured by the predetermined measuring means is not executed, so that the game state that triggers the storage of the specific state information ends. It is possible to prevent the update process from being executed the number of times that the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state approaches even if it is the number of times.

Feature C7. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the second embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S709 in the main MPU 82). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment),
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature C7, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature C8. The state storage means stores the specific state information when the game state when the game round is started is a specific game state (high probability state).
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entering means is more likely to be in the open state than the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature C8, the specific gaming state is more advantageous than the predetermined gaming state in terms of the ease with which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a great disadvantage even if the predetermined gaming state does not occur in the gaming times executed in the specific gaming state.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature B group and the feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably give a profit to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. The game turn control means (main side in the third embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing, and special figure confirmation processing) of MPU82),
A specific lottery for executing a specific end lottery process (a fall determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) for determining whether or not to end the specific game state in the specific game state (high probability state). Means (a function of executing the fall determination process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
Predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of hold information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) (acquisition process of hold information of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). And the function to execute the pass / fail judgment process),
A predetermined privilege granting means (main in the third embodiment) for granting a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) to a player based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being a predetermined lottery result (time saving result). Function to execute the setting process for the time saving result of the side MPU 82),
Equipped with
The specific lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round.

According to the feature D1, when the specific game state is terminated in the specific end lottery process, the specific game state is terminated, and the predetermined privilege is a game based on the predetermined lottery result in the predetermined lottery process. Since it is given to a person, a player who expects to be in a specific gaming state expects that the lottery result for ending the specific gaming state will not be obtained in the specific ending lottery process in the specific gaming state, and a predetermined privilege is given. The player who expects to do so expects that the predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the predetermined lottery process. In this case, the specific end lottery process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed in one game round. As a result, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the lottery result for ending the specific game state is obtained. Therefore, in the game times when the specific game state ends, it is possible to execute the predetermined lottery process in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, the lottery process can be preferably performed.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined lottery means differs in the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process depending on whether or not the predetermined lottery state is in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature D2, since the execution mode of the predetermined lottery process differs depending on whether or not the predetermined game state is executed, the player pays attention to the game state at the timing when the predetermined lottery process is executed. In this case, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the lottery result for ending the specific game state is provided. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after that, in the game times when the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the state where the specific game state ends. Therefore, in the predetermined lottery process, it is possible to treat the game times at which the specific game state ends as a game times that are not in the specific game state.

Feature D3. Specific end processing for ending the specific gaming state based on the result of the specific end lottery processing (fall result) (step S2208 executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). (A function to execute the process of step S2208 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment).
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result, the specific end process is executed before the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to the feature D3, when the result of the specific end lottery process is the end result in the game times in the specific game times, the specific game state may be terminated before the predetermined lottery process is executed in the game times. It will be possible.

Feature D4. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, and special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). Function to execute processing during closure) and
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery process being the special lottery result (big hit result), the special transition means (first) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed. (Function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the result of the predetermined lottery process in the configuration in which the special game state in which the variable ball entry control for the variable ball entry means is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result. A predetermined privilege will be given based on the result of the predetermined lottery. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to grant the predetermined privilege by using the configuration of the predetermined lottery process that determines whether or not to generate the special gaming state.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the special lottery result is higher than that of another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature D5, since the probability that the special gaming state occurs is high in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, the predetermined lottery process is executed after the specific game state is completed in the game times in which the configuration of the above-mentioned feature D1 is provided and the result of the specific lottery process ends the specific game state. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of game times in which the predetermined lottery process is executed in the specific game state.

Feature D6. Specific update means (type random number counter C2) for updating numerical information,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the special lottery result, the special type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means. By executing the process of step S2211), the means for determining the types of benefits (opening / closing execution mode, winning / failing lottery mode, and support mode) that can be given to the player (step S2211 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). Function to execute processing) and
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined type lottery process (executed by the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) using the numerical information updated by the specific update means. By executing the process of step S2217), a means for determining the type of the predetermined privilege that can be given to the player (a function of executing the process of step S2217 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature D4 or D5, which comprises the above-mentioned feature D4 or D5.

According to the feature D6, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the special lottery result, the privilege of the type selected by the special type lottery process is given, so that it is possible to diversify the granting mode of the privilege. Will be. Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result, the predetermined privilege of the type selected by the predetermined type lottery process is granted, so that it is possible to diversify the mode of granting the predetermined privilege. .. In this case, in the configuration in which the numerical information of the specific update means is used in the special type lottery process, the numerical information of the specific update means is also used in the predetermined type lottery process. As a result, it is possible to determine the type of predetermined privilege to be given when the predetermined lottery result is obtained by using the configuration for determining the type of the privilege to be given when the special lottery result is obtained.

Feature D7. The predetermined privilege granting means is any one of the features D1 to D6, which is characterized in that the predetermined privilege is not granted even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the situation of the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature D7, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result in the situation of the specific gaming state, the predetermined privilege is not given, so that the predetermined privilege is not excessively given. It will be possible. In this case, if the lottery result of the specific end lottery process is the lottery result for ending the specific game state in the game times in the specific game state, the lottery result for ending the specific game state is provided. Since the predetermined lottery process is executed after that, in the game times when the specific game state ends, the predetermined lottery process is executed in the situation where the specific game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to grant a predetermined privilege at the game times when the specific game state ends.

Feature D8. Predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment). ,
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
The predetermined lottery means executes the predetermined lottery process based on the acquisition of the special information.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, which is characterized by being migrated.

According to the feature D8, special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the predetermined lottery process is executed by acquiring the special information. In the configuration described above, when the predetermined game state is set, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than when the game state is different. Therefore, the player is expected to be in the predetermined gaming state and to continue the predetermined gaming state for a long time. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to preferably execute the lottery process in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Game times control means (first to twelfth embodiments) that control the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) of the main MPU 82 in
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments, step S1503 in the main MPU 82). The function of executing the process of step S2103 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to twelfth. In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82) and
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments, first ceiling number in the fifth embodiment, or The process of step S1506 in the main MPU 82 is executed in the predetermined privilege granting means (in the first, third to eighth embodiments) to grant the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) when the number of times of the second ceiling is reached. The function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and the tenth to twelfth embodiments. (Function to execute the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82) and
When it is specified that an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) when the supply of the operating power is started, the abnormality handling process (first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments). Then, an abnormality in which step S121 executed by the main MPU 82, step S2421 executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2621) executed by the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment are executed. Corresponding means (a function of executing the process of step S121 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the process of step S2421 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2621 in the main MPU 82) and
Based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means has a predetermined initial value (“500” in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and “800” in the fifth embodiment. A predetermined setting process (step S122 executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and executed by the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment). Step S2506, in the fifth embodiment, the predetermined setting means for executing the predetermined setting means (step S2622 executed in the main MPU 82) (in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, step S122 in the main MPU 82). A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step S2506 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2622 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player is informed of the repeated execution of the game times. It is possible to grant predetermined benefits. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started and an information abnormality has occurred in the predetermined storage means, the abnormality handling process is executed, so that it is possible to deal with the occurrence of the information abnormality. In this case, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality. When an information abnormality has occurred, the information of the predetermined measuring means may also be abnormal information, but in such a situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value, so that the predetermined measurement is performed. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the information of the means being abnormal information.

Feature E2. Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (hit / fail judgment in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82 in the first to third, sixth to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the fifth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S2617 in MPU82) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the configurable situation.

According to the feature E2, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value in the settable situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. It will be possible. In this configuration, the configuration of the above feature E1 is provided, and since the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the game is started with the information of the predetermined measuring means as the abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Feature E3. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process.
This gaming machine is a means for initializing the abnormality-corresponding storage area when the settable situation occurs (in the first to third, fifth to twelfth embodiments, in the set value update process in the main MPU 82. The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is characterized by having a function of executing RAM clear).

According to the feature E3, in a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a configurable status in order to erase the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality, the information of the predetermined measuring means is predetermined in the configurable status. When the abnormality response information is stored, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value instead of the initial value of. As a result, the anomaly response storage area may be initialized regardless of whether or not the anomaly response information is stored in the configurable status, and processing is executed in the configurable status depending on whether or not the anomaly response information is stored. There is no need to make the content different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the configurable situation.

Feature E4. The abnormality response means stores the abnormality response information (information of "1") in the abnormality response storage area (game stop flag of the main RAM 84) in the abnormality response process.
This gaming machine is
Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (hit / fail judgment in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. A situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step S2417 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) and a situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step S2417 in the fourth embodiment).
A means for initializing the abnormality-corresponding storage area when the configurable situation occurs (a function of executing the processes of steps S2504 and S2505 of the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment) and
Equipped with
The predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process when the settable situation occurs in a situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, and the predetermined setting means is stored in the situation where the abnormality response information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the predetermined setting process is executed when a settable situation occurs.

According to the feature E4, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In addition, it is necessary to generate a configurable status in order to erase the abnormality response information stored based on the occurrence of an information abnormality. In this case, if the setting possible situation occurs in the situation where the abnormality response information is not stored, the information of the predetermined measuring means does not become the predetermined initial value, and the setting is made in the situation where the abnormality response information is stored. When a possible situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value. As a result, when a settable situation occurs, the information of the predetermined measuring means is basically prevented from becoming a predetermined initial value, and when a settable situation occurs in order to erase the abnormality response information, it is adjusted accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a predetermined initial value.

Feature E5. Means for executing predetermined information initialization processing for the predetermined storage means (first to first) based on the specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started. 3. The function of executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82 in the fourth embodiment, and the main in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S2619 in the side MPU 82) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature E5, in the configuration in which the initialization process of the predetermined information is executed for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the predetermined initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this configuration, the configuration of the above feature E1 is provided, and since the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value based on the occurrence of the information abnormality, the game is started with the information of the predetermined measuring means as the abnormal information. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Feature E6. Means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (a function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fourth, sixth to twelfth embodiments), and
Means for ensuring that the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined initial value in the wake of the transition to the special gaming state (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, eighth, and ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S1005, a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main MPU 82 in the third embodiment, and a sixth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3109 in the main MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3305 in the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the function of step S4208 in the main MPU 82. Function to execute processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to the feature E6, in a configuration in which the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value triggered by the transition to the special gaming state, even when an information abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is started. The information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a predetermined initial value. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs, the number of times the game times required for the predetermined privilege to be granted is executed, and the number of game times required for the predetermined privilege to be granted after the special game state occurs. It can be the same as the number of times.

Feature E7. Equipped with a means to shift the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 82).
The predetermined privilege granting means specifies based on the information measured by the predetermined measuring means that the number of executions of the game times executed after the special gaming state ends is the predetermined number of triggers. If this is the case, the above-mentioned prescribed benefits will be granted.
The number of executions of the game (“800” in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed, and the above. It is different from the number of executions of the game (“500” in the fifth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the end of the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature E7, in the configuration in which the predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the special game state occurs becomes the predetermined number of triggers, the number of times the game is executed after the information abnormality occurs. The number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game has reached the predetermined number of times, and the number of times the game is executed until the number of times the game is executed after the special game state ends is specified as the number of times the game has been executed. The number of executions is different. As a result, it is possible to make the number of executions of the game times required until the predetermined privilege is granted different between after the special game state ends and after the information abnormality occurs.

Feature E8. The number of times the game is executed, which is required until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed, is the number of times the game is executed after the special game state is completed. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the number of executions is larger than the number of executions of the gaming times required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached.

According to the feature E8, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times after the information abnormality occurs is the number of times the game is executed after the special game state is completed. If the number of executions is larger than the number of executions of the game required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached, and the act of illegally causing an information abnormality is performed, the predetermined privilege is subsequently given. It is possible to increase the number of times the game is executed before it is granted.

Feature E9. Predetermined ball entry means (in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, the second operating port 34, the sixth, tenth to twelfth embodiments) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Then, with the special winning device 151),
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). ,
With a grant determination means (a function of executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. ,
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments).
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state). ,
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature E9, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features E1 to E9, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to play games favorably in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Game times control means (first to fifth, fifth and seventh) that controls game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game turn operation is executed in game times. A function to execute the special figure change start process, the special figure change process, and the special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment).
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means (in the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments). A function to execute the process of step S1503 in the main MPU 82, a function to execute the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment. , The function of executing the process of step S4503 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means, is the predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth, seventh to twelfth embodiments, first ceiling number in the fifth embodiment, or In the first, third to fifth, seventh, and eighth embodiments, the main MPU 82 grants a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) when the number of times of the second ceiling is reached. The function of executing the process of step S1506, the function of executing the process of step S2106 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3705 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, the tenth to the tenth. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4505 in the main MPU 82) and
Special transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (function for executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) When,
Predetermined setting process (“500” in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) so that the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value (“500” in the first to fifth and seventh to twelfth embodiments) when the special gaming state is started. In the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the process of step S1005 executed by the main MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the process of step S1905 executed by the main MPU 82, In the third embodiment, the process of step S2305 executed by the main MPU 82, in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 executed by the main MPU 82, and in the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the main MPU 82 The function of executing the process of step S1005 in the main MPU 82 in the first, fourth, fifth, eighth, and ninth embodiments, the second, which executes the predetermined setting means (the process of step S4208 executed in step S4208). In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1905 in the main MPU 82, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2305 in the main MPU 82, and in the seventh embodiment, the process of step S3305 in the main MPU 82. (Function to execute the process of step S4208 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player is informed of the repeated execution of the game times. It is possible to grant predetermined benefits. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power even after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F2. Means for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail judgment processing) in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (hit / fail judgment in the main MPU 82). Function to execute processing) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the main side). A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment), and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process in the configurable situation.

According to the feature F2, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect to be doing it. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the configurable situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. It will be possible. In this configuration, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power even after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Feature F3. A means for executing a predetermined information initialization process for a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (RAM clear operation). In the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S119 in the main MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2419 in the main MPU 82, the fifth. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2619 in the main MPU 82) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined setting means does not execute the predetermined setting process even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which the initialization process of the predetermined information is executed for the predetermined storage means based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this configuration, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided, and the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state is started. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power even after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that forcibly terminates the special gaming state while maintaining it, the information of the maintained predetermined measuring means is a specific initial value set when the special gaming state is started. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Features F4. Means (1st to 5th) for executing profit-giving processing (win / fail determination processing) in a mode corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. (Function to execute the hit / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh to twelfth embodiments) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S117 in the main MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the main side). A function of executing the process of step S2417 in the MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2617 in the main MPU 82 in the fifth embodiment), and
Equipped with
The predetermined setting means has a configuration in which the predetermined setting process is not executed even if the initialization process is executed, and the predetermined setting process is not executed in the configurable situation, and the supply of operating power is started. In this case, a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed (in the first to third, seventh to twelfth embodiments, a positive determination is made in step S113 in the main MPU 82). In the fourth embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S2413 in the main MPU 82, and in the fifth embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S2613 in the main MPU 82). The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the feature F4, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the configurable situation, so that the initialization process is performed. Is executed, not only is it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped, but also the information of the predetermined measuring means is supplied of the operating power even if a configurable situation occurs. It is possible to maintain the information before the stop. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started and both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed in the predetermined situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to the specific initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to a specific initial value in the configurable situation. It is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value by setting the predetermined situation when the operation is started.

Feature F5. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state,
The special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments, which executes the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is set to the open state. Function to execute start processing, special electric power opening processing, and special electric power closing processing),
Equipped with
The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the gaming round in which the operation result of the gaming rotation operation becomes a special result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) is completed.
It is a configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special gaming state.
The predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the operation result of the game rotation operation becomes the special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value after the operation result of the game rotation operation becomes a special result and before the variable ball entry control is started in the special game state. It becomes possible to do.

Feature F6. Predetermined ball entry means (the second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, and the special prize in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Device 151) and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (steps in the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S709, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments), and
Grant determination means (first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments) of grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process) Function to execute) and
Predetermined ball entry control means (first to fifth, seventh to twelfth embodiments, in which the predetermined ball entry control means can be switched between a closed state and an open state) Function to execute) and
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature F6, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features F1 to F6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to appropriately play a game in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. The game turn control means (main side in the sixth embodiment) that controls the game turn execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that the game turn operation is executed in the game turn. (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing, and special figure confirmation processing) of MPU82),
A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
A function for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (the function of executing the process of step S1503 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). )When,
When the number of times the game is executed measured by the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined number of triggers (the number of fixed ceilings or the number of special ceilings in the sixth embodiment), the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) is given. Predetermined privilege granting means to be granted (a function of executing the process of step S1506 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player, and
Predetermined setting process (main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) so that the information of the predetermined measuring means becomes a specific initial value (“500” in the sixth embodiment) when the special gaming state ends. Predetermined setting means for executing the process of step S3109 (function for executing the process of step S3109 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined privilege is given, so that the player is informed of the repeated execution of the game times. It is possible to grant predetermined benefits. In addition, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the predetermined privilege is given when the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to be granted. In this case, when the information of the predetermined measuring means is set to a specific initial value triggered by the special gaming state, the specific initial value is set when the special gaming state ends. As a result, even if there are multiple patterns of game situations immediately before shifting to the special game state, the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state ends when the special game state ends. It can be aggregated as a process. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G2. The special transition means
A means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when the gaming round is completed (a function of executing the processes of steps S3002 to S3005 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment).
Means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state when an event different from the end of the gaming round occurs (a function of executing the distribution process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to the feature G1, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature G2, there are a case where the game shifts to the special gaming state after the game round ends, and a case where the game shifts to the special game state when an event different from the end of the game round occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern of transitioning to the special gaming state. In this case, the configuration of the above feature G1 is provided, and since a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, there are a plurality of patterns of gaming situations immediately before the transition to the special gaming state. Even so, it is possible to aggregate the process of setting a specific initial value in the predetermined measuring means triggered by the special game state as the process when the special game state ends.

Feature G3. When the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is different from the specific initial value or the specific initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. Specific setting means (sixth embodiment) for executing the specific setting process (step S3204 executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) for executing the game times in the situation of the value. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the process of step S3204 of the main MPU 82 in the above.

In the case of a configuration in which a specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means when the special gaming state ends, the operating power of the operating power is set after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. It is assumed that the special gaming state is forcibly terminated while the information of the predetermined measuring means is maintained by stopping the supply and restarting the supply of the operating power. On the other hand, according to the feature G3, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. This makes it possible to neutralize the above-mentioned fraudulent activities.

Features G4. When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped, a means for executing a power failure processing (power failure monitoring process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) (main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is executed. Equipped with a function to execute power failure monitoring processing)
The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the specific setting means executes the specific setting process in the power failure processing when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state.

According to the feature G4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value is set in the predetermined measuring means in the power failure processing. Compared to the configuration in which the process of setting the initial value in the predetermined measuring means is executed at the start of the supply of the operating power, it is easier to specify whether or not the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state. Become.

Feature G5. The number of executions of the game (“500” in the sixth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game is specified to be the predetermined number of triggers after the predetermined setting process is executed, and the above. It is different from the number of executions of the game (“800” in the sixth embodiment) required until the number of executions of the game becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature G3 or G4, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature G5, the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state, and the number of times the game is executed and the supply of operating power in the middle of the special game state are supplied. Even when it is stopped, the number of times the game is executed is different from the number of times the game is executed until it is specified that the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of triggers after the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, the number of times the game is executed required until the predetermined privilege is granted is determined by stopping the supply of operating power after the end of the special game state and in the middle of the special game state, and restarting the supply of operating power. It is possible to make a difference afterwards.

Feature G6. The number of times the game is executed, which is required until the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the specific setting process is executed, is the number of times the game is executed after the predetermined setting process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G3 to G5, wherein the number of executions of the game is larger than the number of executions of the game required until it is specified that the predetermined number of triggers has been reached. ..

According to the feature G6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state and the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers after the supply of the operating power is restarted. Because the number of executions of the required game times is larger than the number of executions of the game times required until it is specified that the number of executions of the game times has reached the predetermined number of triggers after the special game state ends. If an act of stopping the supply of operating power is performed illegally in the middle of a special game state, it is possible to increase the number of times the game is executed until the predetermined privilege is granted thereafter.

Feature G7. Profit-giving process (whether or not it is executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. A means for executing the determination process (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the configurable situation.

According to the feature G7, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, since the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the configurable situation, it is possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if the settable situation occurs. Become. In the configuration, the configuration of the above feature G3 is provided, and when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power even after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. It is possible to neutralize the cheating that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it.

Features G8. A means for executing a predetermined information initialization process for a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 84) based on a specific related operation (RAM clear operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (RAM clear operation). The function of executing the process of step S119 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) is provided.
Even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not initialized, and the information is not initialized.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7, wherein the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed.

According to the feature G8, in a configuration in which a predetermined information initialization process is executed for a predetermined storage means based on a specific related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial stage is described. Even if the conversion process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be maintained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In the configuration, the configuration of the above feature G3 is provided, and when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the special gaming state, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the relevant initial value after the supply of the operating power is started. A specific setting process is executed so that the game times are executed in a situation where the initial value is different from the specific initial value. As a result, the information of the predetermined measuring means can be obtained by stopping the supply of the operating power and restarting the supply of the operating power even after the special gaming state has gained a certain amount of profit and before the special gaming state ends. It is possible to neutralize the cheating that forcibly terminates the special game state while maintaining it.

Feature G9. Profit-giving process (whether or not it is executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. A means for executing the determination process (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
The configurable status (setting value update processing) that can change the setting value to be used based on the predetermined related operation (setting change operation) when the supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means (function for executing the process of step S117 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) and
Equipped with
The configuration is such that the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed even if the initialization process is executed, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not changed in the configurable situation.
This gaming machine has a predetermined situation in which both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed when the supply of operating power is started (affirmative determination in step S113 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). A means for ensuring that the information of the predetermined measuring means has an initial value different from the specific initial value or the specific initial value (step S114 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature G8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature G9, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. You will expect it to be. In this case, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value, and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the configurable situation, so that the initialization process is executed. Not only is it possible to maintain the information of the predetermined measuring means in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped, but also the information of the predetermined measuring means is retained in the information before the supply of the operating power is stopped even if a configurable situation occurs. It is possible to maintain the power. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started and both the specific related operation and the predetermined related operation are not performed in the predetermined situation, the information of the predetermined measuring means is the specific initial value or the specific initial value. It is set to a different initial value from. As a result, even if the initialization process is executed, the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value and the information of the predetermined measuring means is not set to the initial value in the configurable situation, and the supply of the operating power is started. In some cases, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value or an initial value different from the specific initial value by setting the predetermined situation.

Feature G10. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the variable entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state (special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, and special electric power of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). Function to execute processing during closure) and
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the variable ball entry control is executed in the special gaming state.
Any of the features G1 to G9, wherein the predetermined setting means executes the predetermined setting process after the variable ball entry control in the special gaming state is completed and before the end timing of the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature G10, it is possible to set the information of the predetermined measuring means to a specific initial value after the variable ball entry control is completed in the special gaming state and before the end timing of the special gaming state.

Feature G11. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the sixth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With the acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S2806 of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (main side in the sixth embodiment) for performing grant determination (whether or not the hit / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process of MPU82) and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature G11, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G11, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the processing is preferably executed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Game times control means (first to fifth, fifth and seventh) that controls game times execution means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so that game turn operation is executed in game times. , A function to execute the special figure change start process, the special figure change process, and the special figure determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment).
A period determining means for determining the duration of the game (a function of executing a process for specifying a variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments).
A specific measuring means for measuring the number of times the game has been executed (variable selection state counter 132 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, and a game number counter in the main RAM 84 in the seventh embodiment).
When the game round is executed, the specific update means for updating the number of executions of the game round measured by the specific measuring means (step S1703 of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments). (Function to execute the process of step S3401 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment) and
The number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means after the measurement reference trigger (open / close execution mode) is generated is the specific reference number (500 in the first to fifth and ninth embodiments, the seventh. In the embodiment, the mode changing means (first to fifth) for changing the mode of determining the duration of the game in the period determining means based on the fact that the last digit is "7"). , The function of executing the process of step S1705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps S3402 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment).
Predetermined privilege granting means (first to fifth, seventh, ninth embodiment) that grants a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) when a predetermined grant opportunity (time reduction result) occurs. Function to execute the setting process for the result) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that even if the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur.

According to the feature H1, since the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed based on the number of game rounds executed after the measurement reference trigger is generated becomes the specific reference number, the game round is repeated. When executed, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game round from being standardized. Further, since the predetermined privilege is given when the predetermined grant opportunity occurs, the player expects the predetermined grant opportunity to occur. In this case, even if the predetermined grant trigger occurs and the predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to grant a predetermined privilege to the occurrence of a predetermined grant opportunity while not affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed.

Feature H2. Predetermined lottery means (1st to 5th) for executing a predetermined lottery process (acquisition process of reserved information and pass / fail determination process executed by the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments). A function for executing the hold information acquisition process and the pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the seventh and ninth embodiments) is provided.
The game round control means controls the game round execution means so as to have an operation result corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined grant trigger is generated when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined lottery result (time saving result).

According to the feature H2, in the configuration in which the predetermined privilege can be given when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result, the timing in which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed is not affected. , It is possible to grant a predetermined privilege based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

Feature H3. Predetermined ball-entry means (second operating port 34 in the first to fifth, fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Steps of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments to acquire special information (second hold information) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means. Function to execute the processing of S709) and
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process) (pass / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments). Function to execute) and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (functions for executing special electric start processing, special electric opening processing, special electric closing processing, and special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the first to fifth, seventh, and ninth embodiments).
Predetermined ball entry control means (1st to 5th, 7th, 9th embodiments in which the predetermined ball entry control means can be switched between a closed state and an open state) Function to execute) and
Equipped with
In each game round, the game round control means starts the game round operation and ends the game round operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, as one game round. It is intended to enable the game rounding operation to be performed.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature H3, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1 is provided, and even if a predetermined grant trigger occurs and a predetermined gaming state occurs, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to generate a transition to a predetermined gaming state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined granting opportunity while not affecting the timing at which the determination mode of the duration of the game round is changed.

Features H4. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
When the game times are executed, the number of times updating means for updating the number of times the game times are executed measured by the predetermined measuring means (the main MPU 82 in the first, third to fifth, and seventh embodiments). The function of executing the process of step S1503 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2103 in the main MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment).
Equipped with
The number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means from the measurement reference trigger, is the predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling number in the first to fourth, seventh to ninth embodiments, fixed ceiling number in the fifth embodiment). When the number of times of the first ceiling or the number of times of the second ceiling is reached), the predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode) or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the specific reference number of times is less than the predetermined number of times by a predetermined number of times.

According to the feature H4, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity reaches the predetermined number of times, the predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given, so that the game times are repeatedly executed. It is possible to give the player a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege for what has been done. In this case, the specific reference number of times is a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number of triggers. As a result, the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity, becomes the predetermined number of times, and the game times are played in the game times before the predetermined privilege or the privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given. It is possible to make different modes of determining the duration. Therefore, it is approaching that a predetermined privilege or a privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given by changing the determination mode of the duration of the game round and the number of times the game round is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, even if the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1 is provided and a predetermined grant trigger occurs and a predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H5. The mode changing means is the game number in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of executions of the game number measured by the specific measurement means after the measurement reference opportunity is generated becomes the specific reference number. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein when the mode for determining the duration of the game is changed, the average period of the duration of the gaming times is made longer than before.

According to the feature H5, the number of times the game is executed, which is measured by the predetermined measurement means from the measurement reference opportunity, becomes the predetermined number of times, and in the game times before the predetermined privilege or the privilege different from the predetermined privilege is given. Since the average period of the duration of the game is longer than before, the digestion efficiency of the game is reduced before the predetermined benefit or a different benefit is given by the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of triggers. It is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given in a short period of time. In this case, even if the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1 is provided and a predetermined grant trigger occurs and a predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H6. Multiple types of the specific reference times are set, and
The mode changing means is a continuation period of the game times in the period determining means every time the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means becomes the specific reference times after the measurement reference opportunity is generated. The game according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the determination mode of the above is changed to a predetermined determination mode (a function of executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3405 of the main MPU 82 in the seventh embodiment). Machine.

According to the feature H6, every time the number of game times executed after the measurement reference opportunity occurs becomes any one of a plurality of types of specific reference times, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed to the predetermined determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to regularly and repeatedly generate a situation in which the player pays attention to the content of the game. In this case, even if the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H1 is provided and a predetermined grant trigger occurs and a predetermined privilege is granted, the measurement reference trigger does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the granting of the predetermined privilege due to the occurrence of the predetermined grant opportunity from affecting the game content as described above.

Feature H7. In the mode changing means, the situation when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measurement means after the occurrence of the measurement reference trigger becomes the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support). Mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the period determining means does not change the mode of determining the duration of the gaming times.

According to the feature H7, in the case of a specific situation, even if the number of game times executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference number, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the mode of determining the duration of the game, it is possible to prevent the mode of determining the duration of the game from being changed.

Feature H8. The mode changing means is the game number in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of executions of the game number measured by the specific measurement means has reached the specific reference number since the measurement reference opportunity was generated. When changing the mode of determining the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.
The specific situation is a situation in which the mode of determining the duration of the game round in the period determination means is a mode of determining that the average period of the duration of the game round is shorter than in the case of the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature H7.

According to the feature H8, when the number of game times executed after the measurement reference opportunity occurs becomes the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the game is played. It is possible to create a situation in which a flashy production occurs as a production of times. In this case, in a situation where the average period of the duration of the game rounds is shorter than that in the normal gaming state, when the number of game rounds executed after the measurement reference trigger occurs becomes the specific reference number of times. The mode of determining the duration of the game is not changed. This makes it possible to prioritize situations where the digestion efficiency of game times is high.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment),
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game round operation is performed in each game round. In addition, the game rotation control means (processing for starting special figure change and processing during special figure change in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the game executing means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b). And the function to execute the process during confirmation of special figure),
A period determining means for determining the duration of the game (a function of executing a process for specifying a variable display period of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
A predetermined transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).
A specific measuring means (variable selection state counter 132 in the eighth embodiment) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
The period determination means is based on the fact that the number of times the game has been executed, which has been measured by the specific measurement means since the end of the predetermined game state, has reached the specific reference number (50 times in the eighth embodiment). A mode changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S1705 and step S3512 of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) for changing the mode of determining the duration of the game round in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, since the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed based on the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the predetermined game state ends. After that, it is possible to change the mode of determining the duration of the game times at the timing when the game times of a specific reference number are digested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game times from being standardized, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I2. The predetermined transition means does not grant the privilege based on the result of the grant determination being a predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming state is shifted to the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature I2, based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to generate a situation in which the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the privilege being granted. Further, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided, the mode of determining the duration of the game times is changed based on the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state is completed becomes the specific reference number of times. , It is possible to change the mode of determining the duration of the game times at the timing when the game times of a specific reference number of times are digested after the predetermined game state is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination mode of the duration of the game times from being standardized, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I3. The mode changing means is the game number in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of executions of the game number measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state becomes the specific reference number. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein when the mode of determining the duration of the game is changed, the average period of the duration of the gaming times is made longer than before.

According to the feature I3, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the predetermined game When a condition occurs, it is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the game times after that, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given in a short period of time.

Feature I4. In the mode changing means, the situation when the number of executions of the game times measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state becomes the specific reference number is a specific situation (second high frequency support). Mode), the gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the period determining means does not change the mode of determining the duration of the gaming times.

According to the feature I4, in the case of a specific situation, even if the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the mode of determining the duration of the game time is not changed. In a situation where it is not preferable to change the mode for determining the duration of the game, it is possible to prevent the mode for determining the duration of the game from being changed.

Feature I5. The mode changing means is the game number in the period determining means based on the fact that the number of executions of the game number measured by the specific measuring means after the end of the predetermined gaming state becomes the specific reference number. When changing the mode of determining the duration of the game, the average duration of the duration of the game is made longer than before.
The specific situation is a situation in which the determination mode of the duration of the game round in the period determination means is a determination mode in which the average period of the duration of the game round is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature I4.

According to the feature I5, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number, the average period of the duration of the game times becomes longer than before, so that the game is played. It is possible to create a situation where a flashy production occurs as a production of times. In this case, in a situation where the average period of the duration of the game times is shorter than that in the normal game state, when the number of game times executed after the predetermined game state ends becomes the specific reference number of times. The mode of determining the duration of the game is not changed. This makes it possible to prioritize situations where the digestion efficiency of game times is high.

For the configurations of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the ninth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information (second hold information) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (a function of executing the process of step S709 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). ,
Grant determination means (function for executing the validity determination process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information (win / fail determination process), and
A privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result (big hit result) in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment),
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination as one game round, so that the game round operation is performed in each game round. In addition, the game rotation control means (processing for starting special figure change and processing during special figure change in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the game executing means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b). And the function to execute the process during confirmation of special figure),
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state.
Based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity (time reduction result, ceiling time reduction), the predetermined gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state) without granting the privilege. (Second high-frequency support mode), a predetermined state setting means (a function of executing the processes of step S3604 and step S3705 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may be different depending on the gaming situation in which the predetermined transition opportunity has occurred.

According to the feature J1, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the configuration in which the privilege is given to the player, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state when the player is in the predetermined game state than when the player is in the separate game state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, when the predetermined gaming state is reached based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity, the predetermined gaming state is reached without the privilege being granted. This makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness. In this case, the execution mode of the subsequent predetermined gaming state may differ depending on the gaming situation in which the predetermined transition opportunity has occurred. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the predetermined game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. It is characterized in that the subsequent execution mode of the predetermined gaming state may be different between the case where the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state and the case where the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a situation other than the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine described in J1.

According to the feature J2, since the subsequent transition mode of the predetermined gaming state may differ depending on whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, not only whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs, but also whether or not the predetermined transition trigger occurs. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined transition opportunity occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

Feature J3. As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (first high frequency support mode) and the second predetermined gaming state in which the frequency at which the predetermined ball entry means is in the open state differs from the first predetermined gaming state (the first predetermined gaming state). 2nd high frequency support mode) and exists,
The predetermined state setting means is
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined state setting means (in step S3603 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment) for continuing the first predetermined gaming state. Function to make affirmative judgment) and
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in a gaming state that is not the first predetermined gaming state, the second predetermined state setting means (main in the ninth embodiment) so that the subsequent gaming state is the second predetermined gaming state. (Function to execute the process of step S3604 of the side MPU 82) and
The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature J1 or J2.

According to the feature J3, there are a first predetermined gaming state as a predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state in which the frequency at which the predetermined ball entry means is opened differs from the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state. Further, when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state is continued, and when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the gaming state other than the second predetermined gaming state, the subsequent gaming state is changed. It is the second predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to whether or not a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is more frequently in the open state than the second predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature J4, when the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the first predetermined gaming state in the configuration in which the predetermined ball entry means is more frequently opened in the first predetermined gaming state than in the second predetermined gaming state. By continuing the first predetermined gaming state, it becomes possible to give priority to the continuation of the first predetermined gaming state, which is an advantageous side for the player.

Feature J5. A means for terminating the predetermined gaming state (9th) based on the fact that the number of times of the game executed in the predetermined gaming state becomes the end reference number of times (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). A function of executing the subtraction process of the time saving state counter 134 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment) is provided.
When the predetermined state setting means shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger, the end reference number of times of the predetermined gaming state is a predetermined number of times (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction). The number of continuations)
When the predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine has a larger number of remaining times required to reach the end reference number of times of the predetermined gaming state at that time, and the predetermined number of times. A function for executing the processes of steps S3605 to S3610 and steps S3706 to S3708 of the main side MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment so that the number of times on the side becomes the end reference number of times in the predetermined gaming state thereafter. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the feature J5, when a predetermined transition trigger occurs in the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to make the number of times of the end reference number of the subsequent predetermined gaming state advantageous for the player.

Features J6. The predetermined transition trigger is characterized in that the result of the grant determination is generated based on the predetermined correspondence result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of J5.

According to the feature J6, based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to generate a situation in which the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the privilege being granted. In this case, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

Feature J7. A predetermined measuring means (ceiling counter 131) for measuring the number of times the game is executed, and
A function for updating the number of times the game times are executed, which is measured by the predetermined measuring means when the game times are executed (the function of executing the process of step S3703 of the main MPU 82 in the ninth embodiment). )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined transition trigger is any one of the features J1 to J6, which is generated when the number of executions of the game round measured by the predetermined measuring means becomes the predetermined number of triggers (fixed ceiling count). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J7, when the number of executions of the game times measured by the predetermined measurement means reaches the predetermined number of triggers, the predetermined game state is set. Therefore, the game state is predetermined for the repeated execution of the game times. It is possible to shift to the gaming state. In this case, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

For the configurations of features J1 to J7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information (first reserved information, second reserved information) based on the occurrence of an acquisition opportunity (in the first to fifth, seventh to ninth embodiments, step S704 in the main MPU 82 and The function of executing the process of step S709, the function of executing the process of step S2803 and step S2806 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment, and the function of step S3801 and step S3901 in the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments. Function to execute processing) and
A predetermined determination means (a function for executing the hit / fail determination process of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for performing a predetermined determination (hit / fail determination process) as to whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. ,
Based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined response result (time saving result) that the special information corresponds to the predetermined response information, the player is given a predetermined privilege (second high frequency support mode). (A function to execute the setting process for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) and
The variation display of the predetermined pattern is started, and the variation display of the predetermined pattern is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the predetermined determination. Predetermined display control means (special figure variation of the main MPU 82 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b) so as to be performed. Function to execute start processing, processing during special figure change, and processing during special figure confirmation),
Specific display control means (sound / light side MPU93, display side MPU103) that display-controls the specific display means (design display device 41) so that variable display of specific symbols (designs of symbol rows Z1 to Z3) is executed in the game round. )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined display means has a configuration in which a display range is narrower than that of the specific display means.
The predetermined privilege granting means is not a restricted situation (high probability state or time saving state in the first to eighth embodiments, high probability state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments), and is not a grantable situation (first to eighth). In the normal gaming state in the embodiment, and in the normal gaming state or the time saving state in the ninth to twelfth embodiments), the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined correspondence result. If the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restricted situation, the predetermined privilege is not given.
The predetermined display control means stops the variation display of the predetermined pattern in the predetermined display means when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result in either the grantable situation or the restriction situation. As a result, the predetermined stop result ("4" or "5") is displayed.
The specific display control means is
When the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result ("1.23" or "3.4." As the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. 1 ”) can be displayed (a function of executing the process of step S1408 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) and
When the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, it may be displayed when the result of the predetermined determination is a deviation result as the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. Restriction-corresponding means (a function of executing the process of step S1410 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for displaying a predetermined deviation result (combination of non-reach deviation symbols), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, since the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined correspondence result, the player expects the result of the predetermined determination to be the predetermined correspondence result. Further, while the predetermined privilege is given based on the result of the predetermined response being the predetermined response result in the grantable situation, the predetermined privilege is not granted even if the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restricted situation. .. This makes it possible to limit the situations in which the predetermined benefits are granted.

In this case, in the specific display means having a wider display range than the predetermined display means, if the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, the specific stop result is obtained as the stop result of the variable display of the specific pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the predetermined judgment becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, the predetermined deviation that can be displayed when the result of the predetermined judgment is the deviation result as the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern is displayed. The result is displayed. As a result, when the predetermined privilege is granted, it is possible to make it stand out that the predetermined privilege is granted, and when the predetermined response result is the predetermined response result but the predetermined privilege is not granted. It is possible to make it inconspicuous.

On the other hand, in the predetermined display means, the predetermined stop result is displayed as the stop result of the variation display of the predetermined pattern when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result regardless of the grantable status or the restriction status. Will be done. As a result, the manager of the game hall can easily visually confirm that the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result. Further, since the predetermined display means has a narrower display range than the specific display means, even if the predetermined stop result is displayed by the predetermined display means in the restricted situation, the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined response result in the restricted situation. It becomes difficult for the player to notice.

Feature K2. The specific display control means has a special display area in the specific display means depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result or the result of the predetermined determination is the deviation result in the restricted situation. It is characterized by having a display difference means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1413 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first to twelfth embodiments) for different display contents of (state suggestion area 43). Features The gaming machine described in K1.

According to the feature K2, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, even if the predetermined deviation result is displayed as the stop result of the variable display of the specific pattern in the specific display means, the special display means is special. Since the display content in the display area is different from the display content when the result of the predetermined determination is out of order, the manager of the game hall is restricted when the out-of-predetermined result is displayed in the specific display means. It is also possible to grasp from the display contents of the specific display means whether or not it is triggered by the predetermined response result in.

Feature K3. As the predetermined response result, at least the first predetermined response result (first time reduction result) and the second predetermined response result (second time reduction result) exist.
The predetermined privilege granting means differs in the content of the predetermined privilege to be given depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined correspondence result. To make
The predetermined display control means makes the content of the predetermined stop result different between the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result and the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the second predetermined correspondence result. And
The grantable response means makes the content of the specific stop result different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the grantable situation. It is a thing
The restriction response means is the said in the specific display means regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined response result or the second predetermined response result in the restriction situation. As a result of stopping the variable display of a specific pattern, the above-mentioned deviation result is displayed.
The display difference means makes the display content of the special display area different depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation. The gaming machine according to the feature K2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature K3, in the case where the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result and the second predetermined correspondence result in the grantable situation, it is the stop result of the variation display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. When the content of a certain stop result is different, it becomes possible to suggest the content of the predetermined privilege to be given after that to the player by the content of the specific stop result. On the other hand, regardless of whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, as a result of stopping the variable display of the specific pattern in the specific display means. Since the non-predetermined result is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined response result is obtained, including the type of the predetermined response result. Further, even in this case, the display content of the special display area in the specific display means differs depending on whether the result of the predetermined determination is the first predetermined correspondence result or the second predetermined correspondence result. The hall manager can grasp from the display contents of the specific display means which predetermined response result in the restricted situation is triggered when the predetermined deviation result is displayed in the specific display means. Will be.

Features K4. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means.

According to the feature K4, when the result of the predetermined determination is the predetermined correspondence result in the restricted situation, the display content of the special display area in the specific display means is different from the case where the result of the predetermined determination is out of order. Even in the configuration of the content, the display range of the special display area in the specific display means is narrower than the display range of the display area in which the specific pattern is displayed in the specific display means, so that the special display area is not conspicuous for the player. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K5. A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 34 in the eighth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
The acquisition trigger is a configuration that occurs based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means.
As the granting of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege granting means puts the gaming state into the predetermined gaming state (second high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the separate gaming state (normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, which is characterized by being transferred.

According to the feature K5, when the special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information. It is possible to shift to a predetermined gaming state. Then, in the case of the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the case of another gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Features K6. Specific privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being the grant response result (big hit result) that the special information corresponds to the grant response information. Equipped with privilege granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment).
The feature K5 is characterized in that the predetermined privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state without granting the specific privilege based on the result of the predetermined determination being the predetermined correspondence result. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature K6, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the predetermined correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state without the specific privilege being given. This makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature K7. Specific privilege (opening / closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the result of the predetermined determination being the grant response result (big hit result) that the special information corresponds to the grant response information. Equipped with privilege granting means (a function of executing the special electric start processing, the special electric opening processing, the special electric closing processing, and the special electric ending processing of the main MPU 82 in the eighth embodiment).
The restriction situation is any of the features K1 to K6, which is a specific gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the grant correspondence result is higher than that of the separate gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature K7, in the specific gaming state in which the probability that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the given correspondence result is higher than that in the separate gaming state, even if the predetermined determination result becomes the predetermined correspondence result, the predetermined privilege is not given. It becomes possible to do. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

For the configurations of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to play games favorably in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. First acquisition means (10th to 12th implementation) to acquire the first special information (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33). (Function to execute the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form) and
First grant determination (first special figure special electric control process of main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) whether or not the first special information is information corresponding to the grant of a specific privilege (open / close execution mode). In the special figure change start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments of the first grant determination means (step S4005) for executing the special figure change start process in step S4005. Function to execute processing) and
Taking the first special information as an opportunity, the first game round operation is started and the first game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination. In each of the game rounds, the first game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) so that the first game round operation is executed by the first game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a). (Function to execute special figure change start process, special figure change process, and special figure decision process) in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
The second acquisition means (10th to 12th embodiments) to acquire the second special information (second hold information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (the entry of the game ball into the special winning device 151). (Function to execute the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82) in
Second grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the grant of the specific privilege (special figure variation in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments). The process of step S4005 is executed in the special figure variation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the second grant determination means (10th to 12th embodiments) for executing the start process step S4005). Function) and
The second special information is triggered by the fact that the second game round operation is started and the second game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination. In each of the game rounds, the second game control means (in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) so that the second game round operation is executed by the second game execution means (second special figure display unit 37b). Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
Predetermined transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (time reduction state) (a function of executing setting processing for the time reduction result of the main MPU 82 and subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of end triggers (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). Based on the number of times), the predetermined end means (function for executing the end determination process of the time saving state of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) and the predetermined end means for ending the predetermined game state.
Equipped with
A configuration in which at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information is executed and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information is executed can overlap. And
In the predetermined end means, when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, the total number of times becomes the end trigger number. Even if it is, if it is in the middle of the other game round that was started before the one game round is started, the predetermined gaming state is terminated after the other game round is finished. A game machine to play.

According to the feature L1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. It becomes. In this case, even if the total number of times is the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, that one If the other game is in the middle of the other game that was started before the other game is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game is finished. As a result, the duration of the game round started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of end triggers, and the special information on the side different from the special information that triggered the game round are used as a trigger. The number of game times executed until the end of the predetermined game state varies depending on the start timing of the game times and the duration of the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. A period determining means for making the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the second special information shorter than the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with (a function of executing a function of executing a process of specifying a variation display period of the main MPU 82 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments).

According to the feature L2, the digestion efficiency of the game times is improved by repeating the game times triggered by the second special information in which the average period of the duration of the game times is relatively short in the predetermined game state. It will be possible to increase. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of ending triggers, the gaming rounds triggered by the first special information in which the average period of the duration of the gaming rounds becomes relatively long are started. By setting this, the predetermined gaming state continues until the gaming round triggered by the first special information is completed. Then, the game times executed in the predetermined game state are executed by executing the game times triggered by the second special information while the game times triggered by the first special information are being executed. It is possible to make the total number of times larger than the number of end triggers.

Feature L3. The period determination means is a means for determining by lottery the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in a situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined gaming state ( The gaming machine according to feature L2, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S4809 to S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to the feature L3, when the game round triggered by the first special information is started in the situation where the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger, the continuation period of the game round is determined by lottery. Therefore, a player who wants to increase the number of game times executed in a predetermined game state as much as possible expects that a long period is selected as the continuation period of the game times triggered by the first special information.

Feature L4. When the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2), the first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter, and
When the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3), the second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter, and
Equipped with
The first acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the second acquisition trigger is generated when a gaming ball enters the second entering means.

According to the feature L4, the player can select whether to execute the game times triggered by the first special information or the game times triggered by the second special information in the predetermined gaming state. In particular, in the configuration provided with the above features L2 or L3, the game times triggered by the second special information are repeated until the total number of times in the predetermined game state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger. When the total number of times in the predetermined game state becomes one less than the number of times of the end opportunity, the game times triggered by the first special information are executed, and the game times triggered by the first special information. By making it possible to execute the game times triggered by the second special information after the start of, it is possible to execute as many game times as possible by the end of the predetermined game state. Become.

Feature L5. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the tenth to twelfth embodiments) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature L5, the second special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to grant the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information is the corresponding information, in the case of the predetermined gaming state, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in the case of another gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

For the configurations of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. Implementation of the first acquisition means (11th and 12th) to acquire the first special information (first holding information) based on the occurrence of the first acquisition opportunity (the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33). (Function to execute the process of step S3801 of the main MPU 82 in the form) and
The first special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, whether or not the first special information is the information corresponding to the grant of the specific privilege (open / close execution mode). In the special figure change start process in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments of the first grant determination means (step S4005) for executing the special figure change start process in step S4005. Function to execute processing) and
Taking the first special information as an opportunity, the first game round operation is started and the first game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the result of the first grant determination. In each of the game rounds, the first game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) so that the first game round operation is executed by the first game execution means (first special figure display unit 37a). (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) in the first special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
The second acquisition means (11th and 12th embodiments) for acquiring the second special information (second holding information) based on the occurrence of the second acquisition opportunity (the entry of the game ball into the special winning device 151). (Function to execute the process of step S3901 of the main MPU 82) in
Second grant determination of whether or not the second special information corresponds to the grant of the specific privilege (special figure variation in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments). The process of step S4005 is executed in the special figure variation start process in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82 in the second grant determination means (11th and 12th embodiments) for executing the start process step S4005). Function) and
The second special information is triggered by the fact that the second game round operation is started and the second game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the result of the second grant determination. In each of the game rounds, the second game control means (in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) so that the second game round operation is executed by the second game execution means (second special figure display unit 37b). (Function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change process, and special figure determination process) in the second special figure special electric control process of the main MPU 82)
Predetermined transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (time saving state) (a function of executing the setting processing for the time saving result of the main MPU 82 and the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter 131 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments), and
The total number of game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information executed in the predetermined game state is the number of end triggers (first time reduction continuation number, second time reduction continuation number). Based on the number of times), the predetermined end means (function for executing the end determination process of the time saving state of the main MPU 82 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) and the predetermined end means for ending the predetermined game state.
A period determining means for making the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the second special information shorter than the average period of the duration of the game triggered by the first special information in the predetermined gaming state. (In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S4710 to S4713 of the main MPU 82, and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S4812 to S4815 of the main MPU 82).
Equipped with
A configuration in which at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the first special information is executed and at least a part of the period during which the game round triggered by the second special information is executed can overlap. And
In the predetermined end means, when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, the total number of times becomes the end trigger number. Even if it is in the middle of the other game round that was started before the one game round was started, the predetermined game state is terminated after the other game round is finished.
The period determining means sets the continuation period of the game times triggered by the first special information, which was started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined game state, in the predetermined game state. A short-term selection means (in the eleventh embodiment, the main MPU 82) that makes the period shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in another situation or makes it easier to make the period shorter. The gaming machine is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S4709 of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S4809 to step S4811 of the main MPU 82 in the twelfth embodiment).

According to the feature M1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the game times by repeating the game times triggered by the second special information in which the average period of the duration of the game times is relatively short in the predetermined game state. It becomes.

In this case, even if the total number of times is the end trigger number when one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is completed, that one If the other game is in the middle of the other game that was started before the other game is started, the predetermined game state ends after the other game is finished. As a result, the predetermined gaming state can be continued until the game round that triggered the end of the predetermined gaming state is completed.

However, in the configuration, when the game round triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where the total number of times in the predetermined gaming state is one less than the number of times of the end trigger, the first special information is triggered. The game rounds triggered by the second special information are repeatedly executed until the end of the game rounds, and the actual total number of game rounds executed in the predetermined game state is extremely larger than the number of end triggers. There is a risk that it will increase. On the other hand, the continuation period of the game times triggered by the first special information started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of the end opportunity in the predetermined game state is started in other situations in the predetermined game state. The period is shorter or more likely to be shorter than the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substantially total number of game times executed in the predetermined game state from becoming extremely larger than the number of end triggers.

Features M2. The short-term selection means sets the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information, which was started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the number of times of the end in the predetermined game state, in the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized in that the duration is equal to or less than the duration selected in the gaming times triggered by the second special information in the above.

According to the feature M2, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information started in the situation where the total number of times is one less than the end trigger number in the predetermined game state is the second special information in the predetermined game state. Since the period is less than or equal to the duration selected in the triggered game, it is possible to prevent the actual total number of games executed in the predetermined game state from becoming larger than the end trigger. It becomes.

Features M3. When the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PA2), the first ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the game ball to enter, and
When the game ball flows down the second area (right area PA3), the second ball entry means (special winning device 151) that allows the game ball to enter, and
Equipped with
The first acquisition trigger occurs when a game ball enters the first ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the second acquisition trigger is generated when a gaming ball enters the second entering means.

According to the feature M3, the player can select whether to execute the game times triggered by the first special information or the game times triggered by the second special information in the predetermined gaming state.

Features M4. Predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 151 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The predetermined ball entry control means (a function of executing the normal power control process of the main MPU 82) capable of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the closed state and the open state, and
Equipped with
The second acquisition opportunity occurs when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state than in another gaming state (normal gaming state).

According to the feature M4, the second special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means that is switched between the closed state and the open state, and the second special information is used to grant the specific privilege. In the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the information corresponds to the corresponding information, the predetermined ball entry means is more likely to be in the open state in the case of the predetermined gaming state than in the case of the separate gaming state. Therefore, the predetermined gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features M1 to M4, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature M group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to play games favorably in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A control means (main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes predetermined various processes (specific control processes), and
Information storage means (main side RAM 84 in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed in the control means, and
Equipped with
The information storage means is
A first storage area (work area 211 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed, and
A second storage area (unused in the thirteenth embodiment) that is continuous with the first storage area at the address of the information storage means and is not written with information when the predetermined various processes are executed. Area (address Y (r + 3) to address Y (r + 5)) and
A third storage area (for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is continuously written to the second storage area at the address of the information storage means and information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed. Stack area 212) and
Equipped with
The game machine includes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when a predetermined information erasure trigger (negative determination or execution of set value update process in step S4918) occurs. It is characterized by having an erasing execution means (a function of executing a RAM clearing process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing an information erasing process (RAM clearing process) in the storage area of the information storage means. A game machine.

According to the feature N1, the first storage area and the third storage area are provided as the storage areas for writing the information when the control means executes various predetermined processes, so that the information can be written. It is possible to use the target storage area properly in the first storage area and the third storage area according to the role. Further, in the address of the information storage means, a second storage area is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area, and the second storage area contains information when predetermined various processes are executed. Since writing is not performed, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first storage area and the third storage area in the address of the information storage means.

In this case, when a predetermined information erasure trigger occurs, not only the first storage area and the third storage area used when the predetermined various processes are executed, but also the predetermined various processes are executed. The information erasing process is executed including the second storage area which is not used in the case. As a result, instead of individually designating the first storage area and the third storage area and executing the information erasing process, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area that are continuous at the address of the information storage means It is possible to execute the information erasure process by specifying all at once. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when the information erasing processing is executed.

Feature N2. The erasing execution means is the information storage means having a continuous address range from a predetermined address (address Y (3)) of the first storage area to a specific address (address Y (s + 1)) of the third storage area. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that the information erasing process is executed for the storage area in the above.

According to the feature N2, even if the second storage area is provided as an unused area between the first storage area and the third storage area, the third storage area is connected to a predetermined address. Since the information erasing process may be executed for the storage area of a series of address ranges up to a specific address in the storage area, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing the information erasing process.

Feature N3. Predetermined non-setting means for setting non-predeterminable setting so that information is not written to the second storage area (a function of executing the processes of step S4903 and step S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). ,
When the information erasing process is executed, the predetermined impossibility canceling means (function for executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for canceling the predetermined impossibility setting is executed.
The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or N2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature N1 or N2.

According to the feature N3, since the information cannot be written to the second storage area due to the non-predetermined setting, the information is erroneously written to the second storage area. It is possible to avoid it. In this case, when the information erasing process is executed, the non-predetermined setting is intentionally canceled. As a result, in a configuration in which information is not erroneously written to the second storage area, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area that are continuous at the address of the information storage means are set. It is possible to specify all of them and execute the information erasure process.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the non-predeterminable setting means performs the non-predeterminable setting after the information erasing process is executed.

According to the feature N4, even if the non-predetermined setting is canceled when the information erasure process is executed, the non-predeterminable setting is performed after the information erasure process is executed. As a result, after the information erasing process is executed, it is possible to re-enter the state in which the information is not erroneously written to the second storage area.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to feature N3 or N4, wherein the non-predeterminable setting means performs the non-predeterminable setting when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to the feature N5, since the predetermined impossibility setting is made when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the information is erroneously written to the second storage area before the game is started. It is possible to make it in a state where it will not be damaged.

Feature N6. A predetermined setting area (protect register 223c) that becomes information of one of the binary information when the non-predeterminable setting is performed and becomes the other information of the binary information when the non-predeterminable setting is canceled. Have and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means (RAM management circuit 225) for excluding the second storage area from the information writing target when the information in the predetermined setting area is one of the information. The gaming machine according to any one of N3 to N5.

According to the feature N6, the information in the predetermined setting area is used as one of the binary information in order to set the non-predeterminable setting, and the information in the predetermined setting area is used as the binary information in order to cancel the non-predeterminable setting. The other information may be used. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the non-predeterminable setting and the processing load for canceling the non-predeterminable setting.

Feature N7. The control means is
A predetermined control execution means (a function of executing a specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the predetermined various processes, and a predetermined control execution means.
Another control execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing another various processes (non-specific control process), and
Equipped with
The information storage means includes a fourth storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment) in which information is written when the other various processes are executed.
In the first storage area and the third storage area, information is written when the predetermined various processes are executed, while information is written when the other various processes are executed. Never get sick
In the fourth storage area, information is written when the other various processes are executed, while information is not written when the predetermined various processes are executed.
The game according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the erasing execution means does not execute the information erasing process for the fourth storage area when the predetermined information erasing trigger occurs. Machine.

According to the feature N7, when predetermined various processes are executed in the control means, the first storage area and the third storage area in the information storage means are the targets for writing information, and the control means executes another various processes. In this case, the fourth storage area in the information storage means is the target for writing information. This makes it possible to distinguish the type of storage area to which information is written according to the type of processing executed by the control means. In this case, in a configuration in which the information erasing process is executed including the second storage area which is an unused area when the predetermined information erasing opportunity occurs and the predetermined various processes are executed, the fourth Information erasure processing is not executed for the storage area. As a result, in a configuration in which the information erasing process is executed including the second storage area in order to simplify the processing configuration, the first storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area are also executed for the information erasing process. It becomes possible to distinguish between.

Feature N8. Predetermined non-setting means for setting non-predeterminable setting so that information is not written to the second storage area (a function of executing the processes of step S4903 and step S7506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). ,
When the information erasing process is executed, the predetermined impossibility canceling means (function for executing the process of step S7501 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for canceling the predetermined impossibility setting is executed.
Another erasing means (information abnormality monitoring of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes information erasing processing for the fourth storage area when a specific information erasing trigger (affirmative determination in step S7602) occurs. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature N7, wherein when the information erasing process is executed for the fourth storage area by the separate erasing means, the predetermined impossibility setting is not canceled.

According to the feature N8, in the configuration in which the information erasing process is not executed for the fourth storage area when a predetermined information erasing trigger occurs, the fourth storage occurs when a specific information erasing trigger occurs. Information erasure processing is executed for the area. This makes it possible to execute the information erasing process also for the fourth storage area. In this case, when the information erasing process is executed, the non-predetermined setting is not canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined impossibility setting from being canceled in a situation where the information erasing process is not executed for the second storage area.

For the configurations of features N1 to N8, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature N group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the processing is suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. Means for executing the profit-giving process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) (function for executing the process of step S805 of the main MPU 82) in an manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage, and
Situation generating means (in the thirteenth embodiment) for making it possible to set the set value to be used in a settable state (a situation in which the set value update process in the thirteenth embodiment is executed). (Function to make an affirmative judgment in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82) and
Corresponding to the case where a specific event (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33 and second operating port 34) occurs as a result of the game being executed. A history storage execution means (a function for executing normal ball entry management processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for storing the history information of the game to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251).
Information derivation means (execution of result calculation processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Function to do) and
Aspect notification control means (main side in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the mode notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the mode information derived by the information derivation means is notified. Function to execute the second timer interrupt processing and display processing of MPU82) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect information can be notified by the aspect notification means even in the configurable situation.

According to the feature O1, since the set value to be used is set, the player expects that the set value to be used is the target to be used. Further, when a specific event occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and modification of the history information. In addition, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is notified. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, the mode information can be notified by the mode notification means even if the setting is possible. This makes it possible to set the set value in a mode corresponding to the content of the notified mode information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature O2. Execution of the means for controlling the setting notification means (setting display device 205) so that the setting value is notified in the configurable situation (steps S7203 and steps S7207 to S7212 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature O1, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature O2, in the settable situation, the set value is notified by the setting notification means, and the aspect information is notified by the aspect notification means. As a result, the manager of the game hall is in a state where the desired set value based on the content of the aspect information is notified by the setting notification means while confirming the content of the aspect information notified by the aspect notification means. It is possible to perform the setting work until it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency for setting a desired set value based on the content of the aspect information.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O2, wherein the setting notification means is mounted on a mounting surface (element mounting surface of the main control board 81) on which the mode notification means is mounted.

According to the feature O3, since the setting notification means is mounted on the mounting surface on which the aspect notification means is mounted, the content of the aspect information notified by the aspect notification means and the setting notified by the setting notification means. It will be easier to check both values.

Feature O4. When the supply of the operating power is started, the situation generating means indicates that the situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 195 are performed, and the setting update display flag is set to ". It is intended to make the above-mentioned configurable situation based on the occurrence of "1").
The aspect notification control means is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started and the settable state is reached, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started when the settable state is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3.

According to the feature O4, when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting is possible based on the occurrence of the situation trigger. Therefore, in order to set the set value, the operating power is supplied again. It will be necessary to start. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of improperly setting a set value. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started and the settable state is reached, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started when the settable state is started. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the mode information from being started before the manager of the game hall starts the work for setting the set value.

Feature O5. Check control means for causing the aspect notification means to display a check display for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the aspect notification means (processing of steps S4926 and step S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the check control means starts the check display in the mode notification means when the settable status is completed.

According to the feature O5, a check display is performed so that it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the mode notification means. Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms the check display to make the mode notification means abnormal. It becomes possible to identify whether or not the occurrence of. In this case, if a configurable status occurs, the check display is started when the configurable status ends. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the notification corresponding to the mode information by the mode notification means in the configurable situation over the check display of the mode notification means.

Feature O6. When the supply of the operating power is started, the situation generating means indicates that the situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 195 are performed, and the setting update display flag is set to ". It is intended to make the above-mentioned configurable situation based on the occurrence of "1").
When the mode notification control means becomes a predetermined situation (a situation in which the setting confirmation process and the set value update process are not executed) that does not become the settable state when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed. Is completed, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started (the execution of the second timer interrupt processing is permitted in step S4932 of the main processing in the thirteenth embodiment, so that the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed. The gaming machine according to feature O5, wherein the notification of the base value in 201 to 204 is started).

According to the feature O6, when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting is possible based on the occurrence of the situation trigger. Therefore, in order to set the set value, the operating power is supplied again. It will be necessary to start. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of improperly setting a set value. In this case, when the predetermined situation that does not become the settable state is reached when the supply of the operating power is started, the notification corresponding to the mode information is started after the check display is completed. As a result, when the settable status is not reached, the check display can be prioritized over the start of the notification corresponding to the mode information.

Feature O7. A mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of the mode information derived by the information derivation means is provided.
The mode notification control means is
Sequential notification control means (step of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the mode notification means so that the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the mode information storage means is sequentially executed. (Function to execute the process of S7408 to step S7414) and
When the check display ends after the end of the configurable status, the mode notification means so that the notification is executed from the mode information of the type that was the notification target immediately before the check display starts. (A function to execute the processes of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) and the notification resuming means for controlling the above.
The gaming machine according to the feature O5 or O6, which comprises the above-mentioned feature O5 or O6.

According to the feature O7, since the mode notification means sequentially executes the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information, the manager of the game hall grasps the contents of the plurality of mode information by checking the mode notification means. Is possible. In this case, when the check display after the end of the configurable status ends, the notification is executed from the type of mode information that was the notification target immediately before the check display starts. As a result, after the check display is completed, the manager of the game hall can confirm from the content of the type of mode information interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Feature O8. The sequential notification control means changes the type of the mode information to be notified based on the elapse of a predetermined notification continuation period (display continuation period).
When the check display ends after the settable status ends, the notification resuming means executes notification from the type of mode information that was the notification target immediately before the check display starts. The notification corresponding to the mode information of the type is to be performed over the predetermined notification continuation period regardless of the remaining predetermined notification continuation period when the check display is started. The gaming machine according to feature O7, characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature O8, when the check display ends after the settable status ends, the notification is executed from the type of mode information that was the notification target immediately before the check display starts. , The notification of the mode information of the type is executed for a predetermined notification continuation period from the end of the check display. As a result, after the check display is completed, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the content of the type of mode information interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features O1 to O8, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature O group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic P group>
Features P1. Display target storage means (calculation result storage area 252 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing a plurality of display target information (base values), and
The predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) are controlled so that the display corresponding to each of the plurality of display target information stored in the display target storage means is sequentially executed, and predetermined. Predetermined display control means for changing the type of the display target information to be displayed based on the elapse of the display continuation period (display continuation period) (second timer interrupt processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment and Function to execute display processing) and
Equipped with
When the predetermined situation in which the display corresponding to the display target information is not performed ends, the predetermined display control means displays from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the predetermined situation starts. The display corresponding to the display target information of the type is to be executed, and the predetermined display continuation period is irrespective of the remaining predetermined display continuation period when the predetermined situation is started. A gaming machine comprising a display resuming means (a function of executing the processes of steps S7419 and S7420 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment).

According to the feature P1, the predetermined display means sequentially executes the display corresponding to each of the plurality of display target information, and the type of the display target information to be displayed is changed based on the elapse of the predetermined display continuation period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the contents of a plurality of display target information by confirming the predetermined display means. In this case, when the predetermined situation ends, the display is executed from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the predetermined situation starts, and the display target information of the type is displayed. It is executed for a predetermined display continuation period after the end of the predetermined situation. As a result, after the end of the predetermined situation, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the content of the display target information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the predetermined situation.

Feature P2. The predetermined display means is provided with a separate display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4926 and S7302 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) to display differently from the display corresponding to the display target information. ,
The predetermined situation is a situation in which the separate display is performed.
When the separate display ends, the display resuming means causes the display to be executed from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the separate display starts. It is characterized in that the display corresponding to the display target information of the type is executed over the predetermined display continuation period regardless of the remaining predetermined display continuation period when the separate display is started. The gaming machine according to the feature P1.

According to the feature P2, when another display is performed by the predetermined display means, the display corresponding to the display target information is not performed, so that the separate display can be given priority. In this case, when the separate display ends, the display is executed from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the separate display starts, and the display of the display target information of the type is displayed. It is executed for a predetermined display continuation period from the end of the separate display. As a result, after the end of the separate display, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the content of the display target information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the separate display.

Feature P3. The separate display control means is described in feature P2, wherein the separate display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that enables confirmation of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the predetermined display means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature P3, a check display is performed so that it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the predetermined display means. Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms the check display and causes an abnormality in the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of. In this case, when the check display is completed with the configuration of the above feature P1, the display is executed from the display target information of the type that was the display target immediately before the check display is started. , The display of the display target information of the relevant type is executed for a predetermined display continuation period from the end of the check display. As a result, after the check display is completed, it is possible to sufficiently secure an opportunity for the manager of the game hall to confirm the content of the display target information of the type interrupted by the occurrence of the check display.

Features P4. The predetermined display control means is
In the case of the first situation (the situation where the set value update process is executed) when the supply of the operating power is started, the means for starting the display of the display target information before the check display is started (the first). The function of executing the process of step S5101 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) and
In the second situation (the situation where the setting confirmation process and the set value update process are not executed) when the supply of the operating power is started, the display of the display target information is started until the check display is completed. A means for starting the display of the display target information after the check display is completed (a function of executing the process of step S4932 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to the feature P3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature P4, depending on the situation when the supply of the operating power is started, the display of the display target information is started before the check display is started, and the display is displayed until the check display is finished. It is possible to cause a case where the display of the display target information is started after the check display is completed without starting the display of the target information.

Feature P5. Means for executing the profit-giving process (step S805 of the main MPU 82) (function for executing the process of step S805 of the main MPU 82) in an manner corresponding to the set value corresponding to the player's advantage, and
When the supply of operating power is started, the situation occurrence trigger (both the pressing operation of the reset button 196 and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 195 are performed, and "1" is set in the setting update display flag. It is possible to set the set value to be used before the check display is started based on the occurrence of (the setting in the thirteenth embodiment). A situation generating means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S4908 or step S4915 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) to be a situation in which the value update process is executed).
Equipped with
The first situation occurs when the configurable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second situation occurs when the settable situation does not occur.

According to the feature P5, since the set value to be used is set, the player expects that the more advantageous set value is set to be used. In this case, if the configurable status occurs when the supply of operating power is started, the display of the display target information is started before the check display is started, and the supply of operating power is started. If the setting possible status does not occur, the display target information is not started until the check display is completed, and the display target information is started after the check display is completed. As a result, when the settable status is reached, the display target information can be displayed in the settable status, and when the settable status is not set, the display target information is displayed after the check display is completed. It will be possible to get started.

Feature P6. Corresponding to the case where a specific event (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33 and second operating port 34) occurs as a result of the game being executed. A history storage execution means (a function for executing normal ball entry management processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for storing the history information of the game to be played in the history storage means (normal counter area 251).
Information derivation means (execution of result calculation processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Function to do) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, wherein the display target information is the aspect information.

According to the feature P6, when a specific event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and modification of the history information. In addition, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is displayed. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a specific event. In this case, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described in the above feature P1.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features P1 to P6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform display by a predetermined display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Features Q1. The first processing group execution means (function for executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (specific control processing) of the first processing group, and
The second processing group execution means (function for executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (non-specific control processing) of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. 2nd processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the 13th and 14th embodiments), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
As the processing of the second processing group, the second processing group executing means determines a predetermined event (an event to be affirmed in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, and an affirmative determination in step S6009). When an event, an event to be affirmed in step S6014, or an event to be affirmed in step S6505 has occurred, the predetermined event occurrence information (abnormality flag 213l to 213t) is set in the second processing corresponding storage area. (1) ”is stored) means for executing the generation information storage process (function for executing the process of step S6004, step S6010, step S6015 or step S6506 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) Equipped with
The first processing group executing means is a special processing executing means (13th) that executes special processing when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. In the embodiment of the main MPU 82, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6666, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620, step S6622 or A function to execute the process of step S6624, in the 14th embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and the step. It is characterized by having a function of executing affirmative judgment processing in S8108, affirmative judgment processing in step S8111, affirmative judgment processing in step S8115, and affirmative judgment processing in step S8118). A game machine.

According to the feature Q1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, it is stored in the processing of the first processing group. The corresponding special processing is performed. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. Even if the configuration has a margin, it is possible to execute special processing for the occurrence of a predetermined event as the processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Features Q2. The first processing group executing means is a means for executing a granting trigger processing for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82. A function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622. A function of executing the processing of S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the special process is a process for invalidating the grant trigger of the privilege specified in the grant trigger process.

According to the feature Q2, it is specified whether or not the privilege granting trigger has occurred in the granting trigger processing which is the processing of the first processing group, and a predetermined event is generated in the generation information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group. When the occurrence of the above is specified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process, the trigger for granting the above privilege is invalidated by the special process which is the process of the first process group. .. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to collectively perform the process for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the process for invalidating the privilege granting opportunity in the processing of the first processing group while providing a margin.

Features Q3. The first processing group execution means is
As the process of the first processing group, when it is specified in the grant trigger process that the privilege grant trigger has occurred, the means for executing the reservation process for reserving the grant of the privilege (14th). The function of executing the process of step S8017 to step S8018 or step S8021 to step S8022 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment) and
As the processing of the first processing group, when the special processing is not executed after the reservation processing is executed, a means for executing the privilege granting processing for granting the privilege reserved in the reservation processing ( The function of executing the process of step S8004 or step S8011 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature Q2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature Q3, when it is specified that the privilege granting opportunity has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the granting of the privilege is temporarily reserved, and then the second processing group is processed. If the process of invalidating the privilege grant trigger is not executed in the process of the first process group without storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the process-corresponding storage area, the process of the first process group once described above. Reserved benefits will be granted. As a result, even if the generation information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant trigger process and the privilege grant process in the process of the first process group, the predetermined event does not occur. Is able to grant the privilege to the opportunity to grant the privilege, and to invalidate the opportunity to grant the privilege when a predetermined event occurs so that the privilege is not granted.

Features Q4. The reservation process is a process of acquiring the numerical information used in the lottery process from the numerical information updating means (hit random number counter C1, type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3).
The gaming machine according to feature Q3, wherein the privilege granting process is a process of storing the numerical information in the storage area corresponding to the first process so that the numerical information can be used in the lottery process.

According to the feature Q4, when a privilege granting opportunity occurs, the bonus is granted in a configuration in which the numerical information is acquired from the numerical information updating means and the lottery process is executed using the acquired numerical information. When an opportunity occurs, the numerical information is acquired from the numerical information updating means, but it is in a reserved state, and when it is specified that a predetermined event has not occurred after that, the reserved numerical information is obtained. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process so that it can be used in the lottery process. As a result, it is possible to obtain the numerical information at the timing when the privilege granting opportunity occurs, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the above-mentioned feature Q3.

Features Q5. The first processing group executing means stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area in a situation where the privilege is reserved in the reservation processing as the processing of the first processing group. It is provided with a means for executing an information specifying process for specifying whether or not it is present (a function for executing the process of step S8002 or step S8009 of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment).
The special process executing means is characterized in that the special process is executed when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. The gaming machine according to the feature Q3 or Q4.

According to the feature Q5, the information specifying process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process is executed in the situation where the grant of the privilege is reserved in the reserved process. When it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored, the privilege granting opportunity is invalidated as a special process. This makes it possible to prevent the information identification process from being executed in a situation where the grant of benefits is not reserved.

Features Q6. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the 14th embodiment) is provided.
The predetermined unit process includes the generated information storage process, the special process, the grant trigger process, the reservation process, and the privilege grant process.
Features Q3 to feature Q3 to feature that the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so that the generated information storage processing has a processing order after the processing of the first processing group. The gaming machine according to any one of Q5.

According to the feature Q6, as described above, the generated information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group, is performed in the predetermined unit processing in one processing time in the processing order after the processing of the first processing group. It is possible to produce excellent effects.

Features Q7. In addition to the generated information storage process, the predetermined unit process includes processes of the second process group (information clear process, test firing test process, non-specific control timer update process, information abnormality monitoring process, and information abnormality monitoring process in the 14th embodiment). Check processing) is included
The feature is that the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so that the processing of the second processing group has a processing order after the processing of the first processing group. The gaming machine described in Q6.

According to the feature Q7, in the predetermined unit processing in one processing time, the processing of the second processing group is aggregated as the processing order after the processing of the first processing group, so that the predetermined unit in one processing time is performed. In the processing, it is not necessary to repeatedly perform the transition between the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group. Further, even in this configuration, the configuration of the above feature Q3 is provided, and if it is specified that an opportunity for granting the privilege has occurred in the processing of the first processing group, the granting of the privilege is temporarily reserved, and then the grant of the privilege is reserved. When the process of the first process group does not execute the process of invalidating the privilege granting opportunity without storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the process of the second process group. The privilege once reserved in the processing of the first processing group is given. As a result, even if the generation information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, is not executed between the grant trigger process and the privilege grant process in the process of the first process group, the predetermined event does not occur. Is able to grant the privilege to the opportunity to grant the privilege, and to invalidate the opportunity to grant the privilege when a predetermined event occurs so that the privilege is not granted.

Features Q8. When the first processing group execution means identifies that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group, the first processing group corresponding storage area is given trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d). Means for executing the grant trigger process for storing (setting "1" in each confirmation flag) (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). , A function to execute the process of step S5621 or step S5623).
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q7, wherein the special processing is a processing for erasing the granting trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing.

According to the feature Q8, when it is specified that the privilege grant trigger is generated in the grant trigger process which is the process of the first process group, the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then the grant trigger information is stored. When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process by specifying that the predetermined event has occurred in the generated information storage process which is the process of the second process group, the first process is performed. In the special process which is the process of the group, the above-mentioned grant trigger information of the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the processing for invalidating the privilege granting trigger while having a margin are performed. It can be done collectively.

Features Q9. The first processing group executing means is a means (13th embodiment) for executing a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. The function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature Q8, wherein the generated information storage process and the special process are executed after the grant trigger process is executed and before the privilege grant process is executed.

According to the feature Q9, the generation information storage process which is the process of the second process group and the special process which is the process of the first process group are performed after the grant trigger process which is the process of the first process group is executed. It is executed before the privilege granting process, which is the process of the first processing group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. If a predetermined event has occurred, it is possible to invalidate the privilege granting opportunity before the privilege granting process is executed, while allowing a margin.

Features Q10. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function of executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided.
The first processing group executing means is a means (first) for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. 13 is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment).
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process.
The predetermined unit process includes the generated information storage process, the grant trigger process, the privilege grant process, and the information identification process.
The generated information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information specifying process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed, and the privilege granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature Q9, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

According to the feature Q10, in the configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes the generated information storage process, the grant trigger process, the privilege grant process, and the information specifying process, the generated information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed. Just by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information identification process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Features Q11. The first processing group executing means is a means (first) for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main MPU 82, and in the fourteenth embodiment, the step of the main MPU 82. S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S8111, step S8115, a function of executing the processing of step S8118).
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process.
The second processing group executing means, as the processing of the second processing group, is means for executing the generation information erasing processing (13th, 14th) for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information after the information specifying processing is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q10, which comprises a function of executing information clearing processing of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature Q11, when it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing in the information specifying processing which is the processing of the first processing group, it is the processing of the first processing group. In the configuration in which the special processing is executed, after the information specifying processing is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased by the occurrence information erasing processing which is the processing of the second processing group. As a result, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the predetermined event occurrence information is deleted in the processing of the second processing group while the special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information. Is possible.

Features Q12. The second processing group executing means is a means for executing an event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether or not the predetermined event has occurred as the processing of the second processing group (steps in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). A function for executing the processes of S6001 to step S6003, step S6007 to step S6009, or step S6013 to step S6014) is provided.
When it is specified by the event occurrence specifying process that the predetermined event has occurred, the occurrence information storage process stores the predetermined event occurrence information in the second processing corresponding storage area. It is a composition,
The gaming machine according to feature Q11, wherein the occurrence information erasing process is executed before the event occurrence specifying process is executed when the event occurrence specifying process is executed.

According to the feature Q12, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence specifying process which is the process of the second process group, the second process is the event information storage process which is the process of the second process group. Occurrence to erase the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence identification process is executed when the event occurrence identification process is executed in the configuration in which the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the process corresponding storage area. Information erasure processing is executed. That is, the event occurrence specifying process and the event occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once deleted. As a result, when the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process is executed by the process of the second process group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. In the configuration in which the special processing in is executed in the processing of the first processing group, it is appropriate in the processing of the second processing group while preventing the special processing from being executed multiple times by storing the predetermined event occurrence information once. It is possible to execute the occurrence information erasing process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information at various timings.

Features Q13. The first processing group executing means is based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as the processing of the first processing group. , The predetermined measurement start to start the measurement of the predetermined monitoring period using the predetermined measurement storage area (special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first processing corresponding storage area. A means for executing the process (a function for executing the process of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) is provided.
In the generated information storage process, when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the second process correspondence storage area is regarded as the occurrence of the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q12, characterized in that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the game machine.

According to the feature Q13, when the predetermined response event occurs in the situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the occurrence of the predetermined event. In a configuration in which is stored and special processing is executed, it is possible to perform processing for measuring a predetermined monitoring period using a predetermined storage area for measurement in the processing of the first processing group.

Features Q14. The first processing group executing means is means for executing a processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature Q13, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302 of the main MPU 82).

According to the feature Q14, in a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the process of the first process group is executed, the configuration of the feature Q13 is provided and a predetermined measurement memory is provided. The process for measuring the predetermined monitoring period using the area is performed in the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to consolidate the processes for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processes of the first process group.

Features Q15. The second processing group execution means is based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as the processing of the second processing group. , A specific measurement start process for starting measurement during a specific monitoring period is executed using a specific measurement storage area (1st to 8th winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second processing-compatible storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Q13 or Q14, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to the feature Q15, the process for performing the measurement of the specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of the specific measurement start event is included in the process of the second process group. Thereby, the processing for measuring various periods can be distributed into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the unit of the type of the period to be measured.

Features Q16. The second processing group execution means is the first processing group when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period as the processing of the second processing group. 2. It is characterized in that it is provided with means for executing a process of storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the process-corresponding storage area (a function of executing the process of step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). Features The gaming machine described in Q15.

According to the feature Q16, when the predetermined response event occurs in the situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group, the predetermined event occurs. 2 In a situation where predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the processing corresponding storage area and special processing is executed, and a specific corresponding event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. Even when a specific corresponding event has occurred, predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area and special processing is executed. As a result, the process of measuring each period for specifying whether or not an event that triggers the storage of predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process has occurred is a unit of the type of period to be measured. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the processing into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

For the configurations of features Q1 to Q16, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic R group>
Features R1. The first processing group execution means (function for executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (specific control processing) of the first processing group, and
The second processing group execution means (function for executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (non-specific control processing) of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. 2nd processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the 13th and 14th embodiments), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means is
As the processing of the second processing group, a predetermined event (an event to be affirmed in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, an event to be affirmed in step S6009, or an affirmative determination in step S6014). Process of step S6001 to step S6003, step S6007 to step S6009 or step S6013 to step S6014 in the 13th and 14th embodiments to execute the event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether or not the event has occurred. Function to execute) and
As the processing of the second processing group, when it is specified by the event occurrence specifying processing that the predetermined event has occurred, the predetermined event occurrence information (abnormality flag 213l to Execution of the means for executing the generation information storage process (setting "1" in any of 213r) (the process of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments). Function to do) and
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means is
Means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area (in the thirteenth embodiment, steps S6601, step S6604, and step S6607 of the main MPU 82, A function to execute the processing of step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621, in the fourteenth embodiment, step S8002, step S8009, step S8102, step S8105, step S8108, step S811, and step of the main MPU 82. (Function to execute the processing of S8115 and step S8118) and
As the processing of the first processing group, a special processing executing means for executing a special processing when it is specified in the information specifying processing that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing ( In the thirteenth embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6666, step S6608, step S6669, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step of the main MPU 82. Function to execute the process of S6622, in the 14th embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and step S8108. A function of executing affirmative judgment in step S8111, affirmative judgment in step S8115, affirmative judgment in step S8118), and
Equipped with
When the event occurrence specifying process is executed, the second processing group executing means erases the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence specifying process is executed as the processing of the second processing group. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing information erasing processing (a function for executing information clearing processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to the feature R1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the processing of the second processing group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, it is stored in the processing of the first processing group. The corresponding special processing is performed. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. Even if the configuration has a margin, it is possible to execute special processing for the occurrence of a predetermined event as the processing of the first processing group. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Further, when it is specified that a predetermined event has occurred in the event occurrence specifying process which is the process of the second process group, the second process corresponding storage area is performed in the generated information storage process which is the process of the second process group. In the configuration in which the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in, when the event occurrence identification process is executed, the occurrence information deletion process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information is performed before the event occurrence identification process is executed. Will be executed. That is, the event occurrence specifying process and the event occurrence information storage process are executed after the predetermined event occurrence information is once deleted. As a result, when the process for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second process is executed by the process of the second process group and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. In the configuration in which the special processing in is executed in the processing of the first processing group, it is appropriate in the processing of the second processing group while preventing the special processing from being executed multiple times by storing the predetermined event occurrence information once. It is possible to execute the occurrence information erasing process for erasing the predetermined event occurrence information at various timings.

Feature R2. The feature is that the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed and before the occurrence information erasing process corresponding to the next execution of the event occurrence specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature R1.

According to the feature R2, when it is specified that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process in the information specifying process which is the process of the first process group, it is the process of the first process group. In the configuration in which the special processing is executed, after the information specifying processing is executed, the predetermined event occurrence information is erased by the occurrence information erasing processing which is the processing of the second processing group. As a result, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the predetermined event occurrence information is deleted in the processing of the second processing group while the special processing is executed for the predetermined event occurrence information. Is possible.

Feature R3. The first processing group executing means is a means for executing a granting trigger processing for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82. A function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622. A function of executing the processing of S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the special process is a process for invalidating the grant trigger of the privilege specified in the grant trigger process.

According to the feature R3, it is specified whether or not the privilege granting trigger has occurred in the granting trigger processing which is the processing of the first processing group, and a predetermined event is generated in the generation information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group. When the occurrence of the above is specified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the trigger for granting the above privilege is invalidated by the special processing which is the processing of the first processing group. .. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to collectively perform the process for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the process for invalidating the privilege granting opportunity in the processing of the first processing group while providing a margin.

Feature R4. When the first processing group execution means identifies that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group, the first processing group corresponding storage area is given trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d). Means for executing the grant trigger process for storing (setting "1" in each confirmation flag) (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). , A function to execute the process of step S5621 or step S5623).
The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3, wherein the special processing is a processing for erasing the granting trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing.

According to the feature R4, when it is specified that the privilege grant trigger is generated in the grant trigger process which is the process of the first process group, the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then the grant trigger information is stored. When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process by specifying that the predetermined event has occurred in the generated information storage process which is the process of the second process group, the first process is performed. In the special process which is the process of the group, the above-mentioned grant trigger information of the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the processing for invalidating the privilege granting trigger while having a margin are performed. It can be done collectively.

Feature R5. The first processing group executing means is a means (13th embodiment) for executing a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. The function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature R4, wherein the event occurrence specifying process and the information specifying process are executed after the granting trigger process is executed and before the privilege granting process is executed. ..

According to the feature R5, the event occurrence identification process which is the process of the second process group and the information identification process which is the process of the first process group are performed after the grant trigger process which is the process of the first process group is executed. This is executed before the privilege grant processing, which is the processing of the first processing group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. If a predetermined event has occurred, it is possible to invalidate the privilege granting opportunity before the privilege granting process is executed, while allowing a margin.

Feature R6. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function of executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided.
The predetermined unit process includes the event occurrence specifying process, the granting opportunity process, the privilege granting process, and the information specifying process.
The event occurrence specifying process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed, and the privilege granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature R5, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

According to the feature R6, in the configuration in which the event occurrence identification process, the grant trigger process, the privilege grant process, and the information identification process are included in the predetermined unit process, the event occurrence identification process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed. Just by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information identification process is executed after the event occurrence identification process is executed and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features R1 to R6, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic S group>
Features S1. The first processing group execution means (function for executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (specific control processing) of the first processing group, and
The second processing group execution means (function for executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (non-specific control processing) of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. 2nd processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the 13th and 14th embodiments), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
The first processing group executing means is based on the occurrence of a predetermined measurement start event (step S6104 or step S6303 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as the processing of the first processing group. , The predetermined measurement start to start the measurement of the predetermined monitoring period using the predetermined measurement storage area (special electric monitoring delay timer counter 211b, general electric monitoring delay timer counter 211c) provided in the first processing corresponding storage area. A means for executing the process (a function for executing the process of step S6106 or step S6305 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) is provided.
The second processing group execution means, as the processing of the second processing group, when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response A gaming machine comprising a predetermined corresponding execution means for executing a process (a function of executing the process of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to the feature S1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the predetermined response event occurs in the situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response process is executed in the processing of the second processing group. As a result, the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined response event has occurred is executed not as the process of the first process group but as the process of the second process group, so that the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to have a margin in. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the processing in the control means.

Further, in a configuration in which the predetermined response process is executed in the process of the second processing group when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined response event is specified. It becomes possible to perform the process for measuring the predetermined monitoring period using the measurement storage area in the process of the first process group.

Feature S2. The first processing group executing means is means for executing a processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined measurement start event has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature S1, wherein the main MPU 82 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S6103 or step S6302).

According to the feature S2, in a configuration in which a process for specifying whether or not a predetermined measurement start event has occurred in the process of the first process group is executed, the configuration of the feature S1 is provided and a predetermined measurement memory is provided. The process for measuring the predetermined monitoring period using the area is performed in the process of the first process group. This makes it possible to consolidate the processes for measuring the predetermined monitoring period into the processes of the first process group.

Feature S3. The second processing group execution means is based on the occurrence of a specific measurement start event (affirmative determination in step S6013 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments) as the processing of the second processing group. , A specific measurement start process for starting measurement during a specific monitoring period is executed using a specific measurement storage area (1st to 8th winning monitoring timer counters 213a to 213h) provided in the second processing-compatible storage area. The gaming machine according to feature S1 or S2, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S6016 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).

According to the feature S3, the process for performing the measurement of the specific monitoring period based on the occurrence of the specific measurement start event is included in the process of the second process group. Thereby, the processing for measuring various periods can be distributed into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the unit of the type of the period to be measured.

Features S4. The predetermined response executing means is characterized in that the predetermined response process is executed when the specific response event occurs in a situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period. The gaming machine described in S3.

According to the feature S4, the predetermined response processing is executed when the predetermined response event occurs in the situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period measured in the processing of the first processing group. At the same time, the predetermined response processing is executed even when the specific response event occurs in the situation where the specific response event should not occur in relation to the specific monitoring period measured in the processing of the second processing group. As a result, the process of measuring each period for specifying whether or not an event that triggers the execution of the predetermined response process has occurred is the process of the first process group in the unit of the type of the period to be measured. And the processing of the second processing group can be dispersed.

Feature S5. In the predetermined response process, when the predetermined response event occurs in a situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information (predetermined event occurrence information in the second process correspondence storage area) It is a process to store "1" in any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r).
The first processing group executing means is a special processing executing means (13th) that executes special processing when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. In the embodiment of the main MPU 82, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6666, step S6608, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, step S6618, step S6620 or step S6622. A function to execute the process, in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8105, and the process of step S8108. It is characterized by having a function of executing affirmative judgment processing, affirmative judgment processing in step S8111, affirmative judgment processing in step S8115, and affirmative judgment processing in step S8118). The gaming machine according to any one of S1 to S4.

According to the feature S5, when the predetermined response event occurs in the situation where the predetermined response event should not occur in relation to the predetermined monitoring period, the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing correspondence storage area, and the first 2 When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the processing corresponding storage area, the special processing is executed in the processing of the first processing group. As a result, the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined response event has occurred is executed not as the process of the first process group but as the process of the second process group, so that the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. Even if the configuration has a margin, it is possible to execute a special process for the occurrence of a predetermined response event as the process of the first process group.

Feature S6. The first processing group executing means is a means for executing a granting trigger processing for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group (in the thirteenth embodiment, the main MPU 82. A function to execute the processing of step S5602, step S5605, step S5608, step S5611, step S5614, step S5617, step S5620 or step S5622. A function of executing the processing of S7809, step S7811, step S7813, step S7815 or step S7817) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process for invalidating the grant trigger of the privilege specified in the grant trigger process.

According to the feature S6, it is specified whether or not the privilege granting trigger is generated in the grant trigger processing which is the processing of the first processing group, and a predetermined event is generated in the generation information storage processing which is the processing of the second processing group. When the occurrence of the above is specified and the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, the trigger for granting the above privilege is invalidated by the special processing which is the processing of the first processing group. .. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. It is possible to collectively perform the process for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the process for invalidating the privilege granting opportunity in the processing of the first processing group while providing a margin.

Feature S7. When the first processing group execution means identifies that a privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group, the first processing group corresponding storage area is given trigger information (confirmation flag group 211d). Means for executing the grant trigger process for storing (setting "1" in each confirmation flag) (step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). , A function to execute the process of step S5621 or step S5623).
The gaming machine according to feature S5, wherein the special process is a process of erasing the grant trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process.

According to the feature S7, when it is specified that the privilege grant trigger is generated in the grant trigger process which is the process of the first process group, the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then the grant trigger information is stored. When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process by specifying that the predetermined event has occurred in the generated information storage process which is the process of the second process group, the first process is performed. In the special process which is the process of the group, the above-mentioned grant trigger information of the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the processing for invalidating the privilege granting trigger while having a margin are performed. It can be done collectively.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features S1 to S7, the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F6, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic T group>
Features T1. The first processing group execution means (function for executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (specific control processing) of the first processing group, and
The second processing group execution means (function for executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the 13th and 14th embodiments) for executing the processing (non-specific control processing) of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. 2nd processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the 13th and 14th embodiments), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
As the processing of the second processing group, the second processing group executing means determines a predetermined event (an event to be affirmed in step S6003 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, and an affirmative determination in step S6009). When an event or an event to be affirmed in step S6014 has occurred, predetermined event occurrence information (setting "1" to any of the abnormality flags 213l to 213r) is set in the second processing corresponding storage area. It is provided with means for executing the generation information storage process to be stored (a function of executing the process of step S6004, step S6010 or step S6015 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments).
The first processing group execution means is
When it is specified that the privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group, the granting trigger information ("1" is set in each confirmation flag of the confirmation flag group 211d in the storage area corresponding to the first processing. The process of step S5603, step S5606, step S5609, step S5612, step S5615, step S5618, step S5621 or step S5623 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment. Function to execute) and
As the processing of the first processing group, when the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing, a special processing for erasing the grant trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing is performed. Special processing execution means to be executed (in the thirteenth embodiment, step S6602, step S6603, step S6605, step S6606, step S6668, step S6609, step S6611, step S6612, step S6614, step S6615, step S6617, A function to execute the process of step S6618, step S6620 or step S6622, in the 14th embodiment, the process of step S8006 of the main MPU 82, the process of step S8013, the process of making an affirmative determination in step S8102, and the process of making an affirmative decision in step S8105. A function to execute a determination process, an affirmative determination process in step S8108, an affirmative determination process in step S8111, an affirmative determination process in step S8115, and an affirmative determination process in step S8118). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature T1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, if it is specified that the privilege grant trigger has occurred in the grant trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, the grant trigger information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first process, and then the first. When the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second processing by specifying that the predetermined event has occurred in the generation information storage processing which is the processing of the two processing groups, the first processing group In the special process which is the process, the above-mentioned grant trigger information of the storage area corresponding to the first process is deleted. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. In the processing of the first processing group while using the storage area corresponding to the first processing, the processing for identifying the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity and the processing for invalidating the privilege granting trigger while having a margin are performed. It can be done collectively.

Feature T2. The first processing group executing means is a means (13th embodiment) for executing a privilege granting process when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. The function of executing the process of step S5518, step S5704 or step S5709 of the main MPU 82 in
The gaming machine according to feature T1, wherein the generated information storage process and the special process are executed after the grant trigger process is executed and before the privilege grant process is executed.

According to the feature T2, the generation information storage process, which is the process of the second process group, and the special process, which is the process of the first process group, are performed after the grant trigger process, which is the process of the first process group, is executed. It is executed before the privilege granting process, which is the process of the first processing group, is executed. As a result, by executing the process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred as the process of the second process group instead of the process of the first process group, the process can be executed as the process of the first process group. If a predetermined event has occurred, it is possible to invalidate the privilege granting opportunity before the privilege granting process is executed, while allowing a margin.

Feature T3. A means for starting a predetermined unit process (first timer interrupt process) when a process execution trigger occurs (a function of executing the first timer interrupt process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided.
The first processing group executing means is a means (first) for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group. 13 is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S6601, step S6604, step S6607, step S6610, step S6613, step S6616, step S6619 or step S6621 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment).
The special process executing means executes the special process when it is specified in the information specifying process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process.
The predetermined unit process includes the generated information storage process, the grant trigger process, the privilege grant process, and the information identification process.
The generated information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information specifying process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed, and the privilege granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature T2, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

According to the feature T3, in the configuration in which the predetermined unit process includes the generated information storage process, the grant trigger process, the privilege grant process, and the information specifying process, the generated information storage process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed. Just by setting the execution order of the processes in the predetermined unit process so that the information identification process is executed after the generated information storage process is executed and the privilege grant process is executed after the information identification process is executed. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

For the configurations of features T1 to T3, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic U group>
Features U1. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (main side MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing various processes.
The control means is
Among the various processes, the first process group execution means (function for executing the specific control process of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the process (specific control process) of the first process group, and
A second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing) among the various processes.
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. Second processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means, as the processing of the first processing group, receives the first transmission information (normal return command, at the time of clearing) in the transmission information storage area (command transmission buffer 223b) when the first transmission trigger occurs. Means for executing the first transmission information storage process (13th) for storing the return command, the confirmation start command, the return command at the time of confirmation, the update start command, the return command at the time of update, the first hold command, and the second hold command). A function of executing the processing of step S4914, step S4921, step S5003, step S5007, step S5105, step S5114, step S5705 or step S5710 of the main MPU 82 in the embodiment).
The second processing group execution means, as the processing of the second processing group, when a second transmission trigger occurs, the second transmission information (disconnection generation command, short circuit generation command, general electric winning abnormality) is stored in the transmission information storage area. In step S5404, step S5408, step S6005, step S6011 or step S6507 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment, the means for executing the second transmission information storage process for storing the command, the special electric winning abnormality command or the magnetic abnormality command). Has a function to execute processing)
When the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the gaming machine transmits the first transmission information to the transmission target (sound-light side MPU93), and the transmission information storage area has the first transmission information. (2) A gaming machine comprising a transmission executing means (command transmission circuit 224) for transmitting the second transmission information to a transmission target (sound / light side MPU93) when the transmission information is stored.

According to the feature U1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the first transmission trigger occurs, the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in the first transmission information storage process, which is the processing of the first processing group, and the second transmission trigger occurs. In this case, the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area in the second transmission information storage processing, which is the processing of the second processing group. Then, when the first transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target, and when the second transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the first transmission information is transmitted. 2 The transmission information is transmitted to the transmission target. That is, the storage area in which information can be written in the processing of the first processing group and the storage area in which information can be written in the processing of the second processing group are the storage area corresponding to the first processing and the storage area corresponding to the second processing. In the configuration distinguished by the above, the transmission information transmitted to the transmission target is written in the common transmission information storage area. This makes it possible to aggregate the configurations for transmitting the transmission information as compared with the configuration in which the transmission information is individually transmitted in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Features U2. The control means is configured to write information to the internal storage means (register area 223) provided in the control means when executing the various processes.
The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the transmission information storage area is provided in the internal storage means.

According to the feature U2, the transmission information storage area in which the first transmission information is stored in the processing of the first processing group and the second transmission information is stored in the processing of the second processing group is the internal storage means of the control means. It is provided in. As a result, the storage area in which information can be written in the processing of the first processing group and the storage area in which information can be written in the processing of the second processing group are divided into a storage area corresponding to the first processing and a storage corresponding to the second processing. In the configuration clearly distinguished from the area, the storage area for writing the transmission information is divided into the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group while not using the storage area corresponding to the first processing and the storage area corresponding to the second processing. It is possible to make it common with processing.

Features U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the transmission executing means is not included in any of the first processing group executing means and the second processing group executing means.

According to the feature U3, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

Features U4. The first processing group execution means uses a program to execute the processing of the first processing group.
The second processing group execution means uses a program to execute the processing of the second processing group.
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, wherein the transmission executing means performs the transmission without using a program.

According to the feature U4, the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are executed by using a program, whereas the transmission of the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area is transmitted to the transmission target. It is done without using the program. As a result, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target independently of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group, and the required program capacity can be increased. It is possible to execute control to transmit transmission information without increasing the number.

Features U5. The first transmission information can be transmitted not only in the situation where the processing of the first processing group is being executed by the control means but also in the situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed. Therefore, the second transmission information can be transmitted not only in the situation where the processing of the second processing group is being executed by the control means but also in the situation where the processing of the first processing group is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4.

According to the feature U5, the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area can be transmitted to the transmission target regardless of the execution status of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

For the configurations of features U1 to U5, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic V group>
Features V1. The first processing group execution means (function for executing the specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the processing of the first processing group (processing of specific control) among various processing, and
A second processing group execution means (a function of executing the non-specific control processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the processing of the second processing group (non-specific control processing) among the various processes.
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The first processing-compatible storage area (work area 211 for specific control and stack area 212 for specific control in the thirteenth embodiment), which cannot be written to, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. Second processing-compatible storage area (work area 213 for non-specific control and stack area 214 for non-specific control in the thirteenth embodiment), which cannot be written to
Equipped with
As the process of the first process group, the first process group execution means executes a first update process for updating information in the first numerical storage area (first security counter 211a) when a first update trigger occurs. (A function to execute the process of step S4917 or step S4920 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment).
The second processing group execution means executes a second update processing for updating information in the second numerical storage area (second security counter 213k) when a second update trigger occurs as the processing of the second processing group. (A function to execute the processing of step S5405, step S5409, step S6006, step S6012 or step S6508 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment).
The gaming machine has means for executing specific correspondence processing corresponding to both the information in the first numerical storage area and the information in the second numerical storage area (the security processing of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature V1, when the processing of the first processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the first processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the second processing is not the writing target of the information. When the processing of the second processing group is executed, the storage area corresponding to the second processing is the writing target of the information, but the storage area corresponding to the first processing is not the writing target of the information. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the type of the storage area for which the information is to be written depending on whether the processing of the first processing group is executed or the processing of the second processing group is executed. On the other hand, even when the processing of the first processing group is executed, information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the first processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the second processing, and the processing of the second processing group Even when the processing is executed, the information can be read not only from the storage area corresponding to the second processing but also from the storage area corresponding to the first processing. This makes it possible to refer to the information corresponding to the processing result in one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group in the other processing.

In this case, when the first update trigger occurs, the information in the first numerical storage area is updated in the first update process, which is the process of the first processing group, and when the second update trigger occurs, the second update process occurs. The information in the second numerical storage area is updated in the second update process, which is the process of the process group. Then, the specific correspondence process corresponding to both the information in the first numerical storage area and the information in the second numerical storage area is executed. As a result, in a configuration in which the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group are clearly distinguished, the contents specified in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group correspond to the contents specified in each of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group. It becomes possible to execute the process.

Feature V2. The gaming machine according to feature V1, wherein the first numerical value storage area is provided in the first processing-compatible storage area.

According to the feature V2, it is possible to use the first processing corresponding storage area as the storage area for storing the information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update trigger.

Feature V3. The gaming machine according to feature V2, wherein the second numerical value storage area is provided in the second processing corresponding storage area.

According to the feature V3, it is possible to use the storage area corresponding to the first processing as the storage area for storing the information corresponding to the occurrence of the first update opportunity, and the second update opportunity has occurred. It becomes possible to use the second processing corresponding storage area as the storage area for storing the information corresponding to.

Features V4. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the specific corresponding processing is included in either one of the processing of the first processing group and the processing of the second processing group.

According to the feature V4, it is possible to consolidate the specific corresponding processing into either the processing of the first processing group including the first update processing or the processing of the second processing group including the second update processing.

Feature V5. The specific correspondence process is included in the process of the first process group, and is included in the process.
The first processing-corresponding storage area includes a confirmed storage area (previous value storage area 211e) for storing information in the second numerical value storage area when the specific correspondence processing is executed.
For the specific correspondence process,
Difference specifying processing for specifying the difference between the information in the second numerical storage area and the information in the confirmed storage area (processing in steps S6701 to S6703 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment) and
A process for executing control corresponding to both the difference information specified by the difference specifying process and the information in the first numerical storage area (steps S6706 to step S6706 of the main MPU 82 in the thirteenth embodiment). Processing of S6714) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to V4, which comprises the above-mentioned feature V1 to V4.

According to the feature V5, in the configuration in which the first update process and the predetermined correspondence process are included in the process of the first process group and the second update process is included in the process of the second process group, the information of the second numerical storage area is recorded. It is possible to execute the control corresponding to both the difference and the information in the first numerical storage area in the specific correspondence process.

Feature V6. It is possible to measure the number of times the first update trigger has occurred by using the first numerical storage area.
It is possible to measure the number of times the second update trigger has occurred by using the second numerical storage area.
The game according to any one of features V1 to V5, wherein the specific correspondence process executes a process corresponding to the sum of the information in the first numerical storage area and the information in the second numerical storage area. Machine.

According to the feature V6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described in the configuration for executing the process corresponding to the total of the number of times the first update trigger has occurred and the number of times the second update trigger has occurred. ..

For the configurations of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A8, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F6, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J7, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L5, Features M1 to M4, Features N1 to N8, Features O1 to O8, Features P1 to P6, Features Q1 to Q16, Features R1 to One or a plurality of configurations of R6, features S1 to S7, features T1 to T3, features U1 to U5, and features V1 to V6 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature Q group, the feature R group, the feature S group, the feature T group, the feature U group, and the feature V group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, or a predetermined entry It is known that a pachinko ball enters a club and shifts to a special pachinko state. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary that the processing is suitably executed by the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 24a ... Out port, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 31 ... General winning port, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 37a ... 1st special figure display Unit, 37b ... 2nd special figure display unit, 41 ... symbol display device, 43 ... state suggestion area, 81 ... main control board, 82 ... main side MPU, 83 ... main side ROM, 84 ... main side RAM, 93 ... sound Optical side MPU, 103 ... Display side MPU, 131 ... Ceiling counter 133 ... High probability status counter, 134 ... Time saving status counter, 151 ... Special winning device, 195 ... Setting key insertion unit, 196 ... Reset button, 201-204 ... 1st to 4th notification display device, 205 ... Setting display device, 211 ... Work area for specific control, 211a ... 1st security counter, 211b ... Special electric monitoring delay timer counter, 211c ... General electric monitoring delay timer counter , 211d ... Confirmation flag group, 211e ... Previous value storage area, 212 ... Specific control stack area, 213 ... Non-specific control work area, 213a to 213h ... 1st to 8th prize monitoring timer counters, 213k ... 2 Security counter, 213l to 213r ... Abnormal flag, 214 ... Stack area for non-specific control, 223 ... Register area, 223b ... Command transmission buffer, 223c ... Protect register, 224 ... Command transmission circuit, 225 ... RAM management circuit, 251 ... Normal counter area, 252 ... Calculation result storage area, PA2 ... Left side area, PA3 ... Right side area.

Claims (6)

The first processing group execution means for executing the processing of the first processing group, and
The second processing group execution means for executing the processing of the second processing group, and
Information can be written and read when the processing of the first processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the second processing group is executed. The storage area corresponding to the first processing, which cannot be written to,
Information can be written and read when the processing of the second processing group is executed, while information can be read when the processing of the first processing group is executed. The second processing-compatible storage area where writing is not possible,
Equipped with
The second processing group execution means is
As the processing of the second processing group, a means for executing an event occurrence specifying process for specifying whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, and a means for executing the event occurrence specifying process.
As the processing of the second processing group, when it is specified by the event occurrence specifying processing that the predetermined event has occurred, the generation information for storing the predetermined event occurrence information in the storage area corresponding to the second processing. Means of performing amnestics and
Equipped with
The first processing group execution means is
A means for executing information specifying processing for specifying whether or not the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the second processing corresponding storage area, and
As a process of the first process group, a special process execution means for executing a special process when it is specified in the information identification process that the predetermined event occurrence information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second process. ,
Equipped with
When the event occurrence specifying process is executed, the second processing group executing means erases the predetermined event occurrence information before the event occurrence specifying process is executed as the processing of the second processing group. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing information erasing processing. The feature is that the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed and before the occurrence information erasing process corresponding to the next execution of the event occurrence specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The first processing group executing means includes, as the processing of the first processing group, means for executing a granting trigger processing for specifying whether or not a privilege granting trigger has occurred.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the special process is a process for invalidating the grant trigger of the privilege specified in the grant trigger process. The first processing group execution means stores the granting trigger information in the first processing corresponding storage area when it is specified that the privilege granting trigger has occurred as the processing of the first processing group. Equipped with a means to carry out
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the special processing is a processing for erasing the granting trigger information stored in the storage area corresponding to the first processing. The first processing group executing means includes means for executing the privilege granting processing when the granting trigger information is stored in the first processing corresponding storage area as the processing of the first processing group.
The game according to claim 4, wherein the event occurrence specifying process and the information specifying process are executed after the grant trigger process is executed and before the privilege grant process is executed. Machine. Equipped with a means to start predetermined unit processing when a processing execution opportunity occurs
The predetermined unit process includes the event occurrence specifying process, the granting opportunity process, the privilege granting process, and the information specifying process.
The event occurrence specifying process is executed after the grant trigger process is executed, the information specifying process is executed after the event occurrence specifying process is executed, and the privilege granting process is executed after the information specifying process is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the processing order of the predetermined unit processing in one processing time is set so as to be executed.

Images